M&D Insider Blog

Delicious Breakfast Croissant Sandwich on the Blackstone

Wed, 22 Apr 2026 19:45:00 GMT

Start your day right with a tasty breakfast croissant sandwich made on the Blackstone. Perfect for beginners, this recipe is simple and satisfying.

Delicious Dessert Deviled Eggs Recipe for Beginners

Mon, 20 Apr 2026 21:30:02 GMT

Learn how to make tasty dessert deviled eggs with this easy recipe. Perfect for kids and families, using your Blackstone grill from M&D Enterprises.

Delicious Southwest Chicken Cheesesteaks on Your Blackstone Grill

Sat, 18 Apr 2026 16:30:00 GMT

Try our easy Southwest Chicken Cheesesteaks, made right on your Blackstone grill. Perfect for beginners and packed with flavor!

Delicious Salmon Pancakes for Your Blackstone Grill

Fri, 17 Apr 2026 19:45:00 GMT

Try these easy salmon pancakes on your Blackstone grill. Perfect for beginners, they’re flavorful and fun to make!

Savory Spiced Lamb Burgers with Harissa Sauce

Wed, 15 Apr 2026 20:15:00 GMT

Try these delicious spiced lamb burgers with a flavorful harissa sauce. Perfect for your Blackstone grill, this recipe is simple and satisfying.

Easy Breakfast Tacos on a Blackstone Grill

Tue, 14 Apr 2026 19:55:43 GMT

Start your day right with these easy breakfast tacos! Perfect for beginners and made on a Blackstone grill.

Crispy Shrimp Tacos with Spicy Sauce

Tue, 24 Mar 2026 15:45:00 GMT

Discover how to make crispy shrimp tacos with a spicy sauce on your Blackstone grill. Perfect for beginners!

Delicious Breakfast Sloppy Joes on the Blackstone Grill

Sun, 22 Mar 2026 18:30:03 GMT

Try our easy Breakfast Sloppy Joes recipe, perfect for beginners! Cooked on the Blackstone grill, this dish is sure to please everyone.

Delicious Chicken Shawarma Flatbreads on Your Blackstone Grill

Sat, 21 Mar 2026 16:00:00 GMT

Try this easy Chicken Shawarma Flatbreads recipe using your Blackstone grill. Perfect for beginners, it's flavorful and fun to make!

Delicious Cinnamon Twists on the Blackstone Grill

Fri, 20 Mar 2026 20:00:00 GMT

Try our easy cinnamon twists made with puff pastry, perfect for your Blackstone grill. A sweet treat that's simple and fun to make!

Delicious Shrimp Skewers with Cilantro Lime Rice Recipe

Thu, 19 Mar 2026 17:30:00 GMT

Learn how to make tasty shrimp skewers served with fresh cilantro lime rice. Perfect for grilling on your Blackstone from M&D Enterprises!

Spicy Honey Chicken on the Blackstone Grill

Tue, 17 Mar 2026 16:30:00 GMT

Discover how to make Spicy Honey Chicken on your Blackstone grill. This simple and delicious recipe is perfect for beginners!

Quick and Easy Vegetable Stir-Fry on a Blackstone Grill

Thu, 12 Mar 2026 18:15:00 GMT

Discover a simple vegetable stir-fry recipe perfect for beginners. Cook it on your Blackstone grill for delicious results.

Delicious Wagyu Burgers on the Blackstone Grill

Sat, 28 Feb 2026 21:15:00 GMT

Learn how to make juicy Wagyu burgers on your Blackstone grill. Perfect for beginners, this recipe is easy and flavorful.

Delicious Smoked Turkey Recipe for Beginners

Fri, 27 Feb 2026 22:15:00 GMT

Learn how to make a flavorful smoked turkey using a Traeger grill. Perfect for beginners, this easy recipe will impress your family and friends.

Savory Smash Burgers with Sweet Bacon on a Blackstone Grill

Mon, 23 Feb 2026 20:21:42 GMT

Discover a delicious recipe for savory smash burgers topped with sweet bacon, perfect for grilling on your Blackstone from M&D Enterprises.

Delicious Grilled Meatballs on Your Blackstone

Thu, 19 Feb 2026 00:21:56 GMT

Try these simple and tasty grilled meatballs, perfect for beginners. Cook them on your Blackstone grill for a delightful meal.

Easy Gnocchi Bake with Veggies on Your Blackstone Grill

Mon, 16 Feb 2026 19:45:17 GMT

Discover a simple and delicious baked gnocchi recipe with broccoli and mushrooms, perfect for beginners. Cook it on your Blackstone grill!

Easy Homemade Turkey Gravy Recipe for Beginners

Fri, 13 Feb 2026 23:14:01 GMT

Discover how to make simple and delicious turkey gravy at home. Perfect for your next holiday feast using a Traeger grill from M&D Enterprises!

ENTREES: TRAEGER SMOKED TOMAHAWK STEAK WITH STEAKHOUSE BUTTER

Fri, 13 Feb 2026 17:03:54 GMT

TRAEGER SMOKED TOMAHAWK STEAK WITH STEAKHOUSE BUTTER

For a romantic dinner for two, skip the pricey restaurant and make this juicy, flavorful Smoked Tomahawk Steak with Steakhouse Butter instead.

Prep Time

20 Min

Cook Time

1 Hr

Pellets

Hickory

Yields: 2 Servings

Ingredients

Steak

3 Tablespoon

Beef Rub

1 1/2 Teaspoon

kosher salt

tomahawk steak (3 to 3½ lb)

Butter

4 Ounce

salted butter, softened

2 Tablespoon

chopped fresh parsley

small shallot, chopped

garlic clove, chopped

1 Teaspoon

anchovy paste

1 Teaspoon

worcestershire sauce

1/2 Teaspoon

Dijon mustard

1/4 Teaspoon

freshly ground black pepper

A few dashes Traeger Original Hot Sauce

Serving

Flaky sea salt

Steps

Step 1

Combine the beef rub and the salt in a small bowl and mix well. Season the steak all over with the rub mixture (use it all).

Ingredients

3 Tablespoon Traeger Beef Rub

1 1/2 Teaspoon kosher salt

1 tomahawk steak (3 to 3½ lb)

Step 2

When ready to cook, preheat the grill with the lid closed to 225°F; this will take 10 to 15 minutes.

00:15

225 ˚F / 107 ˚C

Step 3

Holding a wired leave-in meat thermometer or a wireless one like MEATER parallel to the work surface, insert it into the middle of the side of the steak avoiding bone. Smoke the steak until the internal temperature reaches 100°F, 45 to 50 minutes. The time will vary depending on the thickness of the steak, the weather and your grill. The steak will not be fully cooked at this point.

225 ˚F / 107 ˚C

100 ˚F / 38 ˚C

Step 4

While the steak smokes, place the ingredients for the butter in a small food processor and mix until well combined. Alternatively, finely chop the parsley, shallot, and garlic, and mash all the ingredients together well with a fork.

Ingredients

4 Ounce salted butter, softened

2 Tablespoon chopped fresh parsley

1 small shallot, chopped

1 garlic clove, chopped

1 Teaspoon anchovy paste

1 Teaspoon worcestershire sauce

1/2 Teaspoon Dijon mustard

1/4 Teaspoon freshly ground black pepper

A few dashes Traeger Original Hot Sauce

Step 5

Remove the steak from the grill and set it aside (it will go back on the grill). Increase the grill temperature to 425°F. When that temperature is reached, return the steak to the grill and cook, flipping occasionally, until the internal temperature reaches 130°F for medium rare.

425 ˚F / 218 ˚C

130 ˚F / 54 ˚C

Step 6

Transfer the steak to a cutting board and let it rest for 10 minutes. Slice and top with some of the butter and some flakey sea salt. Enjoy!

Ingredients

Flaky sea salt

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR TRAEGER LINEUP!!

ENTREE: TRAEGER CHICKEN QUARTERS WITH ALABAMA WHITE SAUCE

Thu, 22 Jan 2026 18:43:01 GMT

Traeger Chicken Quarters With Alabama White Sauce

This zesty bbq sauce is a regional favorite of sweet home alabama. top a juicy traegered bird with our white sauce recipe, and you may just have a new favorite.

Prep Time

10 Min

Cook Time

1 Hr

30 Min

Pellets

Cherry

Yields: 6 Servings

Ingredients

main

1 Whole

(3 to 3-1/2 lb) fresh young chicken

To Taste

traeger Chicken Rub

Alabama White Sauce

3 1/2 Cup

mayonnaise

1 Cup

apple cider vinegar

1/4 Cup

honey

3 Tablespoon

sriracha sauce

2 Tablespoon

garlic paste

1 1/2 Tablespoon

kosher salt

1 Teaspoon

chipotle chile powder

1 Teaspoon

black pepper

Steps

Step 1

Preheat the grill to 375F.

00:15

375 ˚F / 191 ˚C

Step 2

Place the whole chicken breast-side down on a cutting board with the neck pointing away from you. Cut along one side of the backbone, staying as close to the bone as possible, from the neck to the tail. Repeat on the other side of the backbone then remove it.

Ingredients

1 Whole (3 to 3-1/2 lb) fresh young chicken

Step 3

Open the chicken and slice through the white cartilage at the tip of the breastbone to pop it open. Cut down either side of the breast bone then use your fingers to pull it out. Flip the chicken over so it is skin-side up and cut down the center, splitting the chicken in half. Tuck the wings back on each chicken half. Season both sides of each half with the Traeger Chicken Rub.

Ingredients

To Taste Traeger Chicken Rub

Step 4

Place chicken directly on the grill grate skin-side up and cook until the internal temperature of the breast reaches 160°F, about 60 to 90 minutes.

375 ˚F / 191 ˚C

160 ˚F / 71 ˚C

Step 5

Meanwhile, make the white sauce: In a medium bowl, whisk together the mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, honey, sriracha, garlic paste, salt, black pepper, and chipotle powder. Refrigerate until ready to use.

Ingredients

3 1/2 Cup mayonnaise

1 Cup apple cider vinegar

1/4 Cup honey

3 Tablespoon sriracha sauce

2 Tablespoon garlic paste

1 1/2 Tablespoon kosher salt

1 Teaspoon chipotle chile powder

1 Teaspoon black pepper

Step 6

Transfer the chicken halves to a rimmed baking sheet. Spoon the white sauce over both sides of the chicken halves, then set the baking sheet on the grill grates. Close the lid and cook for 10 minutes to set the sauce.

00:10

Step 7

Remove the chicken from the grill and let rest for 10 minutes before slicing and serving. Enjoy!

click here to check out our traeger lineup!!

ENTREES: TRAEGER HAM AND CHEESE SLIDERS

Fri, 09 Jan 2026 18:57:28 GMT

TRAEGER HAM AND CHEESE SLIDERS

Quick and simple to assemble, melty ham and cheese sliders make a perfect game day snack or a fun weekend lunch. While kids will love the tiny-size sandwiches made with Hawaiian rolls, a mustard butter will make adults happy, too!!

Prep Time

10 Min

Cook Time

20 Min

Pellets

Apple

Yields: 6 Servings

Ingredients

Mustard Butter

4 Tablespoon

unsalted butter, melted

2 Tablespoon

dijon mustard

1 Teaspoon

worcestershire sauce

1/4 Teaspoon

kosher salt

Sliders

1- 12-count package Hawaiian sweet rolls

12 Ounce

thinly sliced smoked ham

6 Ounce

thinly sliced smoked Gouda cheese

1 Teaspoon

poppy seeds

1 Teaspoon

dried minced onion

Steps

Step 1

Preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 400°F; this will take about 15 minutes.

400 ˚F / 204 ˚C

Step 2

Meanwhile, make the mustard butter: In a small bowl, combine the melted butter, mustard, Worcestershire sauce, and salt.

Ingredients

4 Tablespoon unsalted butter, melted

2 Tablespoon dijon mustard

1 Teaspoon worcestershire sauce

1/4 Teaspoon kosher salt

Step 3

Make the sliders: Keeping the rolls attached, use a long serrated knife to slice off the tops of all 12 rolls in one fell swoop; you will have one large top section and one large bottom section. Transfer the bottom section to a rimmed baking sheet and set the top section aside.

Ingredients

1 12-count package Hawaiian sweet rolls

Step 4

Brush the cut side of the rolls with about half of the mustard butter. Arrange the ham over the bottom half and then cover the ham with the sliced cheese. Place the baking sheet directly on the grill grate and cook until the cheese is melted and the rolls begin to toast, about 10 minutes.

00:10

400 ˚F / 204 ˚C

Ingredients

12 Ounce thinly sliced smoked ham

6 Ounce thinly sliced smoked Gouda cheese

Step 5

Meanwhile, combine the poppy seeds and dried minced onion in a small dish. Brush the top section of the rolls with the remaining mustard butter, then sprinkle evenly with the spice mixture.

Ingredients

1 Teaspoon poppy seeds

1 Teaspoon dried minced onion

Step 6

Working carefully so as not to disturb the spices, place the top section of rolls over the melted cheese. Return to the grill and cook until the tops are toasted, about another 10 minutes. Carefully transfer the sliders to a cutting board, cut into individual sliders, and serve. Enjoy!

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR TRAEGER LINEUP!!

ENTREES: BLACKSTONE CHEESESTEAK ROLL UPS

Mon, 05 Jan 2026 16:55:54 GMT

BLACKSTONE CHEESESTEAK ROLL-UPS

Blackstone Cheesesteak Roll-Ups are packed with savory steak, melty cheese, and sautéed peppers, all grilled crispy for an easy, crowd-pleasing bite.

Servings

3-4

Prep Time

10 minutes

Cook Time

15 minutes

Ingredients

For the Wraps

1 lb shaved ribeye

1 green bell pepper, diced

1 red bell pepper, diced

1 small yellow or white onion, diced

4 large flour tortillas

6–8 slices white American cheese

Salt and black pepper, to taste

Optional: butter or oil for toasting

Optional: extra Blackstone Cheesesteak Seasoning

Special Sauce

¼ cup Duke’s mayo

1 tbsp A1 steak sauce

1 tsp prepared horseradish

1 tsp Worcestershire sauce

½ tsp garlic powder

¼ tsp salt

¼ tsp black pepper

½ tsp Blackstone Cheesesteak Seasoning (or to taste)

Directions

1.Preheat the Blackstone to medium-high heat for cooking the steak and vegetables, leaving a medium-heat zone for toasting the wraps.

2.In a bowl, mix the mayo, A1 steak sauce, horseradish, Worcestershire, garlic powder, salt, black pepper, and Cheesesteak Seasoning until smooth. Set aside or refrigerate until ready to use.

3. Add a light drizzle of oil to the griddle, then add the shaved ribeye, diced bell peppers, and diced onion all at once. Season with salt, black pepper, and optional extra Cheesesteak Seasoning. Cook while chopping and tossing until the beef is browned and the vegetables are tender, about 6–8 minutes.

4.Shape the cooked steak and vegetables into a mound or long line. Place the slices of white American cheese directly on top, cover with a melting dome, and add a small splash of water to steam until the cheese is fully melted. Toss everything together until evenly combined and cheesy.

5.Transfer the cheesesteak mixture to a bowl. Lay the tortillas flat and spread a generous layer of the special sauce down the center of each tortilla. Spoon in a hearty portion of the cheesesteak mixture and roll tightly, tucking in the sides as you go.

6.Lightly butter or oil the griddle and place the wraps seam-side down over medium heat. Toast for 1–2 minutes per side until golden and lightly crisp.

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR BLACKSTONE LINEUP!!!

Embrace Ice Cold Savings

beaufuqua22@gmail.com (Beau Fuqua) — Fri, 19 Dec 2025 19:43:49 GMT

Meet Our Exclusive Winter Service Special.

Get Premium Service, At a Discounted Rate, Before Mowing Season Starts!

As the winter chill settles in, it's crucial to ensure that your outdoor equipment is in top-notch condition to withstand the season's challenges. At M&D Enterprises & The Lawnmower Shops, we understand the importance of maintaining your engines, spark plugs, and filters during the winter months. That's why we're thrilled to introduce our Winter Service Special—a comprehensive package designed to keep your equipment running smoothly and efficiently.

What's Included:

Our Winter Service Special is a thorough and meticulous maintenance package that covers all the essentials to prepare your equipment for the upcoming mowing season. Here's what you can expect when you choose our specialized service:

1. Engine, Spark Plugs, and Filters:

We delve into the heart of your equipment, ensuring the engine is in optimal condition. Spark plugs and oil/air filters are replaced and engine oil is changed to guarantee peak performance during the upcoming season.

2. Blades, Belts, and Pulleys Check:

Our expert technicians carefully inspect and assess the condition of your lawnmowers blades, belts, and pulleys. Any signs of wear or damage are addressed promptly, preventing potential issues down the road. If you'd like to be notified before a belt, pulley or other "out-of-package" work is done please don't hesitate to let us know. We're happy to accommodate this!

3. Hydraulic Service (Additional Charge):

For an all in maintenance experience, we offer hydraulic service at an additional charge. This ensures that your equipment's hydraulics are in prime condition, providing enhanced performance and durability over the upcoming season. We recommend this service at least every other year to keep your equipment functioning optimally.

Convenience At Your Doorstep:

At M&D Enterprises & The Lawnmower Shops, we understand the value of your time. That's why we offer pick-up and delivery services at very reasonable rates. You can sit back, relax, and let our team handle the transportation of your equipment to and from our service center, making the entire process hassle-free for you.

Why Choose M&D Enterprises & The Lawnmower Shops?

Expertise:

Our skilled technicians have extensive experience in servicing a variety of outdoor equipment, ensuring that your machinery is in capable hands.

Comprehensive Service:

The Winter Service Special is designed to cover every aspect of your equipment, leaving no stone unturned. We prioritize thoroughness to guarantee your equipment's longevity and reliability.

Convenience:

Take advantage of our pick-up and delivery services, allowing you to focus on other tasks while we ensure your equipment is Performance-ready.

Conclusion:

Don't let winter catch you off guard—invest in the longevity and performance of your outdoor equipment with M&D Enterprises & The Lawnmower Shops' Winter Service Special. Our comprehensive package, coupled with convenient pick-up and delivery services, makes winter maintenance a breeze. Schedule your service today and gear up for a season of efficient and reliable outdoor work!

M&D offers a convenient pickup and delivery service for your riding mower. We know hauling your mower to our shop can be a hassle, so we'll handle the transportation for you. However, this service comes with associated costs that we want to be transparent about.

Why do we charge a fee?

Operating a pickup and delivery service involves significant expenses:

Fuel Costs: Our trucks consume fuel, and gas prices fluctuate.
Labor Costs: We employ drivers to operate these trucks and their time is valuable.
Vehicle Maintenance: Regular maintenance, including oil changes, tire rotations, and repairs, is essential.
Insurance: We carry insurance to cover potential accidents and damages.

Here's a breakdown of our pricing:

Local Pickup and Delivery: For customers within 5 miles of one of our shops, we charge a flat fee of $25.

For locations beyond 5 miles, we add $2 per mile to the base fee.

This lower rate applies when we're already planning a trip to your area, allowing us to combine multiple deliveries and reduce costs.

Rush Pickup and Delivery: If you need immediate service, we offer a faster, more direct delivery.

This service costs $25 plus $3.50 per mile after the initial 5 miles. Please understand:

While we strive to keep costs low, the nature of this service means we often break even or even operate at a slight loss. We offer this service as a convenience to our customers and appreciate your understanding of the associated costs.

If you have any questions or require a quote for distances beyond 40 miles, please don't hesitate to contact us.

Thank you, Mark Fuqua Owner

Join The List

DESSERT: TRAEGER GINGERBREAD COOKIES

Fri, 12 Dec 2025 17:25:45 GMT

TRAEGER GINGERBREAD COOKIES

Celebrate the magic of the holiday season with homemade gingerbread cookies. Embrace the festive spirit by shaping these cookies into any shape you like and decorating them with a simple dusting of "snow" (powdered sugar) and royal icing. Quick tip: Find instant royal icing at your favorite baking supply store or indulge your creativity at a nearby craft store.

Prep Time

30 Min

Cook Time

10 Min

Pellets

Apple

Yields: 12 Servings

Ingredients

main

4 Cup

all-purpose flour, plus more as needed

1 Teaspoon

kosher salt

1 Teaspoon

baking powder

1 Teaspoon

baking soda

2 1/2 Teaspoon

ground ginger

2 Teaspoon

ground cinnamon

1/4 Teaspoon

ground allspice

6 Ounce

unsalted butter, melted

3/4 Cup

brown sugar

3/4 Cup

molasses

large egg

1 Teaspoon

vanilla extract

Royal icing or powdered sugar for decorating

Steps

Step 1

In a medium bowl, whisk the flour, salt, baking powder, baking soda, ginger, cinnamon, and allspice.

Ingredients

4 Cup all-purpose flour, plus more as needed

1 Teaspoon kosher salt

1 Teaspoon baking powder

1 Teaspoon baking soda

2 1/2 Teaspoon ground ginger

2 Teaspoon ground cinnamon

1/4 Teaspoon ground allspice

Step 2

In the bowl of an electric mixer fitted with the paddle attachment, combine the melted butter, brown sugar, and molasses, and mix on low speed until combined. Add the egg and vanilla, and beat on medium speed until combined, about 1 minute.

Ingredients

6 Ounce unsalted butter, melted

3/4 Cup brown sugar

3/4 Cup molasses

1 large egg

1 Teaspoon vanilla extract

Step 3

Add the flour mixture, and mix on low speed until just combined, about 30 seconds.

Step 4

Scrape half of the dough onto a large piece of plastic wrap. Use the wrap to help shape the dough into a disc about ½ inch thick and wrap tightly. Repeat with the remaining dough. Refrigerate for at least 2 hours and up to 2 days or freeze in an airtight container if making in advance.

Step 5

When ready to cook, preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 350°F; this will take about 15 minutes. Line a rimmed baking sheet (or baking sheets) with parchment paper.

350 ˚F / 177 ˚C

Step 6

Meanwhile, lightly flour a work surface. Using a rolling pin, roll one of the discs out until between ¼ and 1/8 inch thick. Using a floured cookie cutter, cut out shapes as desired. Transfer the gingerbread cookie shapes to the prepared baking sheet. Repeat with additional dough, rolling up and reusing scraps for additional cookies. (Refrigerate until ready to bake, if making in batches.)

Step 7

Place the baking sheet directly on the grill grates, close the lid and bake until the cookies are firm and their surface looks dull (not shiny), 8 to 10 minutes.

00:08

350 ˚F / 177 ˚C

Step 8

Let the gingerbread cookies cool on the baking sheet for 10 minutes before transferring to a cooling rack to cool completely. Decorate with royal icing or dust with powdered sugar, as desired. Enjoy!

Ingredients

Royal icing or powdered sugar for decorating

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR TRAEGER LINEUP!!!

ENTREE: TRAEGER CROISSANT STUFFING

Wed, 19 Nov 2025 18:59:20 GMT

TRAEGER CROISSANT STUFFING

The body content of your post goes here. To edit this text, click on it and delete this default text and start typing your own or paste your own from a different source.

ENTREES: TRAEGER SMOKED TURKEY

Thu, 13 Nov 2025 20:10:15 GMT

TRAEGER SMOKED TURKEY

With a crispy outside and a juicy inside, this Traeger smoked turkey calls for simple spices and primal wood-fired flavor. Garlic, butter, thyme, rosemary, salt, and pepper combine to create an herbal rub to maximize flavor while you smoke the meat for 3-4 hours. Make sure to get an early start to begin smoking your Thanksgiving Turkey.

This is paragraph text. Click it or hit the Manage Text button to change the font, color, size, format, and more. To set up site-wide paragraph and title styles, go to Site Theme.

APPETIZER: BLACKSTONE SOUTHWEST EGG ROLLS

Wed, 05 Nov 2025 17:35:14 GMT

BLACKSTONE SOUTHWEST EGG ROLLS

Ready to turn your Blackstone into the life of the party?

These Southwest Egg Rolls are crispy, smoky, and packed with bold flavor—everything you love about Tex-Mex, rolled up and griddled to perfection. They’re the kind of appetizer that disappears before the main course even hits the table.

Get that sizzle going… it’s egg roll time

Servings

4-6

Prep Time

15 minutes

Cook Time

20 minutes

Ingredients

1 lb Ground beef
1/2 Yellow onion
1 bunch Cilantro
2 Limes
1 can Black beans (rinsed)
1 can Fire roasted corn
1 Red bell pepper
1 Green Chile (hatch)
1/2 cup Colby Jack cheese
Egg roll wrappers
Wholly Guacamole
Blackstone Fajita Seasoning
1 bottle Vegetable Oil
Aluminum Tin Pan

Directions

Heat one zone of your griddle to high. Place an aluminum tin tray on the high-heat zone and add vegetable oil to the tray to heat up to 360 degrees.
While your oil is heating up, add 1lb of ground beef to your griddle. Chop up and cook. Next to your beef, add a little olive oil and 1/2 of a large yellow onion diced up to cook. Season both your beef and onions with a pinch of kosher salt, coarse black pepper, and 1 tsp of garlic powder. Once the beef is about 80 percent cooked, incorporate the beef and onions together.
Once done, remove and drain your beef and onions on a paper towel in a bowl. When the fat has drained, remove the paper towel and add one can of hatch green Chile and stir.
Now it's time to build our egg rolls. For this, you want to have your egg roll wraps, beef and onions, one red bell pepper diced up, a bowl of fire-roasted corn (drained), a bowl of black beans (rinsed and drained), a bowl of shredded Colby Jack cheese, Blackstone Fajita seasoning, and a little bowl with water. Place one egg roll wrap flat, dip your finger into the water bowl, and rub your finger around the edges of the wrap. This activates the yeast and allows it to stick together when you roll them up. Start by setting a wrap down with the corners pointing at 12 o’clock and 6 o’clock. In the center of the wrap, add a small amount of all your ingredients, season with the fajita seasoning, then fold two of the corners (9 o’clock and 3 o'clock) into the center, then roll like a burrito, tucking all the ingredients in tightly, and set aside until you’ve used all the ingredients.
Time to fry. Drop in 3 or 4 rolls at a time, making sure not to overcrowd your oil or cool it off. Fry until you have a golden crispy exterior (3-4 mins) and remove to a paper towel to drain. Do this until all your egg rolls are done.
To plate, you can go as simple as a large serving dish with a bowl of Wholly Guacamole on the side. Or you could cut your egg rolls on the bias, lay down a bed of guacamole, and assort them on the plate. Either way, enjoy!

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR BLACKSTONE LINEUP!

ENTREES: TRAEGER CLASSIC BEEF CHILI

Wed, 22 Oct 2025 15:08:47 GMT

TRAEGER CLASSIC BEEF CHILI

Chorizo and ground beef combine to create an epic Traeger chili that the whole family will love. Our recipe features a tasty combo of meat and ranch-style beans, all melded together with veggies and spices inside a Dutch oven that cooks directly on the Traeger.

Prep Time

20 Min

Cook Time

1 Hr

30 Min

Pellets

Apple

Yields: 8 Servings

Ingredients

main

1 Pound ground chorizo

1 Pound ground beef

2 Tablespoon unsalted butter

1 Medium yellow onion, diced

1 green bell pepper, seeded and diced

1 red bell pepper, seeded and diced

2 garlic cloves, minced

2 Tablespoon tomato paste

2 (15 oz) cans of ranch-style beans, drained

1 (15 oz) can of tomato sauce

1 (14.5 oz) can of stewed tomatoes

3 Tablespoon Mexican oregano

3 Tablespoon chili powder

1 Tablespoon ground cumin

2 dried bay leaves

Kosher salt, to taste

Beef stock, beer, or water, as needed

Toppings of your choice, for serving

Steps

Step 1

When ready to cook, set Traeger temperature to 350℉ and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

350 ˚F / 177 ˚C

Step 2

Add the ground beef and chorizo to a large Dutch oven on the stovetop over medium-high heat. Cook, breaking up with a wooden spoon, until the meat is browned, about 8 minutes. Transfer the meat to a medium bowl with a slotted spoon, discarding the excess fat.

Ingredients

1 Pound ground chorizo

1 Pound ground beef

Step 3

Return the Dutch oven to medium-high heat and add the butter. Once melted, add the onion and green and red bell peppers. Sauté for 10 minutes, until the onion is lightly browned. Add the garlic and cook for 2 minutes more, until fragrant. Add the tomato paste and cook until the color darkens to a rusty red. Return the meat to the pot, then add the beans, tomato sauce, and stewed tomatoes and stir. Bring to a simmer, then stir in the oregano, chili powder, cumin, and bay leaves. Season with salt to taste.

Ingredients

2 Tablespoon unsalted butter

1 Medium yellow onion, diced

1 green bell pepper, seeded and diced

1 red bell pepper, seeded and diced

2 garlic cloves, minced

2 Tablespoon tomato paste

2 (15 oz) cans of ranch-style beans, drained

1 (15 oz) can of tomato sauce

1 (14.5 oz) can of stewed tomatoes

3 Tablespoon Mexican oregano

3 Tablespoon chili powder

1 Tablespoon ground cumin

2 dried bay leaves

Kosher salt, to taste

Step 4

Transfer the Dutch oven to the grill grates. Close the lid and cook until the chili has thickened and the flavors have melded, adding beef stock as needed if it is looking too dry, 45-60 minutes.

00:45

350 ˚F / 177 ˚C

Ingredients

Beef stock, beer, or water, as needed

Step 5

Remove the bay leaves and serve the chili hot with your favorite toppings. Enjoy!

00:45

Ingredients

Toppings of your choice, for serving

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR TRAEGER LINEUP!!

APPETIZER: TRAEGER SMOKED BEEF JERKY

Wed, 08 Oct 2025 15:47:20 GMT

TRAEGER SMOKED BEEF JERKY

Smoked low and slow on a Traeger — this beef jerky is so good, you’ll wish you made double.

PREP TIME

15MIN

COOK TIME

4HR

PELLETS

CHERRY

Yields: 8 Servings

Ingredients

MAIN

4 Pound
lean beef, such as flank steak
2/3 Cup
soy sauce
2/3 Cup
worcestershire sauce
2/3 Cup
teriyaki sauce
3 Tablespoon
dark corn syrup
1 Tablespoon
garlic powder
1 Tablespoon
onion powder
1 Tablespoon
sesame seeds
1 Tablespoon
brown sugar
1/4 Teaspoon
cayenne pepper

Steps

Step 1

Freeze the beef for about 30 minutes; this will make it easier to slice.

Ingredients

4 Pound lean beef, such as flank steak

Step 2

Meanwhile, in a medium bowl, combine the soy sauce, Worcestershire, and teriyaki sauce. Add the corn syrup, garlic powder, onion powder, sesame seeds, brown sugar, and cayenne pepper and stir well.

Ingredients

2/3 Cup soy sauce
2/3 Cup Worcestershire sauce
2/3 Cup teriyaki sauce
3 Tablespoon dark corn syrup
1 Tablespoon garlic powder
1 Tablespoon onion powder
1 Tablespoon sesame seeds
1 Tablespoon brown sugar
1/4 Teaspoon cayenne pepper

Step 3

Slice the beef thinly (about ¼ inch thick) across the grain for super tender results. (Or, slice with the grain for extra-long slices with a steak-like chew.) Add the beef to the marinade and refrigerate for at least 4 hours and up to 12 hours.

Step 4

When ready to cook, preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 175°F (or 180°F if that’s the lowest your grill goes). If available, use Super Smoke.

175 ˚F / 79 ˚C

Super Smoke

Step 5

Place a wire rack on a large, rimmed baking sheet. Remove the meat from the marinade and, leaving space between each slice of meat, lay the slices on the rack. Discard the marinade.

Step 6

Place the wire rack directly on the grill grates and smoke until dehydrated, 4 to 5 hours. The finished jerky should look leathery and feel dry but will still be pliant with a chewy, tender bite.

4:00

175 ˚F / 79 ˚C

Super Smoke

Step 7

Let the jerky cool completely before storing it airtight in the refrigerator where it will keep for a few weeks.

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR TRAEGER LINEUP!

A complete Guide on How To Store Your Mower For Winter

Mon, 29 Sep 2025 15:49:33 GMT

How to Store Your Riding Lawn Mower in the Winter: A Complete Guide

Winter is coming — and so is the snow. As temperatures drop and leaves change color, it’s the perfect time to think ahead and prepare your riding lawn mower for winter storage. By winterizing your riding lawn mower now, you’ll save yourself time, frustration, and potential costly repairs when spring rolls back around. In this guide, we’ll cover step-by-step instructions on how to store your mower properly , plus share helpful resources, related blog links , and even some recommended videos from our YouTube channel to make the process easier.

Why Winterize Your Riding Lawn Mower?

Leaving your mower with old fuel, dirty blades, or worn parts over the winter can cause damage, reduce efficiency, and shorten its lifespan. Proper winter storage ensures:

Easy startup in spring
Longer engine life
Sharper blades and cleaner cuts
Lower repair costs

For more year-round maintenance tips, check out our blog on Quick Steps to your best lawn .

Step-by-Step Guide to Winterize Your Riding Lawn Mower

1. Pre-Prep: Set Yourself Up for Success

Park the mower on a flat, level surface.
Make sure the engine is turned off and cool.
Gather tools : most steps can be done with a basic mechanic’s tool kit, but specialty tools like the Arnold Siphon Pump, Blade Removal Kit, and Blade Sharpening Kit make things easier.

2. Disconnect and Remove the Battery

Remove the red positive (+) cable first, then the black negative (–).
Carefully remove the battery and store it in a warm, dry, ventilated location .

3. Check and Replace Spark Plugs

Remove and inspect the spark plug .
Replace if worn or damaged. (Check your Operator’s Manual for the correct part number.)

Want to learn more about small engine care? Read our blog: What ethanol gas is really doing to your engine .

4. Change the Oil and Replace the Filter

Clean the oil fill and drain area.
Use the Arnold Siphon Pump to remove old oil.
Replace the oil filter, lubricating the gasket of the new filter .
Add fresh oil (per your Operator’s Manual).

5. Replace and Clean the Air Filter

Remove the air cleaner cover.
Wash the foam element in mild detergent and water, then let it dry.
Lightly oil the foam element before reinserting.

Replace the paper element with a new one.

6. Replace Blades and Clean the Mowing Deck

Clean dirt and grass from the undercarriage.
Inspect blades for wear and replace or sharpen as needed.
Use gloves and the Blade Removal Tool for safety.

For more blade care tips, check out: How to Sharpen and Balance Mower Blades .

7. Inspect for Broken or Worn Parts

Check belts , belt covers, discharge chute, deck wheels, and tires.
Replace any worn or missing parts .

8. Prepare the Fuel Tank for Storage

Add a fuel stabilizer to prevent fuel from spoiling.
Run the engine for a few minutes to circulate the stabilizer.

For fuel storage tips, read: What Ethanol Gas Is Really Doing To Your Engine .

Final Thoughts

Taking the time to properly winterize your riding lawn mower ensures that come spring, your equipment is ready to fire up without a hitch. By following these steps — and supplementing with helpful tools , blogs , and video guides — you’ll protect your investment and keep your mower in peak condition for years to come.

And don’t forget to explore more seasonal lawn care tips on the MD Enterprises Blog .

Ready to winterize your mower? Follow this checklist today and enjoy a smooth start next spring!

How to Get Your Oklahoma Lawn Ready for Fall: Step-by-Step Guide

Sat, 30 Aug 2025 19:32:53 GMT

The Best Tips to Prepare Your Lawn for Fall in Oklahoma

When the Oklahoma summer heat begins to fade, it’s the perfect time to give your lawn the care it needs to thrive in the cooler months ahead. Fall is not just about pumpkin spice and football—it’s also a crucial season for lawn maintenance. By preparing your yard now, you’ll set the stage for a lush, green, and healthy lawn when spring rolls around.

In this guide, we’ll share the best fall lawn care tips for Oklahoma homeowners, plus recommend tools and equipment that can make the job easier.

Why Fall Lawn Prep Matters in Oklahoma

Oklahoma lawns face unique challenges—from scorching summers to unpredictable weather shifts. By fall, grass often suffers from heat stress, compacted soil, and weeds. Addressing these issues now ensures your lawn develops deep roots, fends off weeds, and stays healthy all year long .

�� Related read: Step-by-Step Guide to Leveling Your Lawn – A smooth yard isn’t just beautiful, it makes mowing and maintenance easier.

7 Essential Tips to Prepare Your Lawn for Fall

1. Aerate Your Soil

After a long summer, Oklahoma soil can become compacted. Aerating creates small holes in the lawn, allowing oxygen, water, and nutrients to reach the roots. This promotes stronger, healthier grass.

Pro Tip: Rent an aerator or use a plug aerator for best results.

2. Overseed Bare Patches

Fall is the ideal time to overseed thin or patchy areas. Cooler temperatures and consistent rainfall help seeds germinate quickly.

�� For best results, pair overseeding with aeration .

3. Fertilize for Root Growth

Unlike spring fertilization that promotes top growth, fall fertilizer feeds your lawn’s root system. Choose a nitrogen-rich, slow-release fertilizer to strengthen your grass before winter.

4. Control Weeds Before They Spread

Weeds love Oklahoma’s mild fall weather. Apply a pre-emergent herbicide now to stop weeds like dandelions and clover before they take root in spring.

�� Related read: Helpful Lawn Edging Tips – Clean edges also help keep weeds at bay and improve curb appeal.

5. Adjust Your Mowing Routine

As temperatures drop, grass growth slows. Lower your mower blade gradually to about 2–2.5 inches. This helps the grass store energy without becoming too tall and vulnerable to disease.

�� Check out How to Know If Your Mower Needs a New Spark Plug so your mower runs smoothly all season.

6. Water Wisely

Even in the fall, Oklahoma lawns need about 1 inch of water per week. However, avoid overwatering as cooler weather means less evaporation.

Pro Tip: Water in the morning to reduce the risk of disease.

7. Clean Up Leaves & Debris

Leaves left on the lawn can block sunlight and trap moisture, leading to mold and disease. Mulch leaves with your mower or rake them regularly to keep your grass healthy.

Why Fall Lawn Care Pays Off in Oklahoma

By taking the time now, you’ll:

Reduce weeds next spring
Strengthen your lawn’s root system
Prevent winter lawn diseases
Enjoy a greener, thicker lawn when warm weather returns

Fall lawn prep is an investment in your home’s curb appeal and value.

Get the Right Tools & Equipment from M&D Enterprises

From lawn mowers and fertilizer spreaders to RTIC coolers that keep your drinks cold while you work outdoors, M&D Enterprises has everything you need for successful lawn care.

�� Explore our full range of products and tips on our products page .

Final Thoughts

Oklahoma’s fall season is short, but the steps you take now can make all the difference come spring. With proper aeration , fertilization , weed control , and consistent care , your lawn will not only survive the winter but come back stronger.

✅ Ready to upgrade your lawn care tools? Visit M&D Enterprises today and let’s get your yard prepared for the season ahead!

Best Outdoor Products for Oklahoma Families: From Coolers to Patio Furniture

Sun, 24 Aug 2025 19:56:02 GMT

Outdoor Entertaining Essentials: Coolers, Grills, and Patio Furniture That Endure Oklahoma Summers

Oklahoma summers are no joke. Between scorching heat, unpredictable storms , and humidity that won’t quit, outdoor entertaining in Northwestern Oklahoma comes with its challenges. But the good news? With the right gear—built tough for our climate—you can host backyard barbecues , pool parties, and family gatherings without worrying about your cooler melting down , your grill giving out , or your patio furniture fading in the sun.

At M&D Enterprises , we know what Oklahomans need for long-lasting outdoor fun. Let’s break down the must-have essentials that make entertaining easier, more enjoyable, and stress-free.

1. Coolers That Keep Ice for Days

When the heat index pushes into triple digits, no one wants warm drinks at the cookout. That’s why a high-performance cooler is non-negotiable.

✅ Why RTIC Coolers Work Best for Oklahoma:

Built with heavy-duty insulation to keep ice for days—even in 100+ degree temps.
Rugged and durable for backyard parties, lake trips, or tailgates.
Cost-effective compared to big-name competitors, giving you more value.

�� Check out our full breakdown in this blog: The Benefits of RTIC Coolers .

2. Grills That Can Take the Heat (and Give It Back)

No outdoor entertaining setup is complete without a grill . But not all grills are built equal—especially under our harsh summer sun and pop-up storms.

�� Top Grill Features to Look For in Oklahoma:

Rust-resistant finishes to hold up against humidity and rain.
High BTU burners for searing steaks and cooking quickly before storms roll in.
Easy-to-clean grease management systems (because no one wants to spend the evening scrubbing).

Pair your grill with the right setup by checking out: Max out your backyard with a Derksen makeover.

3. Patio Furniture That Lasts Through Sun, Rain, and Wind

Plastic chairs that warp or metal frames that rust won’t survive Oklahoma summers. The key is investing in durable, weather-resistant furniture designed for outdoor living.

�� What to Look For in Patio Furniture:

Powder-coated aluminum or poly lumber (resists rust and fading).
UV-resistant cushions that won’t bleach out after one season.
Heavy-duty builds to withstand Oklahoma wind gusts.

This isn’t just about comfort—it’s about creating an inviting, lasting outdoor space your friends and family love.

�� For more backyard upgrade ideas, read: From Dead to Green: How to Fix a Bad Lawn Fast .

4. Bonus Essentials: Shade & Storm-Ready Add-Ons

Because Oklahoma weather can turn in an instant, consider add-ons that boost both comfort and safety:

Portable shade structures like Gazebo's or umbrellas.
Storm shelters (a lifesaver when entertaining during storm season).

�� Read our post: Why Every Homeowner in Northwestern Oklahoma Needs a Storm Shelter .

Why Quality Gear Matters for Oklahoma Families

Investing in the right coolers , grills , and furniture isn’t just about entertaining—it’s about making memories that last. When your gear is built tough for Oklahoma’s unique climate, you spend less time replacing and more time enjoying your backyard.

Final Thoughts: Get Ready for Your Best Summer Yet

From RTIC coolers to heavy-duty grills and furniture built to endure , M&D Enterprises has everything you need to turn your backyard into the ultimate summer hangout spot.

�� Stop by our lot or visit M&D Enterprises today to see the difference quality makes.

Because in Oklahoma, your backyard isn’t just a space—it’s where life happens.

Why Every Homeowner in Northwestern Oklahoma Needs a Storm Shelter

Thu, 21 Aug 2025 21:18:15 GMT

Living in the Heart of Tornado Alley

If you live in Northwestern Oklahoma, you already know how unpredictable the skies can be. One moment the sun is shining, and the next, sirens are wailing as storm clouds twist into violent funnels. This part of the state is firmly rooted in Tornado Alley, where Oklahoma averages 60–70 tornadoes each year, many of them destructive and deadly.

Take the 2012 Woodward EF3 tornado for example—it struck at night, claiming lives and destroying homes when families had little time to react. Or the 2011 El Reno–Piedmont EF5 tornado, one of the most powerful in recorded history, tearing through Northwestern counties with winds nearing 300 mph. These storms are chilling reminders that preparedness isn’t optional here—it’s essential.

That’s why more homeowners are turning to storm shelters , a practical and life-saving investment that protects not only your loved ones but also your peace of mind.

4 Reasons Why Every Northwestern Oklahoma Home Needs a Storm Shelter

1. Safety & Peace of Mind

Above all, storm shelters save lives . When sirens blare, seconds matter. Having a safe, reinforced space just steps away ensures your family has somewhere to go when the worst happens.

✔ Protect children, pets, and elderly family members
✔ Eliminate panic by knowing exactly where to go
✔ Sleep better during storm season knowing you’re ready

�� For more preparation tips, check out our blog on How to Prepare Your Home for Storm Season .

2. Boosting Your Property Value

A storm shelter isn’t just about safety—it’s an investment in your home’s future .

Buyers in Northwestern Oklahoma expect homes to be storm-ready.
A shelter can make your property stand out in a competitive market.
Realtors often highlight storm shelters as a premium selling feature .

Adding a shelter can increase buyer confidence, giving them a reason to choose your home over another.

3. Accessibility in a Matter of Seconds

During a tornado warning, you may only have a couple of minutes—or even seconds—to act . That’s why accessibility is key.

Garage shelters allow you to get to safety without braving the outdoors.
Backyard underground units offer quick, secure refuge near your home.
Above-ground safe rooms are wheelchair-accessible and perfect for multi-generational families.

⚡ In a region where twisters can form suddenly, quick access can be the difference between safety and tragedy.

4. Customization Options for Every Family

No two families are alike—and neither are their storm shelter needs.

Underground shelters : Discreet, space-saving, and incredibly strong.
Above-ground safe rooms : Fast installation, ADA-compliant, and proven to withstand EF5 winds.
Sizes for every family : From compact units to shelters designed for 12+ people.

M&D Enterprises offers shelters that are tailored to your lifestyle—whether you want something discreet under your garage or a large unit in your backyard.

A Local Perspective: Why Northwestern Oklahoma Families Rely on Shelters

Northwestern Oklahoma’s communities have lived through decades of tornado activity. From Woodward to Kingfisher and Canadian counties , residents know that preparation is part of life here.

Families who invested in shelters during the 2012 outbreak reported having precious peace of mind when the sirens went off.
Schools, churches, and community centers across the region have followed suit, building safe spaces for gatherings.

Having a shelter isn’t just about survival—it’s about building resilient communities .

Storm Shelter Video From M&D

Ready to Protect Your Family?

Storm season in Northwestern Oklahoma is unpredictable—but your family’s safety doesn’t have to be. A storm shelter provides security, peace of mind, and long-term value for your home.

At M&D Enterprises , we specialize in helping local families choose the right shelter for their needs—whether above-ground or underground .

�� Don’t wait until the sirens sound. Contact M&D Enterprises today or call 580-886-2345 to protect what matters most.

Best RTIC Coolers 2025 – Durable, Affordable, Long-Lasting Cold

Sat, 09 Aug 2025 17:42:53 GMT

Chill Smarter: 6 Reasons RTIC Coolers Beat the Heat (and the Price Tag)

When outdoor adventures call—whether it's for a backyard BBQ or a rugged camping trip—your cooler needs to be tough, dependable, and keep ice around until you’re ready to replenish. That's where RTIC coolers come in. Offering premium performance without a premium price, RTIC is the cooler that brings both chill and value to the table.

Here’s what sets them apart.

1. Superior Insulation, Killer Ice Retention

RTIC soft coolers can keep items cold for up to 5 days , thanks to high-density foam insulation and leak-proof construction—without breaking the bank. In head-to-head reviews, the RTIC 52-quart Ultra-Light Wheeled Cooler keeps pace with top-tier competitors (like Yeti), yet costs considerably less.

2. Built Rugged for Real Adventure

RTIC coolers are built strong—impact-resistant and with durable seals that hold up when the going gets tough. Outdoorsy types trust them on beach trips, camping, and boat days.

3. Tough on Quality—Easy on Your Wallet

You’ll have trouble finding higher-rated coolers in their price range. Editors call RTIC “the best overall hard cooler,” with build and performance on par with pricier brands.

4. Lightweight and Portable Options

Hate lugging a heavy cooler? RTIC’s Ultra-Light Wheeled Cooler is praised for easy transport—tough to beat when you're hauling camping gear, lunch, and drinks.

5. A Soft-Side Cooler That Performs

RTIC’s soft-sided backpack cooler is both practical and leak-resistant, with enough insulation to keep beverages cool for a full day. It earned “Best Overall” in a backpack cooler test for its convenience.

6. Big Brand Features, Small Brand Price

In a side-by-side comparison, RTIC matched—or even outperformed—premium competitors on ice retention and durability, without the pricey name tag.

Elevate Your Cooler Game with Smart Upgrades

Use RTIC ice packs to reduce mess and free up space for more cold storage.
Choose a wheeled, ultra-light design for big adventures.
Stack with complementary outdoor gear — portable grills , chairs , etc.—for a complete setup.

Seamlessly Shop RTIC Coolers at M&D Enterprises

At M&D Enterprises , you can explore RTIC’s full range of hard coolers, soft coolers, day coolers, tumblers, and water bottles —all in one local stop. Not only that, but every purchase supports hardworking families right here in western Oklahoma.

Ready to elevate your summer with a cooler that’s stylish, tough, and wallet-friendly? Swing by M&D Enterprises or give us a call at 580-886-2345 —we’ll help you find the perfect RTIC model to suit your next adventure.

Stay cool, stay smart!

ENTREES: BLACKSTONE PIZZA OVEN LAZY LASAGNA

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Wed, 06 Aug 2025 17:15:00 GMT

BLACKSTONE PIZZA OVEN LAZY LASAGNA

Looking for a quick, crowd-pleasing comfort food that’s perfect for your Blackstone Pizza Oven? This Lazy Lasagna is the answer. With all the cheesy, savory goodness of traditional lasagna but half the prep time, it’s a delicious shortcut meal that doesn’t cut corners on flavor. Baked to bubbly perfection in the Blackstone, this dish is ideal for busy weeknights, weekend gatherings, or anytime you want a hearty meal with minimal effort.

Ingredients

1 jar of your favorite sauce

1 package of Italian sausage tortellini

1 package of spinach ricotta tortellini

1 cup Parmesan cheese

2 cups mozzarella cheese

1 bunch of Italian parsley

Directions

Preheat your Blackstone Pizza Oven to 550°F.

Spread a thin layer of sauce in a Blackstone deep dish pan.

Add the Italian sausage tortellini in an even layer.

Top with another layer of sauce.

Sprinkle a handful of Parmesan cheese over the sauce.

Add a layer of mozzarella cheese.

Place the spinach ricotta tortellini on top.

Pour the remaining sauce over the tortellini.

Finish with the remaining mozzarella and Parmesan cheeses.

Place the pan in the pizza oven and bake for about 8 minutes, or until the top is golden brown and bubbly.

Remove from the oven, garnish with additional Parmesan cheese and chopped Italian parsley.

Serve and enjoy!

click here to check out our Blackstone products!!

Why Your Lawn Is Uneven and How to Fix It Today

Wed, 06 Aug 2025 14:34:55 GMT

How to Level Your Lawn: Step-by-Step for a Flawlessly Even Yard

Is your lawn bumpy, uneven, or looking worse after heavy rain? A perfectly level lawn not only looks stunning—but also helps with mowing, drainage, and turf health. Follow these steps to even out your yard like a pro.

�� Step 1: Inspect and Mark Problem Areas

Walk the yard after watering or rain to spot low spots , dips, or puddles.
Use stakes , flagging tape , or spray paint to mark each uneven area.
For larger yards or serious grading needs, a laser level or string line gives precise results.

Pro tip: Check for underground issues like roots or pipes before digging.

�� Step 2: Choose Your Leveling Method

✅ Topdressing with Soil (Best for minor dips under ¾ inch)

Use topsoil or quality garden mix —never use sand alone.
Spread ¼–½ inch of soil over low areas.
Seed or sod immediately, and water well .
After a few weeks, mow once grass roots and surface settles.

✅ Full Grading (Needed for deeper depressions or re-slope)

Loosen soil in low areas with a shovel or garden fork.
Add fill material —a clay-sand mix for compaction or screened topsoil for turf areas.
Shift excess soil from high spots into low zones.
Level with a landscape rake or board , blending to ⅛ inch tolerance.
Compact using a roller or plate compactor.
Re-seed or sod the leveled ground and water consistently .

�� Not sure what to choose? For gentle slopes or grading inspiration, check out our post: How Low Should You Mow .

�� Step 3: Seed, Sod, and Water Smartly

Choose appropriate grass type for your zone (e.g. fescue, bermuda, or blazing star natives).
For seed , spread evenly, lightly rake, and keep moist until germination.
For sod , place tight seams, then roll and water daily for two weeks .
After initial growth, transition to regular maintenance.

Want to tackle that patchy lawn too? View our full lawn restoration guide: From Dead to Green: How to Fix a Bad Lawn Fast .

�� Step 4: Final Touches & Maintenance

Mow high at first (3–3.5″) until grass establishes.
Fertilize lightly after the first mow (follow local guidelines).
Edge regularly for crisp boundaries—see our lawn edging guide for tips.
Water deeply but infrequently to promote deep roots and avoid surface washout.

�� Why Leveling Matters

�� Improves curb appeal and makes mowing easier
�� Enhances drainage and prevents pooling
�� Promotes healthier turf growth by eliminating low-oxygen zones

�� Get More Lawn and Yard Tips

�� Ready to Level Up Your Lawn?

With the right tools , materials, and technique—you can restore a lumpy lawn into a smooth masterpiece . Want help selecting soil, seed, or finding the perfect lawn mower ? Call M&D Enterprises at 580‑886‑2345 or stop by one of our locations to see leveling tools, materials, and gear in action.

DESSERT:TRAEGER BAKED PEACH COBBLER

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Wed, 23 Jul 2025 14:17:06 GMT

Traeger Baked Peach Cobbler

The body content of your post goes here. To edit this text, click on it and delete this default text and start typing your own or paste your own from a different source.

Max Out Your Backyard with a Derksen Makeover

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Wed, 16 Jul 2025 19:22:25 GMT

Discover the Versatility of Derksen Portable Buildings: From Home Gyms to Golf Simulators

What if your backyard shed could do more than store tools? With Derksen portable buildings , it can—becoming anything from a home gym to a golf simulator man cave . These adaptable builds are taking outdoor structures to the next level. Let’s explore the many ways you can transform one into a functional, inspiring space.

��️‍♂️ 1. Home Gym That Fits Your Routine

Imagine starting every day with a quick workout steps from your backdoor. A Derksen building —equipped with insulation , electrical outlets , and ventilation systems —makes this your reality. Add rubber flooring and mirrors, and you’ve got a dedicated fitness zone that helps you stay motivated and on-track, with minimal effort.

�� Pro Tip: Thinking of adding soundproof panels or smart lighting? That’s customization worth considering!

�� 2. Art Studio with Natural Light & Space

Dreaming of an inspiring creative space? Derksen buildings can be outfitted with skylights , large studio windows , and fresh paint-ready walls to create a peaceful art retreat. Whether you paint, sculpt, or design, having a dedicated studio boosts creativity and keeps your home clutter-free.

Related Read: Pair your studio with smart landscaping—check out our Outdoor Landscaping Ideas for inspiration.

�� 3. Quiet, Functional Home Office

Working from home? Your mind-space matters. Convert a Derksen into a private office with electrical wiring, insulation, and connectivity options. Surrounding it with greenery or gravel walkways (see our How Low Should You Mow guide for yard ideas) creates a restful, productive environment.

��‍♂️ 4. Chic Pool House for Entertaining

Hosting family and friends poolside? Derksen buildings can be reimagined as stylish pool houses , complete with changing rooms, seating areas, and storage for towels and toys. Add a mini fridge and a countertop bar to turn it into a hub for summer fun.

⛳️ 5. Golf Simulator Man Cave = Game Changer

Golf anytime, under any weather conditions. A Derksen building can become your personal golf simulator haven —outfitted with turf flooring, projector mounts, screen space, and proper ceiling height. Perfect for improving your swing or enjoying friendly competitions.

✅ Why Derksen Portable Buildings Are Perfect for Versatile Spaces

Customizable sizes, doors, windows, and finishes
Built with durable materials for long-lasting use
Added insulation and electrical upgrades available for comfort
Easily relocated or expanded as your needs evolve

�� Score More Inspiration

�� Ready to Build Your Dream Space?

With Derksen portable buildings , there’s no limit to what you can create. Want a custom quote or help planning your build? Call us at 580‑886‑2345 or visit our M&D Enterprises lot to explore models in-person.

Let’s bring your vision to life—whether it’s crushing reps, unleashing creativity, working in peace, lounging poolside, or perfecting your swing.

Lawn Mower Spark Plug Symptoms & Fixes

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Wed, 09 Jul 2025 20:40:33 GMT

�� Is It Time to Change Your Mower’s Spark Plug? Here’s How to Know

Struggling to start your mower? It might not be broken—just in need of a $5 fix.
Learn how a tiny spark plug could be the reason your entire lawn care game is lagging.

⚡ Why Your Spark Plug Deserves More Attention

You wouldn’t try to light a fire with a wet match, right? Your mower’s spark plug is that match . It ignites the fuel-air mix that powers your engine. Without a strong spark, your mower turns into dead weight—or worse, it starts and sputters halfway through the job.

�� Quick Tip: Replacing a spark plug is usually a 10-minute job with a massive payoff in performance.

�� 5 Signs It’s Time to Replace Your Spark Plug

✅ Recognize these issues? You’re likely overdue:

Hard to Start – Takes 3+ pulls to get going? Probably the plug.
Rough Idling or Surging – If it sounds uneven or “jumpy,” misfiring is likely.
Black Smoke or Smell of Gas – Fuel isn’t burning efficiently.
High Fuel Use – A weak spark means more fuel burned for less work.
Cracked or Dirty Plug Tip – Pull the plug and look. If it’s fouled, swap it out.

�� How to Replace a Lawn Mower Spark Plug (DIY Step-by-Step)

Even if you’ve never turned a wrench, this repair is beginner-friendly.

What You Need:

New spark plug (check your mower model)
Socket wrench + spark plug socket
Gap gauge (optional, but ideal)
Shop rag

How to Do It:

Disconnect the wire – Always safety first.
Unscrew old plug – Use your socket wrench.
Check the gap – Set the correct space if needed.
Install new plug – Hand-tighten, then use the wrench for a snug fit.
Reconnect the wire – Fire it up and listen to the smooth sound.

�� How Often Should You Replace It?

You should replace your mower’s spark plug once per season , or every 25–50 hours of use. It’s quick, affordable, and prevents expensive problems down the line.

�� While you’re at it, give your mower a seasonal checkup. Here’s our full guide:
�� Your Guide to Selecting the Perfect Lawn Mower

��️ Spark Plug FAQs

Q: Can I clean a spark plug instead of replacing it?
A: Yes—but it’s not always effective. If it’s severely carbonized or damaged, replacement is better.

Q: Will a bad spark plug ruin my mower?
A: Not instantly, but it puts stress on the engine, wastes fuel, and can cause long-term damage.

Q: How do I know which spark plug to buy?
A: Check your mower manual or visit your nearest M&D Enterprises location for expert help.

�� Bonus Tips to Keep Your Mower Running Like New

Change your oil regularly
Replace your air filter every season
Use fresh gas (not last year’s leftovers)
Sharpen the blade every 20–25 hours of cutting
Store it in a dry space

�� See more maintenance hacks in:
From Dead to Green: How to Fix a Bad Lawn Fast

✅ Final Thoughts: Don’t Let a Tiny Plug Cost You Big Time

Spark plugs might be small, but the impact they have on your mower is huge. Replacing it regularly is the cheapest insurance you can buy for your equipment’s health.

�� Let M&D Help

Need help choosing the right plug or doing a full tune-up? Stop by your local M&D Enterprises location or call 580‑886‑2345 today. Our team is ready to help you get back to cutting with confidence.

�� More helpful reads:

�� Keep Learning, Keep Cutting

Like this article? Share it with fellow lawn warriors or bookmark it for next season.
�� Sign up for our seasonal newsletter to get monthly tips straight to your inbox.

Oklahoma-Proof Plants: Top Ornamental Grasses That Thrive in Tough Weather

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Sun, 06 Jul 2025 17:34:52 GMT

�� Ornamental Grass: The Secret Ingredient for Stunning Landscaping

Ornamental grass is taking over lawns and gardens —and for good reason. It’s hardy, visually striking, and supports local wildlife. From 10″ ankle grazers to towering 10‑foot giants, ornamental grass offers year‑round beauty and function.

Curious to transform your landscape? Let’s dive into what ornamental grass is, how to choose the best varieties, and how to care for them with minimal effort.

✅ What Is Ornamental Grass?

Unlike standard turfgrass, ornamental grasses are perennial plants selected for form, texture, and seasonal color. They range from bunch‑forming to spreading styles and include many U.S. natives—perfect for adding structure to patios, flowerbeds, and hardscape areas.

Before planting, check out our guide on selecting and maintaining ornamental grasses —and get tips on matching them with lawn mowers from our post: Your Guide to Selecting the Perfect Lawn Mower .

�� Choosing the Right Ornamental Grass

1. Growth Habit: Clumping vs. Runners

Clump‑forming grasses stay tidy—ideal for controlled beds.
Runner grasses spread aggressively via rhizomes—great for large areas but invasive if left unchecked.

2. Fast vs. Slow Spreaders

Fast-spreaders like Blue Lyme Grass, Prairie Cordgrass, and Ribbongrass fill space quickly, but can invade nearby beds.
Slow-spreaders such as Fountain Grass, Maiden Grass, and Switchgrass expand slowly and stay contained.

3. Climate Fit: Warm vs. Cool Season

Warm-season grasses thrive in 80–90°F heat and resist drought (Bluestem, Pampas).
Cool-season grasses grow early in spring but need more moisture. Choose based on Oklahoma's climate suitability.

�� Caring for Your Ornamental Grass

�� Annual Maintenance

Most grasses need just a spring cutback —trim to 6–10″ before new growth begins. Warm-season varieties may stay through winter to provide wildlife shelter.

Use gloves, a hedge trimmer, and a bungee cord to bundle grass for easier cutting.

✂️ Evergreen Exceptions

Evergreen types (Fescue, Blue Oat Grass) shouldn't be cut annually—just comb out dead strands when needed.

�� Dividing Every Few Years

To rejuvenate growth and expand planting, divide clumps every 2–3 years. Best time: spring or summer for warm-season , early fall for cool-season types.

�� Container Care

Potted grasses thrive with deep watering every 2–3 weeks. In colder months, move containers to a sheltered space like a garage.

�� Landscaping Tips & Design Inspiration

Pair grasses for contrast :

Mix tall runners with low clump types.
Combine leafy textures with bold seed heads.
Embrace color contrasts—gold, blue, burgundy blend beautifully.

To amplify your design, check these articles:

�� Why Ornamental Grass Is a Smart Choice

Low maintenance: Little water and fertilizer needed once established.
Visual interest: Offers texture, color, and movement year-round.
Wildlife support: Seeds feed birds and grasses provide shelter.
Drought resistant: Especially warm-season types thrive in dry conditions.

A study even suggests sweetgrass (Sweetgrass oil) repels mosquitoes naturally—bonus protection for outdoor spaces!

�� Final Thoughts

Ornamental grasses are a high-impact, low-effort way to beautify your landscape. Think through:

Growth habit (clumping vs. spreading)
Climate match (warm vs. cool)
Care routine (annual trimming, dividing, container care)

�� Want personalized help? Our blog has more on native plants and garden techniques—explore now!

Have questions or need design ideas? Reach out anytime—we’re here for your landscaping journey.

�� Explore More from M&D Enterprises

From Dead to Green: How to Fix a Bad Lawn Fast

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Thu, 03 Jul 2025 19:41:43 GMT

How Do I Turn My Bad Lawn into a Good One?

Bare patches. Brown grass. Weeds everywhere. If your lawn looks hopeless right now, don’t worry— you can fix it . With a few smart steps and some dedication, your yard can once again be the lush green oasis you’ve dreamed of. Ready to bring your lawn back to life? Let’s begin!

�� Step 1: Get to the Root of the Matter

Dethatch your lawn to remove that thick layer of dead grass and debris blocking water and nutrients.
Press down on your lawn—if thatch is over ½ to 1 inch , it’s time to dethatch.
Best done in spring or fall with a dethatching rake or machine rental.

�� Step 2: Level Up Your Lawn

Fix those annoying bumps and dips:

Depressions : Fill small holes with soil + compost. Larger: remove sod, fill the hole, re-lay sod, then water.
Bumps : Cut out a 2’x2’ section, remove excess soil, add compost, and replace the sod.

�� Step 3: Build Good Chemistry (Soil pH)

Healthy lawns start with balanced soil.
Use a DIY pH tester
Ideal pH: 6.0–7.0 —adjust with lime or sulfur as needed.

Need more soil tips? Check out our guide: Mastering Lawn Fertilization

�� Step 4: Feed It Right (Fertilizer)

Use a slow-release fertilizer to avoid burning your lawn.
If you tested your soil, follow the exact nutrient recommendations.
If not, a standard 3–1–1 NPK mix is a safe bet.
Planting grass ? Fertilize a week before seeding and water it in.

�� Step 5: Keep Your Invisible Friends Happy

Maintain a healthy soil microbiome—support 2–5% organic matter in your soil.
Add compost annually to boost soil health and ward off pests.

�� Step 6: Air It Out (Core Aeration)

Use a core aerator —especially after heavy use—to improve root growth.
For best results, aerate in spring or fall.

�� Step 7: Seed the Future

Dethatch and water thoroughly before seeding.
Oversee evenly in two directions, then cover with topsoil or compost .
Best as overseeding techniques vary by location:
Northern climates : Late summer/fall
Southern climates : Early summer

❤️ Step 8: Show Some Love

Mist your yard regularly , especially in the first 4–6 weeks.
Once grass reaches 3–4″, mow with a sharp blade to protect new shoots.
Continue regular watering and a second round of fertilizer if needed.

�� See It in Action

Check out M&D T.V. for all of our recent videos or Subscribe to our YouTube channel !

�� More Reading & Resources

Explore these companion posts for deeper dives:

What’s the Best Mower Height for Your Grass? – Keep your lush lawn looking crisp every time you mow.
Should You Mulch Your Yard? – Learn when to mulch and when to leave it be.
Protect Your Lawn from Foot Traffic – Tips to prevent wear and compaction from kids and pets.

�� Ready to Renovate?

Visit M&D Enterprises in-store or online to get everything you need, including:

Dethatching tools and core aerators
High-quality soil, compost, and fertilizers
Lawn mowers , sprayers , and Bobcat Equipment

Need plant selection help or want to level up your yard? Let us guide you!

✅ Final Takeaway

Dethatch → Level → Test pH → Fertilize → Aerate → Seed → Maintain =
→ Lush, healthy lawn in just a few seasons!

Curious about more yard hacks? Explore our Lawn Care Tips & Tricks blog category.

�� Ready to get started?

Contact M&D Enterprises today for DIY advice, or product recommendations
Call 580‑886‑2345 or visit us online!

Top 5 Ways to Protect Your Power Tool Batteries

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Mon, 09 Jun 2025 20:04:32 GMT

�� How to Extend the Life of Your Power Tool Batteries

Whether you're a professional tradesperson relying on tools day in and day out or a weekend DIYer, taking care of your power tool batteries is essential to getting the most out of your investment. Letting them sit in the heat, overcharging, or using off-brand batteries might be silently killing their performance—and your productivity.

At M&D Enterprises, we’re all about helping you get more value from your tools. Here’s how to store, maintain, and use your batteries to keep them running strong for years.

1️⃣ Use the Right Battery & Charger System

2️⃣ Avoid Extreme Temperatures

Batteries and Oklahoma summers don’t mix well. Lithium-ion batteries can suffer permanent damage over 175°F , which can happen in a hot truck bed or toolbox.

Best practices for temperature control:

Store indoors , ideally around 59°F
Avoid direct sunlight on the jobsite
Don’t leave batteries in cars or garages during extreme cold or heat

�� According to the University of Michigan, elevated temps can degrade every component in a battery and even cause explosions. Keeping them cool is not just smart—it’s safer.

3️⃣ Store Batteries Safely and Correctly

Tossing your power tools into a bin might seem convenient, but moisture, dust, and metal shavings can wreck your battery’s electronics.

✅ Store your batteries:

In a dry, cool place
Inside a case or toolbox with foam padding or holders
Away from metal objects like screws, coins, or keys

�� Also consider investing in a tool storage solution that includes sealed drawers or cabinets for maximum protection.

4️⃣ Use Your Tools Regularly

Even the best batteries will degrade if they sit unused for too long. Most lithium-ion batteries have a low self-discharge rate, but NiCd batteries can lose significant charge in just 3 days.

�� Rotate your batteries often and avoid letting them sit idle for months at a time.

�� Pro Tip: Keep a spare battery charged and ready, so you never hit a dead stop during a job.

5️⃣ Protect Batteries from Water & Metal

Construction sites are messy. Rain, mud, metal shavings, and random hardware are common—but they're all dangerous to your battery’s circuitry.

�� Here’s what you can do:

Use weather-sealed battery packs when working outdoors
Store batteries off the ground in waterproof cases
Never let them come in contact with metal hardware, which can short the terminals

❓ Battery FAQs

What is “memory effect” and how does it impact charging?

Memory effect happens when older NiCd or NiMH batteries are recharged without being fully drained. Over time, they "remember" the partial charge and reduce their capacity.

�� Solution: Always fully discharge NiCd/NiMH batteries before recharging. Lithium-ion batteries don’t have this issue—just charge them after each use.

Can I leave my battery on the charger?

⛔ In most cases, no —especially with older tools . Overcharging can increase wear and reduce lifespan. Some newer chargers offer auto shutoff features , but check your manual to be sure.

✅ If your charger does support safe storage , you’re good. If not, disconnect and store separately after each charge.

Can I recondition old or dead power tool batteries?

Yes—especially older NiCd or NiMH models that have developed memory effect or crystal buildup. Try this:

Fully charge the battery
Run your tool until it stops
Recharge to full again

⚠️ Do this only occasionally, and not with lithium-ion batteries. For those, consider professional services or a replacement.

How long do lithium-ion batteries last?

Most Li-ion batteries last 2–3 years or 300–500 full charge cycles. Proper storage and usage will help maximize this lifespan.

�� Tip: Label your batteries with their first-use date so you can keep track of age.

✅ Wrap-Up: Keep Your Power Tool Batteries Alive Longer

Battery problems are one of the most common issues we hear from customers. But they’re also one of the easiest to prevent .

By:

Using quality batteries and chargers
Keeping them cool and dry
Avoiding overcharging
Using tools regularly
Protecting from elements

You’ll get longer life, better performance, and more jobsite efficiency .

�� More Resources From M&D Enterprises

Need help choosing the best tools or accessories? Contact us or stop by your local M&D Enterprises store . We’re here to help you get the job done right—every time.

How Low Should You Mow

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Mon, 09 Jun 2025 15:16:32 GMT

What Mowing Height Should a Lawn Mower Be Set At?

Finding the perfect mowing height isn't guesswork—it’s about knowing your grass and adjusting for the season. At M&D Enterprises , we believe a properly cut lawn is the first step to a lush, healthy yard that thrives here in Oklahoma .

1. Know Your Grass Type & Location

Cool-Season Grasses (Bluegrass, Rye, Fescue – common north of St. Louis):
Spring & Fall : 2″–2½″ for optimal growth
Summer : Raise to ~3″ to reduce heat stress
Warm-Season Grasses (Bermuda, Zoysia, Bahiagrass – typical in Oklahoma):
Spring/Fall : 1″–2″—they tolerate shorter heights well
Summer : Consistent 1″–2″ works for vigorous growth

�� — For more lawn care insights, check out our Selecting the Right Mower Guide !

2. Measure & Adjust Correctly

Deck height numbers may not match actual cut—test by mowing a small patch and measuring it .
Follow the 1/3 Rule : Never remove more than one-third of the grass blade per mowing.
Aim for trimming no more than 1″ at a time during peak growth. Multiple sessions per week may be ideal during spring and fall .

3. Caring for New Grass Seed or Sod

Sod: Wait at least 10 days or until vigorous growth before mowing.
Seed, Plugs, or Sprigs: Let grass reach 3"-4" tall before the first cut.

4. The Case for Tall Grass

Taller grass provides shade, retains soil moisture, and builds deep roots .
It grows slower, leading to fewer mows—saving you up to 20% of mowing time annually.
It also reduces weed intrusion—less need for herbicides!

5. Why Cutting Too Short Harms Your Lawn

Short cuts stress grass and force it to use root reserves, weakening the plant.
Shallow roots dry out faster and are less resilient to drought and heat .
Tall grass = deeper roots, better health, and a greener lawn .

�� Final Takeaway

Identify your grass and know your zone (warm vs. cool season).
Aim for 1″–2½″ based on grass type and season .
Avoid cutting more than 1/3 of grass at a time.
Leave new lawns longer until established.
Choose height that supports depth, strength, and overall lawn health.

Need Help Choosing the Right Mower?

A well-chosen mower can make all this easy. Visit our Lawn Mower Selection Guide or come into M&D Enterprises for expert advice on the perfect mower to keep your grass at its ideal height—and looking its best.

Keep your lawn smarter and healthier with the right mowing habits—and the right mower from M&D Enterprises !

ENTREES:TRAEGER BBQ CHICKEN BAKED POTATO

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Thu, 05 Jun 2025 18:00:00 GMT

TRAEGER BBQ CHICKEN BAKED POTATO

Load your Traeger-baked potato with grilled chicken & tangy BBQ sauce, this is a one-dish meal that will fill you up with BBQ happiness.

Prep Time

10 Min

Cook Time

1 Hr

30 Min

Pellets

Hickory

Ingredients

main

4 russet potatoes

2 chicken breasts

2 Clove garlic, minced

2 Tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil

2 Teaspoon Worcestershire sauce

As Needed Pork & Poultry Rub

As Needed Apricot BBQ Sauce

To Taste salt and pepper

To Taste butter

To Taste sour cream

To Taste your choice of cheese, for serving

To Taste chives, chopped

Steps

Step 1

When ready to cook, start the Traeger and set the temperature to 450° F and preheat, lid closed, for 10 to 15 minutes.

00:15

450 ˚F / 232 ˚C

Step 2

Wash the potatoes and poke several holes in each with a fork or skewer. Place on the grill and cook for 1 hour to 1 hour 15 minutes, or until they are soft.

01:15

450 ˚F / 232 ˚C

Ingredients

4 russet potatoes

Step 3

Meanwhile, prepare the chicken by rubbing it with the minced garlic, drizzling with the olive oil and Worcestershire sauce and seasoning with the Traeger Pork & Poultry Rub.

Ingredients

2 chicken breasts

2 Clove garlic, minced

2 Tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil

2 Teaspoon Worcestershire sauce

As Needed Traeger Pork & Poultry Rub

Step 4

After the potatoes have been cooking for about 30 minutes, throw the chicken onto the grill.

00:30

450 ˚F / 232 ˚C

Step 5

Let the chicken cook 20 to 30 minutes, or until the internal temperature registers 165 degrees on an instant-read thermometer.

00:30

450 ˚F / 232 ˚C

165 ˚F / 74 ˚C

Step 6

Pull the chicken off when it's done and set aside to allow the juices to redistribute before cutting. Check on the potatoes and pull them off when they are done.

Step 7

Pull the chicken breasts. Mix in a generous amount of Traeger Apricot BBQ Sauce.

Ingredients

As Needed Traeger Apricot BBQ Sauce

Step 8

To assemble, slice open baked potatoes and fill them with your favorite toppings -- season liberally with salt and pepper.

Ingredients

To Taste salt and pepper

To Taste butter

To Taste sour cream

To Taste your choice of cheese, for serving

Step 9

Top each potato with a heap of barbecue chicken and finish with a sprinkle of chives for garnish. Enjoy!

Ingredients

To Taste chives, chopped

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR TRAEGER LINEUP!!!

12 Surprising Uses for Your Pressure Washer

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Mon, 02 Jun 2025 23:03:35 GMT

From Gutters to Grills: Creative Pressure Washing Tips

Pressure washers are incredibly versatile tools that can tackle a wide range of cleaning tasks beyond just concrete, decks, siding, and patios. At M&D Enterprises , we understand the value of maximizing your equipment's potential. Here are some innovative ways to use your pressure washer to save time and effort around your property:

1. Unclogging Drains

When traditional methods fail to clear clogged drains, a sewer jetter attachment for your pressure washer can be a game-changer. These flexible hoses with specialized nozzles can navigate through pipes, breaking apart clogs and flushing out debris. For indoor drains up to 4 inches in diameter, an electric pressure washer with at least 1,500 PSI is recommended. For outdoor drains up to 6 inches, a gas pressure washer is more suitable. Always ensure your pipes can withstand the pressure, and consult a professional if unsure.

2. Removing Paint and Graffiti

A pressure washer equipped with the right nozzle can effectively strip paint or graffiti from various surfaces. Using a 15-degree or 25-degree nozzle, combined with a PSI between 1,500 and 3,000, can remove unwanted paint without damaging the underlying material. For tougher jobs, consider using a chemical graffiti remover in conjunction with your pressure washer .

3. Eliminating Rust

Rust stains on sidewalks, buildings, or metal surfaces can be unsightly. A pressure washer with at least 3,000 PSI and a narrow-angle nozzle can effectively remove rust. For best results, use a rust removal detergent designed for pressure washers .

4. Cleaning Windows

Pressure washing exterior windows can save time, especially for hard-to-reach areas. Use a wide spray nozzle (40 to 60 degrees) and keep the pressure below 2,000 PSI to prevent damage. Ensure windows are in good condition before cleaning, and consider using a cleaning solution compatible with your pressure washer .

5. Maintaining Chimneys

Over time, chimneys accumulate soot and debris. Pressure washing can effectively clean the exterior, but it's crucial to use low pressure (100 to 400 PSI) to avoid damaging the mortar or bricks. Always inspect the chimney's condition before cleaning.

6. Cleaning Landscaping and Farming Equipment

Regularly cleaning your landscaping and farming equipment can extend its lifespan. A pressure washer with 2,000 to 3,000 PSI can remove dirt, grease, and debris from mowers , tractors , and other machinery . Using a telescoping wand can help reach difficult areas without the need for ladders.

7. Refreshing Garbage Cans

Garbage cans can harbor unpleasant odors and bacteria. Using a 40-degree wide spray nozzle, you can effectively clean and deodorize your bins. For a deeper clean, apply a detergent or bleach solution with a scrub brush attachment before rinsing.

8. Clearing Gutters and Downspouts

Clogged gutters can lead to water damage. A pressure washer with a telescoping wand and a gutter-cleaning attachment can efficiently remove leaves and debris. An electric pressure washer with at least 1,200 PSI is typically sufficient for this task.

9. Cleaning Pools

Pressure washers can remove algae, dirt, and other debris from pool surfaces. Use a pressure washer with at least 1,200 PSI and a 90-degree spray nozzle for cleaning pool decks, interiors or patio furniture . Always test a small area first to ensure the pressure won't damage the surface.

10. Washing Rugs and Carpets

Outdoor rugs, car mats, and even some indoor carpets can be cleaned with a pressure washer . Use a 25- or 40-degree nozzle and keep the pressure around 1,600 PSI. Apply a suitable detergent, and avoid using hot water to prevent damage to the fibers.

11. Cleaning BBQ Grills

Grime and grease can accumulate on BBQ grills over time. Disconnect the grill from any gas sources or electricity, apply a degreaser, and use a pressure washer with at least 2,000 PSI to clean the surfaces. Be cautious to avoid damaging sensitive components.

12. Creating Clean Art

Reverse graffiti, or "clean art," involves using a pressure washer and stencils to create designs by cleaning specific areas of a dirty surface. This eco-friendly art form can transform dirty sidewalks or walls into creative displays. Use a stencil made of durable material and a pressure washer with 1,300 to 2,400 PSI for best results.

Safety Tips:

Always read your pressure washer's manual before use.
Wear appropriate protective gear, including goggles and gloves.
Test the pressure on a small, inconspicuous area before proceeding.
Be mindful of the surface material to prevent damage.

For more insights and tutorials on pressure washing, check out our blog and visit our YouTube channel or M&D T.V. for helpful videos.

Let us know if you need further assistance or have specific questions about pressure washing tasks!

What Ethanol Gas Is Really Doing to Your Engine

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Fri, 30 May 2025 03:22:25 GMT

�� Why You Should NEVER Use Ethanol Gas in Your Handheld Lawn Equipment

You rely on your handheld lawn tools to get the job done—fast, efficient, and without drama. But what if we told you one simple mistake at the gas station could destroy your equipment from the inside out?

At M&D Enterprises , we’ve seen it happen too many times: ruined engines, hard starts, expensive repairs. The silent killer? Ethanol in your fuel .

In this post, we'll explain why ethanol is the #1 enemy of two-stroke engines , how it causes piston scarring and compression loss , and why our ethanol-free premixed fuel is the safest option for your handheld tools.

⚠️ Ethanol and Two-Stroke Engines: A Recipe for Failure

While ethanol may be fine for your car, it's devastating for small engines —especially in two-stroke tools like:

Ethanol attracts water from the atmosphere and breaks down quickly, leading to internal corrosion, gummed-up carburetors , and most critically— engine damage .

�� The Real Danger: Piston Scarring and Compression Loss

What most homeowners don’t realize is that ethanol doesn’t just clog up your carb—it burns hotter and drier , which can lead to:

�� Piston scarring – Ethanol runs lean, overheating the engine and scuffing piston walls
�� Loss of compression – Scarred pistons and cylinders reduce power, making the engine hard to start or run at full strength
�� Premature failure – Replacing a two-stroke engine often costs more than buying a new tool

We've opened up hundreds of engines in our repair shop, and the story's always the same— ethanol-fueled damage leaves its mark . Quite literally.

�� Think You're Buying Ethanol-Free at the Pump? Think Again.

Even when a gas station advertises “no ethanol” fuel, there’s still a hidden risk: unless they use dedicated fuel lines for ethanol-free gas, you may still be getting ethanol in the first few gallons.

Why? Because residual fuel from previous blends remains in the hose. So unless you're pumping several gallons (and wasting money), your small gas can is still likely to get a mix of ethanol-laced fuel.

�� It only takes one tank of contaminated gas to damage your engine.

✅ The Safe Solution: M&D's Ethanol-Free Premixed Fuel

At M&D Enterprises , we carry professional-grade premixed fuel that takes all the risk—and guesswork—out of the equation.

Our premium two-stroke fuel is:

✅ 100% ethanol-free
✅ Perfectly mixed at manufacturer-recommended ratios
✅ Stable for long-term storage (12–24 months!)
✅ Cleaner burning, extending the life of your engine

�� It’s not just a fuel—it’s engine insurance .

��️ Trust the Experts at M&D Enterprises

Whether you're maintaining your own backyard or managing a fleet of landscaping tools , using the right fuel makes all the difference .

�� Stop by any of our M&D Enterprises locations across Oklahoma to grab safe, premixed fuel , ask our techs about the best maintenance practices, or schedule a service if your tools are already showing signs of ethanol damage.

And while you're here, check out our full lineup of:

�� Final Thoughts: Don’t Let Bad Gas Cost You a Good Tool

Using gas with ethanol in your two-stroke equipment is like pouring sugar in your gas tank—it may not break it instantly, but the damage adds up fast .

✅ Stick with ethanol-free, properly mixed fuel
✅ Never trust pump gas unless you know the source is clean
✅ Choose M&D Enterprises for safe fuel, reliable tools, and expert advice

�� Ready to make the switch? Come see us today and stock up on premix fuel— your tools will thank you .

ENTREES: TRAEGER COWBOY CANDY RIBS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Thu, 29 May 2025 21:30:00 GMT

Traeger Cowboy Candy Ribs

The Traeger kitchen has produced plenty of incredible recipes, but Nichole Dailey’s creation of these sticky, spicy, smoky-sweet Cowboy Candy Ribs truly stole the spotlight. The Traeger community couldn’t get enough—fans were clamoring for the recipe. The best part? The Cowboy Candy, or candied jalapeños, yields more than you'll need for the ribs, which is a win. They’re perfect on burgers, hot dogs, cheese boards, cocktails—pretty much anything you can dream up.

Prep Time

15 Min

Cook Time

6 Hr

Pellets

Hickory

Ingredients

Cowboy Candy

10 jalapeños

1 1/2 Cup light brown sugar

1 Cup apricot preserves

1/4 Cup apple cider vinegar

2 garlic cloves, minced

1/2 Teaspoon freshly ground black pepper

Ribs

2 Rack St. Louis-style ribs

1/2 Cup yellow mustard

1/4 Cup Anything Rub

2 Tablespoon coarsely ground black pepper

1/2 Cup cooked, chopped bacon

Steps

Step 1

Make the cowboy candy: Preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 225°F; this will take about 15 minutes.

225 ˚F / 107 ˚C

Step 2

Slice the jalapeños into ¼-inch thick rings and spread them out on a wire rack. Place the rack directly on the grill grate and smoke for 25 minutes.

00:25

225 ˚F / 107 ˚C

Ingredients

10 jalapeños

Step 3

Meanwhile, in a medium saucepan, combine the sugar, preserves, vinegar, garlic, and black pepper.

Ingredients

1 1/2 Cup light brown sugar

1 Cup apricot preserves

1/4 Cup apple cider vinegar

2 garlic cloves, minced

1/2 Teaspoon freshly ground black pepper

Step 4

Transfer the smoked jalapeños to the saucepan, then place the pan over medium heat. Cook, stirring occasionally and adjusting the heat so that the mixture is simmering, until syrupy and thick, 8 to 10 minutes. Set aside 1 cup of the cowboy candy, including some of the syrup, for the ribs. Transfer the remaining to a heatproof container. Cover and refrigerate what you don’t use right away; it will keep for up to 2 months. If not making the ribs right away, cover and refrigerate the 1 cup of candy, too.

Step 5

When ready to cook the ribs, heat the Traeger with the lid closed to 225°F.

225 ˚F / 107 ˚C

Step 6

If your butcher has not already done so, remove the thin papery membrane from the bone-side of the ribs by working the tip of a butter knife underneath the membrane over a middle bone. Use paper towels to get a firm grip, then tear the membrane off. Coat the ribs on both sides with the mustard. Sprinkle the Traeger Anything Rub and the black pepper on both sides as well; the ribs should be amply coated.

Ingredients

2 Rack St. Louis-style ribs

1/2 Cup yellow mustard

1/4 Cup Traeger Anything Rub

2 Tablespoon coarsely ground black pepper

Step 7

Place the ribs bone side down directly on the grill grate. Cook undisturbed for 3 hours. After 3 hours, brush the ribs with some of the syrup from the cowboy candy. Cook for another 20 minutes, then brush again. Continue cooking until syrup looks set and the internal temperature reaches 202°F .

225 ˚F / 107 ˚C

202 ˚F / 94 ˚C

Step 8

Transfer the ribs to a cutting board. Line a rimmed baking sheet with butcher paper or parchment for easy cleanup. Slice the racks into individual ribs, then transfer the ribs to a large bowl. Add the bacon and the remaining cowboy candy (the jalapeños plus any syrup) to the bowl and toss well. Transfer the ribs to the baking sheet, scraping the jalapeños and bacon from the bottom of the bowl onto the ribs.

Ingredients

1/2 Cup cooked, chopped bacon

Step 9

Place the baking sheet on the grill grate and cook until the sauce is set and warmed through, 35 to 40 minutes. Enjoy!

00:35

225 ˚F / 107 ˚C

Click here to check our traeger lineup!!

Your Guide to Selecting the Perfect Lawn Mower with M&D Enterprises

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Fri, 23 May 2025 18:11:35 GMT

The M&D Difference: Personalized Help Every Step of the Way

Choosing the right lawn mower is crucial for maintaining a healthy and beautiful yard. At M&D Enterprises , we simplify this process by asking key questions to understand your specific needs. This personalized approach ensures you invest in equipment that matches your lawn's requirements and your preferences.

How Many Acres Are You Mowing?

The size of your lawn significantly influences the type of mower you should consider:

Under 1 Acre: Push mowers or small riding mowers are typically sufficient.
1–3 Acres: Mid-size riding mowers or zero-turn mowers offer efficiency and comfort.

Over 3 Acres: Large zero-turn mowers or lawn tractors are ideal for covering extensive areas quickly.

What Type of Grass Do You Have?

Understanding your lawn's grass type helps in selecting a mower that delivers the best cut:

Fine Lawns (e.g., Bermuda): Mowers with sharp blades and adjustable cutting heights provide a clean finish.
Coarse or Native Grasses (e.g., Crabgrass, Pasture Grass): Mowers with powerful engines and durable blades handle thicker grass effectively.

Learn more about grass types in in our selecting and maintaining ornamental grasses blog post.

Is Your Yard Smooth or Does It Have Rough Terrain?

The terrain of your yard affects mower performance and your comfort:

Smooth/Level Yards: Standard mowers without advanced suspension systems are usually adequate.
Uneven or Hilly Yards: Mowers with enhanced traction control and suspension systems provide stability and ease of use.

Is Your Lawn Open or Filled with Obstacles?

The layout of your lawn determines the maneuverability required from your mower:

Open Lawns: Wider mowers can cover more ground efficiently.
Lawns with Obstacles (e.g., Trees, Flower Beds): Mowers with zero-turn capabilities or smaller decks navigate tight spaces better.

Would You Prefer to Purchase Outright or Finance?

At M&D Enterprises , we offer flexible financing options to suit your budget:

Outright Purchase: Ideal for those who prefer to pay in full and avoid ongoing payments.
Financing Plans: We provide various financing solutions to make your purchase more manageable.

Visit our Financing Options page for more details.

See Our Mowers in Action

For a closer look at our range of mowers and their features, check out our YouTube channel or M&D T.V.

Selecting the perfect lawn mower involves understanding your lawn's size, grass type, terrain, layout, and your budget preferences. At M&D Enterprises , we're committed to guiding you through this process to ensure you find the ideal mower for your needs.

For personalized assistance, visit our Contact Us page or stop by our store.

Entree:Traeger Cheesy Broccoli Casserole

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Thu, 22 May 2025 15:38:26 GMT

Traeger Cheesy Broccoli Casserole

This isn’t your typical broccoli casserole—it’s even better. Our cheesy broccoli casserole is made with gooey cheddar, tender broccoli, and a crispy potato chip topping, then baked to melty perfection on the Traeger. Try this au-gratin-style dish for dinner, and it’ll be a guaranteed show-stopper.

How Hustler Mowers Changed the Landscaping World

Tue, 13 May 2025 21:55:26 GMT

How Hustler Mowers Revolutionized the Landscaping Industry

In the world of landscaping, innovation is the key to efficiency and excellence. One name that stands out in this realm is Hustler Turf Equipment . From pioneering the zero-turn mower to continually enhancing mowing technology, Hustler has transformed the landscaping industry.

The Birth of the Zero-Turn Mower

In 1964, inventor John Regier recognized the need for a mower that could navigate irregular landscapes with ease. He crafted a mower from farm machinery and mower parts, capable of turning with a zero-degree radius . This innovation caught the attention of Excel Industries, which began production of the Hustler mower in Hesston, Kansas. This marked the birth of the world's first zero-turn mower, setting a new standard in lawn care equipment.

Innovations That Set Hustler Apart

Hustler's commitment to innovation didn't stop with the zero-turn mower . The company introduced features like the SmoothTrak™ steering system , providing precise control and maneuverability. Their mowers are designed with heavy-duty, fabricated steel decks and one-piece steel frames, ensuring durability and performance.

Models like the X-ONE® cater to commercial landscapers, offering options like carbureted or fuel-injected engines and various deck sizes to suit different needs.

Commitment to Community and Sustainability

Beyond manufacturing, Hustler Turf Equipment is dedicated to community involvement and environmental stewardship. The company supports local initiatives, including Hesston College and the United Way chapter, and is a member of the Outdoor Power Equipment Institute (OPEI), promoting sustainable practices in the industry.

Experience Hustler at M&D Enterprises

At M&D Enterprises , we proudly offer a selection of Hustler mowers , bringing this legacy of innovation to our customers. Whether you're a homeowner or a professional landscaper, our team can help you find the perfect Hustler mower to meet your needs.

For more insights into lawn care and equipment, explore our blog .

Enhance Your Knowledge with Our Videos

To see Hustler mowers in action and learn more about their features, check out M&D T.V. our YouTube channel :

Conclusion

Hustler Turf Equipment's innovations have undeniably changed the landscaping world for the better. Their dedication to quality, performance, and community involvement sets them apart in the industry. Experience the difference with Hustler mowers at M&D Enterprises .

For more information or to schedule a demo, visit our website or contact us directly.

Ditch the Gas Can: Toro’s Battery-Powered Tools Are All You Need

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Mon, 12 May 2025 22:12:33 GMT

Discover the Benefits of Going Electric Without Sacrificing Power or Performance

If you think electric yard tools can't match the power of gas, think again. Toro's latest 60V MAX* Flex-Force Power System® delivers robust performance, extended run times, and the convenience of a single interchangeable battery across a suite of tools. From mowing to trimming, blowing, and beyond, it's time to experience lawn care that's efficient, eco-friendly, and easy to maintain.

�� Why Go Battery-Powered?

Modern battery-powered tools offer several advantages over their gas counterparts:

Low Maintenance : No gas, oil changes, or spark plugs.
Quiet Operation : Enjoy peaceful yard work without the noise.
Eco-Friendly : Zero emissions for a greener environment.
Ease of Use : Push-button starts and lightweight designs make operation a breeze.

Toro's 60V MAX* Flex-Force line exemplifies these benefits, providing homeowners with powerful tools that are both user-friendly and environmentally conscious.

�� Featured Tools in the 6 **0V MAX* Flex-Force Line**

1. Toro 60V MAX 22" Recycler® Lawn Mower *

Experience a clean, polished cut with Toro's Recycler® mower . Its Vortex Technology enhances airflow, allowing for ultra-fine clippings that nourish your lawn. With P ersonal Pace® self-propel and SmartStow® vertical storage, mowing becomes effortless and space-saving.

2. Toro 60V MAX 15"/17" Carbon Fiber Shaft String Trimmer *

This lightweight yet durable trimmer features a telescoping carbon fiber shaft for adjustable comfort. The ultra-high capacity bump head holds more line, reducing the need for frequent reloads.

3. Toro 60V MAX 900 CFM Brushless Leaf Blower *

Tackle debris with ease using this powerful blower. Its patent-pending acoustic resonator technology ensures quieter operation, while the balanced weight distribution and textured grip enhance comfort during use. Enjoy up to 120 minutes of runtime with the included 4.0 Ah battery.

4. Toro 60V MAX 24" Hedge Trimmer *

Shape your shrubs effortlessly with this hedge trimmer's rotating handle and dual-action blades. Its 24" hardened steel bar cuts through thick branches with precision, making yard maintenance a breeze.

5. Toro 60V MAX 16" Brushless Chainsaw *

Ideal for pruning and cutting, this chainsaw offers a full 16" bar and chain. The brushless motor with RunSmart® onboard intel optimizes performance, providing up to 50 cuts through 6" x 6" branches on a single charge.

�� Interchangeable Battery System

One of the standout features of the Flex-Force Power System ® is its interchangeable battery. Use the same 60V battery across all your Toro tools , simplifying your yard work and reducing clutter.

�� Enhance Your Experience with M&D Enterprises

For more insights and demonstrations, check out our YouTube channel or M&D T.V. : Here, you'll find product overviews, maintenance tips, and customer testimonials to help you make informed decisions.

�� Ready to Upgrade?

Explore our full range of Toro 60V MAX* Flex-Force tools and find the perfect fit for your lawn care needs: M&D Enterprises Products .

Experience the future of lawn care today with Toro's battery-powered solutions .

Protect Your Investment: When and Why to Perform a Break-In Oil Change

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Mon, 05 May 2025 23:16:39 GMT

Protect Your Investment: When and Why to Perform a Break-In Oil Change

If you’ve just invested in a premium mower from M&D Enterprises —be it a Hustler , Toro , Cub Cadet , Gravely , Bobcat , Grasshopper , or Ferris —congratulations! You’re now equipped with top-tier equipment designed for performance and durability. To ensure your mower operates at its best, it’s crucial to perform a break-in oil change after the initial hours of use.

��️ Why Break-In Oil Changes Matter

New mower engines undergo a break-in period where internal components settle and wear in. During this time, microscopic metal particles can accumulate in the oil. Changing the oil after the first 5–10 hours of operation helps remove these particles, preventing potential engine wear and ensuring optimal performance. Check your mowers user manual to find out what break-in time frame is recommended for your specific engine.

⏱️ Recommended Break-In Schedule

While specific recommendations can vary by manufacturer, a general guideline is:

• First Oil Change : After 5–10 hours of operation.

• Subsequent Changes : Every 25–50 hours for push mowers and every 100 hours or annually for riding mowers .

Always consult your mower’s owner’s manual for precise maintenance intervals.

�� How to Perform a Break-In Oil Change

1. Warm Up the Engine : Run the mower for a few minutes to warm the oil, which helps it drain more easily.

2. Drain the Old Oil : Turn off the engine and remove the oil drain plug to let the old oil flow into a suitable container.

3. Replace the Oil Filter : If your mower has an oil filter, replace it to ensure optimal filtration.

4. Add New Oil : Refill with the recommended oil type and quantity as specified in your owner’s manual.

5. Check Oil Level : Use the dipstick to ensure the oil level is correct.

For all of your new oil parts and service we've got you covered!

Proper disposal of old oil is essential. Store it in a sealed container and take it to a local recycling center or service station that accepts used oil .

�� Additional Maintenance Tips

• Air Filter Replacement : Replace the air filter every 25–100 hours of operation, depending on usage conditions, to maintain engine efficiency .

• Regular Cleaning : After each use, remove grass clippings and debris from the mower deck and engine area to prevent corrosion and maintain performance .

�� Need Assistance?

At M&D Enterprises , we’re committed to helping you get the most out of your equipment. If you have questions about maintenance schedules or need service, our expert team is here to assist.

Call or email us today at:

(580)886-2345

info@mowersok.com

Explore our range of top-quality mowers and accessories .

Why Choose M&D Enterprises?

Thu, 01 May 2025 00:10:44 GMT

Why Choose M&D Enterprises: Your Trusted Partner for Outdoor Living in Western Oklahoma

Since 2016, M&D Enterprises has been dedicated to providing the residents of Western Oklahoma with top-quality products and exceptional customer service for all their outdoor living needs. Whether you're looking to enhance your lawn, porch, or patio, M&D Enterprises offers a comprehensive range of solutions tailored to your lifestyle.

�� Comprehensive Product Selection

At M&D Enterprises , you'll find a vast array of products to transform your outdoor spaces:

Lawn & Garden Equipment : From new and pre-owned lawn mowers to handheld equipment , we offer tools that cater to both residential and commercial needs.

Structures & Shelters : Our selection includes barns, carports, steel structures , insulated well houses , portable buildings , chicken coops , greenhouses , and storm shelters , ensuring protection and functionality.

Backyard Essentials : Enhance your outdoor living with our range of grills , patio furniture , Custom Boulders and High Quality Play Sets .

Hunting Products : For outdoor enthusiasts, we provide hunting blinds , game cameras , and other essential gear .

Explore our full product range here: M&D Enterprises Products

��️ Expert Service & Support

Our commitment doesn't end at the point of sale. M&D Enterprises offers:

Parts & Service : We stock a comprehensive range of parts and have trained mechanics ready to service your equipment promptly.
Customer Support : Our knowledgeable staff is always available to provide guidance, ensuring you make informed decisions.

Learn more about our services: Parts and Service page

�� Local Presence with a Personal Touch

With locations in Woodward, Weatherford, Fairview, and Canton, M&D Enterprises is deeply rooted in the Western Oklahoma community. Our local presence ensures that we understand the unique needs of our customers and can provide personalized solutions.

�� Hear from Our Satisfied Customers

Don't just take our word for it. Our customers' experiences speak volumes:

" M&D Enterprises transformed my chaotic yard into a serene space. Their team helped me design the perfect structure , and the installation was seamless."

"Thanks to M&D Enterprises, I no longer worry about frozen pipes in winter. Their insulated well house was a game-changer."

Read more customer stories on our page .

�� Visual Insights & Tutorials

For a closer look at our products and services, visit our YouTube channel: M&D Enterprises YouTube or M&D T.V.

Here, you'll find:

Product Demonstrations : See our equipment in action and understand their features.
Installation Guides : Step-by-step tutorials to help you set up and maintain your purchases.

Customer Testimonials : Hear directly from our satisfied clients about their experiences.

�� A Commitment to Community

Every purchase you make supports over 20 individuals and their families in Western Oklahoma. We take pride in contributing to our local economy and fostering community growth.

�� Connect with Us Today

Ready to elevate your outdoor living experience?

Visit Us : Stop by any of our locations in Woodward, Weatherford, Fairview, or Canton.
Call Us : Reach out at 580-886-2345 for personalized assistance.
Online Inquiry : Submit your questions or request a quote through our website: Contact M&D Enterprises

Experience the M&D Enterprises difference—where quality products , expert service , and community commitment come together.

Should You Mulch Your Yard?

Thu, 24 Apr 2025 21:43:30 GMT

Here's What Every Homeowner in Oklahoma Should Know

When it comes to yard maintenance , one question we get a lot at M&D Enterprises is: "Should I mulch my yard or not?" Whether you're a seasoned homeowner or a first-time lawn enthusiast, mulching can make a world of difference in how your yard looks and performs. But is it the right move for your lawn? Let’s dig in.

�� What Is Mulching?

Mulching involves covering your soil with organic or inorganic material to help retain moisture, suppress weeds, and add nutrients back into the soil. Organic mulch options include grass clippings, leaves, wood chips, and compost, while inorganic mulches include rubber or plastic sheeting.

If you're mowing regularly, many mowers , like the commercial-grade Ferris Mowers we offer, have mulching kits that chop grass finely and redistribute it across your yard.

✅ The Benefits of Mulching

Moisture Retention — Mulch acts as a natural sponge, helping your soil retain moisture during hot Oklahoma summers .
Weed Suppression — A thick layer of mulch blocks sunlight, preventing weed seeds from germinating.
Soil Health — Organic mulch breaks down over time and enriches your soil with nutrients.
Improved Curb Appeal — A well-mulched landscape looks clean, maintained, and professional.
Erosion Control — Mulch reduces runoff and helps prevent soil erosion during heavy rain.

❌ When Mulching Might Not Be Ideal

While mulching has many upsides, there are situations where you might want to hold off:

Excessive Thatch — If your lawn has more than half an inch of thatch, mulching grass clippings may worsen the problem.
Diseased Plants — Avoid mulching near plants that have disease or fungus to prevent it from spreading.
Over-Mulching — Too much mulch can suffocate your grass and cause root rot, especially around trees and shrubs.

�� Bag or Mulch? Which Is Better?

Bagging clippings can keep your lawn looking ultra-clean, and it's a good choice when your grass is wet or overgrown. But mulching returns nutrients back to your lawn and is generally more sustainable. The good news? With the right mower , you don't have to choose one or the other.

⚡ Pro Tip: Use Mulch in Garden Beds Too

Mulching isn’t just for your lawn. Your flower beds and vegetable gardens will also thrive with a proper mulch layer. Use bark mulch for aesthetics or straw in veggie beds for a natural boost.

�� The Oklahoma Climate Factor

In Oklahoma, where summers can be scorching and rainstorms sudden and heavy, mulch helps regulate soil temperature and retain moisture. It's a smart investment for long-term lawn health.

�� Get the Right Equipment for the Job

If you're thinking about mulching your yard but don’t have the right mower or mulch kit, M&D Enterprises has you covered. From Ferris zero-turn mowers to heavy-duty lawn tools , we have what you need to maintain a beautiful, healthy lawn.

Explore more yard care tips on our blog and subscribe to our YouTube channel for how-to videos, mower demos, and seasonal advice.

�� Final Verdict: Yes, Mulch Your Yard — But Do It Smart

Mulching is a low-effort, high-reward way to care for your lawn and garden. As long as you avoid the common pitfalls, it can save you water, suppress weeds, and build healthier soil. Pair it with the right tools and local knowledge, and you're on your way to a yard that thrives all year long.

Have questions about mulching or need help picking the best mower for your lawn? Contact M&D Enterprises or drop by one of our Oklahoma locations today!

ENTREE: TRAEGER SMOKED PULLED HAM

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 04 Apr 2025 15:57:56 GMT

TRAEGER SMOKED PULLED HAM

You’ve heard of pulled pork, but what about its saltier, savory cousin? Our super simple smoked pulled ham recipe gives store-bought ham a Pork & Poultry Rub coating before cooking low and slow on the Traeger and basting with BBQ sauce and apple cider. Once off the grill, this ultra-tender ham shreds up like a charm.

Prep Time

20 Min

Cook Time

6 Hr

30 Min

Pellets

Cherry

INGREDIENTS

1 8 to 9 lb bone-in smoked ham

1/4 Cup yellow mustard

1/3 Cup Traeger Pork & Poultry Rub or salt and pepper

2 Cup apple cider vinegar

1/2 Cup Traeger Apricot BBQ Sauce, plus more for serving

Steps

Preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 275°F.

275 ˚F / 135 ˚C

Rinse the ham under cold water to remove excess salt. Pat dry with paper towels. Using a sharp knife, score the ham in a diamond pattern, about ¼ in deep, on all sides except the flat bottom. Rub the mustard over the top and sides, then sprinkle with the rub, making sure to cover the ham well.

Using a wired leave-in meat thermometer or a wireless one like MEATER®, insert it into the thickest part of the ham avoiding bone. Transfer the ham to the grill grate flat side down and smoke until the internal temperature reaches 165°F; this can take 3 to 4 hours depending on the size of your ham, the grill, and the weather,

275 ˚F / 135 ˚C

165 ˚F / 74 ˚C

Transfer the ham to a 9x13 inch baking dish or roasting pan and increase the grill temperature to 350°F.

350 ˚F / 177 ˚C

Add the apple cider to the bottom of pan and brush the top and sides of the ham with the BBQ sauce. Cover the pan tightly with aluminum foil; allow the end of the thermometer to poke through the foil or reinsert it as necessary. Continue cooking until the ham is fork tender with an internal temperature between 195°F and 205°F, about another 3 hours.

350 ˚F / 177 ˚C

195 ˚F / 91 ˚C

Transfer the tender ham to a rimmed baking sheet and let it rest for 30 minutes. Using your hands or two forks, shred the meat. (Keep the bone for flavoring soup if you like.). Add BBQ sauce to taste.

Serve as is, in sandwiches, sliders or your favorite breakfast casserole. Enjoy!

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR TRAEGER LINEUP!!

M&D Enterprises: Weatherford Location

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Tue, 25 Mar 2025 21:34:31 GMT

M&D Enterprises in Weatherford: Helping You Build, Maintain & Protect Your Property

Welcome to M&D Enterprises & Lawnmower Shops in Weatherford, Oklahoma! Since 2016, we've been dedicated to serving the great people of Western Oklahoma, providing top-quality products and exceptional customer service. Our Weatherford location is your one-stop destination for all your lawn, porch, and patio needs.

Discover Our Wide Range of Products

At our Weatherford store, we offer an extensive selection of products to enhance your outdoor living experience:

Lawn Mowers: Whether you're maintaining a small yard or a large property, we have the perfect lawn mower for you. Our inventory includes top brands like Hustler and Toro , ensuring durability and performance.

Handheld Lawn Equipment: From trimmers to blowers , our handheld equipment makes lawn maintenance a breeze.

Bobcat Equipment: For more demanding tasks, explore our range of Bobcat equipment , including compact tractors and utility vehicles .

Portable Buildings: Need extra storage or a dedicated workspace ? Check out our selection of portable buildings , barns , carports , and steel structures.

Storm Shelters & Safe Rooms: Safety is paramount. Protect your family with our in-ground storm shelters and above-ground safe rooms , designed and manufactured in Oklahoma.

Backyard Essentials: Enhance your outdoor space with our high-quality playsets , grills , patio furniture , greenhouses , and chicken coops .

Why Choose M&D Enterprises in Weatherford?

Expertise: Our knowledgeable staff is passionate about helping you find the right products to meet your needs.

Customer-Centric Approach: We pride ourselves on treating customers the way we would like to be treated, aiming to build lasting relationships.

Convenience: With five locations across Western Oklahoma, including Weatherford, we're always within reach.

Stay Connected with Our Blog

For the latest updates, tips, and product highlights, visit our blog . Here are some recent posts you might find interesting:

Current Bobcat Savings at M&D Enterprises : Discover our latest promotions and save on top-quality Bobcat equipment.

The Ultimate Guide To Derksen Portable Buildings: Learn how our Derksen portable buildings can be tailored to suit your needs.

Engage with Us Through Videos

To get a closer look at our products and services, check out our YouTube channel:

Product Demonstrations : See our lawn mowers and equipment in action to understand their capabilities.
Customer Testimonials : Hear from satisfied customers about their experiences with M&D Enterprises. mdenterprisesok.com+13
How-To Guides : Learn maintenance tips and tricks to keep your equipment running smoothly.

Visit Us Today!

We're conveniently located at 3425 E Main, Weatherford, OK 73096. Our store hours are Monday to Friday, 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM. For any inquiries, feel free to call us at 580-774-9079 or email info@mowersok.com.

At M&D Enterprises in Weatherford, we're committed to helping you create the outdoor space of your dreams. Visit us today and experience the difference! mdenterprisesok.com

M&D Enterprises: Canton Location

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Tue, 11 Mar 2025 01:13:52 GMT

M&D Enterprises in Canton, OK – Your One-Stop Shop for Outdoor Power Equipment, Portable Buildings, and More!

When it comes to high-quality outdoor power equipment , portable buildings , steel structures , and lawn care essentials , M&D Enterprises has been a trusted name across Northwest Oklahoma . One of our standout locations is Canton, OK , where we bring top-notch products and exceptional service to the local community.

Whether you're in the market for a Cub Cadet mower , a Derksen portable building , hunting products , or a Hustler zero-turn mower , our Canton store has you covered . Keep reading to discover why M&D Enterprises in Canton, OK , should be your go-to destination for all things lawn care, storage, and outdoor equipment !

Why Choose M&D Enterprises in Canton, OK? ��

Located in the heart of Northwest Oklahoma , our Canton, OK, location is more than just a store—it's a one-stop shop for homeowners, business owners, and farmers looking for reliable equipment and expert service.

✅ Conveniently located for Canton residents and surrounding areas
✅ Wide selection of mowers, Carports , and portable buildings
✅ Knowledgeable staff to help you find the right equipment
✅ Top brands like Cub Cadet , Hustler , Derksen , and more !
✅ Financing options available

�� Visit us today at M&D Enterprises in Canton, OK, or call us at 580-886-2345 for more info!

Top Products & Services Available at M&D Enterprises – Canton, OK

Zero-Turn Mowers – Hustler , Cub Cadet , Ferris , Grasshopper , Ego , Toro

Keeping your lawn in pristine condition starts with the right mower. At our Canton location , we carry industry-leading brands like Hustler and Cub Cadet , offering powerful and durable mowers that make lawn maintenance easier than ever.

�� Popular Models in Stock:

Hustler Raptor X – Perfect for residential mowing
Cub Cadet Ultima Series – A favorite for homeowners and professionals
Hustler FasTrak – Built for commercial-grade performance

�� Need help choosing the right mower? Check out our in-depth guide: Best Mowers for Your Lawn

�� Watch our mower reviews & how-to videos: M&D Enterprises YouTube

�� Portable Buildings – Derksen Buildings in Canton, OK

Looking for extra storage, a workshop , garage , or even a tiny home ? Our Canton location offers a wide selection of Derksen Portable Buildings , built with Mennonite craftsmanship and customizable to fit your needs.

�� Top Derksen Buildings Available:
✔️ Lofted Barns – Extra storage with overhead loft space
✔️ Utility Sheds – Simple storage solutions
✔️ Cabins – Perfect for a hunting lodge or tiny home
✔️ Garages – Store ATVs, lawn equipment, and more!

�� Want to learn more? Read our Ultimate Guide to Derksen Buildings for all the details on sizes, customization options, and pricing.

�� Watch our video tours of Derksen buildings: M&D Enterprises YouTube

�� Hunting Accessories – Blinds, Feeders & More!

At M&D Enterprises Canton , we’re not just about lawn care and storage solutions —we also cater to hunters who need high-quality gear to level up their hunting game .

�� Top Hunting Products Available in Canton, OK:

Outdoor Hunting Blinds ��

Upgrade your hunting experience with Our Outdoor hunting blinds , designed for comfort, visibility, and concealment. These weather-resistant, durable blinds provide the perfect setup for a successful hunt.

✔️ Popular Models:

Ram Hunting Blinds – Compact and easy to set up
Redneck Hunting Blinds – Spacious and great for group hunting
Phantom Hunting Blinds – 360° visibility for ultimate control

�� Explore more on our hunting accessories page

Why Our Canton, OK, Customers Keep Coming Back

At M&D Enterprises Canton , we don’t just sell products—we provide solutions for homeowners, farmers, and businesses who need reliable equipment and expert service .

��️ Expert Recommendations: Our team is knowledgeable about mowers , Steel Structures , Bobcat Equipment , and more —we help you choose the best fit for your needs.

�� Financing Options: We make it easy to purchase the equipment you need without breaking the bank.

�� Delivery Available: Need your building, mower, or trailer delivered? No problem! We offer delivery services to make your purchase hassle-free.

�� Personalized Customer Service: We take pride in helping our local community find the best outdoor solutions— give us a call at 580-886-2345!

Visit M&D Enterprises in Canton, OK Today!

f you're looking for the best lawn care equipment , portable buildings , or Hunting Products in Canton, OK , stop by M&D Enterprises today ! We’re dedicated to quality, customer service, and competitive pricing .

�� Location: 207 W Main, Canton OK, 73724
�� Call Us: 580-886-2345
�� Website: www.mdenterprisesok.com

�� Need expert lawn care tips? Check out our blog for helpful guides on mowing, lawn maintenance, and equipment reviews!

�� Subscribe to our YouTube Channel for more product demos & tips: M&D Enterprises YouTube

Final Thoughts

At M&D Enterprises Canton, OK , we’re committed to helping you find the right solutions for your outdoor needs . Whether it’s a zero-turn mower , a portable storage building , or a grill , we’ve got you covered .

Come visit us today and experience the M&D Enterprises difference! ��

M&D Enterprises: Woodward Locations

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Thu, 06 Mar 2025 01:45:17 GMT

M&D Enterprises in Woodward, OK: Your One-Stop Shop for Your Best Backyard, Porch, or Patio

When it comes to quality outdoor power equipment , portable buildings , and expert service , M&D Enterprises is your go-to destination in Northwest Oklahoma. With two convenient locations in Woodward, OK, we make it easy for customers to find top-tier mowers , sheds , carports , grills , and more—all backed by outstanding customer support.

Why Choose M&D Enterprises in Woodward?

✅ Two locations for added convenience
✅ Industry-leading brands like Hustler , Cub Cadet , and Derksen
✅ A wide selection of portable buildings , carports , and storm shelters
✅ Financing and rent-to-own options
✅ Exceptional service and customer support

Whether you're looking for a new zero-turn mower , a custom storage shed , or expert repair services , we have you covered. Let’s take a closer look at what each of our Woodward locations has to offer!

M&D Enterprises Woodward (Main Location)

�� Address: 510 Main St, Woodward, OK 73801��

Phone: (580) 256-3001
⏰ Hours: Monday–Friday: 8 AM – 5:30 PM | Saturday: 9 AM – 12 PM

Our main Woodward location is a one-stop shop for lawn care equipment, portable buildings, carports, and more . Whether you're maintaining a residential lawn , managing commercial landscaping , or searching for the perfect storage solution , this location has everything you need.

What You'll Find Here:

✅ Hustler , Cub Cadet & Echo Outdoor Power Equipment
✅ Derksen Portable Buildings – Sheds, Cabins, Garages & More
✅ Carports & Metal Structures
✅ grills & accessories
✅ Parts, Repairs & Service

�� Looking for the best zero-turn mower for your property? Check out our guide on How to Choose the Right Mower .

Featured Products:

Toro & Grasshopper Mowers – Whether you need a residential or commercial mower , we have the perfect fit. Stop by to see our Ultima Series and Hustler FasTrak models in person!

�� Derksen Portable Buildings – Looking for a shed, workshop, garage, or tiny home? Derksen’s high-quality Mennonite-built structures offer the durability and flexibility you need.

��️ Service & Repairs – Our on-site service department is ready to help with mower maintenance, small engine repairs, and parts replacement .

�� Watch our video on choosing the right mower for your lawn! M&D Enterprises YouTube

M&D Enterprises Woodward (South Location)

�� Address: 623 N Main St, Fairview, OK 73737��

Phone: (580) 216-6400
⏰ Hours: Monday–Friday: 8 AM – 5:30 PM | Saturday: 9 AM – 12 PM

Our South Woodward location specializes in portable buildings , carports , grills , and Bobcat equipment . If you're looking for a custom shed, garage, or metal building , this is the place to visit!

What You'll Find Here:

✅ Derksen Portable Buildings – Cabins, Utility Sheds, Garages & More
✅ Carports & Metal Structures – Customizable to Fit Your Needs
✅ chicken coops & Greenhouses – Multiple sizes and options
✅ Rent-to-Own & Financing Available

Featured Products:

�� Portable Buildings & Sheds – Whether you need a storage shed, she-shed, man cave, or tiny home , our Derksen Buildings can be customized to fit your needs.

�� Carports & Metal Structures – Protect your vehicles, RVs, boats, and farm equipment with a durable, custom-built metal carport or garage .

�� Trailers for Every Need – We carry a variety of utility trailers, enclosed trailers, and custom trailer options to fit any hauling job.

�� Need inspiration? Check out our blog on Creative Ways to Use a Derksen Building.

�� Watch our walkthrough video of a Derksen Building on our YouTube channel! M&D Enterprises YouTube

Why Shop at M&D Enterprises in Woodward?

✅ Top Brands You Can Trust – We carry Hustler , Cub Cadet , Echo , Derksen , and more .
✅ Customizable Options – Design your shed, garage, carport, or trailer to fit your exact needs.
✅ Flexible Financing – Take advantage of rent-to-own and financing options .
✅ Expert Support – Our team is here to help you find the right equipment and structures for your needs.

�� Browse our inventory online: M&D Enterprises

�� Have questions? Call us today!

Main Location: (580) 256-0283
South Location: (580) 254-3845

�� Visit us in person at either Woodward location and experience the M&D Enterprises difference!

Final Thoughts

If you're in the Woodward area and looking for top-quality outdoor power equipment , portable buildings , or storm shelters , M&D Enterprises has you covered . With two convenient locations, expert service, and unbeatable products, we are your trusted local dealer .

�� For more updates, tips, and product reviews, check out our blog and subscribe to our YouTube channel !

ENTREES: BLACKSTONE CRISPY FISH STREET TACOS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Wed, 05 Mar 2025 19:13:25 GMT

BLACKSTONE CRISPY FISH STREET TACOS

Crispy Fish Street Tacos cooked on the Blackstone griddle are the perfect way to spice up taco night! With golden, crunchy fish, fresh toppings, and zesty sauce in a warm tortilla, they’re bursting with bold flavor in every bite.

Servings

Prep Time

10 minutes

Cook Time

10 minutes

Ingredients

1 pound fresh fish (cut into bite-sized pieces)

2 cups Panko bread crumbs

4 eggs (whisked)

Blackstone Tequila Lime seasoning (to taste)

Add To Cart

Cooking oil (for the griddle)

8 street taco-size flour tortillas

Queso fresco or cotija cheese (crumbled)

1 lime (juiced)

Mexican crema (for drizzling)

Hot sauce (optional)

Fresh cilantro (chopped)

Directions

1. Preheat your Blackstone griddle to low heat.

2. In a bowl, combine the Panko bread crumbs with a generous amount of Tequila Lime seasoning.

3. In a separate bowl, whisk the eggs. Dip each piece of fish into the whisked eggs, ensuring they are fully coated, then roll them in the seasoned Panko mixture until covered.

4. Drizzle cooking oil onto the griddle. Place the breaded fish on the griddle and cook for about 5–6 minutes, flipping frequently until all sides are golden brown and the fish is cooked through. Remove from heat and set aside.

5. Warm the tortillas by placing them on the griddle for about 30 seconds on each side until soft and pliable. Be careful not to let them crisp up unless you prefer a crunchier texture.

6. Assemble the tacos by placing some crispy fish pieces in each tortilla. Sprinkle with crumbled queso fresco, squeeze fresh lime juice on top, and drizzle with Mexican crema. Add hot sauce if you like some heat, and finish with a sprinkle of fresh cilantro.

Serve immediately and enjoy!

click here to check out our blackstone lineup!!!!!

Keep Your Lawn Green In The Summer Heat

Tue, 04 Mar 2025 17:10:42 GMT

The Ultimate Guide to Keeping Your Lawn Green During an Oklahoma Summer ��☀️

Summer in Oklahoma is brutal , to say the least. With droughts, intense heat, high winds, and dust storms , maintaining a lush green lawn year-round can feel impossible. But with the right approach, you can keep your grass thriving, even in the harshest conditions .

�� Want expert lawn care equipment? Check out our guide on the best mowers for the job .

Follow these essential tips to protect your lawn and keep it looking its best throughout the season.

1. Don’t Overwater – Timing is Everything ��

It’s easy to assume that more water equals healthier grass, but overwatering can do more harm than good . If we’re experiencing a drought or low rainfall, watering early in the morning or late in the evening is ideal.

��️ Why is midday watering bad?
If you water in the middle of the day, the intense heat can cause water to evaporate quickly before it soaks into the roots. Even worse, hot water sitting on your grass can scorch it , causing damage instead of relief.

�� Pro Tip:

If your grass is under stress from extreme heat, a quick light misting in the afternoon can help cool it down—but don’t soak it!

�� Watch this video on our YouTube channel for efficient lawn-watering techniques! M&D Enterprises YouTube

2. Routine Mowing is Key ✂️

As we’ve stressed in previous blog posts , routine mowing is essential for a healthy lawn. However, during extreme heat or drought , mowing incorrectly can do more harm than good.

�� Follow these mowing best practices:
✅ Only cut one-third of the blade at a time – For example, if your grass is 3 inches tall, cut it down to no lower than 2 inches. Cutting too short can put stress on the grass, turning it yellow or even killing it.
✅ Avoid mowing during a drought unless absolutely necessary. If the grass is struggling, mowing can make it worse.
✅ Leave your grass slightly taller in summer – Taller grass provides more shade for the soil, helping retain moisture.

��️ Need a quality mower ? Check out our lineup of Hustler and Cub Cadet mowers for the best equipment to maintain your lawn!

3. Keep Your Mower Blades Sharp ��

One of the biggest mistakes homeowners make is mowing with dull blades . A dull mower blade tears the grass instead of cutting it cleanly , which can:

❌ Cause brown, ragged edges
❌ Increase the risk of disease and stress
❌ Make your lawn look rough and uneven

✔️ Solution: Sharpen your mower blades regularly! A sharp blade creates a clean, crisp cut that heals quickly, keeping your grass healthy.

4. To Bag or Not to Bag? ��

Many people automatically bag their grass clippings, but this can work against you if done incorrectly. Returning clippings to the lawn can actually boost your lawn’s health —but only if you use a mulch kit.

�� Benefits of Mulching Your Clippings:
✅ Acts as a natural fertilizer by returning nutrients to the soil
✅ Helps retain moisture in dry conditions
✅ Reduces the need for additional fertilizers

�� Pro Tip: If you mow frequently and don’t let your grass get too long, mulching is a great option. However, if you’re dealing with thick, wet clippings, bagging might be the better choice.

�� Looking for the right mower? Learn about our top-rated Cub Cadet and Hustler mowers .

5. Lawn Care is a Year-Round Commitment ��

A healthy summer lawn doesn’t start in June—it starts in the off-season . To truly beat the Oklahoma heat, you need to maintain your lawn year-round with proper treatments and care.

�� Key Year-Round Lawn Care Tips:
✅ Aerate in early spring – This allows air, water, and nutrients to reach the roots.
✅ Use pest control as needed – Prevent insects from damaging your lawn.
✅ Fertilize strategically – Avoid over-fertilizing in extreme heat.
✅ Overseed in the fall – This helps create a thicker, healthier lawn.

�� Watch our expert lawn care guide on YouTube for more year-round maintenance tips! M&D Enterprises YouTube

Get the Right Equipment for a Lush Lawn! ��

Having the right tools makes all the difference. At M&D Enterprises , we offer a wide selection of top-quality mowers , trimmers , and lawn care equipment to help you keep your yard in top shape all year long.

�� Call us today at 580-886-2345 to learn more about the best equipment for your lawn!

�� Visit one of our five locations across NW Oklahoma for expert advice and hands-on demos.

�� Explore our selection of lawn equipment online: M&D Enterprises Lawn Care

Final Thoughts

With these expert tips, you can keep your lawn green and healthy , even in the harsh Oklahoma summer . Remember: proper watering , routine mowing , sharp blades, and year-round care are the keys to success!

�� Need more lawn care tips? Check out our blog for expert advice on everything from choosing the best mower to aeration techniques .

�� Don’t forget to subscribe to our YouTube channel for the latest lawn care and equipment tips! M&D Enterprises YouTube

Grill or Spend? Enter to Win a 22” Blackstone or $250 to Use In-Store!

Markf@mowersok.com (Mark Fuqua) — Sat, 01 Mar 2025 18:51:01 GMT

M&D Enterprises Giveaway –

Pick Your Prize

At M&D Enterprises, we appreciate our customers, and we’re excited to give you the chance to win a great prize of your choice.

Choose Between:

A 22” Blackstone Griddle – A high-quality grill for cooking wherever you go.

$250 in M&D Store Credit – Use it toward anything in our store, from grills and mowers to backyard essentials.

How to Enter:

Simply fill out the form above to secure your chance to win.

Entry Deadline: Drawing to be held in late April!

Don’t miss this opportunity. Enter now for your chance to win.

Why A Derksen Is Perfect For Your Backyard

Mon, 24 Feb 2025 17:15:54 GMT

The Ultimate Guide to Derksen Portable Buildings: Endless Possibilities for Your Space

Looking for a high-quality, versatile portable building? Derksen Buildings have been the gold standard in portable structures since 1995! Crafted with traditional Mennonite craftsmanship , these buildings are not only durable but also provide endless possibilities for storage , workspace , and even living spaces .

Whether you need extra storage , a workshop , or a cozy retreat in your backyard , Derksen Portable Buildings are designed to meet a variety of needs. In this guide, we'll explore the many ways you can use a Derksen building , the customization options available, and how to get started with your own.

�� Looking for more storage solutions? Check out our blog on portable storage buildings .

What Can You Do With a Derksen Portable Building?

1. Storage Made Simple

One of the most popular uses for a Derksen building is storage . Whether you need to organize tools , seasonal decorations, or lawn equipment , Derksen offers customizable loft options to maximize space. A loft gives you extra overhead storage, keeping your floor space open and clutter-free.

Key Features:
✅ Lofted storage for more space
✅ High-quality materials for durability
✅ Available in various sizes to fit your needs

�� Pro Tip: Pair your portable building with a Cub Cadet mower from M&D Enterprises to keep your lawn looking pristine!

2. The Perfect Workshop for DIY Mechanics

If you love working on cars, ATVs , or other projects, a Derksen workshop is the perfect solution! These buildings come with optional workbenches and pegboards , giving you a dedicated space to keep tools organized and your projects on track.

Why Choose a Derksen for Your Workshop?
✔️ Workbench options for easy assembly & repairs
✔️ Pegboard walls to keep tools within reach
✔️ Spacious interiors for multiple projects

�� Watch our videos on YouTube for more garage and workshop organization tips! M&D Enterprises YouTube Channel

3. A Customizable Tiny Home Option

With housing prices soaring, tiny homes have become more popular than ever. Did you know that Derksen portable buildings can be converted into fully functional homes ? With sizes reaching up to 16x50 feet , you can design your dream home at a fraction of the cost of a traditional house .

�� Customization Options:
✅ Insulation & drywall for a cozy interior
✅ Electrical packages available
✅ Various styles & layouts to suit your vision

�� Thinking about a portable cabin? Check out our guide on custom portable buildings .

4. A Secure Garage for Your Vehicles & Toys

Need a portable garage for your car, ATV , golf cart , or mower ? Derksen's portable garages are the perfect solution for secure, weather-resistant storage . Unlike traditional garages, these can be easily moved to a different location if needed!

�� Why Choose a Derksen Garage ?
✔️ Heavy-duty construction for durability
✔️ Roll-up garage doors for easy access
✔️ Available in multiple sizes to fit your equipment

�� Pair your new garage with the best mowers on the market! Learn about our most popular mowers here .

5. The Ultimate Man Cave or She-Shed

Looking for a private retreat to unwind, watch the big game, or just relax? A Derksen building can be transformed into the perfect man cave or she-shed! With customizable electrical packages , you can add lighting, TVs, sound systems, and more .

�� Creative Uses for Your Backyard Retreat:

Home theater or gaming room ��
Home bar or lounge ��
Crafting or hobby studio ��

�� Subscribe out our YouTube channel for more ideas of what to do with your

Derksen building ! M&D Enterprises YouTube

6. Your Dream Art Studio or Office Space

Artists, crafters, and remote workers can all benefit from a dedicated workspace free from distractions. A Derksen portable building can be customized into the perfect art studio, office, or creative space .

✏️ Why It’s the Perfect Choice:
✅ Natural lighting with optional windows
✅ Insulation & climate control options
✅ Quiet, private space for focus & creativity

Customize Your Derksen Building

One of the biggest advantages of a Derksen Portable Building is its customization options . You can design your ideal space by selecting from:

�� Exterior Options: Wood, metal, urethane finishes
�� Size Ranges: Compact 8x12 to spacious 16x50
⚡ Electrical Packages: Lighting and outlets
�� Interior Features: Lofts, workbenches, insulation

Want to see customization options in person? Stop by any M&D Enterprises location for expert advice!

Get Your Derksen Portable Building Today!

Whether you need extra storage , a home office , workshop , or a tiny home , Derksen Portable Buildings provide the ultimate flexibility, durability, and affordability .

�� Call us today at 580-886-2345 or visit our website to browse available models! M&D Enterprises Portable Buildings

�� Visit one of our five locations across NW Oklahoma to see our selection in person!

�� Don’t forget to check out our YouTube channel for more ideas on how to use and customize your Derksen Portable Building! M&D Enterprises YouTube

Entrees: Traeger Party Ribs

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Thu, 20 Feb 2025 20:38:10 GMT

Traeger Party Ribs

These party ribs are packed with flavor worth celebrating. This recipe is a cross between ribs and burnt ends—giving you deep, sweet flavor with crispy caramelized edges. The secret is cooking the ribs individually on your pellet grill for faster cooking—about half the time of regular rib racks. They’re also easier to serve as finger food at, you guessed it, a party.

Prep Time

15 Min

Cook Time

2 Hr

30 Min

Pellets

Meat Church

Ingredients

2 racks St. Louis-style pork ribs

Meat Church Hickory All-Purpose BBQ Rub or other favorite BBQ rub

4 Ounce unsalted butter, cut into pieces

1/2 Cup light brown sugar

1/2 Cup agave syrup or honey

Traeger Texas Spicy BBQ Sauce or barbecue sauce of choice

Steps

Trim away any excess fat from the rib racks. (For this speedy preparation, there’s no need to remove the membrane.) Cut between the bones to make individual ribs.

Season the ribs on all sides with the BBQ Rub. Let sit for 15 minutes and up to an hour at room temperature to allow the seasoning to adhere.

Preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 275°F.

275 ˚F / 135 ˚C

Place the ribs directly on the grill grate meaty side up and cook until the ribs reach an internal temperature of 170°F on an instant-read meat thermometer, about 90 minutes. The time will vary depending on the size of the ribs, the weather, and your grill.

Transfer the ribs to a large pan such as a disposable foil roasting pan or a rimmed baking sheet. Add the butter, sugar, and agave. Then add enough BBQ sauce to coat the ribs well, at least ½ cup and up to 1 cup. Mix and toss the ribs well to evenly coat.

Cover the pan with foil and place it on the grill grate. Continue cooking the ribs until tender with an internal temperature of about 207°F, another 30 to 45 minutes.

275 ˚F / 135 ˚C

03:27

Toss the ribs once more with the sauce, transfer to a serving platter, and let them rest briefly before serving. Enjoy!

Click here to check out our traeger lineup!!

How To Grow Healthy Grass This Season

Thu, 20 Feb 2025 16:49:27 GMT

The Ultimate Guide to Growing the Best Grass This Season

A lush, green lawn doesn’t happen by chance—it’s the result of strategic care, the right techniques , and a little bit of patience. Whether you're dealing with patchy spots , weeds, or just want your yard to stand out, this guide will walk you through everything you need to know to grow the healthiest, most vibrant grass this season.

1. Choose the Right Grass for Your Climate

Not all grass types thrive in every region. The first step to a healthy lawn is selecting the right seed.

Cool-season grasses (Kentucky bluegrass, fescue, ryegrass) are best for northern climates.
Warm-season grasses (Bermuda, Zoysia, St. Augustine) thrive in southern regions.
Transition-zone grasses (Tall fescue) work well in areas with both hot summers and cold winters .

�� Need help choosing? Visit M&D Enterprises for expert advice on seed selection!

2. Prep Your Soil for Success

Grass needs nutrient-rich soil to grow strong and lush. Start with a soil test to determine pH levels and nutrient deficiencies.

Aim for a soil pH between 6.0 and 7.0 .
Add lime to raise pH or sulfur to lower it.
Mix in compost or organic matter to improve soil health.

Pro Tip: Aerating your soil before planting allows better water and nutrient absorption, leading to stronger roots.

3. Overseed Bare Spots for a Full Lawn

If your lawn has thin areas or bare patches , overseeding is key.

Mow your grass short and remove debris.
Spread high-quality grass seed evenly over problem areas.
Water daily until seeds establish (usually 10–14 days ).

4. Master the Art of Watering

Watering your lawn correctly makes all the difference.

Deep, infrequent watering (1–1.5 inches per week) promotes deep root growth.
Water early in the morning to minimize evaporation.
Avoid watering in the evening to prevent disease.

5. Fertilize Smartly

A well-fed lawn is a healthy lawn.

Use a slow-release fertilizer in early spring and late fall.
Apply nitrogen-rich fertilizer for vibrant green color.
Organic options , like compost tea or mulched grass clippings , work great too!

6. Keep Weeds & Pests at Bay

Weeds and pests can quickly take over if left unchecked.

Apply pre-emergent herbicides in early spring to prevent weed growth.
Use spot treatments for existing weeds .
Keep your lawn healthy—thick grass naturally chokes out weeds.

�� Browse M&D Enterprises for the best weed and pest control solutions!

7. Mow the Right Way

Mowing might seem simple, but doing it incorrectly can damage your grass.

Keep mower blades sharp for a clean cut.
Follow the 1/3 rule —never cut more than one-third of the grass blade at a time.
Mow at the right height (usually 2.5–4 inches , depending on the grass type).

�� Want to mow like a pro? Learn about striping techniques for a professional finish!

8. Mulch or Bag? Make the Right Choice

Mulching recycles nutrients back into your lawn.
Bagging is better if weeds or disease are present.
Consider a combination approach based on your lawn’s needs.

9. Protect Your Lawn from Heavy Foot Traffic

Too much foot traffic can compact soil and damage grass.

Add stepping stones or mulch pathways in high-traffic areas.
Rotate play areas to prevent overuse.
Aerate annually to relieve soil compaction.

10. Stay Consistent for Long-Term Success

A thriving lawn requires regular care . Stick to a schedule for watering , fertilizing , and mowing , and you’ll see a major transformation!

�� Ready to grow the best grass this season? Visit M&D Enterprises for expert lawn care solutions, or check out our latest YouTube tutorials for even more tips!

How to Stripe Your Lawn Like a Pro: A Step-by-Step Guide

Wed, 19 Feb 2025 00:34:53 GMT

Transform Your Yard with These Lawn Striping Techniques

Achieving a professionally striped lawn can significantly enhance your yard 's visual appeal, making it the envy of the neighborhood. This guide will walk you through the steps to create those coveted stripes, ensuring your lawn stands out this season.

Understanding Lawn Striping

Lawn striping is a mowing technique that bends grass blades in varying directions, reflecting light differently to produce a striped pattern. This effect is commonly seen on sports fields and golf courses but is achievable in residential lawns with the right approach.

Essential Tools for Lawn Striping

To begin striping your lawn, gather the following tools:

Lawn Mower with Roller Attachment : A roller attachment bends the grass blades effectively. Many mowers can be fitted with aftermarket rollers designed for striping.
String or Chalk Line : Useful for marking straight lines as a reference during mowing.
Measuring Tape : Ensures consistent stripe widths across your lawn.

Steps to Stripe Your Lawn

Mow the Perimeter : Start by mowing around the edges of your lawn to establish a clean boundary.
Plan Your Pattern : Decide on the stripe direction—typically, stripes are mowed parallel to a straight edge like a driveway.
Mow the First Stripe : Align your mower with your starting point and mow in a straight line across the lawn. Use a string or chalk line for guidance if necessary.
Create Adjacent Stripes : At the end of the first stripe, turn the mower and mow the next stripe adjacent to the previous one, ensuring the grass bends in the opposite direction.
Repeat the Process : Continue mowing back and forth across the lawn, maintaining straight lines and consistent stripe widths.

Final Perimeter Pass : After completing the stripes, mow around the perimeter once more to clean up any uneven edges .

Tips for Enhanced Striping

Mow When Grass is Dry : Dry grass bends more easily, resulting in more pronounced stripes.
Maintain Sharp Blades : Sharp mower blades ensure clean cuts, promoting healthy grass and better striping.
Vary Patterns Regularly : Changing your mowing pattern prevents soil compaction and encourages upright grass growth.
Use High-Quality Equipment : Investing in a reliable mower and roller attachment can make a significant difference in the quality of your lawn stripes.

Recommended Equipment

For optimal results, consider using mowers designed for precision and ease of use. At M&D Enterprises , we offer a range of high-quality mowers suitable for creating professional-looking lawn stripes. Explore our selection to find the perfect fit for your lawn care needs.

Additional Resources

For a visual demonstration of our products, more information, and for some entertaining content subscribe to our youtube :

By following these steps and utilizing the right tools, you can transform your lawn into a beautifully striped masterpiece that enhances your home's curb appeal.

The Ultimate Guide To Derksen Buildings

Mon, 17 Feb 2025 20:23:36 GMT

The Ultimate Guide to Derksen Portable Buildings: Types & Customization Options

When it comes to high-quality, versatile storage solutions, Derksen Portable Buildings set the standard. Whether you need a backyard shed , a cozy cabin , or a functional workspace , Derksen offers a variety of portable buildings that can be customized to meet your specific needs. In this guide, we’ll explore the different types of Derksen buildings and the customization options available, helping you find the perfect structure for your home or business.

Why Choose Derksen Portable Buildings?

Types of Derksen Portable Buildings

1. Lofted Barns

2. Utility Sheds

3. Cabins & Cabin Shells

4. Garages

5. Greenhouses

6. Playhouses & Tiny Homes

Customization Options: Design Your Perfect Building

One of the best features of Derksen Portable Buildings is the ability to customize your structure to fit your needs. Here are some of the options available:

�� Size & Layout: Choose from compact storage sheds to spacious cabins. �� Siding & Roofing: Select from metal or shingle roofing and a variety of siding materials. �� Doors & Windows: Upgrade with extra-wide doors, roll-up garage doors, or multiple windows for ventilation and natural light. �� Interior Features: Add shelving, lofts, electrical packages, insulation, or even a fully finished interior. �� Color Choices: Match your building to your home with a variety of exterior color options.

Find Your Perfect Derksen Building at M&D Enterprises

At M&D Enterprises , we proudly offer a wide range of Derksen Portable Buildings with customizable options to fit your lifestyle. Whether you need a backyard shed , workshop , or tiny home , we can help you design the perfect structure.

�� Have questions? Give us a call at (580) 886-2345 or visit one of our five locations across NW Oklahoma to see these high-quality buildings in person!

�� Want to see more? Check out our latest videos on YouTube to get a closer look at the customization options available!

Upgrade your space with a Derksen Portable Building today!

Get To Know The Cub Cadet Ultima ZTXS Family

Thu, 13 Feb 2025 19:43:32 GMT

Discover the Power of Cub Cadet Ultima ZTXS Series: The Ultimate Zero-Turn Mowers

Looking for a high-quality mower built in the United States since the 1960s? Look no further than the newest Cub Cadet Ultima ZTXS series . This line offers three different models, each customizable to fit your lawn care needs. Whether you're tackling residential or commercial mowing, these mowers bring innovation, power, and ease of use to your yard maintenance routine.

What Makes the Ultima ZTXS Series Stand Out?

Synchro-Steer Technology: Precision Meets Control

One of the first things you'll notice about these mowers is that they feature a steering wheel instead of lap bars —yet they are still zero-turn mowers! This is made possible by Synchro-Steer® Technology , which provides full control of all four wheels, reducing turf damage and offering unmatched stability on slopes. This feature allows you to maneuver with confidence while maintaining the traditional benefits of a zero-turn mower.

�� Check out our YouTube channel for videos showcasing Cub Cadet mowers in action!

Explore the Cub Cadet Ultima ZTXS Series Models

1. Ultima ZTXS4 : A Powerhouse for Any Yard

This entry-level model in the series delivers robust performance with three different deck sizes and two engine options:

48" deck – 23HP/725cc Kohler Pro 7000 Series (KT730) Engine
54" deck – 24HP/725cc Kohler Pro 7000 Series (KT735) Engine
60" deck – 24HP/725cc Kohler Pro 7000 Series (KT735) Engine

Key Features: ✔ Hydro-Gear ZT 3100 Transmission for smooth operation ✔ Up to 8 MPH forward / 3.5 MPH reverse speeds ✔ 10-gauge steel deck with 2-gauge reinforcement for durability ✔ High-back 20" seat for all-day comfort ✔ LED headlights for extended mowing hours

2. Ultima ZTXS5 : Upgraded Power & Durability

For those seeking a little more power, the ZTXS5 steps it up with commercial-grade upgrades and additional mowing capabilities:

54" deck – 25HP/747cc Kohler Confidant ZT740 V-Twin OHV Engine
60" deck – 25HP/747cc Kohler Confidant ZT740 V-Twin OHV Engine

Upgraded Features Include: ✔ Hydro-Gear ZT 3200 Transmission for enhanced performance ✔ Up to 8.5 MPH forward / 3.5 MPH reverse speeds ✔ Heavy-duty 1.5” x 3” tubular steel frame for maximum durability ✔ Triple Guard Corrosion Defense System for long-lasting protection

3. Ultima ZTXS6 : The Ultimate Mowing Machine

I f you want the top-tier model in the Ultima series, the ZTXS6 delivers the most power and premium features:

60" deck – 25.5HP/852cc Kawasaki FX801 V-Twin OHV Engine

Why Choose the ZTXS6? ✔ Hydro-Gear ZT 3400 Charged Transmission for elite performance ✔ Up to 9 MPH forward / 3.5 MPH reverse speeds ✔ High-performance Kawasaki engine for superior power & smooth operation

Why Buy from M&D Enterprises?

At M&D Enterprises , we take pride in offering top-of-the-line equipment to keep your lawn looking its best. When you choose us, you get: ✅ Expert advice & product knowledge to help find the right mower for you ✅ Multiple locations across NW Oklahoma for easy shopping ✅ Financing options available to fit your budget

�� Call us at (580) 886-2345 or visit one of our five locations today!

�� Want to see these mowers in action? Subscribe to our YouTube channel for the latest demos and reviews!

ENTREES: BLACKSTONE NY STRIPS & TERIYAKI GREEN BEANS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Thu, 13 Feb 2025 18:45:00 GMT

BLACKSTONE NY STRIPS & TERIYAKI GREEN BEANS

Elevate dinner with juicy NY Strip steak and flavorful teriyaki green beans, perfectly seared on your Blackstone! Simple, bold, and delicious—a restaurant-quality meal at home!

Servings

Prep Time

10 minutes

Cook Time

15-20 minutes

Ingredients

1-inch-thick New York Strip steaks

High Plains Steak Seasoning

Avocado oil

String beans

Teriyaki sauce

Sliced almonds

Shredded carrots

Chopped walnuts

Chow mein noodles

Directions

1. Preheat the right burner of the griddle to medium-high heat and the left burner to high heat. Place the string beans on the right side of the griddle. Add a generous squirt of water to help steam the beans, then cover with a basting dome for even cooking.

2. Season the steaks generously with High Plains Steak Seasoning and coat them with avocado oil. Place the steaks on the left side of the griddle and press them down to achieve a perfect sear. Cook for 4-5 minutes, then flip the steaks.

3. Toss the string beans on the griddle, then add more water if needed. Cover again with the basting dome and cook for an additional 3-4 minutes. Remove the cooked string beans from the griddle and place them in a bowl. Mix the beans with teriyaki sauce, sliced almonds, chopped walnuts, shredded carrots, and chow mein noodles.

4. Remove the steaks from the griddle and let them rest for 5-8 minutes to retain their juices. Plate the steaks and teriyaki string beans. Eat and enjoy!

click here to check out our blackstone lineup!

Protect Your Lawn from Foot Traffic: 8 Tips for a Lush Yard This Spring & Summer

Tue, 11 Feb 2025 23:02:21 GMT

How Foot Traffic Affects Your Yard & Tips for a Lush Lawn This Spring & Summer

Your lawn is more than just a patch of grass—it's a gathering place for family barbecues , games of catch, and relaxing evenings outdoors . However, heavy foot traffic can take a serious toll on your yard, leading to compacted soil, thinning grass, and unsightly brown patches . The good news? With a little care and strategic planning, you can keep your lawn looking its best, even during the busiest seasons.

The Impact of Foot Traffic on Your Yard

1. Soil Compaction

Constant walking or playing on your lawn presses down on the soil, making it difficult for air, water, and nutrients to reach the grassroots. This leads to weak grass growth and an unhealthy lawn .

2. Thinning Grass & Bare Patches

Frequent foot traffic wears down grass blades and weakens their roots. This often results in thin areas and bare spots , especially along common walking paths or high-traffic areas.

3. Weakened Root System

A compacted and stressed lawn leads to shallow roots , making it more difficult for your grass to absorb water and nutrients . This makes your yard more vulnerable to drought, heat stress, and pests.

Tips for Growing a Lush Lawn This Spring & Summer

1. Aerate Your Lawn

Aeration helps break up compacted soil, allowing air, water, and nutrients to reach the roots. Spring is the perfect time to aerate , giving your lawn the best chance to thrive.

�� Learn more about lawn care tools at M&D Enterprises .

2. Reseed Bare Spots

If foot traffic has caused bald patches, overseeding can help fill them in. Choose a high-quality grass seed that matches your existing lawn and keep it well-watered until it establishes.

3. Fertilize for Strong Growth

A well-fed lawn is more resistant to damage from traffic. Use a balanced, slow-release fertilizer to promote thick, healthy growth and deep roots.

4. Create Walkways

Direct foot traffic away from vulnerable areas by adding stepping stones, mulch paths, or pavers. This helps prevent excessive wear on the grass while enhancing your yard's aesthetic appeal.

5. Water Deeply & Consistently

Instead of frequent shallow watering , aim for deep soakings 1-2 times per week. This encourages deep root growth, making your grass more resilient.

6. Mow Properly

Avoid cutting your grass too short, as longer blades provide more shade to the soil, reducing evaporation and weed growth. Set your mower to the correct height based on your grass type.

7. Use Foot Traffic-Resistant Grass

Consider planting durable grass varieties like Bermuda, Kentucky bluegrass, or tall fescue in high-traffic areas. These grasses recover quickly and can handle more wear.

8. Add Protective Barriers

If certain areas of your lawn see excessive foot traffic, consider adding small fences, hedges, or decorative borders to redirect movement and give the grass a chance to recover.

Spring & Summer Lawn Care Made Easy

Taking proactive steps to protect your yard from foot traffic will ensure a beautiful, thriving lawn all season long. Need the right equipment to get started? Check out our selection of lawn care tools at M&D Enterprises .

For more lawn care tips , watch our latest videos on YouTube !

Get your yard in top shape for spring and summer—your grass will thank you!

What To Know About Our Insulated Well Houses

Mon, 10 Feb 2025 16:54:21 GMT

Protect Your Water Supply Year-Round with M&D’s Insulated Well Houses

If you rely on a well for your water supply, protecting it from the elements is essential. At M&D Enterprises , we provide high-quality insulated well houses designed to safeguard your well components from freezing temperatures, pests, and harsh weather conditions. Whether you’re dealing with Oklahoma’s unpredictable winters or just want to extend the lifespan of your well system, our insulated well houses are the perfect solution.

Why Choose an Insulated Well House?

A well house does more than just cover your pump and pressure tank—it insulates and protects them from freezing, ensuring uninterrupted water flow even in the coldest months. Here are the top benefits:

✅ Freeze Protection – Proper insulation prevents costly damage to pipes and well components. ✅ Durability – Built to withstand harsh weather conditions, our well houses are a long-term investment.
✅ Pest Resistance – Keep rodents, insects, and other critters away from your well system.
✅ Easy Access – Convenient design allows for maintenance without hassle.
✅ Temperature Control – Optional space heaters ensure your system stays functional in extreme cold.

M&D Enterprises: Insulated Well Houses Built to Last

Our insulated well houses are constructed with high-quality materials that provide superior protection for your well. Each unit is designed with heavy-duty insulation to maintain a consistent temperature, reducing the risk of freezing and damage.

�� Explore our Insulated Well Houses

Key Features of Our Insulated Well Houses

1️⃣ Heavy-Duty Construction – Made with durable materials to last for years. 2️⃣ Thick Insulation – Ensures your well and plumbing are protected in any season.

3️⃣ Variety of Sizes – Whether you have a small residential setup or a larger well system, we offer multiple sizes to fit your needs.

4️⃣ Optional Heating Options – Add a space heater for extra protection in extreme cold conditions.

5️⃣ Easy Installation – Our well houses are designed for quick and simple setup.

How an Insulated Well House Saves You Money

Investing in an insulated well house prevents expensive repairs caused by frozen pipes or pump failures. A well-insulated enclosure maintains a stable temperature, reducing the need for excessive heating and lowering energy costs.

Check out our YouTube channel for videos showcasing our all of our products!

Order Your Insulated Well House Today!

Don’t wait until freezing temperatures threaten your water supply. Protect your well system today with a top-quality insulated well house from M&D Enterprises .

�� Browse Our Selection

Have questions? Contact us at (580) 886-2345 or visit one of our locations to speak with an expert. Let M&D Enterprises help you keep your water flowing year-round!

APPETIZER: TRAEGER CHEESEBURGER DIP

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 07 Feb 2025 17:42:28 GMT

TRAEGER CHEESEBURGER DIP

Hold the bun. In this genius creation, the fast-food classic gets turned into a hearty cheeseburger dip perfect for game day or any time you crave beefy cheese flavor.

Prep Time

25 Min

Cook Time

15 Min

Pellets

Mesquite

INGREDIENTS

Dip

2 Pound ground beef, preferably 80% lean

1 Medium yellow onion, chopped

4 garlic cloves, minced

2 Tablespoon Traeger Burger Rub

2 Tablespoon Worcestershire sauce

1 Pound Velveeta cheese, cut into cubes

8 Ounce cheddar cheese, shredded

1/4 Cup ketchup

1/4 Cup mayonnaise

2 Tablespoon Traeger Original Hot Sauce

Topping

1 plum tomato, diced

1/4 Cup diced yellow onion

1/4 Cup diced dill pickle

1 Tablespoon dill pickle brine

Steps

Preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 350°F; this will take about 10 minutes.

350 ˚F / 177 ˚C

Heat large cast iron skillet over medium heat. Add the ground beef and cook, stirring occasionally and breaking it up with a wooden spoon, until browned and cooked through, 5 to 7 minutes. With a slotted spoon and leaving any fat behind in the skillet, transfer the meat to a bowl and set aside.

Add the onion to the skillet and cook, stirring occasionally, until tender, about 5 minutes. Add the garlic and stir to combine. Cook until fragrant, about 1 minute. Return the ground beef to the skillet, then add the Burger Rub, Worcestershire, Velveeta, cheddar, ketchup, mayonnaise, and hot sauce. Cook, stirring, until the Velveeta has begun to melt.

Smooth out the dip and place the skillet directly on the grill grate. Bake until the cheese is fully melted and bubbling, 15 to 20 minutes.

350 ˚F / 177 ˚C

00:15

While the dip cooks, combine the topping ingredients in a small bowl.

Transfer the dip to a heatproof surface and top with the topping mixture. Serve with chips or veggies of your choice. Enjoy!

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR TRAEGER LINEUP!!

SunFire Heaters: The Ultimate Heating Solution

Fri, 07 Feb 2025 02:14:45 GMT

Clean, Quiet, and Odorless Heat for Any Space

When it comes to efficient and reliable heating solutions for your workspace, SunFire Heaters stand out as a top choice. Designed for both indoor and outdoor use, these heaters offer a clean, quiet, and odorless heating experience, making them ideal for various settings such as workshops , garages , pole barns , and job sites.

Key Features of SunFire Heaters :

Quiet Operation: Unlike traditional forced-air heaters, SunFire Heaters operate with minimal noise, ensuring a peaceful environment.
Clean and Odorless: Thanks to advanced burner technology, these heaters provide a pure, smokeless flame, eliminating unpleasant odors and fumes.
Rugged Durability: Constructed with heavy-duty steel, SunFire Heaters are built to withstand demanding conditions, ensuring long-lasting performance.

Popular SunFire Heater Models:

SF80 Radiant Heater: With 80,000 BTUs, this model heats up to 1,900 square feet and features a 6-gallon tank for up to 10 hours of runtime.

SF120 Radiant Heater: Delivering 120,000 BTUs, it covers areas up to 2,800 square feet and boasts a 14-gallon tank, allowing for up to 16 hours of continuous operation.

SF150 Radiant Heater: The most powerful in the lineup, this heater offers 150,000 BTUs, providing robust heating capabilities for larger spaces.

Applications of SunFire Heaters:

Construction Sites: Ideal for warming areas during building projects.
Auto Shops: Perfect for maintaining comfortable temperatures for both employees and equipment.
Agriculture: Suitable for heating equipment and livestock areas .
Outdoor Events: Provides effective heating for various outdoor activities.

For more information on SunFire Heaters and to explore purchasing options, visit any one of our 5 locations or call us at (580)886-2345

Additionally, check out our blog for more insights on heating solutions and our other products.

For a visual and entertaining look at our other products check out our youtube channel here at: www.youtube.com/@MDenterprisesOK

Find Your Perfect Greenhouse for Peace and Production

Markf@mowersok.com (Mark Fuqua) — Thu, 06 Feb 2025 20:19:49 GMT

From Backyard Boredom to Blooming Success: Discover the Joy of Greenhouse Gardening

Have you ever looked at your neighbor's vibrant garden and wished you had a green thumb too? Many people dream of growing their own fruits, vegetables, and flowers, but the reality of unpredictable weather and limited growing seasons can be discouraging.

Enter the greenhouse! This amazing structure can transform your gardening experience, allowing you to grow a wider variety of plants year-round, regardless of the weather outside.

In this video, you'll meet Jane, a homeowner who discovered the joys of greenhouse gardening. Inspired by her neighbor's flourishing garden, Jane decided to take the plunge and invest in a greenhouse.

Why Choose a Greenhouse?

Extended Growing Season: Grow fresh produce even in the coldest months.

Protection from the Elements: Shield your plants from harsh weather like frost, rain, and strong winds.

Pest and Disease Control: Create a controlled environment to minimize the impact of pests and diseases.

Increased Variety: Grow a wider range of plants, including tropical and exotic species.

For more information on greenhouse gardening, check out these helpful resources:

View another brief blog and see a video on a greenhouse we sold several years ago in use in Kingfisher:

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/need-a-green-house-check-out-texwin

#greenhouse #gardening #backyardgardening #homegardening #growingplants #gardeningtips #gardeninginspiration #greenhousebenefits

#DIY #homegrown

Find Your Perfect Chicken Coop

Markf@mowersok.com (Mark Fuqua) — Thu, 06 Feb 2025 20:07:48 GMT

Discover the Perfect Chicken Coop for Your Family's Journey to Self-Sustainability

Are you dreaming of fresh, farm-to-table eggs right from your backyard? Embarking on the path to self-sustainability is a rewarding adventure, and choosing the right chicken coop is a crucial first step.

In our latest video, we follow a family's quest to find the ideal chicken coop that meets their needs for safety, durability, and comfort for their feathered friends. Their journey is filled with insights and tips that can guide you in making the best choice for your own backyard.

Watch the full video here:

https://youtu.be/FPYimuRREg4

Why Invest in a Quality Chicken Coop?

Protection from Predators: A sturdy coop keeps your chickens safe from potential threats.

Weather Resistance: Ensure your coop can withstand various weather conditions, keeping your flock comfortable year-round.

Ease of Maintenance: A well-designed coop simplifies cleaning and egg collection, making your daily routine more efficient.

At M&D Enterprises, we offer a range of high-quality chicken coops designed to meet these needs and more. Our coops are built with durability and functionality in mind, ensuring a happy and healthy environment for your chickens.

Explore Our Chicken Coops:

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/Products#ChickenCoops

Join the Self-Sustainability Movement

Raising chickens not only provides a source of fresh eggs but also brings joy and educational opportunities for the whole family. It's a step towards a more sustainable lifestyle, fostering a deeper connection with nature.

If you're considering starting your own backyard flock or upgrading your current setup, our video offers valuable insights to help you make an informed decision. Don't miss out on this inspiring journey to find the perfect chicken coop!

Watch Now:

https://youtu.be/FPYimuRREg4

For more information on our products and to read customer testimonials, visit our website:

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/Big-Creek-Chicken-Coops

Embark on your self-sustainability journey today with M&D Enterprises—your trusted partner in quality backyard solutions.

View another brief blog on Chicken Coops here: https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/eggsquisite-living-unveiling-the-charm-and-functionality-of-our-stylish-chicken-coops

#chickens #chickencoop #chickenhouse #Sustainability #farmfressheggs #homegrown #eggs

8 Must-Know Tips for Launching a Profitable Lawn Care Business

Wed, 05 Feb 2025 21:55:02 GMT

From Grass to Green: 8 Essential Steps to Lawn Care Business Success

Starting a lawn care business can be a rewarding venture, offering the opportunity to work outdoors, be your own boss, and cultivate a thriving enterprise. To set yourself up for success, consider these eight crucial tips:

1. Obtain Necessary Licenses and Insurance

Ensure your business operates legally by acquiring the appropriate licenses and insurance. This may include a business license, environmental permits for pesticide use, and liability insurance to protect against potential risks. Consult your local Department of Agriculture for specific requirements in your area.

2. Define Your Services and Pricing

Clearly outline the lawn care services you will offer, such as mowing , fertilization, or landscaping . Establish a pricing structure that reflects the value of your work and aligns with market rates. This clarity helps attract clients and sets expectations.

3. Invest in Quality Equipment

Reliable, high-quality equipment is essential for efficient operations and delivering professional results. Consider investing in commercial-grade mowers , trimmers , and safety gear to ensure durability and safety.

4. Develop a Marketing Strategy

Promote your business through various channels, including social media , local advertising, and word-of-mouth referrals. Encourage satisfied clients to leave positive reviews and recommend your services to others. A strong online presence can significantly boost your client base.

5. Provide Exceptional Customer Service

Building strong relationships with clients through excellent customer service can lead to repeat business and referrals. Communicate effectively, be punctual, and consistently deliver high-quality work to foster trust and satisfaction.

6. Manage Finances Diligently

Keep accurate financial records, monitor expenses, and set competitive yet profitable pricing. Consider using accounting software to streamline invoicing and financial management.

7. Plan Efficient Service Routes

Organize your service routes to minimize travel time and fuel costs. Grouping clients by geographic location enhances efficiency and allows you to serve more clients in less time.

8. Stay Informed and Adaptable

Stay updated on industry trends, new technologies, and best practices in lawn care . Being adaptable and continuously improving your services will keep you competitive in the market.

By following these tips, you can establish a strong foundation for a successful lawn care business. Remember, dedication to quality service and continuous learning are key to long-term success.

For more insights and resources on lawn care and equipment, visit our blog .

Additionally, check out our video on starting a lawn care business:

5 Tips For Using A Generator Safely

Wed, 05 Feb 2025 17:17:18 GMT

5 Essential Tips for Using a Generator Safely

When storms roll in or power outages strike, a generator can be a lifesaver. But without proper use, it can also become a serious safety hazard. Whether you're using a generator for home backup, outdoor events, or job sites, following safety precautions is crucial to protect yourself and those around you. Here are five key tips to ensure you use your generator safely and efficiently.

1. Keep Generators Outside and Well-Ventilated

One of the most critical safety rules is never to run a generator indoors or in enclosed spaces like garages, basements, or sheds. Generators produce carbon monoxide (CO), a colorless, odorless gas that can be deadly in minutes. Always place your generator at least 20 feet away from doors, windows, and vents, ensuring proper airflow and ventilation.

Pro Tip: Use a battery-operated CO detector inside your home to alert you if dangerous fumes accumulate.

2. Use the Right Extension Cords and Connections

Using the wrong type of extension cord can lead to overheating and fire hazards. Always use heavy-duty, outdoor-rated extension cords with a sufficient wattage rating for your generator . Ensure they have a grounded three-prong plug and are free from damage or fraying.

If you’re connecting a generator to your home’s electrical system, use a transfer switch installed by a qualified electrician. Plugging a generator directly into a wall outlet (known as backfeeding) is extremely dangerous and can electrocute utility workers or cause fires.

3. Avoid Overloading the Generator

Every generator has a wattage limit, and exceeding that can damage both the generator and your appliances. Before starting your generator, calculate your power needs by adding up the wattage of the devices you plan to run. Prioritize essential appliances like refrigerators, lights, and medical devices.

Pro Tip: Start with the highest-wattage appliances first and then add smaller ones gradually to prevent overloading.

4. Refuel with Caution

Never refuel a running generato r! Hot engine parts can ignite fuel, causing severe burns or fires. Always turn off the generator and allow it to cool for at least 15 minutes before refueling. Store fuel in approved containers and keep them away from heat sources, open flames, and direct sunlight.

Safety Reminder: Use only fresh, stabilized fuel to prevent clogs and ensure your generator runs smoothly when needed.

Check out our battery powered EGO generators to avoid using fuel!

5. Perform Regular Maintenance and Storage Best Practices

Routine maintenance keeps your generator reliable during emergencies. Check the oil and filters regularly, inspect for loose or damaged parts, and run the generator every few months to keep it in good condition. When storing your generator long-term, drain the fuel or use a stabilizer to prevent gum buildup.

Pro Tip: Review your generator’s manual for specific maintenance recommendations and troubleshooting steps.

Check out this blog to learn more about out parts and service.

Stay Safe and Powered Up!

By following these essential safety tips, you can confidently use your generator without risks. Whether you're preparing for storm season, camping, or working on a project, practicing generator safety ensures reliable power without danger.

Looking for the right generator? Check out our selection of top-rated models or stop by M&D Enterprises to find the perfect fit for your needs!

Watch & Learn

Want to see these safety tips in action? Watch our latest generator safety video and subscribe for more expert tips!

Need more expert advice? Call us at (580) 886-2345 or visit our blog at M&D Enterprises for more lawn, home, and outdoor power equipment tips!

Lawn Care: Boost Your Home, Health, and Happiness!

Tue, 04 Feb 2025 15:01:21 GMT

The Surprising Benefits of a Well-Maintained Lawn

Lawn care is often seen as a chore, but what if we told you it’s more than just cutting grass? A healthy lawn enhances your home’s beauty, improves mental and physical health, increases property value, and even helps the environment. So before you put off mowing for another week, consider these benefits of a well-maintained yard!

1. Reduce Allergies

Did you know tall, uncut grass can be a major pollen producer? Many people associate allergies with flowers, but overgrown grass releases pollen that triggers sneezing and itchy eyes—especially on windy days. Keeping your lawn trimmed to about 1.5 to 2 inches can reduce pollen levels and make breathing easier. Just remember to take an allergy pill beforehand and shower afterward to remove pollen and dust!

2. Boost Mental Health

During the COVID-19 lockdowns, depression rates skyrocketed. One simple way to combat stress and boost your mood? Yard work! Mowing , planting, and tending to your lawn provide a sense of accomplishment and a reason to get outside. The fresh air and physical activity release endorphins, making you feel happier and more fulfilled.

3. Improve Physical Health

Think of lawn care as a built-in workout! Whether you’re pushing a mower , raking leaves, or pulling weeds, you’re engaging multiple muscle groups and burning calories. Regular yard work can improve cardiovascular health and keep you active—without the need for a gym membership.

4. Social & Community Benefits

A well-kept lawn isn’t just good for you—it benefits your neighborhood too! A lush, green lawn makes your home inviting, encouraging social interactions with neighbors. Hosting BBQs , playing with the kids, or simply enjoying an evening on the porch all become more enjoyable when your yard is well-maintained. Plus, studies show that well-landscaped neighborhoods promote happiness and a sense of trust among residents.

5. Increase Property Value

Thinking about selling your home? First impressions matter, and curb appeal can make or break a sale. A well-maintained lawn gives potential buyers confidence that the rest of the home is well cared for. In fact, homes with great landscaping can see a property value increase of up to 15%!

6. Lawn Care = Cleaner Air

Did you know grass produces more oxygen than trees? A well-maintained lawn acts as a natural air filter, absorbing carbon dioxide and releasing fresh oxygen. It also traps dust and pollutants, improving air quality for you and your family.

Ready to Transform Your Lawn?

Taking care of your lawn has endless benefits—from improving health to boosting your home's value. Need the right equipment to make lawn care easier? At M&D Enterprises , we carry top-quality lawn care tools .

�� Call us at (580) 886-2345 or visit M&D Enterprises for expert advice on keeping your lawn in top shape!

�� Check out our latest lawn care videos on YouTube:
�� M&D Enterprises YouTube Channel

The Different Options of EGO Mowers

Fri, 31 Jan 2025 20:56:00 GMT

Power, Performance, and Precision: The Ultimate Guide to EGO Battery-Powered Mowers

EGO Power+ has revolutionized lawn care with its innovative battery-powered mowers, offering a range of models to suit various yard sizes and user preferences. In this guide, we'll explore the different types of EGO mowers , highlighting their key features to help you make an informed decision for your lawn care needs.

1. EGO Power+ 21" Self-Propelled Mower

This model delivers the torque of gas without the noise, fuss, or fumes. It offers up to 60 minutes of runtime on a single charge with the recommended 56V 7.5Ah ARC Lithium™ battery. The variable speed self-propel feature allows you to adjust the mowing speed from 0.9 to 3.1 MPH, providing flexibility and ease of use. With six cutting height positions ranging from 1.5 to 4 inches, you can achieve the perfect cut for your lawn.

2. EGO Power+ 21" Select Cut™ Self-Propelled Mower

Equipped with the Select Cut™ Multi-Blade Cutting System, this mower includes three interchangeable lower blades: the Mulching Blade, High Lift Bagging Blade, and Extended Runtime Blade. This system allows you to customize your mowing experience, whether you prefer mulching, bagging, or extended runtime. The Touch Drive™ Self-Propelled Technology provides ultimate control, making lawn maintenance effortless.

3. EGO Power+ 22" Aluminum Deck Select Cut™ Self-Propelled Mower

For those seeking durability and performance, this mower features a 22" aluminum deck and delivers up to 11.1 foot-pounds of torque, surpassing the power of gas mowers. The Select Cut™ Multi-Blade System and self-propelled functionality ensure a high-quality mowing experience with minimal effort.

4. EGO Power+ 20" Self-Propelled Mower with Steel Deck

Combining strength and efficiency, this model boasts a 20" steel deck and a brushless motor, providing the torque of gas with a 60-minute run time. The variable-speed self-propelled feature allows for easy maneuverability, making it ideal for various lawn terrains.

5. EGO Power+ 42" T6 Riding Lawn Tractor

For larger lawns, the 42" T6 Riding Lawn Tractor offers a platform-compatible riding experience powered by the same 56V ARC Lithium™ batteries that power all EGO tools. This tractor provides the power and performance of gas without the associated noise and emissions, ensuring a comfortable and efficient mowing experience.

6. EGO Power+ 52" Z6 Zero Turn Riding Mower

Built with a 52" 10-gauge fabricated steel deck and reaching a top speed of 8 MPH, this zero-turn riding mower allows you to cover more ground faster. It's capable of cutting up to 4 acres on a single charge, making it perfect for expansive properties.

Choosing the Right EGO Mower for Your Lawn

When selecting an EGO mower , consider the following factors:

Lawn Size: For smaller to medium-sized lawns, a 21" or 22" self-propelled mower may suffice. Larger properties might benefit from the 42" or 52" riding mowers.
Terrain: Self-propelled mowers are ideal for hilly or uneven terrains, providing assistance in movement.
Cutting Preferences: If you prefer mulching, bagging, or require extended runtime, the Select Cut™ models offer customizable options to suit your needs.

For more insights and product demonstrations, visit M&D Enterprises' Blog and check out our YouTube Channel for in-depth reviews and how-to videos.

Upgrade your lawn care routine with EGO's innovative mowers and experience the convenience and efficiency of battery-powered equipment.

The Ultimate Guide to Derksen Portable Buildings:

Thu, 30 Jan 2025 17:56:00 GMT

Finding the Perfect Fit for Your Needs

When it comes to high-quality, durable, and versatile portable buildings, Derksen is a name that stands out. Whether you're looking for extra storage, a home office, a backyard workshop, or even a cozy cabin retreat, Derksen Portable Buildings offers a wide range of options to fit your needs. At M&D Enterprises , we proudly carry Derksen buildings and are here to help you choose the perfect one for your property.

Why Choose Derksen Portable Buildings?

Derksen has been a leader in the portable building industry for over 25 years, offering top-notch craftsmanship, customizable options, and flexible rent-to-own financing. These buildings are constructed with high-quality materials and are designed to last, making them a worthwhile investment for homeowners, businesses, and outdoor enthusiasts alike.

Types of Derksen Portable Buildings

Derksen offers a variety of styles to accommodate different needs. Let’s explore some of their most popular options:

1. Lofted Barns

Perfect for maximizing storage space, lofted barns feature an overhead loft area to store seasonal items, tools, and equipment without taking up valuable floor space. Available in standard and deluxe models , these barns are ideal for anyone needing extra room for organization.

2. Utility Sheds

If you're looking for a simple yet effective storage solution, the utility shed is a great choice. With straight walls and a traditional design, these sheds are perfect for lawn equipment, gardening tools, or even a small workspace.

3. Cabins

Dreaming of a weekend getaway spot? Derksen cabin s provide a cozy and functional retreat, perfect for hunting lodges, guest houses, or vacation rentals. Available in styles like the Side Cabin and the Lofted Barn Cabin , these buildings can be customized to fit your vision.

4. Cottage Sheds

For those who want a stylish yet practical storage solution, the cottage shed offers an attractive design with windows and a charming aesthetic. It’s a popular choice for she-sheds, home offices, or creative studios.

5. Garages

Need a secure place to store vehicles, ATVs, or motorcycles? Derksen portable garages come with heavy-duty floors and roll-up doors, providing excellent protection for your valuable items.

6. Playhouses

Give your kids a fun and safe outdoor play space with a Derksen playhouse. These charming buildings can also double as craft rooms, small offices, or hobby spaces.

Customization Options

One of the best things about Derksen Portable Buildings is their ability to be customized to your specific needs. Choose from a variety of sizes, colors, roof styles, and additional features like windows, shelving, and insulation. Whether you need a simple storage solution or a fully finished living space, Derksen allows you to create the perfect building for your property.

Why Buy From M&D Enterprises?

At M&D Enterprises , we are committed to helping you find the right portable building for your needs. We offer flexible financing options, including rent-to-own plans with no credit check. Plus, we handle delivery and setup, ensuring a hassle-free experience.

Watch & Learn More!

For an in-depth look at Derksen Portable Buildings, check out our latest video on our YouTube channel: M&D Enterprises YouTube. See these high-quality structures up close and discover how they can transform your outdoor space.

Explore More!

Want to learn more about other outdoor solutions? Visit our blog for expert insights on storage buildings, outdoor furniture, and lawn care tips: M&D Enterprises Blog .

Final Thoughts

Derksen Portable Buildings offer exceptional quality, durability, and customization to suit a variety of needs. Whether you're looking for extra storage, a home office, or a cabin retreat, M&D Enterprises has the perfect solution for you. Contact us today to explore your options and bring your vision to life!

A Guide To Some Popular Residential Mowers

Markf@mowersok.com (Mark Fuqua) — Wed, 29 Jan 2025 23:26:36 GMT

Click the link to view the data.

https://irp.cdn-website.com/5c0d5c90/files/uploaded/Mowing_Made_Easy__A_Guide_to_Top_Residential_Zero-Turn_Mowers.pdf

5 Small Things To Improve Your Yard

Wed, 29 Jan 2025 19:41:00 GMT

5 Keys to a Picture-Perfect Lawn

Want to have the best yard in your neighborhood? A lush, well-maintained lawn doesn’t have to be a dream! By following these five simple lawn care tips, you can transform your yard into the envy of the block.

1. Striping – Achieve That Professional Look

If you've ever admired the pristine, striped grass at a baseball stadium, you’ll be happy to know you can achieve the same look at home! Lawn striping enhances the appearance of your grass by bending the blades in different directions to create a stunning contrast.

How to Stripe Your Lawn:

Install a striping kit on the back of your mower (works for push, reel, and zero-turn mowers).
Mow in straight lines or patterns to achieve a professional, manicured look.
Experiment with different designs like checkerboards or diagonal stripes for added curb appeal.

2. Edging – Define Your Landscape

A well-defined edge along sidewalks, driveways, and porches makes your lawn look polished and professional. Edging removes overgrown grass, giving your yard a clean and refined finish.

Quick Edging Tips:

Use a dedicated edger or a string trimmer for a crisp boundary.
Edge your lawn every couple of weeks to maintain a neat appearance.
Blow away loose grass clippings for a spotless finish.

3. Trimming – Enhance the Beauty of Your Yard

Overgrown shrubs and bushes can make a yard look messy, even if the grass is perfect. Regular trimming keeps your landscaping tidy and promotes healthy plant growth.

Pro Trimming Advice:

Use sharp hedge trimmers to shape bushes and shrubs.
Trim every other month to prevent overgrowth.
Remove dead or weak branches to improve air circulation and plant health.

4. Blowing – The Final Touch

A clean lawn isn’t just about grass. Using a blower to clear debris from sidewalks, driveways, and porches can instantly improve your home’s curb appeal.

Best Blowing Practices:

Blow leaves, dirt, and grass clippings off hard surfaces after mowing.
Use a backpack or handheld blower for quick and efficient cleanup.
Pay attention to corners and edges where debris tends to accumulate.

5. Watering – Keep Your Grass Green and Healthy

Even with all the mowing , edging , and trimming , your lawn won’t thrive without proper hydration. Watering regularly ensures a lush, green yard that stays healthy through the seasons.

Smart Watering Tips:

Water early in the morning or late in the evening to minimize evaporation.
Use a sprinkler system for even distribution.
Adjust watering frequency based on weather conditions to prevent over or under-watering.

Get the Best Lawn Care Products at M&D Enterprises

Looking for top-tier lawn care products to make these tasks even easier? M&D Enterprises has everything you need, from striping kits to high-quality trimmers and blowers. Visit us in-store or online to find the perfect tools for your lawn care routine.

�� Call us at (580) 886-2345 or visit your nearest M&D Enterprises & Lawn Mower Shop today!

�� Want to see these tips in action? Check out our latest YouTube videos on lawn care maintenance!

Redneck Hunting Blinds

Wed, 29 Jan 2025 19:16:00 GMT

The Ultimate Blend of Comfort, Stealth, and Durability for Serious Hunters

As the late summer and early fall approach, hunting enthusiasts gear up for the season, and one of the most sought-after products during this time is high-quality hunting blinds. At M&D Enterprises, we pride ourselves on offering a diverse selection of hunting blinds to meet the varied needs of our customers. Among our top offerings are the renowned Redneck Hunting Blinds, celebrated for their superior craftsmanship and thoughtful design.

Why Choose Redneck Hunting Blinds?

Redneck Hunting Blinds are meticulously crafted in Lamar, Missouri, embodying a commitment to quality that resonates with serious hunters. Despite the playful name, Redneck emphasizes that there's nothing "redneck" about their products; instead, they focus on delivering high-quality, innovative solutions designed by hunters, for hunters.

Premium Fiberglass Construction

One of the standout features of Redneck blinds is their construction from 100% fiberglass material, finished with a maintenance-free gel coat. This seamless design ensures quiet operation, excellent scent control, and resistance to rodents. Moreover, the sturdy fiberglass structure effectively shields hunters from the unpredictable and often harsh weather conditions common in Oklahoma.

Variety of Styles and Sizes

Understanding that hunters have diverse preferences and requirements, Redneck offers a range of styles and sizes:

5x5 Trophy Tower : Ideal for 1 to 2 persons using a gun or crossbow.

5x6 Stalker : Designed for 2-person gun hunting.

6x6 Buck Palace : Accommodates up to 3 adults, suitable for combo hunting.

6x7 Big Country : Spacious enough for 3 to 4 adults, perfect for combo hunting.

For rifle hunters, the oversized horizontal windows provide an excellent shooting platform, while bowhunters will appreciate the combo blinds equipped with tall vertical windows for enhanced visibility.

Standard Features and Accessories

Redneck blinds come equipped with a host of standard features aimed at enhancing the hunting experience:

Closed-cell insulated ceilings and acoustic foam-covered walls for superior sound control and insulation.
High-density foam padding beneath marine-carpeted flooring to minimize noise.
Large tinted, tempered automotive-glass windows for clear visibility.
A functional gear console to organize hunting essentials.
Built-in shelves and gun holders for convenience.
EZ-Pull silent window opening system for horizontal windows.
Green LED under-mount light for low-light conditions.
A 2" roof overhang and window drip edge to keep rain off the windows.

Additionally, M&D Enterprises offers 10' deluxe powder-coated tower stands compatible with any fiberglass blind. These stands are constructed with heavy-duty powder-coated bent steel to resist rust and include welded tie-down rings and blind mounting brackets for stability and safety.

Warranty and Assurance

Redneck stands behind the durability and quality of their products. Their fiberglass blinds and stands come with a warranty against manufacturing material and workmanship defects for up to 25 years for the original owner. Warranted products will be repaired or replaced at the Redneck Outdoor facility and returned at no charge to the owner. To become a registered owner, complete the product warranty registration card included with your blind and return it to any M&D location .

Explore More Hunting Solutions

At M&D Enterprises, we understand that every hunter has unique needs. In addition to Redneck Hunting Blinds , we offer a variety of other high-quality hunting products:

Dillon Hunting Blinds : Durable fiberglass blinds with marine decking and optional additional windows.
Phantom Hunting Blinds : Featuring a one-piece roto-molded design using high-grade, high-impact, UV-stabilized polyethylene.
Boss Buck Feeders : Reliable feeders to attract game to your hunting area.
Stealth Cam Game Cameras : High-quality cameras to monitor wildlife activity.

For a comprehensive overview of our hunting products, visit our Hunting Accessories page.

Experience Redneck Blinds Firsthand

To see the quality and features of Redneck Hunting Blinds in action, check out this video:

For more insights and product showcases, visit our YouTube channel .

Investing in a high-quality hunting blind can significantly enhance your hunting experience. At M&D Enterprises, we're committed to providing top-tier products and exceptional customer service to meet all your hunting needs.

How and Why You Should Keep Your Pellets Fresh

Wed, 29 Jan 2025 18:25:00 GMT

The Importance of Keeping Your Pellet Grill Pellets Dry: Unlocking the Best Flavor and Performance

Pellet grills have revolutionized outdoor cooking, providing unbeatable flavor and convenience. But did you know that the quality of your grilling experience heavily depends on one crucial factor—keeping your pellets dry? Moisture can make or break your pellet grill’s performance, affecting everything from temperature control to smoke production. In this guide, we’ll explain why dry pellets are essential, the impact of damp pellets, and tips to ensure your pellets stay in top condition.

Why Dry Pellets Matter for Your Pellet Grill

Wood pellets are the fuel that powers your pellet grill, and their ability to burn efficiently is directly tied to their moisture content. High-quality pellets have a moisture level of about 5-10%, which allows them to burn cleanly, generate consistent heat, and produce that coveted wood-fired flavor. When pellets absorb moisture, however, they can become compromised, leading to poor performance and frustration.

The Difference Between Dry and Damp Pellets in Cooking

✅ Dry Pellets:

Burn efficiently and maintain steady temperatures.
Produce clean, flavorful smoke that enhances food taste.
Reduce the risk of auger jams and grill malfunctions.
Provide consistent cooking times and better results.

❌ Damp Pellets:

Burn inefficiently, causing temperature fluctuations.
Create excessive ash buildup and potential fire hazards.
Produce bitter, dirty smoke that negatively affects food flavor.
Can swell and crumble, leading to auger clogs and grill shutdowns.

How to Keep Your Pellets Dry and Ready to Use

To maximize the performance of your pellet grill, follow these key tips to store and protect your pellets:

�� Store in an Airtight Container – Keep your pellets in a sealed, moisture-resistant container. A high-quality plastic bin with a locking lid works great to prevent humidity from seeping in.

�� Keep Them Off the Ground – Store your pellets on a shelf or elevated surface to avoid exposure to damp conditions, especially in garages or sheds.

�� Use Resealable Bags – If your pellets come in paper bags, transfer them to a resealable plastic bag after opening to maintain their dryness.

�� Avoid Outdoor Storage – While it might seem convenient, storing pellets outside exposes them to temperature swings, condensation, and rain—even if they’re in a closed bag.

�� Check Before Use – Before adding pellets to your grill, inspect them. Dry pellets should feel hard and snap when broken. If they’re soft, swollen, or crumble easily, discard them and use a fresh batch.

What to Do If Your Pellets Get Damp

Accidents happen, and sometimes pellets get exposed to moisture. If your pellets feel slightly damp but not completely ruined, try spreading them out in a warm, dry area for a few hours. However, if they have swollen or become crumbly, it's best to discard them and start fresh.

Check out this short video for pellet grill cleaning tips

Upgrade Your Grilling Game with M&D Enterprises

At M&D Enterprises, we offer a wide selection of premium pellet grills and high-quality wood pellets to ensure you get the best flavor every time you cook. Check out our Pellet Grill Collection for the latest models and accessories to enhance your grilling experience.

�� Want to see these tips in action? Visit our YouTube channel at MD Enterprises OK for expert advice, grilling demonstrations, and product reviews.

Keeping your pellets dry is a simple yet crucial step in achieving perfect results with your pellet grill. With the right storage methods and high-quality pellets from M&D Enterprises, you’ll enjoy superior performance, rich flavors, and hassle-free grilling all season long. Ready to fire up your grill? Make sure your pellets are in peak condition and taste the difference today!

Ego- The Future of Lawncare

Wed, 29 Jan 2025 18:15:00 GMT

Revolutionize Lawn Care with EGO Battery-Powered Equipment

Are you ready to upgrade your lawn care routine with cutting-edge technology? EGO Power+ is transforming the industry with its advanced battery-powered lawn equipment, offering powerful performance without the hassle of gas and emissions. Whether you’re mowing, trimming, or blowing leaves, EGO’s lineup provides a seamless, eco-friendly solution for homeowners and professionals alike.

Why Choose EGO Battery-Powered Lawn Equipment?

EGO Power+ is renowned for delivering gas-like power without the noise, fumes, and maintenance of traditional gas equipment. Here are some standout benefits:

1. Unmatched Power & Performance

EGO’s 56V ARC Lithium™ batteries provide industry-leading power, ensuring your lawn tools run longer and perform at their peak. The battery technology offers consistent performance, even in tough conditions.

2. Eco-Friendly & Low Maintenance

Say goodbye to gas, oil changes, and emissions! EGO’s battery-powered tools are environmentally friendly and require minimal upkeep compared to traditional gas-powered lawn equipment.

3. Interchangeable Battery System

One of the biggest advantages of EGO products is their universal battery compatibility. A single EGO 56V battery can power multiple tools, including lawn mowers , trimmers , blowers , and chainsaws , making it a cost-effective and convenient option for homeowners.

4. Quiet Operation

EGO tools operate at significantly lower noise levels than gas-powered equipment, allowing you to maintain your lawn without disturbing neighbors.

5. Weather-Resistant & Durable

EGO equipment is built with IPX4-rated weather-resistant materials, ensuring durability and performance in various weather conditions.

Exploring EGO’s Top Lawn Care Tools

EGO Power+ Lawn Mowers

EGO offers a range of self-propelled and push mowers designed for efficiency and ease of use. Features include:

Peak Power™ technology for extended runtime
Adjustable cutting heights
Foldable design for compact storage

EGO Power+ String Trimmers

Perfect for edging and trimming, EGO string trimmers come with:

Carbon fiber or aluminum shafts for durability
Rapid Reload Head for quick and easy line replacement
Variable speed controls for precision cutting

EGO Power+ Leaf Blowers

EGO’s blowers deliver powerful airflow to clear leaves and debris effortlessly. Key features include:

Turbo Boost mode for maximum power
Brushless motor technology for efficiency
Lightweight and ergonomic design

EGO Power+ Chainsaws & Hedge Trimmers

For more intensive yard work, EGO’s chainsaws and hedge trimmers offer:

High-efficiency brushless motors
Advanced safety features
Extended battery life for long-lasting performance

Keeping Your EGO Batteries in Top Shape

To maximize the lifespan and performance of your EGO batteries :

Store batteries in a cool, dry place
Avoid leaving batteries in direct sunlight
Regularly clean battery terminals for optimal connections

Upgrade Your Lawn Care Today!

EGO Power+ lawn equipment is available at M&D Enterprises . Visit us today to find the perfect battery-powered tools for your lawn care needs.

For more insights and product demonstrations, check out our YouTube Channel for in-depth reviews and how-to videos!

Ditch the gas. Power up with EGO and experience the future of lawn care!

ENTREE: BLACKSTONE CRANBERRY ALMOND FLAPJACKS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Wed, 29 Jan 2025 16:13:31 GMT

BLACKSTONE CRANBERRY ALMOND FLAPJACKS

Elevate your breakfast with Blackstone Cranberry Almond Flapjacks! These fluffy, golden pancakes are packed with the perfect blend of tart cranberries and crunchy almonds, delivering a delicious balance of sweet and nutty flavors. Whether you're cooking at home or on the griddle, these hearty flapjacks are sure to satisfy your morning cravings. Start your day right with a warm, wholesome, and flavorful breakfast!

Servings

Prep Time

5-10 minutes

Cook Time

5-10 minutes

Ingredients

Pancake mix (e.g., Kodiak Power Cakes Flapjack & Waffle Mix)

1/2 cup dry oats

Ground cinnamon (to taste)

1 tsp pure almond extract

1 cup pure maple syrup

1/2 cup fresh cranberries

1/2 stick of butter

Almond slices

Powdered sugar (for garnish)

Directions

1. Preheat a Blackstone griddle to high heat. Prepare enough batter for 4 servings according to the pancake mix instructions. Stir in the oats, cinnamon, and almond extract, adjusting with extra liquid or mix to achieve a medium-thick consistency.

2. Place the maple syrup and cranberries in a cast iron pan or heatproof bowl on the griddle. Heat and stir until the cranberries pop, then remove from heat to prevent burning or boiling over.

3. Reduce the griddle heat to medium-low and spread butter across the surface. Pour the batter onto the griddle to form flapjacks of your desired size. Flip when the bottoms are lightly browned, spreading butter on the top side before flipping again. Cook until both sides are golden and remove from heat.

4. Add more butter to the griddle and toast the almond slices, stirring gently until browned.

5. Serve the flapjacks topped with cranberry syrup, toasted almonds, and a sprinkle of powdered sugar. Enjoy!

click here to check out our blackstone lineup!

Traeger Pellet Grills

Wed, 29 Jan 2025 15:27:00 GMT

How Does a Traeger Pellet Grill Work?

Traeger makes Wood-Fired cooking simple
1. Fuel the fire: hardwood pellets fuel the fire and add an incredible flavor.
2. Set-it and Forget-it: select the temperature you want, then set-it and forget-it.
3. Create flavorful moments: create moments that you, family, and friends won't ever forget!

Timberline Grill Series: Welcome to the Hall of Fame

Traeger's premiere grill, the Timberline redefines what’s possible in the world of outdoor cooking. It boasts next-gen features and premium construction to deliver the ultimate grilling experience.

Timberline 1300-
Capacity:12 Chickens OR 15 Rib Racks OR 12 Pork Butts
Total cooking space: 1300 sq. in.
Total weight: 226 lbs
Pellet hopper capacity: 24 lbs
Max temperature 500° F

Timberline 850-
Capacity: 9 Chickens OR 8 Rib Racks OR 6 Pork Butts
Total cooking space: 850 sq. in.
Total weight: 213 lbs
Pellet hopper capacity: 24 lbs
Max temperature: 500° F

Features:
Wifire technology, D2 controller, pellet sensor, downdraft exhaust, super smoke mode, and a dual position smoke/sear grate.

Ironwood Grill Series: Elevate Your Craft!

Take your outdoor cooking to the next level with the Ironwood grill. Loaded with upgraded features, it’s built to deliver superior flavor every time.

Ironwood 650-
Capacity: 8 Chickens OR 5 Rib Racks OR 6 Pork Butts
Total cooking space: 650 sq. in.
Total weight: 149 lbs
Pellet hopper capacity: 20 lbs
Max temperature: 500° F

Ironwood 885-
Capacity: 10 Chickens OR 7 Rib Racks OR 9 Pork Butts
Total cooking space: 885 sq. in.
Total weight: 175 lbs
Pellet hopper capacity: 20 lbs
Max temperature: 500° F

Features:
WiFire Technology, D2 Controller, Grill Insulation, meat probe, and all-terrain wheels

Pro Grill Series: Wood-Fired Flavor Made Easy

The Pro Series grill makes it simple to achieve incredible wood-fired flavor. Set-It & Forget-It® ease and precise temperature control help you create unforgettable meals.

Pro 780-
Capacity: 34 Burgers OR 6 Rib Racks OR 6 Chickens
Total cooking space: 780 sq. in.
Total weight: 150 lbs
Pellet hopper capacity: 18 lbs
Max temperature: 500° F

Pro 575-
Capacity: 24 Burgers OR 5 Rib Racks OR 4 Chickens
Total cooking space: 575 sq. in.
Total weight: 124 lbs
Pellet hopper capacity: 18 lbs
Max temperature: 500° F

Features:
All-terrain Wheels, hopper cleanout, and turbotemp

Town & Travel Grill Series: Enjoy Wood-Fired Flavor Anywhere

From game days to getaways, bring wood-fired flavor everywhere with our portable grills. Featuring compact, portable designs, they’re primed for balconies, tailgates, and more.

Tailgater-Capacity: 2 Chickens OR 3 Rib Racks OR 12 Burgers
Total cooking space: 300 sq. in.
Total weight: 62 lbs.
Pellet hopper capacity: 8 lbs.
Max temperature: 450° F

Ranger-Capacity: 1 Rib Racks OR 6 Burgers OR 10 Hot Dogs
Total cooking space: 184 sq. in.
Total weight: 60 lbs
Pellet hopper capacity: 8 lbs
Max temperature: 450° F

Pellets, Rubs, And Sauces!

Traeger's premium wood pellets are made from 100% natural, food-grade hardwood. Traeger pure wood pellets grant the perfect burn for optimal wood fired flavor. Made in the USA.

Here’s the rub down: for anything you’re fixin’ to grill, we’ve got a spice for that. Whether you rub it on or shake it out, make your meal superbly spiced.

Flavor Guide:

click here to take a look at all of our traeger grills!

Canton, Oklahoma: A Hidden Gem in the Heartland

Markf@mowersok.com (Mark Fuqua) — Wed, 29 Jan 2025 13:57:34 GMT

Canton, Oklahoma: A Hidden Gem in the Heartland

Nestled in the heart of Oklahoma, Canton is a charming small town that offers a unique blend of history, culture, and natural beauty. Often overlooked by travelers, Canton is a true hidden gem waiting to be discovered.

Exploring Canton:

Historic Downtown: Take a stroll through Canton's historic downtown and admire the beautifully preserved buildings, including the iconic Canton Grand Arts Theater, and the historic Canton Depot.

Local Businesses: Discover a vibrant array of local businesses, from quaint antique shops and charming boutiques to inviting cafes and delicious restaurants. There's even a large outdoor power dealer for all of your lawn mower and other lawn related needs.

Outdoor Recreation: Enjoy the beauty of the outdoors with a visit to Canton Lake, perfect for fishing, boating, and relaxing by the water. For golf enthusiasts, the Canton Golf Course offers a challenging and enjoyable round.

History and Culture:

Rich Heritage: Delve into Canton's rich history, dating back to its founding in 1872. Learn about the town's significant role in the development of Oklahoma.

Cultural Events: Experience the vibrant local culture through events like the annual fishing tournament the Canton Lake Walleye Rodeo and Walleye Rodeo Parade.

Why Visit Canton:

Canton offers a refreshing escape from the hustle and bustle of city life. It's the perfect place to:

Relax and Unwind: Slow down and enjoy the peaceful atmosphere of this charming small town.

Connect with Nature: Immerse yourself in the beauty of the Oklahoma countryside.

Support Local Businesses: Discover unique treasures and savor delicious local cuisine.

Experience Small-Town Charm: Embrace the friendly atmosphere and warm hospitality of the local community.

Conclusion:

Canton, Oklahoma, is a hidden gem waiting to be discovered. With its rich history, vibrant culture, and stunning natural beauty, it offers a unique and unforgettable experience for visitors of all ages. So, plan your trip to Canton today and discover the charm of this enchanting small town in the heartland.

mdenterprisesok.com

The body content of your post goes here. To edit this text, click on it and delete this default text and start typing your own or paste your own from a different source.

Kanyon Outdoor Furniture: Elevate Your Outdoor Living Spaces

Mon, 27 Jan 2025 20:10:00 GMT

Why Choose Canyon Outdoor Furniture?

When it comes to creating a beautiful and functional outdoor space, Kanyon Outdoor Furniture sets the standard. Designed with durability, comfort, and style in mind, this furniture transforms any backyard, patio, or deck into a welcoming retreat. Let’s dive into what makes Kanyon Outdoor Furniture the ideal choice for your outdoor oasis.

The Kanyon Living Difference

1. Unmatched Durability

Kanyon Outdoor Furniture is built to last. Made from high-density polyethylene (HDPE) materials, this furniture withstands harsh weather conditions, including intense sunlight, rain, and snow. With UV protection and weather-resistant finishes, your investment will look as stunning years down the road as it does today.

2. Customizable Options

Personalization is key, and Kanyon Living offers a wide variety of options to suit your style. Choose from various colors, finishes, and designs to create a look that’s uniquely yours. Whether you prefer a rustic charm or a sleek, modern aesthetic, there’s something for everyone.

3. Comfort Above All Else

Comfort is key when it comes to outdoor furniture, and Kanyon Outdoor Furniture doesn’t disappoint. With ergonomic designs, the ability to add plush cushions, and thoughtful construction, you’ll enjoy hours of relaxation.

4. Eco-Friendly Materials

Sustainability matters. Kanyon Outdoor Furniture is crafted from recycled and sustainable materials, so you can furnish your outdoor space responsibly without compromising quality or style.

How to Style Your Outdoor Space with Kanyon Outdoor Furniture

Creating the perfect outdoor oasis is easier than you think. Here are some styling tips to get you started:

Mix and Match: Combine different furniture styles to create a unique look. Pair a sleek dining table with rustic chairs for a modern farmhouse vibe.
Add Pops of Color: Use colorful cushions, throws, or outdoor rugs to add personality to your space.
Accessorize: Incorporate elements like lanterns, potted plants, and outdoor wall art to make the space feel complete.

For more inspiration, check out our blog for 8 steps for DIY lawn restoration.

Low Maintenance

Our 20 year warranty is a testament to our confidence in this product's durability. Our material is resistant to stains and corrosive substances: Also won't splinter, crack, chip, peel or rot.

No Sanding, repainting, replacing hardware or staining needed. All you need is a little soap and water to keep your furniture looking like new.

Shop Kanyon Outdoor Furniture Today

Ready to upgrade your outdoor space? Visit M&D Enterprises to explore a wide range of Kanyon Outdoor Furniture and find the perfect pieces for your home. Don’t forget to check out our blog for more expert tips, inspiration, and product recommendations.

Transform your backyard into the ultimate retreat with Kanyon Outdoor Furniture . Your outdoor oasis is just a few clicks away!

Protect What Matters Most

Markf@mowersok.com (Mark Fuqua) — Mon, 27 Jan 2025 06:21:52 GMT

Decorative options on a 6x6 Concrete Safe Room above ground unit, and also on an inground easy access slope front model.

Ensuring Family Safety with Stylish Storm Shelters

When it comes to protecting your loved ones, nothing is more important than investing in reliable, high-quality storm shelters. At M&D Enterprises, we provide storm shelters that offer durability, style, and peace of mind. Our shelters are designed to withstand the toughest conditions while seamlessly blending into your outdoor space.

Why Choose Our Storm Shelters?

Our storm shelters stand out due to their high-quality construction, aesthetic design, and compliance with FEMA standards. Here’s why you should consider installing a storm shelter from M&D Enterprises:

Certified for Strength – Built to withstand winds up to 250 MPH, our shelters provide top-tier protection.

Stylish Integration – We offer designs that complement your home's aesthetics.

Customizable Features – From size options to ventilation, customize your shelter to fit your needs.

Affordable Financing – Take advantage of our rent-to-own options with no credit check.

Read more about our storm shelters here:

➡ Storm Shelters for Your Home

Top Benefits of Installing a Storm Shelter

Unmatched Safety: Our shelters provide a safe refuge during extreme weather events like tornadoes and hurricanes.

Increased Property Value: A well-installed shelter adds significant value to your home.

Peace of Mind: You and your loved ones can rest easy knowing that you're protected.

Customization Options: Choose from various styles and sizes that blend perfectly with your outdoor aesthetics.

Looking for tips on how to choose the right shelter? Check out our guide:

➡ How to Choose the Right Storm Shelter

Stylish & Functional Shelter Designs

Gone are the days of unsightly storm shelters! Our modern designs allow you to stay safe without compromising your backyard's appearance. Whether you prefer an above-ground safe room or an in-ground storm shelter, we've got options to fit every need.

Explore our product range here:

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/storm-shelters-and-safe-rooms

Customer Testimonials

Our customers trust us to provide safety solutions that stand the test of time. Here's what they have to say:

"I love how my shelter blends perfectly with my yard!" – Sarah M.

"The installation was quick, and the team was professional." – Jake R.

"Finally, I have peace of mind during storm season." – Emily D.

Want to hear more success stories?

➡Check out our Customer Reviews & Testimonials on our website or social media pages

Flexible Financing Options

We understand that investing in safety can be a financial commitment. That’s why we offer flexible payment plans, including:

Special Promotions – Keep an eye out for our seasonal discounts!

➡ Storm Shelter Financing Options are available with approved credit

Watch Our Shelters in Action

Want to see how our storm shelters perform under pressure? Check out these videos from our YouTube channel:

See Our Storm Shelters in Action!

Why You Need a Storm Shelter in Oklahoma

Installation Process Explained

Subscribe for more updates and safety tips:

➡ M&D Enterprises YouTube Channel

Final Thoughts

At M&D Enterprises, we believe that safety and style should go hand in hand. With our high-quality storm shelters, you can protect your family without compromising on aesthetics. Whether you're looking for a simple safe room or a fully customized shelter, we have the perfect solution for you.

Ready to take the next step?

�� Call us at 580-886-2345

�� Visit Our Website

#FamilySafetyFirst

#PeaceOfMind

#StylishProtection

#SafeAndSound

#WeatherReady

#HomeSanctuary

#InvestInSafety

Another blog on Storm Shelter importance:

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/why-a-storm-shelter-is-crucial-in-tornado-alley-a-closer-look-at-oklahoma-s-safety-precautions

Chainsaw Maintenance

Sat, 25 Jan 2025 19:51:00 GMT

Chainsaw Maintenance: Essential Tips for Long-Lasting Performance

Every tool needs regular care to stay efficient, and your chainsaw is no exception. Consistent chainsaw maintenance not only extends its lifespan but also prevents critical failures that could lead to dangerous injuries. In this guide, we’ll walk you through must-know tips to keep your chainsaw running smoothly and safely.

1. Keep the Air Filter Clean

A clean air filter is the lifeline of your chainsaw’s engine. Neglecting it can lead to dirt and sawdust clogging the carburetor, causing hard starts, poor performance, and even engine damage.

Why It’s Important:

Dirt and debris can damage piston rings, leading to loss of compression and reduced power.
Clean filters ensure smooth airflow, protecting the engine’s delicate components.

Pro Tip: For saws with paper or foam filters, replace the filter regularly to maintain peak performance.

Related Read: How to Winterize Outdoor Power Equipment

2. Bar Maintenance

Your chainsaw bar is exposed to significant wear, especially on the underside where most cutting happens. Proper care helps extend its lifespan.

Maintenance Tips:

Flip the Bar: Rotate the guide bar every time you change the chain to ensure even wear.
Clean Regularly: Clear out the guide bar groove and oil inlet to prevent blockages.
File Burrs: Smooth out burrs from the bar rails to keep it functioning efficiently.

When to Replace the Bar:

If the groove isn’t deep enough to hold the drive link.
If the chain no longer aligns straight in the groove.

3. Prioritize Chain Lubrication

Poor lubrication is one of the leading causes of premature wear in chainsaws. Without proper oiling, the chain and bar wear down rapidly, reducing performance.

How to Check Your Lubrication System:

Start your chainsaw and hold it over a stump.
Rev the engine and observe for a fine line of oil on the stump.
If you don’t see oil, check the oil level and unclog the nozzle (sawdust can block it).

Always use a high-quality, original chain oil for optimal lubrication.

4. Ensure Proper Chain Tensioning

Chain tension directly affects the performance and safety of your chainsaw.

How to Tension a Chain Correctly:

The chain should rest against the bottom of the guide bar but still be easy to pull by hand.
Always let the chain cool before making adjustments, as it will shrink once cooled.

Pro Tip: Running a chainsaw with a loose chain can cause it to veer off the guide bar, leading to potential injury.

5. Condition a New Chain

A new chain requires proper conditioning to maximize its lifespan.

Steps to Prepare a New Chain:

Soak it in bar and chain oil for several hours to lubricate pivot points.
Hang the chain to let excess oil drip off.
Mount and tension the chain, then run it briefly to heat it up.
Re-tension after light use before moving to heavy-duty tasks.

This process ensures your new chain delivers reliable performance from the start.

6. Use Non-Ethanol Gasoline

Ethanol in gasoline can wreak havoc on small engines, including your chainsaw. Over time, ethanol absorbs moisture, separates in the tank, and corrodes metal components.

Best Practices:

Opt for non-ethanol gasoline whenever possible.
If unavailable, use ethanol-blended gas with a stabilizing additive.
Always use fresh fuel—buy it in small quantities to avoid spoilage.

Bonus Tip: Add a high-quality fuel like Red Armor fuel or fuel stabilizer like Mechanic in a Bottle or

Your Chainsaw Deserves the Best

Regular maintenance ensures your chainsaw is always ready to tackle any task, from cutting firewood to trimming trees. Don’t wait for your equipment to fail—proactive care is the key to safe and efficient operation.

Mixes with 89-octane gasoline at a 50:1 gas-to-oil ratio
Meets or exceeds ISO-L-EGD- and JASO M345/FC standards
For use with 2-stroke outdoor power equipment engines

RedMax 95 octane fuel is mixed at 50:1 with a high-quality synthetic oil blend, specifically formulated to provide RedMax handheld products with optimal equipment performance. This ethanol-free fuel mix does not degrade or oxidize like pump gas and will stay fresh for years in storage.

Low Smoke Synthetic 2 Stroke Engine Oil
50:1 Mix Ratio
2.6 oz. Bottles (6-Pack)
1 Bottle per Gallon of Fuel

How to Mix Properly

Step 1:
Measure out the quantities of gasoline and oil that you will be mixing.
Step 2:
Put some of the gasoline into a clean, and approved gasoline container
Step 3:
Pour in all of the oil and gently shake the can to agitate it for about 10 seconds
Step 4:
Pour in the rest of the gasoline and gently shake the can again to agitate for at least an additional minute. Be sure that the mixture is thoroughly agitated
Step 5:
Place a clear indication on the outside of the container to signify that this mixture contains oil

Mixing the gas and oil properly is very important for the longevity of your trimmer. Be sure you are following all steps and recommendations carefully for best results.

Visit M&D Enterprises

At M&D Enterprises, we carry everything you need to maintain and repair your chainsaw, from chain oils to replacement parts. Explore our blog for more helpful tips or stop by one of our stores for expert advice.
shop our line up of lineup of chainsaws click here !

How can Mechanic in a Bottle work for you?

Fri, 24 Jan 2025 22:18:00 GMT

Keep Your Engines Running Smooth with Mechanic in a Bottle

Let’s face it: small engines, whether 2-cylinder or 4-cylinder, seem to develop issues at the worst possible times. From clogged carburetors to stubborn water and carbon deposits, the struggle is real. When you need your equipment the most, that’s often when something goes wrong.

But here’s the good news: M&D Enterprises has your back with Mechanic in a Bottle .

This powerful synthetic fuel additive is designed to keep your engines running at peak performance. While it may look like a small bottle, don’t let the size fool you—it’s a giant when it comes to restoring and maintaining your engine’s health.

Why Mechanic in a Bottle is a Game-Changer

If you’re tired of dealing with poor engine performance or breakdowns, this additive is your go-to solution. Here’s what it can do:

Remove varnish from the fuel system.
Eliminate and prevent carbon and water deposits.
Revitalize rubber and plastic components.
Cleanse the engine’s fuel system.
Ensure efficient starts and peak performance.

And the best part? No greasy hands required! Just unscrew the fuel cap, pour in 1 ounce of Mechanic in a Bottle per gallon of fuel, and let it do the rest. Your engine will be running like new in no time.

Got Diesel? We’ve Got You Covered!

Don’t worry, diesel owners—there’s a Mechanic in a Bottle for you too! The diesel-specific formula offers additional benefits:

Vapor Corrosion Inhibitor (VCI) for 360-degree anti-corrosion protection above and below the fuel line.
Ultra-concentrated formula, compatible with all diesel systems.
Restores lubrication, extending the life of pumps and injectors.
Increases cetane for better power and performance.
Cleans the entire fuel system, reducing emissions and smoke.
Prevents sludge, bacteria, and fungus by dispersing water.

How to Use Mechanic in a Bottle

For a Poor-Running Engine:

Mix 1 ounce of Mechanic in a Bottle per gallon of fuel.
Fill the fuel tank and run the engine for 5 minutes.
Let the unit sit for 8 hours.

For a Non-Running Engine:

Drain the fuel system completely.
Add Mechanic in a Bottle to the tank (2 oz for small equipment, 4 oz for larger equipment).
Press the primer bulb to get the additive into the engine.
Let it sit for 8 hours.
Pour in fresh gas and start the engine.

Why You Should Prep Your Equipment Now

As winter approaches, preparing your small engines for seasonal changes is essential. Mechanic in a Bottle ensures your equipment doesn’t let you down when spring arrives. And if you're curious about other ways to store your equipment for winter, check out our post on winterizing outdoor power equipment.

Visit M&D Enterprises Today!

Don’t wait until it’s too late! Swing by an M&D Enterprises location near you to grab your Mechanic in a Bottle. You’ll thank yourself when your engines are running smooth come spring.

Explore our full line of products, including fuel stabilizers, winter prep items, and more .

Let’s keep your equipment in tip-top shape—without any hiccups!

He conquered his beast of a yard, see his story....

Markf@mowersok.com (Mark Fuqua) — Tue, 21 Jan 2025 23:59:37 GMT

He wishes he would have done it sooner....

How One Man Took Back His Lawn – And How You Can Too!

There’s something incredibly satisfying about a beautifully manicured lawn—a lush, green space where you can relax, entertain, and take pride in your home. But for many homeowners, achieving that perfect yard can feel like an uphill battle.

That’s where M&D Enterprises comes in. As Western Oklahoma’s go-to experts in lawn care equipment and services, we’re here to help you reclaim your yard and make it the talk of the neighborhood. Let’s dive into the story of one homeowner’s transformation and explore how the right tools, expert support, and a little determination can turn your lawn dreams into reality.

The Problem: A Lawn in Need of Rescue

Like many of us, our customer, James, was stuck in a frustrating cycle—his lawn was overrun with weeds, patchy grass, and uneven terrain. His outdated mower made the job feel impossible, and he was ready to give up.

That’s when he discovered the power of zero-turn mowers and the expertise of M&D Enterprises.

The Solution: A Zero-Turn Mower That Changed Everything

Zero-turn mowers are a game-changer for anyone tired of struggling with traditional push mowers. These agile machines offer unmatched speed and maneuverability, making it easy to navigate around obstacles and cover large areas efficiently.

After working with the knowledgeable team at M&D Enterprises, James selected a Gravely ProWalk zero-turn mower. Known for its professional-grade performance and durability, this mower was the perfect fit for his yard’s unique challenges.

But it wasn’t just the mower that made the difference. M&D Enterprises backed the sale with exceptional customer service, a fully stocked parts department, and even a convenient pick-up and delivery service to keep James’s mower in top shape.

Why Zero-Turn Mowers Are the Best Choice for Your Lawn

Whether you’re tackling a small yard or acres of grass, zero-turn mowers from trusted brands like Grasshopper, Hustler, Ferris, Gravely, Toro, and Cub Cadet deliver:

Speed and Efficiency: Cover more ground in less time.

Maneuverability: Easily handle tight turns and obstacles.

Durability: Built to withstand tough mowing conditions.

At M&D Enterprises, we carry top models from these industry leaders, each offering unique features tailored to your needs. From the smooth ride of Ferris mowers to the innovation of Hustler’s HydroGear ZT transmissions, there’s a perfect machine waiting for you.

The Results: A Lawn to Be Proud Of

With his Gravely zero-turn mower and M&D’s ongoing support, James transformed his yard into a vibrant, healthy lawn that he now proudly shows off to family and friends. His success story is just one of many, proving that with the right tools and expertise, anyone can take back their lawn.

Visit M&D Enterprises Today!

Are you ready to start your own lawn transformation? At M&D Enterprises, we’re here to guide you every step of the way. Whether you need expert advice, quality equipment, or reliable service, we’ve got you covered.

�� Visit us in-store or online at MDEnterprisesOK.com

�� Call us at 580-886-2345

Don’t let another season pass you by—take the first step toward the lawn of your dreams today!

From Chaos to Calm: How One Man Solved His Lawn Problems—Fast!

Markf@mowersok.com (Mark Fuqua) — Mon, 20 Jan 2025 18:44:32 GMT

Ease Your Outdoor Storage Woes

Is your yard a battlefield of clutter? Cars, tractors, bikes—scattered everywhere, with no end in sight? You’re not alone. That’s exactly where one man found himself, overwhelmed and unsure of how to take back control of his space.

But then, he found M&D Enterprises and Lawnmower Shops, and everything changed. ��

With their expert help, he designed the perfect structure to organize his outdoor space, protect his belongings, and clear the chaos. The process? Shockingly simple. The structure was delivered, installed, and ready to go before he knew it.

Now, his lawn isn’t just clean—it’s transformed. And his life? A whole lot easier.

�� Ready to reclaim your yard and your peace of mind? Watch his inspiring story and see how M&D Enterprises can make it happen for you too!

�� Learn more or start designing your structure today: https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/steel-structures

ENTREE: TRAEGER FRENCH ONION FOCACCIA

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Mon, 20 Jan 2025 17:36:00 GMT

Traeger French Onion Focaccia

Love French onion soup? This caramelized onion focaccia features all that makes it so good just minus the broth. You get rich and sweet slow-cooked onions plus nutty, melty Gruyère all in a bready bite baked with a kiss of wood-fired flavor. Note that this recipe was developed with Diamond Crystal kosher salt in the dough. If using a different salt, go with the weight instead of the volume as salts have different crystal sizes.

Prep Time

30 Min

Cook Time

45 Min

Pellets

Pecan

Ingredients

Caramelized Onions

2 Tablespoon salted butter

2 yellow onions, thinly sliced

Kosher salt

3 garlic cloves, minced

Focaccia

2 1/2 Cup warm water (about 110°F)

1 Tablespoon honey

2 1/4 Teaspoon active dry yeast

5 Cup (725 grams) bread flour

2 Tablespoon plus 2 teaspoons kosher salt (25 grams)

1/2 Cup high quality extra-virgin olive oil, divided

Topping

4 Ounce Gruyère, grated (about 1½ cups)

2 Tablespoon high quality extra-virgin olive oil

1 Tablespoon flaky sea salt

Steps

Make the caramelized onions: Melt the butter in a large sauté pan over medium heat. Add the onions and a pinch or two of salt. Cook, stirring occasionally, until the onions are soft and deeply browned. This will take at least 20 minutes and maybe longer so be patient. Once the onions are caramelized, add the garlic and cook for another minute or two. Remove from the heat and cool completely. (The onions can be caramelized a day ahead of using them; keep them covered and refrigerated.)

Make the dough: In the bowl of a stand mixer fitted with the dough hook, combine the water, honey, and yeast and mix with your fingers until combined. Let stand 5 minutes until cloudy and foaming.

In a separate medium bowl, combine the flour and salt and mix well. Add the flour mixture to the water mixture and mix on low just until the dough begins to come together, about 1 minute. Increase the speed to high and knead until the dough wraps around the hook and pulls away from the sides of the bowl, about 10 minutes. Because this is a high hydration dough, it will look too wet in the beginning but trust the process and just let the machine work and it will come together. The dough should be slightly tacky and silky smooth.

Pour ¼ cup of the olive oil into a clean, large bowl and swirl to coat. Using a flexible bench scraper, scrape the dough into the oiled bowl. Spread a bit of the oil over the top of the dough and cover the bowl with plastic wrap. Place in a warm spot in the kitchen and let rise until doubled in size, 1 to 1½ hours.

Add the remaining ¼ cup oil to a large, rimmed baking sheet or a 9x13 inch baking dish. With oiled hands, loosen the dough from the sides of the bowl. Place your hands under the dough and lift it allowing the dough to fall downwards and stretch. Lower the dough back down allowing it to fold onto itself. Rotate the bowl 90 degrees and repeat the stretch and fold. Repeat one more time, but this time, when you lower it, lower it onto the oiled baking sheet. Work your hands underneath the dough and gently lift and pull the dough to the edges of the pan. Repeat all around until the dough begins to shrink back. Lightly oil the top of the dough with some of the excess oil in the pan and cover lightly with plastic wrap. Let rise a second time at room temp until doubled in size, about 45 minutes. (Alternatively, if you aren’t ready to bake straightaway, you can transfer the dough to the fridge and let it slowly rise for at least 8 hours and up to 24 hours. When ready to bake, let it sit at room temperature for 45 minutes to an hour to take the chill off.)

When ready to bake, position a grill grate in the highest position in your grill if that’s available; if not, it will bake fine on the lower grate, you will just want to check on its doneness sooner. Preheat the grill with the lid closed to 425°F; this will take at least 15 minutes.

425 ˚F / 218 ˚C

Sprinkle the cheese and caramelized onions over the top of the risen focaccia dough. Drizzle with the 2 tablespoons extra-virgin olive oil and sprinkle with flaky sea salt. Oil your hands and poke the dough all over ensuring your fingers reach the bottom of the pan to create dimples.

Transfer the focaccia to the grill placing it on the bottom grate. Bake for 25 minutes.

425 ˚F / 218 ˚C

00:25

If available, transfer it to the top rack. Continue to cook until the onions are a deeper brown and the focaccia is pulling away from the sides of the pan, about another 20 minutes if on the top grate; begin checking earlier if on the bottom. The cheese should be melted and the bread lightly browned.

425 ˚F / 218 ˚C

00:20

Remove the focaccia from the grill and let cool for 10 minutes. Remove from the pan, slice, and serve. Enjoy!

click here to Check out our traeger lineup!!

Say Goodbye to Frozen Pipes- Insulated Well Houses

Markf@mowersok.com (Mark Fuqua) — Sat, 18 Jan 2025 15:48:21 GMT

Insulated Well Houses from M&D

Say Goodbye to Frozen Pipes This Winter: The Ultimate Guide to Insulated Well Houses

Winter is here, and with it comes the dreaded risk of frozen pipes. For homeowners and businesses relying on wells, this can mean significant inconvenience and costly repairs. But there’s good news: insulated well houses offer an effective solution to protect your water system and keep things running smoothly, no matter how low the temperatures drop.

At M&D Enterprises, we specialize in insulated well houses designed to provide unmatched protection against freezing weather. Here’s everything you need to know about these must-have structures and how they can save you time, money, and stress this winter.

What Are Insulated Well Houses?

Insulated well houses are custom-built enclosures designed to protect your wellhead and associated plumbing from harsh weather conditions. Constructed with high-quality insulation materials, these structures maintain a stable internal temperature, preventing pipes from freezing even during the coldest nights.

Whether you're in Western Oklahoma or another region prone to freezing temperatures, an insulated well house is a game-changer for safeguarding your water supply.

Key Benefits of Insulated Well Houses

Freeze Protection: Keep your well components safe from freezing temperatures, ensuring uninterrupted water flow.

Energy Efficiency: Many insulated well houses are designed to work with small heaters, maintaining warmth with minimal energy use.

Durability: Built with robust materials, these structures withstand harsh weather, providing long-term protection.

Convenience: An insulated well house eliminates the hassle of dealing with burst pipes or temporary fixes during a cold snap.

Image Suggestion: Include an image of a well house in winter conditions to illustrate its protective benefits.

Features of M&D Enterprises' Insulated Well Houses

At M&D Enterprises, our insulated well houses are built with both function and aesthetics in mind. Here’s what sets them apart:

High-Quality Insulation: Keeps the interior temperature stable, even in extreme cold.

Custom Sizes: Choose from various sizes to fit your specific wellhead and plumbing setup.

Ease of Access: Designed with convenient doors and hatches for easy maintenance.

Durable Materials: Built to last, our well houses resist wear and tear from weather exposure.

Our well houses are crafted with Western Oklahoma’s unpredictable winters in mind, providing peace of mind for homeowners and businesses alike.

Image Suggestion: Show a close-up of an M&D Enterprises insulated well house, highlighting its durable construction.

Why Choose M&D Enterprises?

As Western Oklahoma’s trusted provider of outdoor structures and equipment, M&D Enterprises takes pride in delivering top-notch products and unmatched customer service. Here’s why our customers keep coming back:

Local Expertise: With years of experience serving the area, we understand the challenges posed by Oklahoma’s winters.

Quality You Can Trust: Our insulated well houses are built to meet the highest standards of durability and efficiency.

Comprehensive Solutions: From insulated well houses to storm shelters and portable buildings, we offer everything you need to protect your home or business.

Image Suggestion: Use an image of a smiling customer standing next to their newly installed insulated well house to convey trust and satisfaction.

Contact M&D Enterprises Today

Don’t let frozen pipes disrupt your winter. Invest in an insulated well house from M&D Enterprises and enjoy reliable water access all season long. Visit one of our stores in Western Oklahoma, call us at 580.886.2345, or check out our website at mdenterprisesok.com to learn more.

Act now to secure your insulated well house before the next freeze hits!

Another blog on our insulated well houses: https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/what-to-know-about-polar-sheds

Power Up Safely This Winter: Essential Generator Safety Tips

Markf@mowersok.com (Mark Fuqua) — Fri, 17 Jan 2025 14:53:52 GMT

Prepare Before the Storm Hits

Keeping your home or business powered during a winter outage is crucial. Generators provide a reliable backup solution, but safety is paramount. Here's a guide from the Outdoor Power Equipment Institute (OPEI) to ensure safe generator use this winter:

Check Your Generator: Ensure your generator is in good working order.

Perform a thorough inspection before the storm arrives to avoid any surprises.

Review the Manual: Don't rely on memory! Reread the owner's manual (find it online if missing) to refresh your memory on safe operation procedures.

Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detector: Install a battery-operated CO detector in your home.

This alarm will warn you of dangerous CO levels seeping into the building.

Fuel Up Safely and Properly Recommended Fuel: Always use the fuel type recommended by your generator's manufacturer. This protects your investment and ensures optimal performance.

Fresh Fuel is Best: If possible, use fresh fuel for your generator. If using stored fuel (older than 30 days), add a fuel stabilizer to prevent degradation.

Approved Storage: Store gasoline only in approved containers, away from heat sources, to minimize fire hazards.

Generator Placement and Ventilation Open Air is Key: Generators must never be used in enclosed spaces like homes, buildings, or garages, even with open windows/doors. Place the generator outdoors, far from windows, doors, and vents that could allow CO infiltration.

Keep it Dry: Avoid operating your generator in wet conditions. Consider purchasing a model-specific tent or cover for added protection. These are readily available online or at home improvement stores.

Safe Refueling and Power Consumption Cool Down Before Refueling: Always turn off and cool down the generator completely before refueling to prevent accidental fires.

Battery-Powered Generators: For battery-powered generators/inverters, use only the manufacturer-specified charger. Ensure proper charging within the recommended temperature range to avoid battery damage.

Connecting Appliances and Transfer Switches Direct Connection is Best: If you don't have a transfer switch, use the generator's outlets directly to power appliances.

Heavy-Duty Extension Cords: When using extension cords, ensure they are heavy-duty, outdoor-rated, and have a capacity (in watts or amps) exceeding the combined appliance load. Inspect the cord for cuts, and verify the plug has all three prongs for proper grounding.

Transfer Switch Benefits: Consider installing a transfer switch. This device safely connects the generator to your circuit panel, allowing you to power hardwired appliances. Many transfer switches also display wattage usage to prevent overloading.

Important Reminders Never Backfeed: Avoid the dangerous practice of "backfeeding" power into your home's electrical system by plugging the generator into a wall outlet. This can injure utility workers and neighbors, bypass safety measures, and damage electronics or cause electrical fires.

By following these safety tips, you can ensure your generator provides reliable backup power during winter outages while keeping yourself, your family, and your property safe. Remember, a little preparation goes a long way!

M&D offers a great selection of portable generators to power your home or other remote needs!

Check them out here:

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/generators

ENTREE: TRAEGER LOADED TOTCHOS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Tue, 14 Jan 2025 22:15:00 GMT

TRAEGER LOADED TOTCHOS

Consider this more of a recipe suggestion than a hard and fast recipe, as these loaded tater tot nachos are fun to play around with, and you’ll need to eyeball the amounts depending on the size of your baking dish, your crowd, and your appetite. Replace the pulled pork with chicken or brisket and the refried beans with black beans if you like. Skip the olives if not your thing and add bacon if you want—it’s never not welcome.

Prep Time

20 Min

Cook Time

30 Min

Pellets

Hickory

INGREDIENTS

Totchos

Enough frozen tots to make at least 2 to 3 layers in your baking dish; 4 if very deep

Leftover pulled pork

Canned diced jalapeños

Sliced black olives

Refried beans

Nacho cheese sauce, warmed

Suggested Toppings

Salsa

Sour cream

Fresh jalapeños, thinly sliced

Shredded iceberg lettuce

Fresh cilantro, whole leaves or chopped

STEPS

Cook the tots according to package directions. Set aside.

Preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 400°F; this will take about 15 minutes.

400 ˚F / 204 ˚C

In a deep baking dish, add enough of the tots in a single layer to cover the bottom of the pan. Top with some of the pulled pork, jalapeños, and olives. Dollop some of the beans and then drizzle a decent (or decadent) amount of the cheese sauce over the nuggets.

Repeat these layers until you run out of room or ingredients, whichever comes first.

Transfer the pan to the grill grate and cook until heated through and crisp on the edges. The time this takes will vary depending on the number of layers involved but plan on about 30 minutes and begin checking earlier. To test if hot throughout, poke a skewer into the pan then place the tip of it on your wrist. It it’s hot you’re good to go.

400 ˚F / 204 ˚C

00:30

Transfer the baking dish to a heatproof surface. Use a knife to cut around the edges of the pan to loosen the totchos from it. Place a rimmed baking sheet or other large flat serving platter over the pan. Carefully, and using pot holders, flip the baking sheet and dish over. Remove the baking dish to reveal the tower of tots.

Serve the totchos with your favorite toppings and dig in. Enjoy!

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR TRAEGER LINEUP!!!

FREE info on quick steps to your best lawn!

Markf@mowersok.com (Mark Fuqua) — Mon, 13 Jan 2025 18:04:52 GMT

Determining which soil type you have, and the best grass and fertilizer types for it, are covered.

FREE info about how to have a better lawn.....the third point is important for sure.

Confused about grass? Feeling lost in the fertilizer aisle? Don't know what grows best in your soil? Don't worry, M&D Enterprises has got you covered!

Unlock the secrets to a lush, healthy lawn in just 5 minutes! Our video dives deep into soil types, different grass varieties, and the perfect fertilizer for each one! Don't waste money on the wrong stuff - learn what your lawn really needs!

Watch now and implement for less lawn struggles!

read the blog:

The Ultimate Guide to Perfect Lawns: Understanding Soil, Grass, and Fertilizer

Achieve a Lush, Green Lawn with the Right Products

Have you ever dreamed of having a picture-perfect lawn? One that is lush, green, and weed-free? Many homeowners struggle to maintain healthy lawns, but with the right knowledge and products, it's possible to achieve your dream.

This comprehensive guide delves into the essential elements of lawn care: soil types, grass varieties, and fertilizers. We'll provide valuable insights to help you choose the best products for your lawn's specific needs.

Understanding Your Soil: The Foundation of a Healthy Lawn

Healthy soil is the foundation of any thriving lawn. It provides the nutrients and support grass needs. Understanding your soil type and its characteristics is crucial.

There are four main soil types: clay, sandy, loamy, and peat. Each has unique properties affecting drainage, moisture retention, and plant growth.

Clay Soil:

Dense and heavy, clay soil hinders water drainage, leading to waterlogged roots and potential fungal diseases.

It's often low in nutrients, which can stunt plant growth.

Improve clay soil by adding organic matter like compost or peat moss to increase drainage and aeration. Lime can raise the pH level.

Sandy Soil:

Loose and well-draining, sandy soil doesn't retain moisture well, causing plants to dry out quickly.

Like clay, it's often low in nutrients.

Improve sandy soil by adding organic matter to help retain moisture. More frequent fertilizer applications replenish lost nutrients.

Loamy Soil:

Considered ideal for lawns, loamy soil balances drainage and moisture retention. It's also rich in nutrients.

If you have loamy soil, you have a great starting point!

Peat Soil:

Very acidic with low nutrient content, peat soil isn't ideal for most lawn grasses.

Raising the pH level and adding nutrients is necessary before planting grass in peat soil.

Testing Your Soil:

Determine your soil type and pH level by sending a sample to a local extension office or testing lab, or by using a home soil test kit. This knowledge allows you to take the necessary steps to improve your soil for a healthy lawn.

Choosing the Right Grass: Matching Grass to Your Environment

The right grass variety is essential. Different grasses have different needs for sunlight, water, and soil conditions.

Popular warm-season grasses include Bermuda, Zoysia, and St. Augustine. Cool-season grasses like Kentucky bluegrass, fescue, and ryegrass thrive in cooler climates.

Consider your climate, soil type, and personal preferences when choosing a grass. Drought-tolerant varieties are best for areas with limited rainfall.

Fertilizing Your Lawn: Providing Essential Nutrients

Fertilizers provide essential nutrients like nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium (NPK), promoting strong, healthy growth.

The amount of fertilizer depends on your soil type, grass type, and lawn condition. Always follow the instructions on the fertilizer label to avoid over-fertilizing, which can damage your lawn.

Choosing the Right Products for Your Lawn:

Now that you understand the basics of soil, grass, and fertilizer, you can make informed decisions about the products you use. Consider factors like:

Soil test results: This will tell you what nutrients your lawn is lacking.

Grass type: Different grasses have different nutrient needs.

Climate: Choose products that are appropriate for your region.

Desired results: Are you looking for a quick green-up or long-term soil health?

By carefully selecting the right products, you can create a beautiful and thriving lawn.

Conclusion:

Understanding your soil, choosing the right grass, and using the appropriate fertilizers are key to a beautiful and healthy lawn. By making informed choices about the products you use, you can achieve the lawn of your dreams.

Additional Tips:

Water deeply and infrequently to encourage deep root growth.

Mow regularly to maintain a healthy height.

Aerate annually to improve drainage and aeration.

Apply a pre-emergent herbicide in the spring to prevent weeds.

Regularly inspect for pests and diseases and take appropriate action.

By following these tips and choosing the right products, you can create a lawn that will be the envy of your neighbors.

Call to Action:

Explore our range of high-quality lawn care products at [mdenterprisesok.com] to find the perfect solutions for your lawn's needs.

Additional Resources:

[Your local extension office]

[The National Gardening Association]

[The Lawn Care Institute]

Check out our website and blogs for even more lawn care tips!

580.886.2345

MDenterprisesOK.com

For your best lawn, porch, patio, or acreage, we’re your people. Making your life easier with quality products and services at fair prices is our mission.

#LawnCare #LawnTips #FertilizerTips #Gardening #DIY #MDEnterprises #HealthyLawn #GreenThumb #GardeningLife

Other related Blogs from M&D:

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/oklahoma-essential-lawn-care-tips

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/repurpose-fall-leaves

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/aerating-tips-and-tricks

Please give our social media a look for more entertaining and informative information:

https://linktr.ee/mdenterprisesok

How to Store Your Mower for Winter

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 01:33:00 GMT

How to Properly Store Your Outdoor Power Equipment for Winter

As winter approaches, it's time to think about the health of your outdoor power equipment. Proper storage during the offseason isn't just about keeping things tidy—it’s critical to ensuring your tools, especially those with engines, are ready to perform when spring rolls around. Ignoring proper maintenance and storage can lead to costly repairs and unnecessary downtime.

Whether you’re storing a lawn mower, chainsaw, or other essential gear, follow these simple tips to ensure your equipment stays in great shape.

1. Stabilize Lawn Mower Fuel

2. Change the Oil and Filters

Why It’s Important : After a full season of mowing, your engine oil collects dirt, debris, and particles that can damage the engine if left unchanged.

Steps to Change Oil :

Drain the old oil into a container.
Replace the oil filter, lubricating the new filter gasket.
Add the correct type and amount of fresh oil.

Pro Tip : Take this opportunity to check and replace your air filter as well. A clogged air filter reduces engine power and fuel efficiency.

3. Maintain the Battery

Why It Matters : Batteries lose charge capacity when left idle for long periods. Connecting a battery tender or trickle charger prevents this issue.

Which Option to Choose?

Battery Tender : Charges when needed and pauses when the battery is full.
Trickle Charger : Applies a constant, low-level charge to maintain the battery.

Pro Tip : If you’re storing multiple tools, consider investing in a multi-bank battery tender for convenience.

4. Clean the Mower Deck

Why It’s Critical : Grass buildup under the deck can lead to corrosion, reduced performance, and uneven cuts.

Steps to Clean Your Deck :

Remove the blades and clean the deck with low-pressure water.
Sand off any rust and touch up bare metal with rust-resistant paint.

Learn more about caring for your mower deck in our comprehensive mower maintenance blog .

5. Inspect Belts and Blades

While your deck is off, inspect the mower belts and blades for wear and tear. Replace damaged blades and worn belts to avoid downtime in the spring.

Need replacement parts? Visit M&D Enterprises and Lawnmower Shops for genuine parts and accessories.

6. Upgrade Your Maintenance Game with Mechanic in a Bottle

Quick Fix for Fuel Problems : If you’re unsure about the condition of your fuel, add Mechanic in a Bottle to clean the fuel system and restore performance.

Curious about mechanic in a bottle? Check out our Mechanic in a Bottle blog .

Why Proper Storage Matters

By following these steps, you’re not just protecting your investment—you’re ensuring your equipment is ready to work hard next season. Proper maintenance and storage can save you time, money, and headaches when the busy spring season arrives.

Pro Tip : Pair these tips with a steel structure or portable building from M&D Enterprises to keep your equipment protected from the elements all winter long.

Don’t Wait Until It’s Too Late!

Ready to prep your equipment for winter? Visit M&D Enterprises for fuel stabilizers, battery tenders, oil filters, and more. Need help? Our expert technicians are just a call away.

Shop Now : www.mdenterprisesok.com

ENTREE: TRAEGER CHIPOTLE CHICKEN BOWL

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Mon, 06 Jan 2025 20:43:10 GMT

TRAEGER CHIPOTLE CHICKEN BOWL

Looking for something light, colorful, and bursting with flavor? Try this chipotle-spiced chicken bowl comes chock full of veggies and guacamole.

Prep Time

35 Min

Cook Time

30 Min

Pellets

Mesquite

INGREDIENTS

Marinade

1/4 Cup fresh squeezed lime juice

3 Tablespoon coarsely chopped shallot

3 Tablespoon chopped fresh cilantro

2 Tablespoon chopped chipotle chiles in adobo

3 garlic cloves smashed and peeled

2 Teaspoon agave syrup or honey

1 Teaspoon ground cumin

1 Teaspoon dried oregano

1 Teaspoon chile powder

1 Teaspoon kosher salt

1/2 Teaspoon ground coriander

1/3 Cup avocado oil or other neutral oil

1 1/2 Pound boneless, skinless chicken thighs

Bowls

1 ear of husked corn or 1 cup frozen fire-roasted corn kernels at room temperature

1 head Romaine lettuce, shredded

1/2 small head Savoy cabbage, shredded

1 large tomato sliced or diced

1 15-oz can black beans, rinsed well and drained

1/2 Cup homemade or store-bought guacamole

1/2 Cup crumbled Cotija cheese

1/4 Cup Mexican crema or sour cream mixed with a little lime juice (optional)

2 Tablespoon hand-torn epazote leaves (optional)

Crisped tortilla strips or tortilla chips, for serving

Steps

For the marinade: In a food processor or blender, combine the lime juice, shallot, cilantro, chipotle, garlic, agave, cumin, oregano, chile powder, salt, and coriander. Pulse or blend until fairly smooth. With the motor still running, add the oil and puree until all of the ingredients are combined.

Place the chicken thighs in a bowl, add half of the marinade, and coat the chicken thoroughly. Cover and refrigerate for at least 2 hours and up to 8 hours. Reserve the remaining marinade separately.

When ready to cook, preheat the Traeger to 400°F; this will take at least 15 minutes.

400 ˚F / 204 ˚C

Remove the chicken thighs from the marinade letting any excess marinade drip back into the bowl or bag. (Discard this marinade.) Insert a leave-in meat thermometer into the center of the thickest chicken thigh. Transfer the thighs to the hot grill grates and cook until the internal temperature reaches 170°F, 25 to 35 minutes.

400 ˚F / 204 ˚C

00:15

Transfer the thighs to a cutting board to rest briefly. If using corn on the cob, grill it, turning it occasionally, until some kernels are charred, then remove the kernels from the cob. Cut the the chicken thighs into bite-size pieces.

400 ˚F / 204 ˚C

170 ˚F / 77 ˚C

00:25

To assemble the bowls, toss the lettuce and cabbage in a large mixing bowl. Drizzle with 2 to 3 tablespoons of the reserved marinade, then divide among 4 serving bowls. Arrange the corn, tomato, black beans, guacamole, and cheese in clusters on top of the lettuce and cabbage. Top with the chicken, drizzle with some of the remaining marinade. Finish with a drizzle of Mexican crema and the epazote leaves, if using. Serve with tortilla strips or chips. Enjoy!

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR TRAEGER LINEUP!!!

APPETIZER: TRAEGER SMOKED DEVILED EGGS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Sat, 28 Dec 2024 16:21:10 GMT

TRAEGER SMOKED DEVILED EGGS

Whip hard boiled egg yolks with savory spices & smoke them on the Traeger for a holiday appetizer that's finger-licking delicious.

Prep Time

15 Min

Cook Time

45 Min

Pellets

Hickory

INGREDIENTS

12 Large eggs

2 Whole jalapeño

2 Slices bacon

1/2 Cup Mayonnaise

2 Teaspoon white vinegar

2 Teaspoon Mustard

1/2 Teaspoon chili powder

1/2 Teaspoon paprika

1/4 Teaspoon Salt

2 Tablespoon chives, chopped

Steps

Bring a large pot of water to boil, add eggs and cook for 9 minutes. Remove and rinse in cold water. Once cool enough to handle, peel the eggs and slice in half.

When ready to cook, set grill temperature to 180℉ and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes.

Place the eggs (yolk side up) and jalapeno peppers on the grill. Close the grill and allow to smoke for 45 minutes.

180 ˚F / 82 ˚C

00:45

Super Smoke

Meanwhile, cook the bacon until crispy. Allow to cool and chop until they become bits.

Remove eggs and jalapenos from the Traeger.

Slice top off the jalapenos, slice in half, remove seeds with a spoon and dice very finely.

In a medium bowl carefully scoop the yolks out of the eggs. Add the jalapeno peppers, 1 tbsp bacon bits, mayo, vinegar, mustard, chili powder, paprika, and salt. Using a fork, mash the mixture together and taste for seasoning. Add more salt if needed.

Using either a piping bag with your largest tip, or a teaspoon, fill each egg white with about 2-3 tsp of the yolk mixture.

Top with a sprinkle of paprika and bacon bits and chopped chives. Enjoy!

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR TRAEGER PRODUCTS!!

ENTREES: TRAEGER PECAN STICKY BUNS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Tue, 17 Dec 2024 21:03:41 GMT

TRAEGER PECAN STICKY BUNS

What’s better than the smell of warm cinnamon sticky buns in the morning? How about those buns being covered in rich, gooey caramel sauce and topped with pecans? Thanks to Dennis Prescott’s easy, make-ahead recipe, this dream can become a reality. Do note that the buns should be assembled at least 8 hours ahead of baking, so plan accordingly.

INGREDIENTS -9 SERVINGS

Dough

1 1/8 Cup whole milk

1/2 Cup salted butter cut into ½-inch cubes

1/2 Cup granulated sugar

1 1/8 Tablespoon active dry yeast

4 1/2 Cup all-purpose flour, divided, plus more for dusting

1 1/8 Teaspoon salt

2 1/4 large eggs

2 1/4 Teaspoon pure vanilla extract

Vegetable oil, for the bowl

Caramel Heaven

1/2 Cup butter

1 1/8 Cup packed dark brown sugar

1 1/8 Cup heavy cream

1/2 Cup maple syrup

1/4 sea salt

Filling

1/2 Cup packed dark brown sugar

1 1/8 Teaspoon ground cinnamon

2 1/4 Tablespoon butter, melted

1 2/3 Cup pecan halves, chopped

steps

The night before, get the dough ready: In a small saucepan, combine the milk, butter, and sugar and heat the mixture over medium-low heat, giving it a stir every minute or so. When the butter has melted and the sugar has dissolved entirely, remove the pan from the heat. Be careful not to let the milk boil. If it gets close, remove the pan from the heat and let it chill out for a few minutes.

Ingredients

1 1/8 Cup whole milk

1/2 Cup salted butter cut into ½-inch cubes

1/2 Cup granulated sugar

Sprinkle the yeast over the milk mixture and let it sit and bubble and do what it does best. After about 15 minutes, it’ll be good to go.

Ingredients

1 1/8 Tablespoon active dry yeast

While the yeast is coming to life, in the bowl of a stand mixer fitted with a dough hook, combine 2 cups of the flour and the salt. With the mixer on low, crack in the eggs and pour in the vanilla. Slowly stream the yeast mixture into the flour. Turn off the mixer, add the remaining 2 cups flour, and crank the mixer back on medium speed. Let the dough knead away for about 5 minutes, until all the flour is combined. Turn the mixer speed to high and let it go to town, kneading that dough for another 5 minutes.

Ingredients

4 1/2 Cup all-purpose flour, divided, plus more for dusting

1 1/8 Teaspoon salt

2 1/4 large eggs

2 1/4 Teaspoon pure vanilla extract

Transfer the dough to a large, lightly oiled bowl, cover with plastic wrap, and give it a home somewhere warm for about 1½ hours, or until doubled in size.

Ingredients

Vegetable oil, for the bowl

While the dough is rising, make the caramel heaven: In a small saucepan, combine the butter, brown sugar, cream, maple syrup, and salt. Bring the mixture to a boil over medium heat, then reduce the heat to medium-low and let the mixture simmer away for 5 minutes until the caramel is a deep golden brown and has reduced slightly. Caramel is crazy hot and can easily make for a bad day. Please keep your day awesome. (Time bonus! This saucy business can be prepared several days ahead and kept in an airtight container in the fridge.)

Ingredients

1/2 Cup butter

1 1/8 Cup packed dark brown sugar

1 1/8 Cup heavy cream

1/2 Cup maple syrup

1/4 sea salt

Transfer the dough to a lightly floured surface. Roll it out into a 12x24-inch rectangle that’s about ½ inch thick.

Make the filling: In a small bowl, combine the brown sugar and cinnamon. Brush the dough with the melted butter, then sprinkle the brown sugar mixture on top, leaving just under 1 inch of space around the edges. Working on the long side, roll the dough up into a long jelly roll-style situation. Cut the roll crosswise into 9 large buns.

Ingredients

1/2 Cup packed dark brown sugar

1 1/8 Teaspoon ground cinnamon

2 1/4 Tablespoon butter, melted

Pour the caramel sauce evenly over the bottom of a 9x13-inch baking pan and sprinkle the pecans on top. Add the buns to the pan, cut side up. Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate overnight or for at least 8 hours.

Ingredients

1 2/3 Cup pecan halves, chopped

When ready to bake, preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 350°F; this will take about 15 minutes.

350 ˚F / 177 ˚C

Let the buns sit on the counter for 10 minutes to lose their chill. Transfer the baking dish to the Traeger and bake until golden brown on top, cooked through, and entirely delicious, 35 to 45 minutes.

350 ˚F / 177 ˚C

Let the buns hang out in the pan for 10 minutes then run a knife around the edges of the pan in case any caramel decided to stick. Turn the buns out onto serving board so that the gorgeous caramel is on top. These are best enjoyed while still warm and fresh but will be delicious for a couple of days, stored in an airtight container at room temperature. Just warm them up before serving if you by some crazy chance have any left the next day.

click here to check out our traeger lineup

ENTREES: TRAEGER GRILLED LOBSTER WITH LEMON GARLIC BUTTER

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Wed, 11 Dec 2024 15:53:46 GMT

TRAEGER GRILLED LOBSTER WITH LEMON GARLIC BUTTER

Bring a little surf to your turf and take a page from Dennis The Prescott’s cookbook.

You’ll be dreaming about this smoky ocean dweller for a long time.

Prep Time

15 Min

Cook Time

20 Min

Pellets

Hickory

INGREDIENTS

main

4 Whole (1-1/2 lb) live lobsters

2 Whole lemons, sliced

flat-leaf parsley, for serving

Lemon Garlic Butter

3/4 Cup butter, softened

2 Tablespoon flat-leaf parsley, finely chopped

1 Tablespoon minced shallot

2 Clove garlic, minced

1 Tablespoon lemon zest

1 Tablespoon lemon juice

1/2 Teaspoon Sea salt

1/2 Teaspoon freshly cracked black pepper

steps

Bring a large stockpot of water to a rapid boil. Working in batches as necessary,

dispatch the Lobster. First, place the tip of a sharp chefs knife in the Lobster's back, just below its head,

and working quickly slice through the head dispatching the Lobster.

Submerge the lobster in the boiling water head first, then cover with a lid.

Cook for 2 minutes, until bright red, then transfer to an ice-bath to cool and stop the cooking process, about 5 minutes.

Using a very sharp knife, split the lobster into 2 halves. Clean out the tomalley from the body and discard.

In a medium bowl, mix the softened butter with the parsely, minced shallot, minced garlic, lemon zest and lemon juice.

Season with sea salt and fresh cracked pepper. Whisk together until smooth. Set aside.

When ready to cook, set grill temperature to 425° F (215 C) and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes.

When hot, place the lobsters on the grill, flesh side down, and cook for 4 minutes.

Turn, and spoon about 2 tsp of compound butter onto each lobster half.

As the butter begins to melt, baste with a brush all over the flesh.

Cook for 4-5 minutes until cooked through and coated in melted butter.

Serve immediately with sliced lemons. Enjoy!

click here to check out our traeger lineup!!

ENTREES: BLACKSTONE SPICY CHICKEN SANDWICH

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Wed, 04 Dec 2024 17:20:29 GMT

BLACKSTONE SPICY CHICKEN SANDWICH

Get ready to spice up your mealtime with a sandwich that’s equal parts heat and flavor! Juicy, crispy chicken is paired with bold seasonings, creamy sauces, and just the right amount of kick—all perfectly toasted on the Blackstone griddle. Whether you're a heat seeker or just craving a delicious twist on a classic, this spicy chicken sandwich is sure to become your new favorite. Let’s fire it up!

Servings

3-4

Prep Time

10 minutes

Cook Time

10-15 minutes

Ingredients

Breading Mix:

1 – 2 cups of panko

Breading Slurry:

1 egg

½ cup buttermilk

1-2 tablespoon hot sauce

½ teaspoon pepper

½ cup self-rising flour

3-4 chicken breast cutlets

1 cup avocado oil

4 potato rolls

2 tablespoons mayonnaise

Lettuce

Tomatoes

Directions

Pre warm griddle to low heat.

Set up a breading station with two different bowls. Add panko to one and add slurry items to the other and mix it well.

Bread chicken cutlets by placing into the slurry bowl first then placing into the panko.

Add oil to the griddle and after warm, add chicken to the griddle. Flip after 3-4 mins on each side until the chicken reaches 165 degrees.

Add mayo to buns and toast on the griddle for 1 – 2 mins on each side. Remove.

Add more mayo then add lettuce, chicken breast, then tomato. Season tomato with salt and pepper.

Serve and enjoy!

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUR BLACKSTONE LINE UP!!!

APPETIZER: BLACKSTONE GRILLED CHEESE HOT DOGS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Wed, 20 Nov 2024 16:45:00 GMT

BLACKSTONE GRILLED CHEESE HOT DOGS

Craving the ultimate comfort food mash-up? Look no further than Grilled Cheese Hot Dogs on the Blackstone! Imagine the crispy, buttery goodness of a classic grilled cheese wrapped around a savory hot dog, all sizzling to perfection on the griddle. Perfect for backyard cookouts, quick dinners, or whenever you want to level up your favorite childhood snacks, these grilled cheese hot dogs bring together melty cheese, juicy hot dogs, and that satisfying crunch—all in one bite! Grab your spatula and let’s get grilling!

Servings

4-5

Prep Time

10 minutes

Cook Time

15 minutes

Ingredients

1 pack of hotdogs, scored

1 pack of Hawaiian dinner rolls

1-2 teaspoons Blackstone SPG

1 lb shredded cheese

2 tablespoons mayonnaise (optional)

¼ cup honey mustard

Directions

Score the hotdogs in a cross-hatch pattern.

Preheat the griddle on low heat.

Place the hotdogs on the griddle, season with SPG, and cook to your preferred doneness.

Cut the Hawaiian rolls on top to open slightly, and spread mayonnaise inside (if desired).

Slice the hotdogs in half.

Add shredded cheese to each roll, place a hotdog half inside, and top with more cheese.

Sprinkle extra cheese on the griddle and press each roll onto the cheese, cooking for 2-3 minutes until the cheese crisps up on the bottom.

Serve with honey mustard or a dipping sauce of your choice.

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR BLACKSTONE LINEUP

ENTREES: TRAEGER CHEESY SKILLET CORNBREAD WITH PEPPERONCINI

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Tue, 12 Nov 2024 16:31:40 GMT

TRAEGER CHEESY SKILLET CORNBREAD WITH PEPPRONCINI

This old fashioned cornbread recipe comes courtesy of Momma Rodgers, the mother of Traeger's own senior creative director. Its super moist texture is reminiscent of spoonbread, but it’ll hold together when sliced. A little cheesy and a little spicy, it not only pairs well with turkey and all the fixings, but it also tastes great with chili.

Prep Time

10 Min

Cook Time

45 Min

Pellets

Turkey Blend

INGREDIENTS

Cooking spray

1 Cup stone ground yellow cornmeal

2 Teaspoon baking powder

1/2 Teaspoon salt

2 large eggs

1 8.5-oz can cream style corn

4 Ounce salted butter melted and slightly cooled

1 Cup sour cream

1 Cup grated cheddar cheese

3 jarred pepperoncini, seeded and finely chopped

Very lightly spray an 8-inch square baking dish or 9-inch cast-iron skillet with cooking spray. Preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 350°F; this will take about 15 minutes.

In a medium bowl, whisk the cornmeal, baking powder, and salt. Add the eggs, corn, butter, and sour cream and beat with a spoon until just combined. Stir in the cheese and the pepperoncini. Scrape into the prepared baking dish.

Transfer to the grill grates and bake until the bread is set and browning on the edges, about 45 minutes.

Let cool briefly before slicing and serving. Enjoy!

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR FULL LINE OF TRAEGER GRILLS !!

ENTREES: TRAEGER TURKEY STUFFING BACON BALLS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Wed, 06 Nov 2024 22:11:43 GMT

TRAEGER TURKEY STUFFING BACON BALLS

When your Thanksgiving feast has a cornucopia of leftovers, create these fun & delicious bacon-wrapped stuffing bombs.

Prep Time

5 Min

Cook Time

25 Min

Pellets

Apple

INREDIENTS

1 Can (16 oz) cranberry sauce

1 jalapeño, seeded and finely diced

3 Cup prepared stuffing

1 Cup shredded cooked turkey

6 Slices bacon, cut in half

Steps

In a small saucepan, combine cranberry sauce and jalapeños. Bring to a boil over medium-high heat then reduce the heat to a simmer. Cook for 4 to 5 minutes then remove from the heat and allow to cool.

When ready to cook, set Traeger temperature to 375°F and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes.

Start by filling the palm of your hand with approximately 1/4 cup of the stuffing. Use your thumb to create an indentation. Fill the indentation with a heaping tablespoon of the shredded turkey and then close the stuffing all around to form into a ball.

Wrap the ball of stuffing with half a piece of bacon and hold in place with a toothpick, if necessary. Repeat until all of the balls are made.

When ready to cook, place the stuffing balls directly on the grill grate and cook for 25 to 30 minutes, turning once. (The bacon should be crisp.)

Remove from grill and serve with cranberry jalapeño jelly. Enjoy!

CLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR TRAEGER LINEUP!!!

ENTREES: BLACKSTONE HOT HONEY RANCH CHICKEN BURGERS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Tue, 29 Oct 2024 21:42:08 GMT

BLACKSTONE HOT HONEY RANCH CHICKEN BURGERS

Get ready for a flavor-packed twist on the classic chicken burger with this Hot Honey Ranch Chicken Burger! Juicy grilled chicken topped with a spicy-sweet drizzle of hot honey, cool ranch dressing, and your favorite crisp toppings make this burger the perfect balance of sweet heat and creamy goodness. Ideal for summer grilling or anytime you’re craving something a little bold, this recipe will be your new go-to for burger night!

Servings

Prep Time

5 minutes

Cook Time

5 minutes

Ingredients

1 ½ lbs. ground chicken

¼ cup grated Parmesan cheese

2 tablespoons chopped parsley

Blackstone Bootleg Burger Seasoning, to taste

8 slices Colby Jack cheese

¼ cup honey

2 tablespoons hot sauce (e.g., Cholula)

1 tablespoon red pepper flakes

4 ciabatta rolls, sliced

Ranch dressing

Bibb or butter lettuce

Red onion, thinly sliced

Tomato, thinly sliced

Directions

In a large mixing bowl, combine the ground chicken, grated Parmesan, chopped parsley, and Blackstone Bootleg Burger Seasoning to taste.

Mix until evenly combined.

Heat your Blackstone griddle to high and add a small amount of olive oil.

Divide the chicken mixture into 2-3 oz. portions and shape each portion into a meatball. Place each meatball onto the hot griddle, then

flatten thinly using a burger smasher and a piece of parchment paper.

In a small bowl, mix together the honey, hot sauce, and red pepper flakes until well blended.

Toast the ciabatta buns on the griddle until golden. Flip the chicken patties once browned, and spoon some hot honey sauce over the cooked side of each patty. Place a slice of Colby Jack cheese on top.

Spread a drizzle of ranch dressing on the bottom half of each toasted bun. Add a layer of lettuce, then double stack the chicken patties on top. Finish with tomato, red onion, an additional drizzle of ranch dressing, and more hot honey sauce if desired. Place the top bun and serve hot.

click here to check out our blackstone lineup

The Advantage of Cellular Game Cameras

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Tue, 29 Oct 2024 15:20:42 GMT

Get Real-Time Updates Directly to Your Phone

As a hunter, the excitement of scouting for a trophy buck can be easily dampened by the old-school game camera routine—driving to your hunting property, swapping out SD cards, and then waiting to see what’s been captured. You could be missing that crucial moment when the perfect buck passes by, simply because you weren’t there at the right time. The hassle of constant trips just to check your camera keeps you from fully enjoying your hunt, and it eats away at your precious time. Every missed opportunity makes you question, "What if I had known sooner?"

Our cellular game cameras come packed with features that give you an edge over traditional models. Here’s why they’re the best choice for serious hunters:

Real-Time Photo Delivery: Get instant notifications and photos sent straight to your phone as soon as motion is detected, so you always know what’s happening in the field.
360 degree capability: Designed to capture every angle, our 360 degree option ensures you capture a full photo of that trophy buck. Even if he's just cruising by looking for does.
Weatherproof Design: Built to withstand the elements, these cameras work in all conditions—from rain and snow to extreme heat.

A Green Thumb for Western Oklahoma:

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Tue, 15 Oct 2024 15:00:00 GMT

Essential Lawn Care Tips:

Western Oklahoma's unique climate, characterized by hot summers and often harsh winters, presents specific challenges for maintaining a lush, healthy lawn. However, with the right care and attention, you can achieve a beautiful green oasis in your backyard. Here are some critical tips for lawn care in this region:

Understanding Your Soil

Soil Testing: Conduct a soil test to determine the nutrient levels, pH, and texture of your soil. This information will guide your fertilization and watering practices.
Soil Amendments: Amend your soil with organic matter, such as compost, to improve its structure, water retention, and nutrient content.

Watering Wisely

Deep Watering: Water deeply and infrequently, encouraging roots to grow deeper into the soil. This helps your lawn withstand drought conditions better.
Avoid Overwatering: Excessive watering can lead to fungal diseases and root rot. Aim for 1-2 inches of water per week, depending on your soil type and weather conditions.

Fertilizing Effectively

Timing: Fertilize your lawn in the spring and fall when it's actively growing. Avoid fertilizing during dormancy or periods of extreme heat.
Balanced Fertilizer: Use a balanced fertilizer that contains nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in appropriate ratios.
Slow-Release Fertilizers: Opt for slow-release fertilizers to provide a steady supply of nutrients over time.

Mowing Properly

Blade Height: Mow your lawn at a height of 2.5-3 inches to promote deeper roots and shade the soil, helping to retain moisture.
Sharp Blades: Ensure your mower blades are sharp to prevent ragged cuts that can stress the grass.
Bagging vs. Mulching: Decide whether to bag or mulch your clippings based on your lawn's needs and preferences. Mulching can add organic matter to your soil, but excessive clippings can smother the grass.

Weed Control

Prevention: Prevent weeds by maintaining a healthy, dense lawn. Regular mowing, proper watering, and fertilization can help outcompete weeds.
Selective Herbicides: Use selective herbicides to target specific weeds without harming your lawn. Read the label carefully and follow application instructions.

Pest Management

Monitor for Pests: Keep an eye out for common lawn pests like grubs, chinch bugs, and armyworms.
Integrated Pest Management (IPM): Use a combination of cultural practices, biological controls, and chemical treatments as needed to manage pests effectively.

By following these essential lawn care tips, you can cultivate a thriving and beautiful lawn in Western Oklahoma, even in the face of challenging weather conditions. Remember to adapt your practices based on your specific soil type, climate, and lawn's needs. With a little effort and attention, you'll be enjoying a lush, green oasis in no time!

580.886.2345

MDenterprisesOK.com

For your best lawn, porch, patio, or acreage, we’re your people. Making your life easier with quality products and services at fair prices is our mission.

#LawnCare #LawnTips #FertilizerTips #Gardening #DIY #MDEnterprises #HealthyLawn #GreenThumb #GardeningLife

Other related Blogs from M&D:

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/repurpose-fall-leaves

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/aerating-tips-and-tricks

Please give our social media a look for more entertaining and informative information:

https://linktr.ee/mdenterprisesok

ENTREES: BLACKSTONE GLAZED DONUT SMASH BURGERS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Tue, 08 Oct 2024 18:33:17 GMT

BLACKSTONE GLAZED DONUT SMASH BURGERS

Get ready to elevate your burger game with a mouthwatering twist! These Blackstone Glazed Donut Smash Burgers combine the classic, savory smash burger with the sweet indulgence of a glazed donut bun. Perfectly cooked patties, melty cheese, and that irresistible donut glaze come together for an unexpected, unforgettable treat that’ll have everyone asking for seconds. Ready to savor the sweet-and-savory goodness? Let’s dive in!

Ingredients

Glazed donuts (cut in half to use as buns)

80/20 ground beef

American cheese slices

Whiskey burger seasoning

Directions

1. Carefully slice the glazed donuts in half to use as buns.

2. Shape the ground beef into small balls, about the size of a golf ball.

3. Generously season the burger meat with Whiskey Burger Seasoning.

4. Heat a griddle or skillet on high heat and smash the burger balls flat.

5. Flip the burgers once they’ve developed a good crust, then immediately top each with a slice of American cheese.

6. Once the cheese has melted and the burgers are fully cooked, place the patty between the glazed donut halves to create your burger.

7. Now it's time to taste and decide: Are they good, great, or just a gimmick?

click here to Check out our line of blackstone products!

Creative Ways to Repurpose Fall Leaves and Enjoy Your Yard Year-Round

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Fri, 04 Oct 2024 15:00:00 GMT

Don't let your leaves go to waste this fall

As homeowners, we all love the changing seasons, but there’s one problem that comes with fall: piles and piles of leaves. Raking, bagging, and hauling leaves can be a tedious, never-ending chore. But what if I told you that instead of dreading this seasonal task, you could turn those leaves into something beneficial for your yard?

Mulch: Shredded leaves make an excellent, natural mulch that helps retain moisture and regulate soil temperature.

Compost: Fall leaves are a perfect addition to your compost pile, breaking down into nutrient-rich organic matter that can feed your plants for years.

Insulation: Spread a thick layer of leaves over garden beds for winter insulation, protecting your plants from frost and cold snaps.

Leaf Mold: Pile your leaves in a corner, keep them moist, and over time they’ll break down into leaf mold—a rich soil amendment that’s better than any store-bought option.

Our approach focuses on turning your annual leaf problem into a year-round benefit. With these repurposing strategies, you’re not just tidying up your yard—you’re investing in its long-term health.

580.886.2345

MDenterprisesOK.com

For your best lawn, porch, patio, or acreage, we’re your people. Making your life easier with quality products and services at fair prices is our mission.

#LawnCare #LawnTips #FertilizerTips #Gardening #DIY #MDEnterprises #HealthyLawn #GreenThumb #GardeningLife

Other related Blogs from M&D:

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/oklahoma-essential-lawn-care-tips

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/aerating-tips-and-tricks

Please give our social media a look for more entertaining and informative information:

https://linktr.ee/mdenterprisesok

Why Aerating Your Lawn Is the Secret to a Healthier Yard

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Tue, 17 Sep 2024 15:00:00 GMT

Expert Tips and Tricks For Aerating Your Lawn

Every homeowner dreams of a lush, green lawn, but achieving that dream can be tricky, especially if your lawn is suffering from compacted soil. Over time, foot traffic, weather, and regular use can compress the soil, making it difficult for air, water, and nutrients to reach the grass roots. If your lawn looks patchy, is slow to grow, or feels hard underfoot, you’re likely facing compacted soil. That’s when the importance of aerating your lawn becomes clear. The solution isn't just about giving your grass a fighting chance—it's about ensuring it thrives, and that's what drives homeowners to take action. But you can't just dive into lawn care with any tool; you need the right one for the job.

When is the Best Time to Aerate?

Aeration works best when done just before or during periods of high growth. However, not immediately preceding or during periods of stress to the lawn. For example, heat or drought. The type of grasses that make up your lawn will determine the best time of year to aerate.

When to Aerate if You Have Cool-Season Grasses: If you’re working with cool-season grasses, including bluegrass, fescue, and ryegrass, aerating during the growth periods in the spring and fall is best. However, if you aerate in the spring make sure to do it early in the season to avoid rising temperatures that will put stress on your lawn.

When to Aerate if You Have Warm-Season Grasses: For warm-season grasses such as Bermudagrass, buffalograss, St. Augustine and zoysiagrass, aerate your yard during warm times of the year, between late-spring and early-autumn.

Considerations for Aerating in the Spring: In the spring, if possible, wait until you’ve mowed the lawn at least once or twice before aerating. This is tricky in northern climates where the spring season is usually condensed. However, mowing before aerating ensures the lawn will grow fast enough to recover and take advantage of the increased pore space and air exchange at the root zone that aeration creates.

One caveat, says Friell, is that any disturbance of the root zone in the spring can increase weed competition by bringing buried seeds to the surface. “Applying fertilizer and a pre-emergent weed killer following aeration can reduce the potential for weed competition and increase the hardiness of the grasses. But don’t apply a weed killer if you plan to overseed following aeration. It will prevent germination of the seed you put down.”

Considerations for Aerating in the Fall: “Aeration should be performed early enough in the fall that the turf can recover before it needs to prepare for winter dormancy,” Friell said.

In addition to it being among the best times to aerate your lawn, fall is also a great season to overseed. However, if you plan to overseed, do so quickly after aerating your yard so that your seeds start growing into grass before a freeze moves in.

Part of why getting the timing right is so important is because if you’re doing spike or core aeration (the most popular method), the process will puncture holes into your lawn, which allows air to spread while reducing surface compaction in the aerated area. As these holes are punctured, water and fertilizer can more easily reach the roots below your turf.

How Often Should You Aerate Your Lawn?

Friell says eration should be performed at least once per year on most lawns. Lawns with compacted soil or soil with high clay content may benefit from aeration twice annually. It’s also good practice to aerate twice annually if your lawn gets a lot of foot traffic.

3 Things To Do After Aerating Your Lawn

Watering after aeration is always a good idea. As Friell said, lawns should not be aerated when turf is wet, or the dirt contains enough moisture to be muddy.
Apply an application of fertilizer and weed killer shortly following aeration. However, be sure to skip the weed killer if you’re going to overseed following aeration.
Overseed after aeration so seeds can take advantage of the disturbed surface. This creates better seed-to-soil contact, which encourages successful germination.

Following core aeration, it’s fine to leave the soil plugs in your yard that were pulled up during aeration. The plugs will typically decompose after a couple weeks. If you use the spike or liquid aeration, there won’t be any plugs.

580.886.2345

MDenterprisesOK.com

For your best lawn, porch, patio, or acreage, we’re your people. Making your life easier with quality products and services at fair prices is our mission.

#LawnCare #LawnTips #FertilizerTips #Gardening #DIY #MDEnterprises #HealthyLawn #GreenThumb #GardeningLife

Other related Blogs from M&D:

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/oklahoma-essential-lawn-care-tips

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/repurpose-fall-leaves

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/aerating-tips-and-tricks

Please give our social media a look for more entertaining and informative information:

https://linktr.ee/mdenterprisesok

Sources :

Toro Yardcare Blog

“When to Aerate Your Lawn“, Bayer Advanced, Web. Accessed Jan. 28, 2016

Day, Julie, “Spring Lawn Care Guide“, TodaysHomeowner.com, Web. Accessed Jan. 28, 2016

Fresenburg, Brad S. “Spring Lawn Care — Aeration, Fertility and Crabgrass Control“, University of Missouri Integrated Pest Management, Web. March 15, 2012

Juror, Richard and Wallace, Greg, “Properly Aerating Lawns“, Iowa State University Extension and Outreach, Web. Aug. 12, 2015

Entrees: Blackstone Garlic Parmesan Chicken Skewers

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 06 Sep 2024 17:44:10 GMT

BLACKSTONE GARLIC PARMESAN CHICKEN SKEWERS

Looking for a crowd-pleaser? Try these easy and delicious Garlic Parmesan Chicken Skewers at your next gathering or as a simple weeknight dinner option.

Servings

15 medium skewers

Prep Time

10 minutes

Cook Time

10 minutes

Ingredients

4 boneless chicken breasts, cubed
15 medium-sized skewers

Marinade

1 tbsp. oil
1 tsp grated garlic
1 tsp garlic salt
1 tsp paprika
1 tsp oregano
2 tsp Italian seasoning (Blackstone Tuscan Herb or Tutto Italiano)
1.5 tsp Blackstone Bayou Blend (Cajun seasoning)
2 tbsp. Parmesan cheese
¼ cup Dukes Mayo

Garlic Butter

1 stick unsalted butter, melted
2 tbsp. fresh grated garlic
½ tsp garlic salt
1.5 tbsp. flat-leaf parsley, chopped
2 tbsp. Parmesan cheese
Pinch of crushed red pepper

Directions

Cube the chicken and place it in a large bowl. Add the marinade ingredients, coating the chicken evenly. Marinate for at least 20 minutes, or up to overnight.
Thread the chicken onto the skewers. Preheat the Blackstone griddle to medium to medium-high heat and add a thin layer of oil. Place the skewers on the griddle and cook for 2-3 minutes on each of the four sides.
While the chicken is cooking, mix the garlic butter ingredients in a small bowl. In the last couple of minutes of cooking, brush the chicken skewers with the garlic butter on both sides. Plate the skewers, garnish with more Parmesan cheese if desired, and enjoy !

CLICK HERE to check out our full line of BLACKSTONE products!!!!!!

ENTREES: BLACKSTONE BREAKFAST CRUNCHWRAPS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Wed, 28 Aug 2024 18:00:00 GMT

BLACKSTONE BREAKFAST CRUNCHWRAPS

Sizzle up your morning with golden, crispy breakfast crunchwraps on the Blackstone griddle.

Servings

3-4

Prep Time

5 minutes

Cook Time

15 minutes

Ingredients

Large tortillas

Crispy tostadas

Frozen tater tots (1/2 bag)

Chorizo (1 lb)

Eggs

Shredded Colby Jack cheese (1 bag)

Jalapeños (2-3)

Cilantro (1/3 cup, chopped)

Red onion (1/2)

Red wine vinegar (1/3 cup)

Kosher salt

Coarse black pepper

Olive oil (2-3 tbsp)

Directions

Preheat your Blackstone griddle to medium heat.

Julienne cut half a red onion and slice up two jalapeños. Add them to a small bowl along with 1/3 cup of red wine vinegar, 2-3 tbsp of olive oil, a pinch of salt, and pepper. Mix well and set aside to marinate.

Add frozen tater tots to the Blackstone and cook, tossing occasionally, until golden brown and crispy.

Next to the tater tots, add chorizo and cook until done. About 80% of the way through cooking, create a well in the center of the chorizo and crack three eggs into the middle. Season with salt and pepper, mix the eggs into the chorizo, and cook until done. Add about a cup of shredded cheese (more or less if desired), mix well, and move the mixture off to the side when done.

Place a tortilla on your cutting board. In the center of the tortilla, add a small portion of tater tots and smash them down. Top with some of the chorizo-egg mixture, followed by pickled onions and jalapeños, a crispy tostada, and a bit of cheese in the center. Fold the tortilla over the filling, using the melting cheese to "glue" the folds in place. Fold the tortilla in a circular pattern until it is fully enclosed.

Return the folded wrap to the Blackstone griddle, folded side down, to seal the tortilla with the melted cheese. Cook until golden brown on both sides. Remove when done and serve with your favorite hot sauce. Enjoy!

CLICK HERE TO cHECK OUT OUR LATEST BLACKSTONE BLOG!

One Grill, Endless Possibilities

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Mon, 19 Aug 2024 14:00:00 GMT

Why Your Blackstone Grill Is More Than a Breakfast Machine

Expanding Beyond Breakfast with Blackstone Griddles:

When most people think of griddles, breakfast immediately comes to mind-pancakes, eggs, bacon, and all those morning delights. However, this limited mindset might be holding you back from fully utilizing your Blackstone griddle. Homeowners like you want to enjoy their outdoor cooking experience to the fullest, not just in the morning but all day long. But, with so many cooking appliances out there, it can be challenging to find one that meets all your needs.

Missing Out on Versatility in Outdoor Cooking:

Unlock the Full Potential of Your Blackstone Griddle:

What if we told you that your Blackstone griddle is much more than a breakfast station? By embracing the full capabilities of your griddle, you can sear steaks to perfection, stir-fry vegetables, cook juicy burgers, and even whip up desserts like grilled peaches or crepes. With the right approach, your Blackstone can become the go-to appliance for all your meals, making outdoor cooking more enjoyable and satisfying than ever before. Trust us, once you start exploring its potential, you’ll never look at griddles the same way again.

Why We’re the Experts You Can Trust:

What Sets Us Apart:

Unleashing the Features of Your Blackstone Griddle:

Let’s talk about what makes the Blackstone griddle so special. It’s not just the large cooking surface or the easy-to-use design. The real magic lies in its ability to handle any cooking challenge you throw at it. With a Blackstone griddle, you can control the heat across multiple zones, allowing you to cook different types of food simultaneously. It’s perfect for everything from quick weeknight dinners to elaborate weekend feasts. Plus, with its durable construction and easy maintenance, it’s built to last, making it a smart investment for any home cook.

So, the next time you fire up your Blackstone griddle, remember—it’s not just for breakfast. It’s your all-in-one solution for a diverse range of meals, all day long. Ready to get cooking? Let’s make every meal an adventure.

DESSERT: TRAEGER CHOCOLATE CREAM PIE

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Wed, 14 Aug 2024 16:02:19 GMT

TRAEGER CHOCOLATE CREAM PIE

Matt Pittman's recipe takes this silky chocolate classic for a wood-fired spin. Using a pre-made crust makes it as simple to make as it is delicious.

Prep Time

10 Min

Cook Time

30 Min

Pellets

Cherry

INGREDIENTS

1 pre-made pie shell, unbaked

2 Cup whole milk

2/3 Cup Sugar

3 Large egg yolks, beaten

1/4 Teaspoon kosher salt

2 Tablespoon cocoa powder

3 Tablespoon (heaping) cornstarch

1/2 Teaspoon vanilla extract

Whipped cream, for serving

Chocolate bar, for shaving (optional)

Steps

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 400°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Place the pie shell on the grill grates and bake according to the package instructions. Remove from the grill and let cool to room temperature.

Meanwhile, set up a double boiler and bring the water to a simmer. Add the milk, sugar, egg yolks, salt, cocoa powder, and cornstarch to the top of the double boiler and whisk until completely combined. Cook, whisking constantly, until thickened, 10-15 minutes. Remove the custard from the heat and let cool to room temperature, about 20 minutes.

Stir the vanilla into the chocolate custard, then pour the custard into the pie shell. Transfer to the refrigerator and chill overnight.

When ready to serve, top the pie with whipped cream and chocolate shavings if desired, then slice into wedges. Enjoy!

to check out our traeger line up click here !!!

Discover the Ease of the Cub Cadet Zero Turn With Steering Wheel

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Tue, 06 Aug 2024 16:03:16 GMT

The Unmatched Convenience and Advantages of the Cub Cadet ZTS Models

Save up to $300 now on most models

Maintaining a nice lawn can be a challenging task for homeowners. Traditional lawn mowers often require a significant amount of physical effort and precision to achieve that perfect cut. This can be especially true for zero-turn mowers , which, despite their effectiveness, can be difficult to operate for those unfamiliar with their unique steering mechanism. Homeowners are looking for a solution that simplifies lawn care without compromising on performance.

At M&D Enterprises , we pride ourselves on providing top-quality lawn care solutions tailored to the needs of our customers. With 7 years of experience in the industry and a dedication to customer satisfaction , we have helped countless homeowners transform their lawn care routines. Our commitment to offering innovative products like the Cub Cadet ZTS Model Lawn Mower ensures that you receive the best tools for the job.

Discover the difference with the Cub Cadet ZTS models and take the first step towards a stress-free, beautifully manicured lawn. Visit M&D Enterprises today to learn more and save up to $300 on most Cub cadet zts models !

Create a Stunning Garden Retreat in Your Own Backyard

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Thu, 01 Aug 2024 14:51:58 GMT

You've been bitten by the gardening bug and are eager to create your own backyard oasis. However, knowing where and when to start can be overwhelming. Addressing these key questions will ensure that your garden thrives and yields a bountiful harvest all season long.

Design Before Digging: Planning Your Garden Before Planting

Starting a successful backyard garden requires resisting the urge to hastily dig up your grass and plant seeds. Instead, the first step is to carefully plan every detail of your garden. The second step involves creating a comprehensive plan that includes:

Research the specific plants you want to grow and understand their individual needs in order to thrive.
Choose the ideal location for your garden.
Implement proper garden containment techniques.
Determine the optimal time to start planting.

As you continue to garden, you will face numerous variables and questions. By developing a solid plan from the beginning, you will be better prepared to address any unexpected challenges that may arise due to the unpredictability of mother nature.

What Plants Are You Excited To Cultivate?

When starting your backyard garden, it's best to focus on planting vegetables that you already love to eat. Incorporating a few new plants can introduce variety and excitement. By prioritizing foods that you enjoy, you'll naturally feel more motivated to nurture your garden and will gain a deeper appreciation for the quality of your harvest. Don't be afraid to experiment with a wide variety of cool- and warm-season veggies, even in a small garden space. This mix of plants can be successively planted and will give you a head start on planning for future growing seasons.

CHOOSING THE IDEAL GARDEN SPOT

When selecting a location for your garden, it is important to consider several key factors.

1. Light

Sunlight is essential for the success of your garden, but the amount required varies based on the types of plants you are growing. For sun-loving plants such as tomatoes and cucumbers, a minimum of six hours of direct sunlight per day is necessary. While many vegetables thrive in full sun, some like kale, spinach, and certain root vegetables can tolerate partial shade. If faced with a choice between a spot that receives ample sunlight and one with more shade, opt for the sunnier location as it is easier to provide additional shade if needed. Remember, you can always introduce shade cloths to your garden, but increasing sunlight can be a more challenging task.

2. Space

It is advisable to begin with a small plot, even if you have aspirations of running a miniature farm in the future. By starting in a more manageable area, you can prevent your garden from growing out of control and potentially becoming overwhelming. Additionally, starting small ensures that your household is not inundated with an excess of vegetables that cannot be consumed in a timely manner.

3. Soil

Before planting directly into your backyard soil, it is highly recommended to conduct a soil test as one of the most crucial steps in selecting the optimal spot to establish your garden. A comprehensive soil test can provide invaluable insights into key factors such as pH levels, nutrient concentrations, texture, and organic matter content. Armed with this vital information, you can make informed decisions regarding the selection of vegetables that are best suited for your soil type and determine any necessary soil amendments to enhance the overall health and productivity of your garden.

4. Water source

Opting to begin your garden in close proximity to a water source is a strategic decision that can yield significant time, water, and energy savings throughout the duration of your growing season. While it may be convenient to have the ideal planting spot far from a water source, there are practical solutions available such as rain barrels, drip irrigation systems, and soak hoses to mitigate this challenge. However, given the choice between setting up your garden near or far from a water source, it is always advisable to position your garden as close to the water source as feasible to optimize efficiency and minimize resource wastage.

Managing Your Garden: Maximizing Efficiency and Resource Conservation

Whether you choose to plant directly in the soil, use pots, or tend to raised beds, containing your garden is essential in managing pests and maintaining efficiency in gardening tasks. Establish clear boundaries between your garden and the surrounding yard by incorporating paths or well-maintained lawn edges. These delineations act as barriers to weed encroachment and facilitate easier navigation around your garden for tending to your plants.

OPTIMAL TIMING FOR PLANTING

Determining the optimal time to begin planting in your garden is influenced by various factors, including your local climate, the specific vegetables you plan to grow, and whether you are starting with seeds or nursery plants. To achieve successful results, consider using a soil thermometer or referring to a planting calendar tailored to your region to guide you in timing your planting correctly.

Selecting Optimal Timing for Cool-Season Vegetables

For optimal growth, plant cool-season vegetables in early spring once the soil has warmed to an appropriate temperature. It is important to avoid planting too close to the last frost, as this can impede the growth of even these hardy plants. When planting, be sure to consider the soil temperature and moisture levels, as planting in conditions unsuitable for germination can result in seed and seedling damage.

Optimal Timing for Planting Warm-Season Vegetables

It is crucial to wait until the temperatures are consistently warm enough for warm-season vegetables to thrive, typically in late spring or early summer. Even transplants from nurseries or greenhouses will struggle in soils that are too cold, resulting in poor crop quality and yield.

Embrace the Experience and Your New Garden Lifestyle

Discover the endless possibilities of gardening, from implementing companion planting techniques to mastering successive sowing and constructing your own garden boxes. As a beginner in backyard gardening, simplicity is key - relax and savor the journey. Let the sheer delight of gardening guide your path, making winter feel shorter and fueling your enthusiasm for the coming spring.

For more lawn tips and tricks click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on what lawn equipment is best for your lawn!!

580.886.2345

MDenterprisesOK.com

For your best lawn, porch, patio, or acreage, we’re your people. Making your life easier with quality products and services at fair prices is our mission.

#LawnCare #LawnTips #FertilizerTips #Gardening #DIY #MDEnterprises #HealthyLawn #GreenThumb #GardeningLife

Other related Blogs from M&D:

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/oklahoma-essential-lawn-care-tips

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/repurpose-fall-leaves

https://www.mdenterprisesok.com/aerating-tips-and-tricks

Please give our social media a look for more entertaining and informative information:

https://linktr.ee/mdenterprisesok

ENTREES: TRAEGER SHEET PAN MEDITERRANEAN CHICKEN

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 26 Jul 2024 18:30:00 GMT

TRAEGER SHEET PAN MEDITERRANEAN CHICKEN

This Greek accented sheet pan chicken features marinated chicken thighs and favorite garden vegetables plus olives and halloumi cheese. The cheese holds its shapes in the heat of the grill and browns beautifully adding toasty flavor and crisp texture. Though it’s available at most supermarkets, feta can also work, or you can leave the cheese out and still enjoy a tasty chicken and veg dinner.

Prep Time

15 MIN

Cook Time

35 MIN

Pellets

SIGNATURE PELLET BLEND

INGREDIENTS

This recipe serves:

MAIN

1 zucchini, halved lengthwise, cut crosswise 1-inch thick

1 yellow squash, halved lengthwise, cut crosswise 1-inch thick

1 Cup cherry tomatoes

1 red or yellow bell pepper, cut into 1-inch pieces

1/2 small eggplant, cut into 1-inch cubes

1/2 red onion, cut into 1-inch pieces

1/2 Tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil, divided

3 garlic cloves, minced

Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper

1 Tablespoon Traeger Fin & Feather Rub

1 Tablespoon finely grated lemon zest

6 bone-in, skin-on chicken thighs, trimmed of excess fat and skin

5 Ounce halloumi cheese, patted dry, hand-torn into roughly 1-inch pieces

2 Tablespoon fresh lemon juice

1/3 Cup pitted Kalamata olives, halved

1/4 Cup mixed chopped fresh herbs, such as basil, parsley, oregano, chives

STEPS

Preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 450°F; this will take at least 15 minutes.

In a large bowl, gently toss the vegetables with 3 Tablespoons of the oil, the garlic, 1 teaspoon salt, and ½ teaspoon pepper. Transfer to one side of a large (13- x 18-inch) rimmed baking sheet.

In a large bowl, combine the remaining 2 Tablespoons of the oil with the Fin & Feather, lemon zest, and 1 teaspoon pepper. Add chicken thighs and toss gently with your hands, working some of the seasoning under the skin as well as over the outside of the thighs. Arrange along the end of the empty side of the baking sheet. Scatter the halloumi over the vegetables.

Insert a leave-in meat thermometer into the thickest part of the largest chicken thigh avoiding bone. Cook until the internal temperature of the chicken reaches 160°F, the vegetables are tender, and the halloumi is browned, 30 to 35 minutes.

Remove the baking sheet pan from the grill but leave the grill on. Using a slotted spoon and leaving most of the liquid behind on the baking sheet, transfer the vegetables and cheese to a serving platter. Drizzle the lemon juice over the vegetables and toss to combine. Scatter the olives and herbs over the vegetables.

Return the chicken to the grill skin side down directly on the grill grate to brown and crisp the skin, 3 to 5 minutes. Add the chicken to the platter of vegetables and serve. Enjoy!

to check out our traeger line up click here !!!

Ultimate Concealment and Comfort: Ram Hunting Blinds

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Sat, 20 Jul 2024 15:00:00 GMT

Unlock the Greatest Hunting Experience with RAM Hunting Blinds

What sets M&D Enterprises apart is our commitment to quality and customer satisfaction. We value the same things you do - a successful hunt, comfort, and reliability. These RAM Hunting Blinds are a testament to our dedication to providing the best hunting gear. We believe in supplying products that make a real difference in your hunting experience, and our customers' success stories prove it.

The RAM Hunting Blind is packed with features to enhance your hunting experience:

Don't miss out on your next trophy because of inadequate equipment. Upgrade to the RAM Hunting Blind and experience the difference. Your hunt deserves the best, and we're here to provide it.

Happy hunting!

Exciting News: M&D Enterprises Now Offers Blackstone Griddles!

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Fri, 19 Jul 2024 14:00:00 GMT

Unleash Your Outdoor Cooking Potential with Blackstone Griddles at M&D Enterprises

Outdoor cooking enthusiasts know that achieving the perfect sear, sizzle, and flavor on a traditional grill can be challenging. Whether it’s uneven heating, limited cooking space, or the inability to cook a variety of foods simultaneously, these issues can make outdoor cooking less enjoyable. Homeowners who love entertaining and enjoying their property often find themselves frustrated with the limitations of their current grill setups.

The Blackstone Griddle is a game-changer for outdoor cooking enthusiasts. Here’s what makes it stand out:

Even Heating: Say goodbye to cold spots and enjoy perfectly cooked food every time.
Large Cooking Surface: Cook for a crowd with ease, thanks to the ample cooking space.
Versatility: Grill, sear, sauté, and more – the possibilities are endless.
Durability: Built to last with high-quality materials that withstand the elements.
Ease of Use: Simple to set up and clean, making your cooking experience hassle-free.

Upgrade your outdoor cooking setup with a Blackstone Griddle from M&D Enterprises and transform your backyard into a culinary paradise. Visit us today to learn more and see how we can help you enjoy your property like never before.

Lawn Edging Pro Tips

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Thu, 18 Jul 2024 14:22:26 GMT

�� Lawn Edging 101: The Easy Way to Boost Curb Appeal

For many, owning a home means focusing on décor and furnishings—but the lawn often gets overlooked. Alongside mowing and watering , lawn edging is a quick and easy way to elevate your yard’s appearance and protect your landscape investment.

Curious? Here’s everything you need to know—plus inspiring ideas, pro tips, and video guides to help you get started:

1. ✂️ What Is Lawn Edging—and Why It Matters

In essence, lawn edging creates a crisp line that separates your grass from hardscapes like sidewalks, gravel driveways, garden beds, or patios. The benefits?

Prevents wear on mower blades
Stops grass and debris from spilling onto hard surfaces
Maintains a polished, professional look

Need help fixing a patchy lawn behind neat edges? Check out our guide: From Dead to Green: How to Fix a Bad Lawn Fast.

2. ��️ Top Tools for Clean, Precise Edges

▶️ String Trimmers (aka Weedwackers)

Versatile & maneuverable : Great for curved beds, tight corners, and uneven terrain
Accessory-friendly : Attachments can turn your trimmer into an edger , hedge trimmer , or blower
Tips : Ideal for detailed work, but may struggle with dense turf

Check our review of top lawn mowers here: Your Guide to Selecting the Perfect Lawn Mower .

▶️ Dedicated Lawn Edgers

Precision cutting : Designed to roll along borders with a sturdy metal blade
Brushless models : Offer better control, lighter weight, and adjustable cutting depth
Best for straight lines : Perfect for sidewalks, patios, and driveways

Discover more ways to keep your edges sharp in our article: How Low Should You Mow.

3. �� Stylish Lawn Edging Options

Want minimal trimming and maximum impact? Try these creative borders:

Pavers & stone : Neat, long-lasting, and custom-shaped to match your design
Low hedges or flowering shrubs : Natural, beautiful, and low-maintenance once established

Chemical edge control : Use herbicides sparingly for clean lines—it's a helpful, short-term solution (and not a substitute for regular trimming)

4. �� Helpful Videos from Our YouTube Channel

Check out M&D T.V. or our youtube channel for more video tips and tricks.

5. �� Simple Lawn Edging Tips & Tricks

Edge immediately after mowing —the grass is easier to cut.
Target 1" of dirt and turf per pass to protect roots and ensure clean lines.
Use proper safety gear : closed-toe shoes, eye protection, and gloves are a must.

Stay consistent : Edge every 1–2 weeks during peak growing season. Stretch this to monthly in slower months.

6. ✅ Quick Action Plan for Clean Edges Today

Choose your edging tool: trimmer for intricacy or edger for defined lawns
Pick your border style: stone, hedge, or simple cutline
Follow our maintenance tips and setup a schedule
Watch our embedded videos for easy, visual guidance

�� Learn More from M&D Enterprises :

Ready to transform your lawn with sharp, clean edges? Want help choosing the right EDGE tool or creating a lawn-care schedule? Give us a call at 580‑886‑2345 or contact us online —we’re here to help your yard shine!

Essential Steps for Post-Grill Perfection: How to Care for Your Traeger Grill

lukefuqua27@gmail.com (Luke Fuqua) — Tue, 16 Jul 2024 20:07:49 GMT

Essential Tips to Ensure Your Traeger Grill Stays in Top Condition After Every Use

A clean grill makes more flavorful food (and is more efficient). For the best performance, you’ll want to clean your grill up after each cook. We’ve got the goods to keep your Traeger fresh and ready to make memorable meals every time.

While the exact details for cleaning your grill may vary by type of grill , the basics remain the same.

Make sure your grill is completely cool.
Spray the grill grate and the inside of the chimney (if your grill has one) with an all-natural degreaser/cleaner
Remove and clean both sides of the grill grates (keep reading to know how)
If your grill uses a liner , dispose of old foil or drip tray liners .
Remove the drip tray and the heat baffle.
Empty the pellets from the hopper.
Vacuum the inside of the grill, the firepot, and the hopper thoroughly, making sure you collect as much residual sawdust as possible.
Scrub the inside of the chimney. Again, we recommend not using wire brushes. Instead, use a cleaning cloth or heavy-duty paper towels.
Spray the inside and outside of the grill with the all-natural degreaser/cleaner and allow it to soak for several minutes before wiping it clean with a paper towel or cleaning cloth. While we recommend our Traeger All Natural Cleaner , you may also use any non-chemical cleaner or a mixture of diluted dish soap, water, and vinegar.
Last, reinsert all components, including the heat baffle, drip tray, drip tray liners/foil, new bucket liners, and grill grates, and you are set!

HOW TO CLEAN THE HOPPER, FIRE POT, AND GREASE CHANNELS

Maintaining your Traeger isn't just about keeping the cooking surfaces clean; it's also crucial to pay attention to often-overlooked components like the hopper, fire pot, and grease channels. These three elements play a vital role in ensuring the performance, safety, and longevity of your grill.

WHEN TO CLEAN YOUR GRILL

Now that you know how to clean a Traeger grill, you need to know when you should clean your grill. While you should follow the recommended schedule below, remember that you may need to adjust according to your cooking habits and food smoking preferences. For example, if you’re cooking high-fat foods like pork belly or brisket, your grill will require cleaning sooner than veggies or breads.

After Each Use: Wipe down spills and scrape down the grill grates.
Every 2-3 Cooks (or every 20-24 hours of cook time): Deep clean the inside of the grill.
Every 3 Months: Clean the outside of the grill (especially if you don’t have a grill cover )
Every 6 Months: Clean the grease chute (or the backpack/downdraft if the grill does not have a chimney) to avoid grease fires.

HOW TO CLEAN A TRAEGER GRILL FAQS

How Do I Prevent Rust?

The simple answer? Regular cleaning and maintenance. While Traeger Grill’s are made with powder-coating on the grates to prevent rust, it’s always good practice to keep the grates clean. You will also want to keep your grill clean and dry, remove excess grease and food particles, use rust-preventative products, and protect your grill from the elements.

What Cleaning Products Should I Use and Why?

Traeger Grill’s may be hardy, but you can’t just clean them with anything and hope for the best (especially if you want to protect your warranty). When you purchase your pellet grill, make sure to also invest in the following tools:

As a precaution (especially during busy grilling seasons when you’re likely to go through these products faster), make sure to have disposable cloths or heavy-duty towels on hand, along with distilled white vinegar, onion, lemon, baking soda & vinegar, and dish soap. These common household items will help keep your grill smoking like normal.

DESSERTS: TRAEGER BAKED LEMON MERINGUE PIE

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 12 Jul 2024 19:30:00 GMT

TRAEGER BAKED LEMON MERINGUE PIE

This pie is like none you've ever had before. The smoked lemon filling is bright, zesty, and perfectly sweet. Baked over applewood, this wood-fired pie will blow your dessert game out of the water.

Prep Time

30 MIN

Cook Time

1 HR

10 MIN

Pellets

APPLE

INGREDIENTS

1 1/2 Cup sugar, divided

2/3 Cup lemon juice

1 Tablespoon lemon zest

Pinch of kosher salt

All-purpose flour, for dusting

1 round of store-bought or homemade pie dough

7 Large eggs, divided

1 Tablespoon heavy cream

4 Tablespoon (1/2 stick) unsalted butter

1 Teaspoon vanilla extract

STEPS

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 165℉ and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes. For optimal flavor, use Super Smoke, if available.

In a medium bowl, whisk together 3/4 cup sugar, the lemon zest, lemon juice, and salt. Pour the mixture into a shallow baking dish and place on the grill grates. Close the lid and smoke for 30 minutes. Remove from the grill and let cool. Increase the Traeger temperature to 350°F.

On a well-floured surface, roll out the pie dough to 1/8 inch thick. Gently drape the dough round into a 9-inch pie dish. Trim and crimp the edges, then freeze for at least 30 minutes.

In a small bowl, beat together 1 egg and the heavy cream. Using a pastry brush, brush the edges of the pie dough with the egg wash. Place a sheet of parchment paper over the pie dough, then a sheet of aluminum foil. Fill the pie dough with pie weights.

Place the pie dish on the grill grates, close the lid, and bake until the crust is cooked through, 15-18 minutes. Carefully lift away the pie weights, foil, and parchment paper. Close the lid and cook the crust until the edges begin to turn golden brown, about 5 minutes more. Remove the pie crust from the grill and let cool while you make the filling. Leave the Traeger on.

Separate 3 eggs, reserving the whites for the meringue. Add the yolks and remaining 3 whole eggs to a large heat-safe bowl. Pour in the smoked lemon juice mixture and whisk well to combine.

Fill a medium pot with 3 inches of water and bring to a simmer over medium heat. Place the bowl with the egg mixture on top and cook, whisking constantly, until the mixture thickens enough to coat the back of a spoon, 8-10 minutes. Remove the filling from the heat and whisk in the butter until melted and well incorporated.

Pour the lemon filling into the pie crust. Place the pie on the grill grates, and bake until the filling is just set with a slight jiggle in the center, about 20 minutes. Remove the pie from the grill and let cool to room temperature, then refrigerate overnight.

Make the meringue: In a medium pot, combine the reserved egg whites and remaining 3/4 cup sugar. Cook over medium heat until the mixture is warm and the sugar has dissolved, 2-3 minutes.

Carefully pour the egg white mixture into the bowl of a stand mixer fitted with the whisk attachment. Beat on high speed until white and fluffy and the mixture holds medium peaks, about 5 minutes. Add the vanilla and beat until just incorporated. Transfer the meringue to a piping bag fitted with a closed star tip, if desired.

Pipe or spread the meringue over the top of the pie. Using a kitchen torch or broiler, brown the top of the meringue.

Slice and serve immediately. Enjoy!

to check out our traeger line up click here !!!

BENEFITS OF NATIVE PLANTS FOR THE ENVIRONMENT

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Tue, 09 Jul 2024 14:13:24 GMT

Native plants are currently popular, but their benefits go beyond just a trend. These plants have evolved to thrive in specific conditions, helping attract local pollinators and create a unique and sustainable yard that requires less water, pesticides, and fertilizers compared to non-native species. By planting native plants, you are not only enhancing the beauty of your landscape but also supporting the ecosystem and promoting biodiversity in your area.

Decoding "Native": Plant Terminology Explained

Native plants are plants that naturally occur and have adapted to the specific environment of a given region. The types of native plants vary from place to place: in the Southwest, native plants are often drought-tolerant like succulents and cacti, while the Midwest boasts prairie flora such as tall grasses and wildflowers. It's important to note that native plants can vary even within a state, as they are dictated by region rather than state boundaries.

The Benefits of Native Plants for the Environment

Native plants have evolved to thrive in their specific environments, making them essential contributors to the local ecosystem. These plants provide crucial nutrients like pollen and nectar for native bees, butterflies, and birds, while also offering shelter for a variety of local wildlife. Given the current decline in butterfly and bee populations, the widespread popularity of these pollinator-friendly plants among homeowners and landscapers is not surprising. Increasing the presence of native plants will play a critical role in ensuring these vital pollinators have the necessary resources to survive and thrive.

How to Identify Native Plants

To begin, identify your plant hardiness zone using the USDA Plant Hardiness Zone Map to understand the climate conditions of your region. Plants adapted to specific climates will thrive, so it is crucial to select species native to your area. Consider factors such as the amount of sunlight and water your yard receives to make informed plant choices. If water conservation is a concern, opt for drought-tolerant species, while selecting full-sun plants for sun-drenched areas. Different zones in your yard may vary in sunlight exposure, so plan accordingly. For those aiming to attract native pollinators, consult your local garden center for guidance on plant varieties beneficial to pollinators, such as milkweed for its pollen-rich flowers. Selecting the right plants tailored to your region and garden conditions will promote a healthy and thriving landscape.

Maximizing the Benefits of Native Plants in Your Garden

Gardening with native plants offers a customizable approach based on your landscaping goals. For a more natural and low-maintenance alternative to traditional turf grass, consider using native grasses and ground cover plants. These can also add color and texture as perimeter plants. If you have limited space or cannot make extensive changes to your yard, native plants can thrive in planter boxes and still support local pollinators. Regardless of your goals or yard size, incorporating native plants can enhance the beauty of your landscape while benefiting the environment.

For more lawn tips and tricks click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on what lawn equipment is best for your lawn!!

Mastering Lawn Fertilization: Tips and Techniques for a Lush Yard

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Tue, 25 Jun 2024 16:15:37 GMT

The concept of lawn fertilizer can spark a variety of responses from homeowners, leading to differing opinions on its importance. While some may offer simple explanations like nutrients and plant health, there is often a lack of consensus on its significance. It is crucial to delve deeper into the fundamentals of lawn fertilizers and understand the most effective methods for their application to achieve optimal results for your lawn.

Understanding Grass Fertilizer: Its Purpose and Benefits

In simple terms, fertilizer is made up of various chemical elements essential for promoting healthy grass growth and overall productivity. Specifically formulated for lawns, these fertilizers provide crucial nutrients such as nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium to help nourish the soil and enable the grass to thrive, recover from common stressors like foot traffic and mowing. Conducting a soil test is crucial in identifying the precise needs of your lawn, preventing over-application of nutrients like phosphorus that can pose environmental risks, such as eutrophication in surface water sources.

Nitrogen (N)

Nitrogen is the primary mineral nutrient essential for maintaining a healthy lawn. Beyond its role in giving grass a vibrant green hue, nitrogen plays a crucial role in the formation of proteins and enzymes necessary for robust growth. This nutrient is key in developing dense shoot coverage, which helps your lawn outperform weeds and resist damage from diseases, pests, and foot traffic. By supplying an adequate amount of nitrogen, you can ensure your grass remains resilient and lush.

Phosphorus (P) and Potassium (K)

Apart from nitrogen, your lawn may also require phosphorus and potassium for optimal growth. Phosphorus, a nutrient that typically stays in the soil, is vital for promoting strong root development and enhancing the establishment of newly seeded lawns. On the other hand, potassium, which can easily leach into the soil, plays a key role in boosting grass resilience against cold weather, diseases, drought, and wear and tear.It is important to pay attention to state laws and local regulations regarding fertilizer application. Some areas have imposed bans on phosphorus application to turf unless soil tests indicate its necessity, while others enforce seasonal restrictions on all fertilizer applications. Adhering to these guidelines will help ensure the health of your lawn while also protecting the environment.

Deciphering Fertilizer Bag Labels

The numbers on a fertilizer bag indicate the percentage of nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), and potassium (K) in the product. For instance, a bag labeled as 20-10-10 contains 20% nitrogen, 10% phosphorus, and 10% potassium, while the remaining components could include other elements like iron and sulfur, as well as inert fillers. In areas with restrictions on phosphorus use, opt for a phosphorus-free fertilizer like a 19-0-7 or a 24-0-11.

What Type of Lawn Fertilizer is Best for Your Lawn?

Fertilizers come in various forms, including natural, synthetic, or a combination of both, and can be classified as fast or slow-releasing. It is important to note that fast-releasing fertilizers have a higher chance of damaging your grass, particularly in dry conditions. Therefore, slow-releasing fertilizers are typically the better choice for most lawns when applied properly.

Comparing Fast-Release and Slow-Release Lawn Fertilizer: Understanding the Contrast

Fast-Release Lawn Fertilizer:

Fast-release nitrogen sources, including ammonium nitrate, ammonium sulfate, and urea, offer quick greening of the grass but come with downsides such as leaching, nitrogen burn, elevated soil salinity, and the need for frequent applications to sustain nutrient levels. If opting for solely fast-release fertilizers, it is advisable to apply no more than one pound per 1,000 square feet of lawn.

Slow-Release Lawn Fertilizer:

Slow-release fertilizers can offer numerous benefits, including reduced time spent spreading, extended duration, and potential cost savings, despite a higher initial investment. While slow-release nitrogen may take longer to show results in grass, it also carries a lower risk of burning or nutrient loss through runoff or leaching. Slow-release options for lawn fertilizers encompass two main types: slowly soluble and water-insoluble nitrogen sources. Slowly soluble fertilizers, which are synthetic organic products, are created to release nitrogen gradually by adjusting particle size and utilizing coatings. Examples of slowly available forms include IBDU, methylene ureas, sulfur-coated ureas, and poly-coated ureas. On the other hand, water-insoluble sources consist of synthetic organics like urea formaldehydes and natural organic materials such as activated sewage sludge, processed manures, and plant-based meals.

Best Practices for Applying Lawn Fertilizer: Timing and Methods

It is recommended to apply a minimum of two pounds of lawn fertilizer per year. Factors such as grass type, lawn size, and maintenance requirements all influence the amount of fertilizer needed and the timing of application. It is crucial to understand and consider these factors when determining the appropriate amount of fertilizer for your lawn. Instructions on the fertilizer bag typically indicate the amount of nitrogen to be applied per 1,000 square feet of lawn. Using a spreader can help ensure even coverage during application.

Northern grasses

Generally speaking, low-maintenance northern lawns require approximately two pounds of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet, whereas higher-maintenance lawns may need between three and four pounds. It is recommended to divide your annual fertilizer applications, with two-thirds applied in the early fall and the remaining one-third in late spring after the first signs of green-up.

Southern grasses

Low-maintenance southern yards typically need an application of two to four pounds of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet, while higher-maintenance yards may require between four and six pounds. It is recommended to make the first fertilizer application a few weeks after the initial spring green-up, followed by a smaller second round of fertilizer in late summer while the grass is still actively growing.

Advanced Tips for Fertilizing Your Lawn

To ensure proper application of lawn fertilizer, carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions. Verify the calibration of your spreader and accurately measure the square footage of your lawn before spreading fertilizer to prevent over-application. Remember that excessive fertilizer application can lead to lawn damage, thatch buildup, and pest problems. Keep in mind that lawns prone to heavy rainfall, sandy soils, or over-watering may experience nutrient leaching. Opt for slow-release or water-insoluble fertilizers to minimize leaching and provide longer-lasting nutrients to the grass. To enhance nutrient cycling, mulch grass clippings into the lawn while mowing, which can return approximately 1 pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet over a year.

For more lawn tips and tricks click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on what lawn equipment is best for your lawn!!

ENTREES: TRAEGER COWBOY CANDY RIBS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 14 Jun 2024 20:11:01 GMT

TRAEGER COWBOY CANDY RIBS

Many amazing recipes come out of the Traeger kitchen. But when Nichole Dailey developed these sticky, spicy, smoky-sweet, cowboy candy ribs, she wowed the Traegerhood. People were literally begging for the recipe. The Cowboy Candy makes more than you need for the ribs, which should make you happy. Try the candied jalapeños on burgers, dogs, with cheeses, in cocktails, or any other way you can imagine.

Prep Time

15 MIN

Cook Time

6 HR

Pellets

HICKORY

FEEDS

INGREDIENTS

15 jalapeños

2 1/4 Cup light brown sugar

1 1/2 Cup apricot preserves

3/8 Cup apple cider vinegar

3 garlic cloves, minced

3/4 Teaspoon freshly ground black pepper

RIBS

3 Rack St. Louis-style ribs

3/4 Cup yellow mustard

3/8 Cup Traeger Anything Rub

3 Tablespoon coarsely ground black pepper

3/4 Cup cooked, chopped bacon

STEPS

Make the cowboy candy: Preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 225°F; this will take about 15 minutes

Slice the jalapeños into ¼-inch thick rings and spread them out on a wire rack. Place the rack directly on the grill grate and smoke for 25 minutes.

Meanwhile, in a medium saucepan, combine the sugar, preserves, vinegar, garlic, and black pepper.

When ready to cook the ribs, heat the Traeger with the lid closed to 225°F.

Place the baking sheet on the grill grate and cook until the sauce is set and warmed through, 35 to 40 minutes. Enjoy!

to check out our traeger line up click here !!!

What Is The Ideal Grass Cutting Height For A Healthy Lawn?

Tue, 11 Jun 2024 20:07:31 GMT

Maintaining a well-manicured lawn is a common task for homeowners, especially during the warmer months. Not only does regular grass cutting ensure a tidy and clean outdoor space, but it also helps to meet city or HOA regulations. However, one aspect that is often overlooked is the importance of cutting grass at the right height. Is it possible to cut the grass too short or too long?

Recommended Mowing Heights By Grass Type

What is the best way to measure the height of my grass?

Many people believe they can gauge the height of their grass simply by eyeing it and making a rough estimate in inches. Some may even resort to the old "dollar bill trick" to visualize the length. However, for precision, the most reliable method is to actually measure it using a ruler. This tool allows you to accurately assess the current height of your grass as well as determine the ideal cutting height.

How Does Weather Impact the Height of Grass?

Just like any other plant, the weather plays a significant role in the growth rate of your lawn. Heavy rains can lead to flooding and rapid growth of grass, while hot and dry conditions can stunt growth, causing fluctuations in the mowing schedule for your lawn.

How Can I Adjust The Cutting Height Of My Mower?

Measuring the grass height is essential when it comes to cutting your lawn, but knowing how to adjust your mower's cutting height is equally important. Most mowers are versatile and allow you to easily adjust the cutting height. For walk-behind mowers, you can typically adjust the height by raising or lowering the deck using a lever located next to the wheels. Some models may require adjusting the height at 2 or 4 wheels. Riding mowers usually have a pin or lever to adjust the deck height. It is crucial to ensure that each wheel is set to the same height for an even cut. If you encounter difficulty adjusting the height, refer to the equipment manual for guidance on achieving the perfect grass height.

What are the Consequences of Cutting Grass Too Short?

The negative consequences of cutting grass too short can be detrimental to both the grass and the soil beneath it. Overly short grass can cause damage, leading to quicker drying out of the lawn and the onset of dead patches. It is advisable to maintain a slightly taller grass height to prevent the need for reseeding damaged areas.

What is the Optimal Height for Grass Cutting?

Equipped with essential knowledge, you may be pondering the ideal grass cutting height for a lush and vibrant lawn. The recommended cutting height varies based on the type of grass you have, with a general suggestion of 2.5 to 3 inches. This range ensures a neatly manicured lawn while promoting healthy grass growth and root development. Maintaining your grass at this height not only enhances the aesthetic appeal of your outdoor space but also contributes to the overall health and resilience of your lawn.

For more lawn tips and tricks click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on what lawn equipment is best for your lawn!!

MAINTAINING GRASS IN EXTREME HEAT: WATERING AND CUTTING TIPS

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Tue, 04 Jun 2024 17:38:01 GMT

First and foremost, make sure to water your lawn deeply and infrequently. This means giving your lawn a good soaking once or twice a week, rather than frequent shallow waterings. This will encourage deep root growth, making your lawn more resilient to drought conditions. Additionally, mow your lawn at a higher setting to provide shade for the soil and help retain moisture. Consider applying a slow-release fertilizer to provide essential nutrients to your grass throughout the summer months. Finally, consider planting drought-resistant grass varieties or incorporating more native plants into your landscaping to reduce water consumption. By following these tips, you can help your lawn thrive even in the most extreme summer conditions.

Tip #1: Avoid Cutting Grass Too Short

One common mistake made by homeowners and commercial landscape maintenance companies is cutting the lawn too short. When grass is cut too short, particularly in hot weather, it hinders the plants' ability to produce energy for growth. On the other hand, maintaining grass at the proper height helps develop stronger roots that support more robust plants, making them more resilient to stress. It is essential to consider that different grass varieties have distinct growth habits that dictate the ideal mowing heights. For instance, cool-season grass and warm-season grass types require slightly different maintenance techniques and recommended cutting heights.

TIP #2: FOLLOW THE ONE-THIRD RULE FOR PROPER LAWN MAINTENANCE

When determining the appropriate grass cutting height, it is crucial to adhere to the "one-third" rule, which advises against removing more than one-third of the grass height in a single mowing session. This practice helps to maintain a cooler lawn by preserving more plant tissue. Additionally, certain grass types, such as cool-season varieties, can benefit from increased height during hot weather. For instance, if your lawn is typically mowed at 2.5 inches, raising the cutting height to 3 inches in the summer heat can alleviate heat stress and prevent the grass from entering dormancy.

TIP #3: CONTROL WATER CONSUMPTION

One common misconception about watering lawns during extreme heat is the belief that more water is better. However, turf grasses actually thrive better when kept on the drier side rather than constantly wet. Overwatering can lead to physiological issues for both plants and soil organisms, as it deprives grass roots of oxygen and can make them more susceptible to diseases that flourish in wet conditions. To promote a healthy lawn, it is recommended to follow the "deep and infrequent" watering technique. This involves thoroughly watering the entire root zone and then allowing the grass to dry out before watering again. By monitoring the appearance of your lawn and focusing on dry areas, you can efficiently manage your watering schedule. Remember, lawns only need about one inch of water per week, including any rainfall.

Tip #4: In times of drought, let it be.

It is best to avoid mowing your lawn during drought conditions. Lawns that are already stressed from lack of water have a diminished ability to recover from mowing and can be further damaged. Wait to mow the grass until after a rainfall or irrigation day when it has dried out. Mowing wet grass should also be avoided to prevent clumping.

At What Temperature Is It Too Hot to Mow the Grass?

Various grass varieties have varying thresholds for heat tolerance, however, warm season grasses are also vulnerable to damage if mowed in high temperatures. It is recommended to refrain from mowing when the temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit. Let the grass grow another day when it is cooler to avoid potential harm to your lawn.

Optimal Timing for Mowing Your Lawn During Hot Weather

When faced with the task of mowing your lawn during the peak of summer, selecting the optimal time of day can make a significant difference in managing the hot weather for both you and your lawn. Avoiding mowing at noon under scorching temperatures is essential, but cutting grass too early in the morning or late at night can also have negative effects on your lawn's health. The ideal time for mowing in hot weather is usually mid-morning or late afternoon when the temperatures are more bearable and conducive for both you and your lawn.

TIP #5: MAINTAIN SHARP BLADES FOR A HEALTHY LAWN

Cutting grass with a sharp mower blade promotes faster healing for the plant compared to using a dull blade. Dull blades do not cleanly cut the grass but instead tear the plant tissue, causing a brownish appearance and increasing vulnerability to stress and disease, particularly in warmer temperatures.

TIP #6: Let Grass Clippings Stay for a Healthier Lawn

Returning clippings to the lawn using a mulching mower can provide valuable nutrients to your grass, acting as a natural fertilizer as they decompose. This method helps your lawn recover from heat stress without requiring additional fertilizer. Be mindful of where you dispose of clippings, avoiding streets, storm drains, and bodies of water to prevent pollution. When mowing near water, consider bagging clippings within a close distance to reduce nutrient runoff into streams and lakes.

TIP #7: Environmentally-Friendly Lawn Care Practices for Nutrient-Rich Grass

Avoid fertilizing your lawn during the peak heat of mid-summer, as this can overburden cool season grasses that are already struggling to keep up with their energy consumption. The additional growth stimulated by fertilizer can further stress your lawn during high temperatures. Similarly, refrain from aerating or dethatching your lawn during the summer months, as these practices can cause temporary damage. Instead, opt to cultivate your lawn in the fall or spring when the turf is more resilient and can recover swiftly from any minor injuries.

Tip #8: The Importance of Promoting Year-Round Lawn Health

Taking a year-round, comprehensive approach to lawn care can simplify the process of maintaining a lush and healthy lawn. The first step involves ensuring the health of your lawn in every season, as healthy grass is better equipped to withstand the rigors of extreme heat. Consistent care throughout the year, including proper fertilization, watering, mowing, and pest control, is crucial for cultivating a resilient lawn that can thrive during the summer months. The second step is to implement best management practices specifically tailored to combat the stresses of summer, as detailed in this article. By prioritizing the health of your yard during periods of intense heat, you can achieve a vibrant and robust lawn that will reward you with beauty and satisfaction year-round.

For more lawn tips and tricks click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on what lawn equipment is best for your lawn!!

How & When To Water Your Grass

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Tue, 14 May 2024 14:24:27 GMT

We all desire a picturesque and inviting yard, where we can gather with loved ones and admire as we come and go from our homes. Proper watering is key to achieving a lush and healthy lawn throughout the season. However, there are pitfalls to avoid when it comes to watering. Watering at night can promote harmful diseases, and insufficient watering can result in shallow root systems. By determining the ideal frequency, duration, and timing for watering your lawn, you can ensure vibrant green grass all summer long. Let's delve into the guidelines for effective watering practices.

Is Your Lawn in Need of Hydration?

Take a stroll across your lawn and test the resilience of the grass. If it springs back quickly, your lawn likely has sufficient moisture and further watering may do more harm than good. However, if the grass remains flattened, it may be time to give your yard a drink. To maintain a healthy lawn, aim to provide 1” to 1.5” of water per week during the peak growing season of spring and summer, adjusting for your specific location and climate. If rainfall is insufficient, follow these watering tips to ensure your lawn receives the proper hydration it needs.

Incorporate Lawn Care Into Your Morning Routine

For optimal lawn care, water your lawn in the early morning when temperatures are cooler and winds are calmer. This time allows water to deeply penetrate the soil and root system with minimal evaporation. Avoid watering during the hottest parts of the day, as it can result in up to 30% evaporation losses.

Evening Watering Strategy

Many individuals believe that watering their yard in the evening allows the soil to absorb the water without the sun evaporating it. While this may be true in dry climates like California, it can have negative consequences in humid climates. Watering at night in humid regions can create conditions ripe for lawn diseases. Therefore, it is recommended to water your lawn in the morning in humid climates to prevent potential issues.

Be Mindful of Your Watering Practices

To avoid unnecessary water waste, refrain from watering non-essential areas like sidewalks, driveways, or the side of your house. Additionally, remember that shady areas require less water compared to sun-exposed spots. By adjusting your watering schedule accordingly, you can conserve water, reduce waste, and save on your water bill.

Effective Lawn Watering with a Sprinkler System

Watering your lawn is best done with a sprinkler system that meets your lawn's needs. Your choice between above-ground or in-ground sprinklers will impact your watering frequency and efficiency. Above-ground sprinklers are the more budget-friendly option but are less effective and consume more water. Ensure full yard coverage by moving the sprinkler around. In-ground systems with pop-up heads offer sophisticated controls for optimal watering times and targeted areas. Be mindful of rainfall and moisture levels to prevent overwatering. Opt for oscillating sprinklers for new lawns, as they are gentler on developing root systems. Pulsating sprinklers are more forceful and cover a wider area.

How to Choose the Most Efficient Method to Water Your Lawn

To optimize your watering schedule, aim to run your sprinklers for short periods two to three times a week. This approach helps prevent excess runoff, promotes deeper water penetration into the soil, and allows roots to thrive and establish a strong foundation.

Proper Watering for Healthy Roots

Deep penetration of water into the soil promotes the growth of strong, deep roots in your lawn. To ensure your lawn is receiving the correct amount of water, aim for the soil to be moist up to 6 inches deep. A simple way to check this is by using a long screwdriver to test the soil's moisture level. If the screwdriver easily reaches the 6-inch mark, then the soil is adequately watered. However, if you encounter resistance, it indicates that the soil is still too dry and requires additional watering.

Adjust Watering Routine Throughout The Year

Adapt your lawn watering regimen according to the changing seasons. In spring and summer, aim for an inch to an inch-and-a-half of water, gradually decreasing as fall sets in. Cease watering entirely when temperatures consistently drop below 40 degrees. Consider adjusting your sprinkler system's watering schedule based on seasonal weather or upgrade to a smart controller for automated adjustments.

Pay Attention to Your Yard

Following this guide is an essential first step in mastering the art of maintaining an optimal watering schedule for your lawn. By attentively observing and addressing the specific needs of your yard, you will witness a noticeable improvement in its lushness and overall health, providing a beautiful outdoor space for you and your loved ones to appreciate.

For more lawn tips and tricks click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on what lawn equipment is best for your lawn!!

How-To: Mower Deck Maintenance

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Thu, 02 May 2024 21:51:49 GMT

Keep your mower deck operating at its best with these easy maintenance tips. Consistent maintenance not only extends the lifespan of your equipment but also ensures that your lawn looks its best throughout the entire season.

Clean deck and blades regularly

Maintaining peak performance of your mower deck is essential for optimal functionality and longevity. By following these simple maintenance tips, you can enhance the efficiency and effectiveness of your equipment. Regular upkeep, including cleaning and blade sharpening, is key to ensuring that your mower deck operates smoothly and efficiently. Not only will proper maintenance prolong the life of your equipment, but it will also help you achieve a well-manicured lawn that looks great all season long. Remember to also check for any loose bolts or components, as tight and secure parts are crucial for safe and effective operation. With proper care and attention to maintenance, your mower deck will continue to provide you with reliable performance for years to come.

Sharpen Blades

To ensure a clean and precise cut on your lawn, it is crucial to consistently sharpen your mower blades. By removing any nicks and dull edges through regular maintenance, you can achieve a sharp cutting edge that will enhance the efficiency of your equipment. Optimal blade performance can be achieved by sharpening them to a 30-degree angle with a slight flat on the leading edge, as this configuration not only improves cutting ability but also increases blade durability in challenging conditions. Keep your mower blades in top condition to maintain a well-manicured lawn and extend the life of your equipment.

Check Belt Tension

To maximize the performance of your mower and prevent belt slipping, it is essential to maintain proper belt tension. Refer to your mower's manual for detailed instructions on how to adjust the belt tension correctly. By following these guidelines, you can ensure that your equipment operates efficiently and effectively, prolonging its lifespan and reducing the need for repairs. Proper belt tension is key to achieving optimal performance from your mower, so make sure to regularly check and adjust it as needed.

Inspect Spindles

It is important to conduct routine inspections of your mower's spindles to check for signs of wear and tear, such as cracks, rust, or loose bearings. Promptly replacing any damaged spindles is crucial to preventing expensive repairs and ensuring the safety of your equipment. By staying vigilant and making necessary replacements as needed, you can prolong the life of your mower and keep it running smoothly.

Lubricate Moving Parts

To increase the efficiency and longevity of your equipment, it is recommended to apply lubricant to moving components such as pulleys, bearings, and pivot points. By reducing friction through proper lubrication, you can protect these parts from premature wear and tear, ultimately extending their lifespan. This simple maintenance task can make a significant difference in the performance and durability of your machinery.

Monitor Deck Leveling

Regularly checking and adjusting the level of the deck is essential to ensure a uniform cut when mowing the lawn. An imbalanced deck can lead to uneven cutting, scalping, and overall poor performance. Taking the time to maintain a properly leveled deck can greatly improve the quality of your lawn care and ensure a well-manicured lawn every time you mow.

For more lawn tips and tricks click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on what lawn equipment is best for your lawn!!

Traeger Grill Do’s and Don’ts

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Fri, 26 Apr 2024 15:33:37 GMT

Traeger grills are expertly crafted to elevate your cooking experience, providing both convenience and enhanced flavor. Equipped with precise temperature controls and the ability to monitor temperatures remotely from your phone, achieving delicious meals every time is easier than ever. If you find yourself struggling to achieve perfect results, you may be falling victim to some common grilling mistakes. Let us guide you through what to do, and more importantly, what not to do, to ensure a successful grilling experience.

Don’t: Constantly Adjusting Grill Temperatures

Grilling on a Traeger should be easy and straightforward. If you find it complicated, it may be due to frequent temperature adjustments. With Traeger grills, the design allows for a "set it and forget it" approach. Even if there are minor temperature variations, the system will automatically balance itself out.

Don’t: Open The Lid While Cooking

Each time you lift the lid to inspect your food, you are allowing heat to escape, which can affect the cooking process. It is essential to keep the lid closed while using our pellet grills for various cooking methods, including smoking and searing, to ensure consistent and efficient heat retention for optimal results. Let your grill work its magic by maintaining a closed lid and allowing it to cook your food to perfection.

Do: Use The Highest Quality Pellets

Investing in high-quality Traeger all-natural hardwood pellets is essential when smoking a premium cut of meat like brisket. These pellets, available in a variety of flavors ranging from mild cherry to bold mesquite, not only enhance the taste of your food but also ensure a consistent burn to achieve the ultimate wood-fired flavor. Don't compromise on the quality of your pellets when it comes to creating delicious, smoky masterpieces like brisket.

Do: Use a Leave-In Meat Thermometer

Utilizing cutting-edge thermometers like MEATER® eliminates the need to constantly open your grill to check on the progress of your cooking. With real-time notifications, you will be alerted at every crucial stage of the process, from when it's time to wrap your brisket to when your cook is perfectly done. Say goodbye to guesswork and hello to precision cooking with MEATER® thermometers.

Don’t: Cook on a Dirty Grill

Prioritize cleaning as a top task on your agenda to maintain the performance of your Traeger grill and enhance the flavor of your food. Show some love to your grill with the help of our grill scraper and cleaner, making the task simple and efficient for you.

For more grill tips and recipes click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on our grills

8 Steps for DIY Lawn Restoration

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Wed, 24 Apr 2024 19:41:43 GMT

Turning Your Bad Lawn into a Healthy Oasis

Are bare spots, dead grass, and a yard full of weeds making you want to start fresh but unsure where to begin? It can be overwhelming to imagine restoring your lawn, but with some effort and time, you can transform it into the lush green paradise you desire. Don't lose hope - with a bit of do-it-yourself work and patience, you can rejuvenate your lawn and create the beautiful green oasis you've always dreamed of. Ready to turn your weedy lawn into a vibrant, healthy expanse of green? Let's get started on the journey to revitalizing your lawn.

Digging Deep: Uncovering the Root of the Problem

Begin the process of restoring your lawn by dethatching, which involves removing the thick layer of grass clippings and organic material known as thatch that can suffocate your grass by preventing proper airflow and nutrient absorption. Take a shovel and cut out a triangular plug of grass that is a few inches deep to check the thickness of the thatch layer - if it measures up to an inch, then it's time to dethatch. This task is ideally done in the spring or fall seasons for optimal results.

Smooth Out Your Yard for Safety and Satisfaction

All those bumps and divots in your yard can be frustrating and even hazardous, causing potential ankle injuries. Fortunately, they are both manageable issues that can be easily addressed as part of your lawn restoration project. By taking the time to level out uneven surfaces and fill in holes, you can create a safer and more visually appealing lawn that you and your family can enjoy.

Restoring your lawn: fixing depressions and uneven surfaces

For small divots, apply topsoil and compost, then use a landscaping rake to ensure a smooth and level finish. For larger depressions, remove the sod, fill with a combination of soil, compost, humus, and fertilizer, then reapply the sod and press it down firmly. Be sure to water the repaired areas afterward.

Addressing Uneven Terrain

To fix the uneven terrain, carefully cut out a 2’x2’ section of sod and remove the excess dirt beneath it. Add compost and soil, thoroughly moisten the area with a hose, and then re-cover it with the removed sod. Use the remaining dirt to fill in the gaps around the patch edges for a seamless blend.

Testing Your pH Levels

Looking to bring your yard to life? Establishing a strong chemistry between you and your soil is key. Start by testing the pH levels of your soil - if they are too high or too low, essential nutrients may struggle to reach your grass. You can easily do this at home with a pH soil tester from a home and garden center, or opt for professional lawn care services for a more thorough assessment.

Nourish Your Lawn

Fertilizer plays a crucial role in revitalizing and nourishing dehydrated lawns. To effectively restore your lawn's health, opt for a slow-release fertilizer and mindful application. Excessive use of fertilizer can result in nitrogen burning, disease, or contamination of stormwater, emphasizing the importance of careful dosage. If you previously conducted a soil test, adhere to the recommended fertilizer type and quantity. In the absence of a soil test, select a slow-release fertilizer with a balanced nitrogen-phosphorus-potassium ratio of 3-1-1. Prior to seeding your yard for lawn renovation, supplement with fertilizer one week in advance and ensure it is adequately watered into the soil for optimal absorption and effectiveness.

Nurture Your Microscopic Allies

Your yard is a vibrant ecosystem teeming with billions of beneficial microbes and microorganisms in every pinch of soil. By providing them with nutrient-rich soil containing 2–5% organic material, you can support their efforts to rejuvenate your lawn and maintain its lush, green appearance.

Breathe New Life Into Your Lawn

Revitalize Your Neglected Lawn with Core Aeration: Some lawns are truly deprived of the care and oxygen they desperately need to thrive. By using a core aerator on your yard, you can create essential space in the soil for grass roots to establish a deeper foundation. This process allows for better absorption of nutrients, fertilizer, and organic matter, setting the stage for a vibrant, lush lawn to flourish.

How to Properly Seed Your Lawn for Optimal Growth

Enhance the sowing process by evenly spreading grass seed by hand or with a broadcast spreader across your lawn. For a more efficient method, utilize a slit-seeder to create small openings in the soil and automatically plant the seeds. Prepare your lawn by dethatching to reveal the soil, and ensure it is adequately watered before sowing. Begin seeding at the perimeter of the lawn, dividing the seed and applying it in two directions. Lightly cover the seeded areas with compost and topsoil. The timing of overseeding should be based on the climate and region where you reside.

Northern Climates

For optimal results, consider overseeding your lawn during the late summer or early fall. This timing will allow the young grass seeds to germinate, develop strong root systems, and store vital nutrients for the following spring. By taking these proactive measures, you can ensure a lush and healthy lawn for the upcoming seasons.

Southern Climates

To promote robust growth and nutrient storage in your lawn, it is recommended to overseed during the early summer months. This timing allows the grass seeds to establish deep, strong root systems just in time before the arrival of fall. By overseeding at this time, you can ensure that your grass will be better equipped to withstand the challenges of the upcoming seasons and maintain its health and vitality.

Maintain Your Lawn with Care and Attention

Restoring a lush, healthy lawn requires ongoing care and attention. To accelerate the germination process after overseeding, it is recommended to lightly mist the yard for 5 to 10 minutes in the morning and afternoon, increasing it to twice a day as needed. Within four to six weeks, your new grass should reach a height of about two inches, indicating successful growth. Once the grass has matured, it is safe to resume a regular watering schedule and consider a second round of fertilizer, following the manufacturer's guidelines. When the grass reaches three to four inches in height, you can begin mowing, ensuring that your mower blade is sharp to avoid damaging the young grass. By following these eight simple steps diligently, you can achieve a vibrant, green lawn in no time. Your commitment to proper lawn care will be rewarded with beautiful, lush grass that you can proudly enjoy.

For more lawn tips and tricks click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on what lawn equipment is best for your lawn!!

ENTREE: TRAEGER BBQ CHICKEN BREASTS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Wed, 24 Apr 2024 17:23:05 GMT

TRAEGE BBQ CHICKEN BREASTS

Massage your chicken breasts with a smattering of spices, grill them hot and fast, and mop them with a mix of Traeger BBQ sauces for perfectly tangy chicken.

Prep Time

20 MIN

Cook Time

30 MIN

Pellets

HICKORY

INGREDIENTS

MAIN

3/8 Cup Olive oil

1 1/2 Teaspoon grated garlic

1 1/2 Tablespoon Worcestershire sauce

3 Tablespoon Traeger Fin & Feather Rub

6 chicken breasts

3/4 Cup Traeger 'Que BBQ Sauce

3/4 Cup Traeger Sweet & Heat BBQ Sauce

STEPS

In a small bowl, whisk together the olive oil, garlic, Worcestershire sauce, and Traeger Fin & Feather rub.

Coat the chicken breasts all over with the mixture.

In a separate small bowl, mix together the Traeger Sweet & Heat and Traeger ‘Que BBQ sauces.

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 500°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Insert the probe into the thickest part of a chicken breast. Place the chicken directly on the grill grates, close the lid, and grill until the internal temperature reaches 160℉, 20-30 minutes. 5 minutes before the chicken is done, brush with the BBQ sauce mixture.

Remove the chicken from the grill and let rest 5 minutes before slicing. Enjoy!

to check out our traeger line up click here !!!

A Complete Steak Guide to The Perfect Steak

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Thu, 18 Apr 2024 14:59:52 GMT

Indulge in the ultimate food experience with our complete steak guide, guaranteed to elevate your cooking skills to new heights. Say goodbye to mediocre meals and hello to perfectly cooked steaks every time with the help of your trusty Meater. Celebrate food month in style and savor the flavor of a perfectly cooked steak like never before. Dig in and get ready to impress your taste buds with our foolproof steak guide.

Ribeye Steak

Renowned for its succulent marbling and bold flavor, the ribeye steak is a beloved choice among steak connoisseurs. Perfect for grilling or pan-searing, the ribeye shines when cooked to a juicy medium rare or medium doneness, allowing its inherent tenderness and taste to truly shine through. Treat yourself to the exquisite experience of savoring a perfectly cooked ribeye steak, guaranteed to satisfy even the most discerning palates.

Filet Mignon

Filet mignon, also known as tenderloin steak, is renowned for its unparalleled tenderness and velvety texture. Coveted by aficionados for its lean profile, filet mignon is a prime choice for those seeking a refined dining experience. To fully appreciate its exquisite qualities, this cut is best enjoyed cooked to a perfect medium rare, allowing its natural tenderness to shine through. Indulge in the luxury of savoring a meticulously prepared filet mignon, a culinary masterpiece that is sure to delight the most discerning palates.

New York Strip Steak

The New York strip steak, renowned for its robust flavor profile, offers a versatile dining experience. Whether grilled to perfection, expertly pan-seared, or broiled to your liking, this cut never fails to impress. For optimal enjoyment, aim for a medium doneness to strike the perfect harmony between tenderness and flavor, ensuring each bite is a culinary delight. Embrace the culinary magic of the New York strip steak, a timeless classic that is sure to satisfy even the most discerning of palates.

T-Bone Steak

Named after the distinctive T-shaped bone that separates the tenderloin and strip portions, the T-bone steak embodies the best of both worlds. Whether grilled, roasted, or expertly prepared using the sous vide method, this cut guarantees a delectably tender steak. For an unparalleled dining experience, aim for a perfect medium rare doneness, allowing the flavors to shine and the juiciness to take center stage. Indulge in the exceptional taste and texture of the T-bone steak, a culinary masterpiece that promises a truly unforgettable meal.

Tomahawk Steak

The Tomahawk steak is a breathtaking cut of beef celebrated for its remarkable size and exceptional flavor profile. Whether expertly grilled to perfection or elegantly roasted in the oven, this majestic steak is guaranteed to be the pièce de résistance of your dining experience, elevating any meal to a memorable occasion. Impress your guests and indulge in the unrivaled taste and succulence of the Tomahawk steak, a show-stopping choice that will leave a lasting impression and create unforgettable moments at the table.

The Perfect Tool for Perfect Cooks,Every Time

The Meater 2 Plus is the perfect cooking companion for any culinary method, whether you're baking in the oven or grilling outdoors. With its advanced technology, you can now spend less time monitoring your food and more time savoring the sunshine and good company. Let the Meater 2 Plus take the guesswork out of cooking, allowing you to relax and enjoy the cooking process like never before.

In conclusion, elevate your culinary experience with our steak guide and the Meater 2 Plus. Prepare to bid farewell to average meals and welcome perfectly cooked steaks during food month. Explore esteemed cuts like ribeye and filet mignon, supported by the Meater 2 Plus to easily cook and enjoy every meal. Let this cooking companion enhance your dining experiences, making each meal a true culinary delight.

For more grill tips and recipes click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on our grills

10 Must-Do Spring Gardening Tasks By Pros

Fri, 05 Apr 2024 18:31:05 GMT

As spring arrives, the weather varies across different regions, impacting your gardening plans. While some areas may already be planting this month, in other places it's still too early. Nonetheless, there are plenty of tasks to tackle in your garden this month, whether you have a large yard or a small patio garden. Tasks like pruning, transplanting, and dividing fall-blooming perennials should be on your to-do list , along with setting up trellises and adding compost to your garden beds. Before you dive into these tasks, it's essential to consider your agricultural zone and ensure it is the right time for these activities. If your ground is still frozen, it's best to wait a few more weeks to avoid any potential damage.

Revitalize Your Evergreens

Now is the optimal time to remove coverings from your evergreen shrubs that have been protected from the winter weather. Consider this as a rejuvenation process for your garden after a period of dormancy. According to Justin Hancock, a horticulturist at Costa Farms, it is essential to water your evergreens during early spring, especially in regions where the soil freezes during winter. In addition, the late winter and early spring months present an ideal opportunity to take hardwood cuttings for propagating your beloved trees and shrubs while they are still in their dormant state.

Install trellises and other support systems

To ensure optimal growth in your garden, it is recommended to install trellises and other plant supports before new growth begins. Waiting until plants have already started growing can potentially damage their roots. By setting up the support structures preemptively, before the garden flourishes, you can easily guide the growth of your plants and prevent unruly vines and stems from causing any disruption. Carrie Spoonemore, co-creator of From Seed to Spoon, advises against delaying support installation to protect the health and development of your plants.

Start pruning

With the arrival of warmer weather, it becomes essential to prune woody plants in your garden. The key to successful pruning is to do so before new buds and growth start to emerge on the stems. It is important to note that each perennial shrub and bush has unique pruning requirements, so it is advisable to conduct thorough research before making any cuts with your pruners.Before embarking on the pruning process, it is crucial to clean, disinfect, and sharpen your shears, according to Chuck Pavlich, director of new product development at Terra Nova Nurseries. Pavlich suggests a pro tip of cleaning the shears before putting them away as well, as this helps maintain their condition and makes it easier to remove fresh plant resin compared to resin that has been sitting for months.

Prune Cool-Season Ornamental Grasses

Cool-season and warm-season ornamental grasses require distinct care to thrive. To determine which varieties are in your garden, observe how they fare in different weather conditions. Cool-season grasses maintain their appearance in colder temperatures, while warm-season varieties will wither and turn brown following the first frost. It is crucial to refrain from trimming cool-season ornamental grasses until the soil thaws and any remnants of ice and snow have melted. When the time comes to prune, ensure you leave at least one third of the older foliage intact to support optimal growth. Over-trimming can hinder the plant's development, so exercise caution when cutting back excess foliage.

Divide fall-blooming perennials

Prepare Your Fall-Blooming Perennials for Thriving Growth. To ensure the health and vigor of your fall-blooming perennials like hostas and daylilies, it is essential to dig them up and divide them before they begin their seasonal growth. Using a sharp spade or other suitable garden tool, carefully divide the plants and replant the divisions in suitable locations within your garden or share them with friends.For plants that prove challenging to divide, a helpful tip is the "two forks" technique: Place two garden forks back to back, insert them into the center of the root ball, and gently push them apart by applying pressure to the handles. This method aids in separating the roots without causing excessive damage, as recommended by Kelly Funk, president of Jackson & Perkins.If you find yourself needing to divide unruly irises or peonies in the spring instead of the fall, know that it is possible, especially for irises known for their resilience. While best practice is to divide these plants in the fall, addressing them in the spring can still prove successful in promoting their growth.

Transplant any deciduous trees and shrubs

Take Advantage of the Optimal Time for Transplanting Deciduous Trees and Shrubs, As the season transitions, now is an opportune moment to relocate any deciduous trees and shrubs in your garden. It is crucial to undertake this task before the plants commence new growth, as disturbing them during this phase may result in shock.To minimize stress on the plant during the moving process, landscape expert Hancock suggests digging the hole for the plant's new location before uprooting it. By planning ahead and preparing the site in advance, you can help ease the transition for the plant.Furthermore, consider the weather conditions when planning the transplant. Ideally, choose a couple of cloudy or rainy days post-transplantation to provide the plant with a more favorable environment for acclimatizing. Stay informed about the weather forecast in your area and schedule the transplant accordingly to ensure the plant's successful adaptation.

Revitalize Your Flower Beds with a Thorough Cleanout

As we freshen up our homes for spring, let's not forget to give our flower beds the same attention. It's time to clear out the old to make room for new growth and plants to flourish. Removing leaves and mulch that have accumulated over winter is essential to allow early spring growth to emerge, such as bulbs and perennials.To avoid any damage to your perennials, it's important not to jump into spring cleanup too early. Waiting until the risk of hard freezes has passed is advised to protect your garden. Double-check weather forecasts for any potential freezing temperatures before starting the cleanup process.When dealing with the fallen leaves, remember that they may be serving as homes for hibernating butterflies and moths. Approach the cleanup process with care, gently relocating the leaves to a corner of your yard before discarding them later in the season. This consideration for local pollinators will help preserve important wildlife in your garden.

Add compost to garden beds

Once your garden soil has thawed, this task can be undertaken. Incorporate a layer of your chosen compost into the upper layer of the garden soil. This will provide a beneficial lift to all plants that are beginning to show signs of new growth.Hancock highlights that compost serves the additional purpose of breaking up dense clay soil as it breaks down. This process not only benefits sandy soils by extending moisture and nutrient retention but also creates a conducive environment for plant roots to flourish.

Enhance soil health with pre-planting slow-release fertilizer

In addition to compost, incorporating slow-release fertilizer into your garden before planting can provide a valuable boost to your plants. There are two main types to choose from: organic options like greensand, limestone, or rock phosphate, and commercially-made slow-release fertilizers. While both types have their own benefits and drawbacks, organic options are gentler on newly transplanted plants, offering steady nutrition over time. On the other hand, commercially-made fertilizers react to heat and moisture levels, providing nutrients during key growth periods.

Carefully plan the layout of your garden

Now is the perfect time to plan out the layout of your gardens for the upcoming season. It is best to do this when your beds are clear and you have some dedicated time to research different plant species and their specific requirements. Consider factors such as bloom time, color scheme, fragrance, and the purpose of your garden, such as a cutting garden," advises Laura Walsh, marketing director at Oasis Forage Products. "Grouping plants with similar needs will make maintenance easier and promote healthy growth." Creating a detailed map of your gardens can help you keep track of where each plant is located, including seasonal plants like annuals and tender fruits and vegetables. This thoughtful planning will pay off in the following year and make gardening more enjoyable and manageable.

For more lawn tips and tricks click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on what lawn equipment is best for your lawn!!

How to Get Your Outdoor Equipment Ready For Spring

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Mon, 01 Apr 2024 18:03:22 GMT

After your outdoor power equipment has spent the winter in storage, it is important to perform some maintenance to ensure everything is in top shape for the spring season. In this blog, we will cover the essential maintenance tasks for these four key outdoor power tools: Riding Mowers, Walk Behind Mowers, Leaf Blowers/Vacs, and Trimmers. As you inspect each piece of equipment for maintenance requirements, be sure to pay attention to these critical factors to determine whether your equipment is ready for spring or needs some care. Remember, now is the perfect time to schedule preseason maintenance or repairs for your power equipment at a local dealer to beat the rush and ensure your equipment is in top-notch condition when you need it.

Spring Riding Mower Preparation

Taking the time to properly maintain your riding mower will not only improve its performance but also extend its lifespan. In addition to checking the battery, electrical system, spark plugs, and tire pressure, it is crucial to inspect the blades for any damage or dullness. Sharpening or replacing the blades as needed will ensure a clean and efficient cut, reducing strain on the engine. Cleaning or replacing the air filter is another important step to ensure optimal engine performance and fuel efficiency. Lastly, checking the oil level, changing the oil if necessary, and inspecting the belts and pulleys for wear and tear will help prevent unexpected breakdowns during the mowing season. By following these maintenance tasks, you can enjoy a hassle-free and productive mowing experience all season long.

Preparing Walk-Behind Mowers for Spring Maintenance

Regular maintenance of your walk-behind mower is essential to keep it running smoothly and efficiently. In addition to disposing of old fuel and checking oil, spark plugs, and air filters, it is important to inspect and clean the cutting deck thoroughly. Removing any build-up of grass clippings and debris will prevent clogging and ensure a clean and even cut. Sharpening the blades regularly will also improve cutting performance and reduce strain on the engine. Checking the pull cords for any signs of wear and tear will prevent unexpected breakdowns and ensure easy starting. It is also important to inspect and maintain any attachments or accessories, such as baggers or mulching kits, to ensure they are working properly. By following these maintenance tasks, you can keep your walk-behind mower in top condition and enjoy a well-groomed lawn all season long.

How to Prep Leaf Blower/Vacs for Spring

Prior to using your leaf blower or vacuum, it is essential to perform a few key safety checks. Begin by ensuring that the bottom inlet cover or vacuum tube is properly locked in place to prevent any accidents during operation. Next, carefully inspect the safety tab on both the inlet cover and vacuum tube to confirm that it is not damaged, as this is crucial for safe usage. Finally, thoroughly check all straps, handles, nuts, and bolts to make sure they are securely fastened, as loose components could pose a hazard during operation. By diligently following these steps, you can help ensure a safe and successful leaf blowing or vacuuming session.

How to Prep Trimmers for Spring

As you prepare your trimmers for the spring season, it is important to conduct a thorough inspection to ensure optimal performance. Begin by checking the spool to make sure it is fully loaded and ready for use, as well as ensuring the cutter head is clear of any dirt or cuttings that may impede its function. Additionally, examine all fasteners on the trimmer and tighten them as needed to prevent any potential issues during operation. Lastly, make sure to clear any debris from the air intake vents to maintain proper airflow and prevent overheating. By following these steps, you can help ensure that your trimmers are in top condition and ready for all your spring landscaping tasks.

What if My Yard Tool Won’t Start

If your yard tool is experiencing starting issues, there are a few common reasons that may be causing the problem. Firstly, check to see if you are using fresh fuel that is less than 30 days old, as old fuel can deteriorate and prevent proper engine ignition. Next, ensure that the spark plug wire is securely attached to the spark plug and is clean and in good condition, as a faulty connection can disrupt the flow of electricity needed to start the engine. Additionally, if your machine relies on a battery for power, make sure it is fully charged to provide the necessary energy for starting. By troubleshooting these potential causes, you can pinpoint the issue and take the necessary steps to get your yard tool up and running again.

Ensure Your Power Equipment is Spring-Ready

Not only will early maintenance ensure that your equipment is ready to go when you need it, but it will also give you peace of mind knowing that your tools are in safe and reliable condition. With the busy season ahead, having your equipment checked and serviced now will give you the confidence to tackle any project without worrying about unexpected malfunctions. Take advantage of this downtime to get ahead and set yourself up for success in the upcoming season. Don't wait until the last minute - schedule your maintenance today and enjoy a stress-free and productive spring and summer with your power equipment.

For more tips click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on what equipment is right for your lawn!

ENTREE: TRAEGER BAKED CINNAMON ROLLS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 29 Mar 2024 17:04:54 GMT

TRAEGER BAKED CINNAMON ROLLS

This easy-to-make favorite is rolling with Traeger’s signature wood-fired flavor. Serve this sweet treat for breakfast or dish it out for dessert.

Prep Time

1 HR

30 MIN

Cook Time

20 MIN

Pellets

PECAN

SERVES 8

INGREDIENTS

MAIN

1/2 Ounce (2 packets) active dry yeast

1/3 Cup plus 1 teaspoon cane sugar

1 Cup warm water (110°F to 115°F)

5 Cup all-purpose flour, plus more as needed

2 Teaspoon Salt

1 Cup warm milk (110°-115°F)

1 Large eggs

As Needed oil

1/2 Cup butter, softened

1 Cup brown sugar

2 Tablespoon cinnamon

CREAM CHEESE ICING

4 Ounce cream cheese, room temperature

1/2 Cup butter, room temperature

2 Cup powdered sugar

1/2 Teaspoon vanilla

1 Teaspoon milk

Pinch Salt

STEPS

Place the yeast, 1 tsp of sugar, and the warm water in a mixing bowl or the base of a stand mixer. Stir to combine. Allow the yeast to proof for 5 minutes, it should start to bubble a bit, showing that the yeast is indeed alive.

Sprinkle the flour, salt and remaining 1/3 cup sugar over the yeast mixture. Using a dough hook or wooden spoon, stir for 30 seconds. Pour in the warm milk and egg.

Knead again on the medium-low setting, or on a floured work surface by hand until the dough is very soft, adding up to one more cup of flour so the dough is soft and smooth and has lost its sticky quality.

Coat the bowl with a small film of oil and place the dough in the bowl, turning to coat the dough evenly with oil. Cover the bowl with a clean cloth, place in a warm spot in the kitchen and allow to proof, about 45 minutes. The dough will have almost doubled in size.

In a small bowl combine the softened butter, sugar, and cinnamon.

Punch down the dough and roll out into a rectangle on a floured work surface.

Spread the cinnamon butter mixture over the top of the dough and roll up into a log.

Cut the dough into rolls about 2" thick. Transfer rolls to a buttered baking dish or cast iron and lightly cover with a kitchen towel. Let the rolls rise again until doubled in size.

When ready to cook, set the temperature to 325℉ and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Place the baking dish or cast iron directly on the grill grate and bake the rolls until lightly browned, about 20 minutes.

For the Icing: place cream cheese and butter in the bowl of a stand mixer fitted with a paddle attachment. Mix together on medium speed until combined. Reduce the speed to low and add in the powdered sugar slowly. Add vanilla, a pinch of salt and milk and mix to combine.

Remove the rolls from the grill and spread icing on top while the rolls are still warm. Enjoy!

To take a look at our Traeger lineup click here !!

Selecting and Maintaining Ornamental Grasses

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Tue, 26 Mar 2024 20:33:51 GMT

Ornamental grass is gaining popularity for its hardy nature, visual impact, and benefits to local wildlife. Unlike traditional grass, ornamental grass comes in a variety of heights and colors, making it a versatile option for landscaping, hardscaping, and potted plants. If you're considering planting ornamental grass, we'll discuss important details to consider and the minimal care needed to keep it thriving.

Choosing the Right Ornamental Grasses for Your Garden

If you are already familiar with ornamental grass in your landscaping, feel free to skip ahead to our section on ornamental grass care. However, if you are new to these plants and interested in their beauty and ease of care, keep reading to discover how to choose the right ornamental grass for your garden. Ornamental grasses can spread, with some species being more aggressive than others. When selecting ornamental grasses, consider whether they are clump-forming or runners. Runners spread quickly and are ideal for covering large areas, while clump-forming grasses remain contained in neat mounds. Prioritize understanding the growth patterns and potential spread of each grass species to avoid any unwanted surprises in your yard.

Fast Growing Ornamental Grass

Fast-growing grasses, known as runners, can be a great option for filling low-maintenance spots with a visually impactful plant. Additionally, these runner grasses tend to be taller and more dramatic compared to clump-forming varieties. Popular runner grasses include Blue Lyme Grass, Prairie Cordgrass, and Ribbongrass. However, it is important to be cautious when planting fast-growing grasses, as non-native varieties have the potential to spread beyond your property, outcompeting native plants and exhibiting invasive qualities. To avoid these issues, consider planting native grasses that are not only fast-growing but also resilient to various environmental conditions, ranging from drought to flooding.

Slow Growing Ornamental Grasses

Caring for ornamental grass is a breeze when you don't have to constantly trim or weed it. To keep your landscaping and local flora undisturbed, opt for clumping varieties of grass. Not only do these types of grasses stay short and manageable throughout the growing season, they also expand over time to fill out a space without becoming invasive. Popular clump-forming grasses like fountain grass, maiden grass, and switchgrass are excellent choices for low-maintenance landscapes.

Which Ornamental Grasses Pair Well Together?

When pairing ornamental grasses, it is crucial to consider contrasts. Encircle tall grasses with short, clump-forming varieties. Combine grasses with striking catkins with those boasting sharp forms or bold attitudes. Contrasting colors guarantee a visually captivating display that will endure long after your flowers have faded.

What is the Easiest Ornamental Grass to Grow in Your Climate?

When it comes to grasses, they can be categorized into two main groups: warm-season and cool-season varieties. Warm-season grasses typically thrive in zones 3 to 11 and are known for being easier to cultivate. Despite their name, these grasses can withstand cold climates, but they flourish best in temperatures ranging from 80 to 90 degrees. The primary reason for their ease of growth compared to cool-season grasses lies in their superior drought tolerance. Drought-resistant options range from understated native Bluestem to extravagant and towering Pampas grass.

Nurturing Ornamental Grasses

Now that you have chosen the ideal grass for your project, caring for ornamental grasses can be relatively simple. Once established, most ornamental grasses require minimal watering and fertilizer, with grooming typically needed only once a year. Depending on the type of grass you have selected, your main task may involve preventing it from spreading uncontrollably and taking over your landscaping. Opting for clump-forming varieties can help maintain grass within a specific area, although some may try to spread via underground rhizomes. Diligent maintenance will assist in keeping them in check, allowing you to enjoy a well-maintained landscape.

When to Cut Back Ornamental Grasses

There are three main types of grasses with varying growing patterns. Evergreen grasses maintain growth throughout the year, slowing down in mid-winter. Warm-season grasses initiate growth in late spring, while cool-season grasses start growing in the spring before temperatures exceed 75 degrees. Long ornamental grasses are appreciated during winter for their seasonal interest and ability to provide habitat for animals. In climates with wet winters or fire concerns, cutting back may be done in late fall. Warm-weather grasses turn brown in winter but leaving them uncut can offer winter interest in the snow and provide seeds for wildlife. Cool-weather grasses may continue growing through mild winters. Therefore, most ornamental grasses should be trimmed back to 6 to 10 inches in early spring before new growth begins.

Maintaining and Trimming Ornamental Grasses

Before cutting back ornamental grasses, ensure your protection by wearing thick gloves and eye gear, as the long grass can be unexpectedly sharp. To simplify the cutting process and save your back, use a bungee cord and hedge trimmer. Place the cord around the base of a grass clump, securing it into a tidy bundle. Proceed to trim the grass evenly to your preferred height with the hedge trimmer. To streamline cleanup, collect the clippings in a bucket or wheelbarrow as you go. Most ornamental grasses should be pruned annually, excluding evergreen varieties like Fescue and Blue Oat Grass, which do not go completely dormant. If evergreen ornamental grasses start to appear unkempt with dead or dying strands, they require combing out and removal of brown stems.

Grooming Ornamental Grasses

Maintaining ornamental grasses involves periodic combing to eliminate dead and dried-up stems. The process is straightforward: wear gloves to protect your hands from sharp grass strands, then gently comb through the grass clump with your fingers. Shake the grass to reveal any hidden dead strands and remove them by pulling away at the base. For cleanliness, carry a container to collect the discarded strands as you groom.

Caring for Biennial Ornamental Grass

Every two to three years, clumps of ornamental grasses may need to be divided to rejuvenate their growth and fill in empty spaces in your landscape. Dividing should ideally be done in early spring, but there are some exceptions. Warm-season grasses can also be divided in mid-summer before they flower, while cool-season grasses can be divided in early fall. Give your grass time to recover before the onset of winter to ensure a healthy display in the following growing season.

How to Divide and Transplant Ornamental Grasses

Before dividing your grass, ensure that you catch it while it's actively growing but before it flowers to prevent potential root system issues. To divide the grass evenly, remove the entire grass clump by digging around it with a sharp shovel, cutting through some roots. Lift the grass and roots, then set it aside. Use a garden knife or saw to cut down the middle of the root ball and divide it into segments, each with some roots intact. Consider the original spot's size before dividing the entire clump to determine how much grass to keep in the area. Transplanting divided or obtained decorative grass cuttings is a straightforward process. Dig a hole twice the width of the grass roots, and mix the soil with compost instead of fertilizer. Cover the grass with its roots at the base of the crown, water immediately after planting, and continue watering until the plant is well-rooted.

Tending to Potted Decorative Grasses

Grass is a versatile and appealing option for enhancing small outdoor areas like patios, pool decks, and balconies. Potted ornamental grasses can effortlessly bring a touch of greenery and elegance to any space. While caring for decorative grass in containers is generally straightforward, it is essential to note a few key differences. In regions with cold winters, it is advisable to relocate containers to a sheltered spot like a garage during the colder months. Additionally, ensure that ornamental grasses receive a deep watering every two to three weeks to maintain their health and vitality.

For more tips click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on what equipment is right for your lawn!

Get Your Grass to Bounce Back After Winter

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Sun, 24 Mar 2024 16:45:00 GMT

Tips to Revive your Lawn

Here are some tips to help revive your lawn and make it look greener and healthier. The first step is to carefully rake and dethatch. When raking, it’s important to wait until the grass is dry to avoid causing damage.

When dethatching, be sure to remove any excess thatch or dead material from your lawn, as a layer thicker than an inch can prevent nutrients and water from reaching your grass. It’s important to work gently to ensure that your lawn can receive the nourishment it needs.Next, it’s crucial to aerate your lawn to improve the circulation of air, water, and nutrients to the soil and roots. Aeration can be done using a pitchfork or a specialized tool called a lawn aerator. This process helps to relieve compacted soil and promote healthy root growth.

#1: Accessing Your Soil and Aerate it If Necessary

The quality of your grass is affected by a variety of factors, and one common problem is soil compaction. If your lawn seems to be declining in health over the years, compacted soil may be to blame. This can be caused by foot traffic, tire tracks, and other repeated forces. To address this issue, take a walk around your yard to check for hard spots in the ground. To loosen up the soil, you can aerate the ground, allowing it to reintroduce oxygen, water, and other essential nutrients.

#2: Clearing and Seeding Dead Patches

Address dry patches in your grass as soon as possible to prevent them from worsening. Once bare spots appear, prepare the soil by loosening the surface with a rake or similar tool. Then, choose the right grass seed and spread it over the loosened soil. To prevent birds from eating the seeds, mix in extra soil or compost. Keep the seeds moist by watering them once or twice a day for about 10 days until they start sprouting. Once the new grass is taller than the rest of your lawn, you can mow it to the desired length.

#3: Right Pre-emergent Herbicides For You

There are several herbicide options available in the market, but not all are suitable for application on your grass after winter. Selective herbicides are designed to target and eliminate problematic weeds without causing harm to other plants. Nonselective herbicides, on the other hand, will kill any type of plant it comes in contact with. Pre-emergent herbicides are used as a preventive measure before weeds like thistle and clover start to grow, while post-emergent herbicides are used reactively to eliminate weeds that have already sprouted. It's important to note that if you have newly seeded patches of grass, you should avoid applying herbicides to prevent any negative impact on the growth of the new grass.

#4: Fertilizing Grass and Starting Sprinklers

Once the herbicides have been absorbed, it's time to start fertilizing your lawn. Fertilizer provides essential nutrients needed for healthy grass growth, especially if your lawn is not already thick and green. The soil alone may not be able to provide all the nutrients necessary throughout the growing season, making it difficult to revive your grass after winter without the help of fertilizer. Additionally, as your grass grows, it's crucial to increase watering, particularly after fertilization, to ensure that the nutrients are effectively absorbed into the grass roots. It's important not to rush into watering, but to wait until the grass is ready to take in additional moisture. This approach will help promote strong and vibrant growth in your lawn.

#5: Time to Start Mowing

Once the grass has grown tall and the ground is dry, you are free to begin mowing your yard. However, after winter, it is important to leave the grass fairly long. Cutting the grass too short can encourage the growth of weeds and limit the surface area needed for photosynthesis, leading to a weakened lawn. It is best to set your cutting length to a higher height for the first few cuts of the season to promote healthy and strong growth while preventing weed growth. This will help maintain the overall health and appearance of your lawn. Need a new lawnmower? Explore our options here.

For more tips click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for info on what equipment is right for your lawn!

Tips and Tricks for Keeping Your Mower Blades Sharp and Balanced

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Wed, 20 Mar 2024 18:36:25 GMT

In this blog, we get into the important topic of maintaining your mower blades for optimal performance. From understanding the ideal sharpness level of your blades to the best practices for sharpening and balancing, we provide valuable insights and tips for every lawn care enthusiast. Whether you are a beginner or a seasoned pro, our guide will help you navigate the dos and don'ts of blade maintenance, ensuring your lawn stays looking its best all year round.

How sharp should your mower blade b e?

In order to achieve the perfect balance of sharpness for your mower blades, it's important to understand that they should be aggressively sharp, but not as sharp as a razor's edge. You should be able to touch the blade with your hand without getting cut. Contrary to popular belief, a lawn mower blade with a razor sharp edge will not cut grass better. In fact, an edge that is too sharp has the tendency to roll over, which can cause blades to get nicked and chipped. This can lead to the need for more frequent sharpening and a shorter blade life. By following our recommendations for maintaining the optimal sharpness level of your mower blades, you can ensure a clean and precise cut for your lawn while also prolonging the life of your blades.

How Often Should You Sharpen Lawn Mower Blades?

It is essential to consider the frequency of use when determining how often to sharpen your lawn mower blades. For homeowners who use their mower occasionally, an annual sharpening may be sufficient. However, for professionals who rely on their equipment daily, more frequent sharpening will be necessary to maintain optimal cutting performance. It is important to pay attention to the cutting quality of your mower – if you start to notice uneven cuts or missed patches of grass, it may be time to sharpen your blades. Additionally, any damaged blades should be replaced promptly to prevent further issues and ensure a clean cut for your lawn. By staying proactive about blade maintenance and replacement, you can extend the life of your mower and enjoy a well-manicured lawn.

What tool do you use to sharpen mower blades?

Besides using a blade grinder for sharpening, it is also important to inspect your mower blades regularly for any signs of wear or damage. This includes looking for nicks, gouges, or bends in the blade that can affect its cutting ability. Neglecting to address these issues can not only result in an uneven and unkempt lawn but could also put unnecessary strain on your mower's engine. By taking the time to properly maintain and sharpen your mower blades, you can ensure that your lawn mower operates efficiently and effectively, saving you time and effort in the long run. Remember, a well-cared-for blade leads to a well-groomed lawn.

When should I replace my mower blades?

Moreover, it is recommended to balance your mower blades after sharpening or replacing them. Balanced blades help prevent excessive vibration, which can lead to uneven cuts and potentially damage your mower. To balance a blade, simply hang it on a nail or blade balancer tool and ensure that it remains level. By following these maintenance steps, you can prolong the life of your mower blades, enhance your lawn's appearance, and keep your mower running smoothly for years to come.

Why should I balance my mower blades?

In addition, keeping your mower blades sharp is also crucial for achieving a clean and precise cut. Dull blades can tear grass rather than cleanly cutting it, resulting in a ragged and uneven appearance. Sharpening your blades regularly will not only improve the aesthetic of your lawn but also promote healthier grass growth by preventing stress and damage to the blades. A sharp blade requires less effort from your mower, leading to increased fuel efficiency and reduced wear and tear on the engine. By consistently balancing and sharpening your mower blades, you can optimize the performance of your equipment and enjoy a well-manicured lawn all season long.

For more tips click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on what equipment is right for your lawn!

Controlling Invasive Grasses in Your Lawn: A Comprehensive Guide

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Fri, 15 Mar 2024 14:57:27 GMT

Identifying and Controlling Invasive Grasses and Weeds in Your Yard

Invasive grasses and weeds have the potential to quickly transform a beautiful, healthy lawn into a problematic eyesore. These unwelcome intruders can be hard to identify among your regular grasses and plants. It's important to take proactive steps to prevent their establishment in your yard. Here is a field guide to assist you in identifying and effectively eliminating some of the most common types of invasive weeds that may invade your lawn. Don't wait until it's too late – stay a step ahead of these deceptive grasses before they become a major headache.

Understanding and Addressing Common Invasive Grasses and Weeds in Lawns

Crabgrass, also known as Finger Grass, is a widespread invasive weed that plagues many lawns. This annual grass is recognizable by its long, finger-like fronds and can be found in various regions of North America, thriving in both warm and cool climates. Crabgrass is particularly opportunistic in lawns that are inadequately watered, poorly fertilized, and have drainage issues.

Hogweed encompasses various invasive weed species, featuring clusters of small white flowers resembling Queen Anne's Lace. Despite its attractive appearance, this weed is highly invasive and can rapidly overtake a lawn. Its sap is phototoxic and especially harmful to children and pets.

Johnsongrass, a highly invasive weed, thrives in nutrient-rich, bottom ground and cultivated fields, making it a significant threat. Resembling a smaller version of wheat, it spreads rapidly and poses a risk to animals if consumed in large quantities.

Cheatgrass, also known as downy brome or dropping brome, is easily recognizable by its slender stalk and "hairy" leaves. A highly adaptable species, Cheatgrass thrives in various climates and has become a common invasive grass in lawns. Its prolific seed production not only causes trouble for lawns and allergy sufferers, but also poses a threat to other plant species, easily overtaking them.

Effective Strategies for Eliminating Invasive Grass and Weeds

Crabgrass: the most effective way to prevent its growth is by using a pre-emergent herbicide, ideally with mesotrione. This will stop the crabgrass from germinating in the first place. If crabgrass has already appeared in your lawn, one recommended approach is to mow over the patches to prevent further spread. Regular maintenance and care can also help prevent crabgrass infestations in the future.

Hogweed: Controlling hogweed is essential due to its rapid seeding. To prevent the spread of hogweed, it is crucial to start control measures before any sprouts emerge. Promptly removing any hogweed sprouts upon sighting them is crucial, especially for small infestations. Root cutting can be effective in stopping its spread. Similar to crabgrass, managing hogweed can involve mowing and the use of herbicides, such as glyphosate and triclopyr, before it becomes overgrown and harder to control. Regular maintenance and early intervention are key in preventing hogweed infestations.

Johnsongrass: There are several alternative treatment options available for managing this invasive grass beyond using traditional herbicides. Hand weeding can be an effective method for controlling johnsongrass when it first emerges. Many farmers also opt to use soil tilling in the fall when most invasive grasses are dormant to control johnsongrass. Additionally, in areas where there are no other plants, flooding patches of johnsongrass can be a non-chemical and effective way to prevent its spread. These alternative methods offer sustainable and environmentally friendly options for managing johnsongrass infestations.

Cheatgrass: There are multiple non-chemical approaches for managing Cheatgrass. In addition to manually removing individual shoots, regularly watering your lawn can also discourage its growth, as Cheatgrass thrives in dry soil conditions. Controlled burning is another method for large areas of Cheatgrass, although it should be conducted by a professional with caution. Alternatively, chemical herbicides containing glyphosate or imazapyr can also be applied for more targeted control.

Preventing and Managing Invasive Grasses and Weeds in Your Lawn

Invasive grasses and weeds not only detract from the appearance of your yard, but they can also harm other plants. While addressing these issues is typically straightforward and hassle-free, the best approach is to prevent invasive grasses from taking hold in the first place. This can be achieved by planting grass seed early, promoting a lush and dense lawn, and employing preventive herbicides when necessary. If you're seeking additional advice for maintaining a healthy and vibrant lawn, continue exploring further tips and tricks. For example, regularly mowing your lawn at the proper height can help prevent invasive grasses and weeds from establishing a foothold. Additionally, implementing a regular fertilization and watering schedule can promote the growth of healthy, vigorous grass that will out-compete invasive species.

For more tips click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for info on what equipment is right for your lawn!

Identifying and Addressing Spring Lawn Diseases: A Guide for Homeowners

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Wed, 13 Mar 2024 17:09:23 GMT

Is your lawn looking spotty? Does the grass appear gray, yellow, or even red? Here are five common reasons for discoloration in the spring. While many issues stem from fungi, simply using antifungal solutions may not be the solution. In this blog, you will learn about the potential causes, symptoms, and effective strategies to restore your grass to its healthy state.

Recognizing and Treati ng Snow Mold

Snow mold is a common issue in early to late spring, with two primary varieties: pink snow mold and gray snow mold. Less frequently seen are cottony snow mold and snow scald, which can also affect lawns in early spring. These mold-related diseases typically emerge after prolonged snow cover but can also be present in other conditions. Symptoms include round patches of white, pink, or tan dead grass surrounded by a subtle red-toned ring for pink snow mold, gray or tan dry patches with stringy mycelium for gray snow mold, fluffy mycelium on grass leaves for cottony snow mold, and bleached grass with black stripes for snow scald, particularly in wet, cool, and overcast weather.

How to treat snow mold?

Red thread is a fungal disease caused by Laetisaria fuciformis that manifests as rust-colored patches on grass. This blight often targets grass that is stressed from factors such as low fertilization, inadequate sunlight, or drought. While red thread is commonly seen in spring due to its preference for cool, damp weather, it can also occur in the fall.

To effectively treat red thread, it is recommended to collect clippings during active infection to prevent the spread of the fungus. In order to prevent future outbreaks of red thread in your lawn, ensure that nitrogen and potassium levels are adequately balanced and optimized.

RED THREAD

Fairy Rings Unveiled

Fairy rings are a common lawn disease caused by a fungus that manifests as rings of mushrooms, emerald circles, or arcs of dead grass surrounded by darker green grass. This fungal growth is typically fueled by excess thatch and prefers warm, wet conditions, making it a common issue in the spring but can occur at any time.

When treating fairy rings, it is important to refrain from using anti-fungal treatments as they are not effective. Instead, you can mask the appearance of fairy rings by carefully applying fertilizer to the lighter grass within the affected area and ensuring consistent watering to prevent drying out. To prevent fairy rings from occurring in the future, it is advisable to regularly remove thatch and aerate your lawn.

NECROTIC RING SPOT

Necrotic ring spot, also known as ring spot, is a fungus identified as Ophiosphaerella korrae that commonly affects Kentucky bluegrass and creeping red fescue. This spring lawn disease tends to emerge when the weather transitions from cool and wet to hot and dry conditions, particularly in compacted soils.

Symptoms of necrotic ring spot include large circles of discolored grass with healthy green grass in the center, initially appearing as bronze and later fading to a straw color. This distinctive pattern is referred to as the "frog eye" effect and is often found in newly sodded lawns due to the fungus's preference for compact soil.

To treat necrotic ring spot, it is essential to address soil compaction, improve drainage, and maintain proper fertility to prevent the disease. Additionally, reducing lawn stress through consistent watering and adjusting mowing height can help manage the issue. If necessary, fungicides can be used as a last resort.

Unveiling the Common Causes of Spring Lawn Diseases

Winter can take a toll on our lawns, as the unpredictable weather and fluctuating moisture levels can cause grass to become stressed and prone to fungal infections. There are several factors that can increase the vulnerability of your lawn to disease.

Fungi thrive in wet environments, so excess moisture and debris, such as leaves, that trap moisture in the grass can create conditions conducive to fungal diseases. To reduce moisture and prevent fungal infections, it is important to clear fall debris before snowfall and redistribute snowdrifts in your lawn to promote proper drainage.

In addition to moisture, an imbalance in nitrogen levels can also promote fungal growth. To prevent fungal infections, avoid fertilizing your lawn after the last frost and ensure proper timing of the first fertilization, based on your location and grass type.

By being aware of these factors and taking proactive steps to address potential issues, you can better prepare your lawn to combat spring lawn diseases. For further guidance on maintaining a healthy lawn, explore our blog for essential tips on everyday yard care and maintenance.

For more tips click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345 for more information on what equipment is right for your lawn!

HUGE Rebates and awesome financing options as low as 0%!

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Sat, 09 Mar 2024 20:20:56 GMT

Are you in search of a new mower at a budget-friendly rate? Look no further! We are currently offering fantastic sales on a variety of our mower brands. Take advantage of our affordable pricing, as well as our cheap interest financing options. Below are the mower brands we carry, along with their current sales and the details of our financing plans. Don't miss out on these great deals – act fast, as these offers won't last long!

Gravely Sale

Mark your calendars for the upcoming Mow the Distance Sales Event, running from March 27 to April 8, 2024, at all Gravely commercial dealers nationwide. Customers can take advantage of discounts of up to 25% off List Price on select Gravely commercial mowers, as well as up to $350 off select baggers. Eligible models for the sale include the Gravely ZT HD with Kohler engine, ZT HD with Kawasaki engine, ZT HD Stealth, compact Pro Pro Walk, Z-Stance, and Pro Stance, among others.

Don't miss out on these fantastic deals - make sure to mark your calendar and seize the opportunity to save on quality Gravely products during these special events!

Toro Sale

Toro Sales is currently offering incredible discounts on selected MyRide Timecutter and Titan models, with a generous $500 off from February 1 to March 31, 2024. Additionally, Toro is providing a fantastic 0% financing option for 60 months on specific Timecutter models, including 75740, 75742 and 75749. Among the other selected models that qualify for the $500 discount are 75316,and 75755, just to name a few. In addition to the $500 discount, Toro is also offering $400 off on base Timecutter and Titan selected models during the same effective dates. Qualifying models for this discount include 75306, and 75305, among others. Don't miss out on these amazing deals!

Hustler Sale

Hustler-DeWalt is currently running exciting promotions for a limited time. Customers who purchase a Hustler Raptor X, XL, XD, XDX, or Dash XD between 3/11-4/13 will receive $350 worth of free DeWalt products. Additionally, those who buy a Hustler Fastrak or Fastrak SDX during the same period can enjoy $600 worth of free DeWalt goods. These are just a few of the many incredible deals available, with some promotions running from 1/1-6/30. Don't miss out on these fantastic offers from Hustler-DeWalt!

Cub Cadet Sales

Don't miss out on the Cub Cadet sale happening now! Enjoy 20% off on select models including the Pro Z 500, Pro Z 700, Pro Z 900, Pro HW 300, and Pro X 600 series from 3/1-3/31. Take advantage of $1,000 off the Pro Z 960 EFI with effective dates from 1/1-6/30. Plus, when you purchase a Cub Cadet Ultima ZT2, ZT3, ZTS1, or ZTS2 between 3/11-4/13, you'll receive $350 worth of free DeWalt products. For those interested in the Cub Cadet Ultima ZTX and ZTXS, don't miss the opportunity to get $600 of free DeWalt items during the same promotion period. Hurry and save big with Cub Cadet-DeWalt!

Mower Financing

Sheffield offers various payment programs in partnership with leading brands like Hustler, Cub Cadet,and Gravely. Hustler provides a mow-now-pay-later program with no interest for 120 days and no payments for 150 days, along with competitive interest rates ranging from 3.49% to 6.49% over varying terms and the effective dates being 3/1/24-3/31/24. Gravely's options include 0% financing for 24 months and 5.49% for 48 months, as well as a 0% Low APR Program for 36 or 48 months and the effective dates being 2/1/24-4/30/24. Meanwhile, Cub Cadet offers similar mow-now-pay-later terms and a low rate promotion of 0% for 48 months and their effective dates are 3/1/24-3/31/24. Additionally, Toro provides a 0% financing offer for 60 months on selected Timecutter models, exclusively through TD Bank and the effective dates being 2/1/24-5/31/24.

If you would like to see more of our current sales click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345. M&D will assist you in finding the right mower at a price that fits your budget

Introducing The Derksen Platinum Options

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Thu, 29 Feb 2024 17:46:56 GMT

Platinum vs Standard Option

Here are the key differences between the Platinum and standard options. The standard options include best value metal, best value wood, metal, z-metal, urethane and painted. The standard option also offers a variety of colors for siding and trim, ranging from paint colors to coastal and earth tones. In contrast, the Platinum option includes painting the porches and deck board flooring with Seminole white for a more premium and tailored finish.

Derksen General Information

Derksen portable buildings have worked for over 20 years to become Americas’ most trusted name in backyard storage solutions. They have set the standard in the industry, innovating and producing top quality buildings at affordable prices and each of their structures are handmade and built to last.

When getting the building you want Derksen proudly offers more styles, options and exterior finishes than any other company in the business. With a commitment to excellence and customer satisfaction, Derksen has become a leader in the industry by continuously improving and expanding their product line to meet the diverse needs of their customers.

From traditional storage barns to modern cabins Derksen offers a wide range of styles, sizes, and customizations to ensure that each customer finds the perfect building to suit their unique needs and preferences.

Additionally, Derksen's dedication to quality is evident in their use of durable materials and skilled craftsmanship, ensuring that every building is not only aesthetically pleasing but also built to withstand the test of time. With an array of exterior finishes and customizable options available, customers can truly make their Derksen building their own, adding style and functionality to their outdoor space.

Deluxe Lofted Barn Cabin

The Deluxe Lofted barn cabin comes with a wrap-around front porch with rails, adding versatility and functionality to any outdoor space. The porch depth is included in the length measurement, and the cabin also features three 2x3 standard windows and a 9-light, 36” prehung door. Additionally, the deluxe lofted barn cabin includes standard lofts on each end. Derksen Portable Buildings ensures that their cabins are durable, practical, and stylish, offering a wide range of customization options and high-quality materials.

Derksen Cabin with Lap Side

The cabin is equipped with a spacious 4-foot deep front porch adorned with safety rails, and this porch depth is factored into the overall length measurement. Side cabins also boast a 4-foot porch with customizable placement options, providing a welcoming outdoor space. Additionally, this cabin includes three 2x3 standard windows with lap siding on each side, along with a 9-light, 36-inch prehung door. With a generous headroom, the cabin features standard 8-foot walls (exterior measurements), providing ample space for movement and storage. The use of lap siding adds a touch of traditional charm and durability to the cabin's exterior, enhancing its visual appeal and longevity.

Derksen Cabana

The Derksen Cabana is purposefully designed as an ideal gathering spot for your outdoor space. It is built with a sturdy all-treated construction, 2x6 floor joists set into notched skids, and 5/4 floorboards, along with built-in benches for added convenience. The Derksen Cabana not only provides a durable and reliable structure for outdoor gatherings but also offers versatile customization options to suit your specific needs. With its spacious interior and durable materials, the Cabana is the perfect addition to any outdoor environment, whether for entertaining guests or simply relaxing in your personal oasis.

Derksen Cabin

The Derksen Cabin offers a welcoming 4’ deep front porch with rails as a standard feature, providing a charming entrance to your new space. The cabin's thoughtful design also includes three 2x3 standard windows and a 9-light, 36’ prehung door, allowing plenty of natural light to fill the interior. With its generous headroom, featuring standard 8’ walls (exterior measurement), the cabin ensures a spacious and comfortable environment for all your needs. Its well-crafted features make it the perfect choice for those seeking a functional and beautiful outdoor retreat.

Deluxe Derksen Cabin

The Deluxe Cabin goes beyond a standard front porch, offering a wrap-around front porch with rails as a standard feature, adding both practicality and charm. The porch depth seamlessly integrates into the length measurement of the cabin, maximizing space utilization. Additionally, the cabin includes three 2x3 standard windows, one 9-light, and a 36’ prehung door, providing ample natural light and a welcoming entryway. With spacious 8’ walls (exterior measurement) as the standard, the Deluxe Cabin prioritizes comfort and functionality, making it an ideal choice for a high-quality outdoor living space.

Derksen Lofted Barn Cabin

The Lofted barn cabin boasts a welcoming 4’ deep front porch complete with sturdy rails, adding a touch of charm and providing a perfect spot for relaxation. The porch depth is seamlessly integrated into the overall measurements of the cabin, ensuring that every inch is utilized effectively. Inside, this cabin is equipped with a loft on each end, maximizing space and offering versatile storage or sleeping options. Additionally, this style includes three 2x3 standard windows, allowing natural light to flood the interior, and a striking 9-light, along with a 36' prehung door, enhancing both the aesthetics and functionality of the cabin. These features combine to offer a delightful and practical living space for any setting.

Side Lofted Barn Cabin

The Side Lofted barn cabin is designed for maximum flexibility, featuring a spacious 4’ porch on the side that can be placed to meet your specific preferences. Additionally, this cabin is equipped with standard lofts on both ends, offering additional storage or sleeping space. The inclusion of three 2x3 standard windows, a 9-light, and a 36’ prehung door allows for abundant natural light to fill the interior and provides convenient access. With standard 8’ walls (exterior measurements), the cabin offers plenty of headroom for a comfortable living space.

Side Cabin

The side cabins come with a 4’ porch on the side, allowing for customizable placement options to suit your preferences. The cabin is bright and welcoming, featuring three 2x3 standard windows, a 9-light, and a 36’ prehung door, ensuring plenty of natural light and easy access. The standard 8’ walls (exterior measurements) provide ample headroom, contributing to a comfortable and spacious interior.

Buy or Rent-to-Own

Derksen's Rent-to-Own program is designed to make storage solutions accessible and affordable for everyone. Whether you need extra space for personal belongings, equipment, or tools, this program gives you the opportunity to acquire a high-quality Derksen building without a large upfront payment. With various sizes and customization options available, you can find the perfect building to suit your needs and preferences. This program offers the convenience of on-site storage while allowing you to take control of your storage solution's ownership in the long run.

If you would like more information click here or give us a call at 580-886-2345!

Our top priority is to ensure that your needs are fully met and that you are completely satisfied with our service at any M&D location you visit.

ENTREES: TRAEGER GRILLED LOBSTER TAIL

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Tue, 13 Feb 2024 16:24:22 GMT

TRAEGER GRILLED LOBSTER TAIL

Learn how to bring the sea to your backyard with a delicious grilled lobster tail. Simply cut a slit in each tail to butterfly, pour on the butter mixture, then let our signature heat and smoke do the rest to learn how to do an expert Traeger lobster tail.

Prep Time

10 MINUTES

Cook Time

25 MINUTES

Pellets

PECAN

INGREDIENTS

2 (8-10 oz) lobster tails

8 Tablespoon (1 stick) unsalted butter

2 Tablespoon lemon juice

1 Teaspoon paprika

1/4 Teaspoon garlic salt

1/4 Teaspoon Old Bay Seasoning

1/4 Teaspoon freshly ground black pepper

2 Tablespoon Chopped fresh parsley

STEPS

Use kitchen shears to cut a slit lengthwise down the top of each lobster shell toward the tail. Using your fingers, gently pry the meat from the shell, keeping it attached at the base of the tail. Lift the meat so it rests atop the split shell (again, keeping it attached at the base of the tail). Use a paring knife to cut a slit down the middle of the lobster meat to butterfly it open. Place the lobster tails on a rimmed baking sheet.

Melt the butter in a small saucepan over medium-low heat. Whisk in the lemon juice, paprika, garlic salt, Old Bay seasoning, pepper, and parsley.

Pour about 1 tablespoon of the butter mixture over each lobster tail. Keep the remaining butter mixture warm.

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 500°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Set the lobster tails directly on the grill grates. Cook with the lid closed until the meat is white and opaque, 25-30 minutes.

Transfer the lobster tails to a platter and serve with the remaining butter mixture. Enjoy!

to check out our traeger line up click here ! !!

APPETIZER: TRAEGER ULTIMATE GAME DAY DIP

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Tue, 06 Feb 2024 18:00:00 GMT

TRAEGER ULTIMATE GAME DAY DIP

Kick off game day with the ultimate snack. This three cheese dip is elevated with wood-fired bacon, spiced with jalapeños and baked over mesquite wood for a dip your crowd will flip over.

Prep Time

10 MINUTES

Cook Time

30 MINUTES

Pellets

MESQUITE

INGREDIENTS

MAIN

1 Pound cream cheese, softened

1 Cup Mayonnaise

1 Cup shredded cheddar cheese

1/2 Cup shredded Parmesan cheese

6 jalapeños, seeded, ribs removed and finely diced

8 Slices bacon, cooked and finely chopped;

1/2 Cup chopped scallions

chips, crostini or vegetables, for serving

TOPPING

1 Cup panko breadcrumbs

1/2 Cup shredded Parmesan cheese

1/4 Cup butter, melted

STEPS

When ready to cook, set Traeger temperature to 350℉ and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

In the bowl of a stand mixer, combine cream cheese and mayonnaise and mix with the paddle attachment until combined. Fold in remaining ingredients for the dip.

Transfer to a cast iron skillet and smooth out the top. Combine ingredients for the topping and place on top of the dip. Place cast iron directly on the grill grate and cook 20 to 30 minutes or until the top is lightly browned and the dip is bubbling.

Serve with chips, crostini or veggies for dipping. Enjoy!

to check out our traeger line up click here !!!

MEATER PLUS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Mon, 05 Feb 2024 17:37:33 GMT

TAKING THE GUESSWORK OUT OF COOKING

Indulge in culinary perfection with MEATER Plus, the top-selling wireless smart meat thermometer that elevates your indoor and outdoor cooking experience. Say goodbye to guesswork and hello to flawless results, ensuring restaurant-quality meals without the stress or mess. Don't wait any longer—unlock the secret to achieving the perfect cook every time with the long-range capabilities of MEATER Plus!

UNIQUE FEATURES

Introducing MEATER Plus, the ultimate choice for indoor and outdoor cooking aficionados. This 100% wire-free smart meat thermometer offers unparalleled freedom and flexibility, featuring Bluetooth 5 technology with a remarkable range of over 1000ft (330m) in open air. With the free app compatible with both iOS and Android devices, effortlessly monitor your cooking progress from your smartphone or tablet (not included).

The ideal gift for any chef in your life, MEATER Plus makes achieving perfect results a breeze, whether they're grilling up a storm or mastering culinary creations in the kitchen. With the holiday season around the corner, it's the perfect present for Christmas, stocking stuffers, or white elephant gift exchanges.

Equipped with dual temperature sensors, MEATER Plus allows you to simultaneously monitor both internal meat temperature (up to 212°F) and ambient/external temperature (up to 527°F), ensuring precision cooking every time. Cleanup is a breeze with its dishwasher-safe design.

Bid farewell to guesswork with MEATER Plus' Guided Cook System, guiding you through each cooking stage for consistent and flawless results. Custom alerts and notifications keep you on track, while the innovative algorithm estimates ideal cooking and resting times.

For extended wireless range, utilize MEATER Link to connect to your home WiFi network with a second smart device.

With its stainless steel, water-resistant, and easy-to-clean probe, MEATER Plus is the ultimate tool for achieving culinary perfection, offering convenience, precision, and unparalleled cooking experiences.

Pick up your MEATER Plus today at any of our five conveniently located M&D Enterprises stores!

APPETIZER : TRAEGER BACON WRAPPED ARMADILLO EGGS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Thu, 25 Jan 2024 15:48:26 GMT

TRAEGER BACON WRAPPED ARMADILLO EGGS

Armadillo eggs, a Texas BBQ staple, has no egg in it at all. Instead, they’re cheese-stuffed jalapeños wrapped in pork sausage and shaped like, you guessed it, eggs. This version ups the flavor quotient by seasoning the pork with Traeger Fajita Rub, using pepper jack cheese, and by adding bacon two ways: crisped and crumbled into the filling as well as strips wrapped around the “egg.” But that’s not all. They also get hit with wood-fired flavor, and a basting of BBQ sauce, if you like.

Prep Time

30 MINUTES

Cook Time

1 HOURS

Pellets

HICKORY

SERVES

INGREDIENTS

14 Slices thick-sliced bacon, divided

12 Medium jalapeño peppers

4 Ounce cream cheese, softened

4 Ounce pepper Jack cheese, shredded

2 Pound ground pork

2 Tablespoon Traeger Spicy Fajita Rub

1/2 Cup Traeger Texas Spicy BBQ Sauce or other BBQ sauce (optional)

STEPS

In a small skillet over medium heat, cook 2 pieces of the bacon until crispy. Set aside to cool, then crumble or chop into small pieces.

Prepare the jalapeños: With a sharp knife, slice off the stem ends, then using a small spoon or paring knife, scoop out the seeds and veins inside the jalapeños and discard.

Make the filling: In a small bowl, add the softened cream cheese, pepper Jack cheese, and crumbled cooked bacon and stir to combine. Spoon or pipe the filling into the jalapeños.

In a medium bowl and using your hands, gently combine the ground pork with Traeger Fajita rub; try not to overwork the pork. Divide the pork into 12 equally sized portions, about 2 ½ oz (71 grams) each.

Press one portion of pork into a rough oval shape that’s larger than the jalapeño and about 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. Place the jalapeño on the pork and completely encase it in the meat, ensuring the cheese filling is covered. Repeat to cover all the jalapeños.

Wrap each armadillo egg in a piece of bacon, starting toward one end and wrapping in a spiral toward the other end. It’s okay if the entire egg is not covered. (At this point, the assembled eggs can be covered and refrigerated for up to 12 hours before cooking; cold eggs may take a little longer to cook.)

When ready to cook, preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 275°F; this will take about 15 minutes.

Place the armadillo eggs directly on the grill grates, close the lid, and cook for 45 minutes. Flip the armadillo eggs over and continue cooking for another 45 minutes. Increase the grill temperature to 375°F and cook until the bacon bacon is cooked the way you like it, about 10 minutes for crispy. If using BBQ sauce, baste the eggs toward the end of cooking and allow the sauce to set on the grill for about 5 minutes.

Remov e the armadillo eggs from the grill. Let cool slightly before serving. Enjoy!!!!

to check out our traeger line up click here ! !!

Eggsquisite Living: Charming and Functional Coops

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Tue, 23 Jan 2024 20:02:52 GMT

Unveiling the Charm and Functionality of Our Stylish Chicken Coops!

Elevate your egg-gathering experience with our thoughtfully designed and aesthetically pleasing chicken coops, ensuring both the comfort of your feathery friends and the joy of having fresh eggs at your fingertips.

Transform your backyard into a haven for happy hens with our charming chicken coops at M&D Enterprises! Beyond providing a cozy home for your feathered friends, these coops offer a plethora of benefits. Picture waking up to the soothing clucks and the satisfaction of collecting your own farm-fresh eggs each morning. Our thoughtfully crafted coops, available in various sizes and colors, not only enhance the aesthetics of your space but also contribute to a sustainable and rewarding lifestyle. From the compact and adorable mini coops to the spacious Chicken Castle, our selection caters to every need. Embrace the joy of responsible farming and relish the numerous perks that come with it – from connecting with nature to enjoying the simple pleasures of homegrown goodness. Join us in creating a haven where happy hens and fresh eggs thrive!

Our diverse range includes the compact 6'x10' mini coop, perfect for smaller spaces, to the expansive 8'x24' for those looking to accommodate a larger flock. With a variety of colors and customizable options, you can choose the coop that best suits your preferences and needs.

Elevate Your Chicken Coop with Custom Options for Every Feathered Friend!" Additional options that can be added include and not limited to cross breeze slider vent, nesting boxes, "dusk to dawn door", pull hooks, anchors and roosts.

Indulge in farm-fresh eggs daily with the exceptional chicken coops available at M&D Enterprises. Crafted with meticulous attention to detail and using high-quality materials, each coop is a testament to superior craftsmanship.

click here to check out our pricing and additional information on our coops!!!! or feel free to give us a call at 580-886-2345.

SELECTING A WELL BUILT UTV

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 19 Jan 2024 21:56:25 GMT

How to Select a Well-Built UTV

Utility vehicles (UTVs) have become a preferred mode of transportation, offering efficiency and comfort on both jobsites and expansive properties. When seeking a reliable and well-built utility vehicle, careful consideration is crucial to guarantee years of dependable service. Prior to making a purchase, it's essential to explore key factors that contribute to selecting the optimal UTV for your specific work needs. Taking the time to assess these considerations ensures a smart investment and a vehicle that aligns seamlessly with your intended use.

Easy Access to UTV Maintenance Areas

When evaluating different UTV models, it's essential to ensure that routine maintenance tasks can be conveniently addressed through one of three accessible avenues: the driver's side access panel, the passenger's side access panel, or by raising the cargo box.

Bobcat utility vehicles stand out for their design that prioritizes streamlined and efficient maintenance procedures. Featuring fewer grease points and enhanced accessibility to critical components such as coolant, air, oil, and fuel filters, servicing your UTV becomes a quicker and more straightforward process.

In specific UTV models, the design includes seats that flip forward, providing easy access to essential elements like the oil fill, oil check, battery, and alternator. Additionally, certain components may be easily reached by lifting the hood. This thoughtful design ensures that maintaining your Bobcat UTV is not only a necessity but also a hassle-free and time-saving task.

Availability of UTV Parts and Maintenance Services

When compa ring utility vehicles, it's crucial to assess the availability of parts and maintenance services for your machine. Consider the proximity of service centers and the travel distance required for UTV servicing or repairs. Additionally, inquire about the training and expertise of the technicians who will be handling your utility vehicle.

With Bobcat utility vehicles, you benefit from the extensive support of a global network of Bobcat dealers that provide top-notch accessories and parts. Boasting the largest dealer network in the country, with over 600 dealers, Bobcat Company ensures that trained service technicians are well-equipped to address all your service needs, from engine maintenance to hydrostatic or hydraulic components. When investing in a Bobcat UTV, you can trust in the reliability of their service network and inquire about comprehensive manufacturer warranties to understand what is covered.

LET M&d eNTRPRISES AND lAWNMOWER SHOPS HELP YOU GET THE RIGHT PIECE OF EQUIPMENT TO MEET YOUR lANDSCAPING AND GROUNDS MAINTENANCE NEEDS!!!!! 580-886-2345 cLICK HERE TO CHECK OUT OUR CURRENT LINE OF BOBCAT PRODUCTS.

ENTREES: TRAEGER CUMIN CITRUS GRILLED CHICKEN

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 19 Jan 2024 16:20:08 GMT

TRAEGER CUMIN CITRUS GRILLED CHICKEN

This mouth-watering recipe tantalizes with the zesty flavors of the Mediterranean.

Prep Time

10 MINUTES

Cook Time

1 HOURS

Pellets

MESQUITE

INGREDIENTS

4 chicken breasts

2 Teaspoon extra-virgin olive oil

1 lemon, juiced

1 lime, juiced

1 orange, juiced

4 Teaspoon ground cumin

1/2 Teaspoon kosher salt

1/4 Teaspoon Pepper

STEPS

It’s great to get to know your local butcher to get the highest quality meats. Pound chicken breasts to 1/2” thickness.

Rub chicken breasts with olive oil. Combine citrus juices, cumin, salt, and pepper and rub mixture evenly onto chicken breasts and let marinade at least 1 hour (or overnight).

When ready to cook, set the Traeger to 350℉ and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes.

Place chicken on the grill and cook until grill marks have formed and chicken is cooked through, about 4-5 minutes per side. An instant-read thermometer should read 165℉ in the thickest part of the chicken breast.

Remove from heat and let them rest for 5 minutes, then slice into 1/2” thick slices. Serve over coleslaw or a green salad. Enjoy!

TO CHECK OUT OUR LINE OF TRAEGER PRODUCTS CLICK HERE !!!!!

ENTREES: TRAEGER GRILLED BACON-WRAPPED HOT DOGS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 12 Jan 2024 16:35:20 GMT

TRAEGER GRILLED BACON-WRAPPED HOT DOGS

Everything is better with bacon. Take your dogs to to the next level with crispy bacon, melty cheddar cheese, and all your favorite toppings.

Prep Time

15 MINUTES

Cook Time

20 MINUTES

Pellets

HICKORY

INGREDIENTS

8 Ounce Block Colby or Cheddar Cheese

8 Whole hot dogs

8 Slices Thin-cut bacon

Ketchup, for serving

To Taste Relish, for serving, optional

mustard, for serving

STEPS

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 350°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Using a sharp knife on a cutting board, slice the cheese into eight long strips. Slice the hot dogs lengthwise, leaving a "hinge" on one side, and tuck a piece of cheese into each.

Wrap a slice of bacon in a spiral fashion around each hot dog and secure with toothpicks.

Place the bacon-wrapped hot dogs directly on the grill grates, close the lid, and cook for 20-30 minutes, or until the cheese is melted and the bacon has crisped up.

Remove the hot dogs from the grill. Transfer to the buns and serve immediately with ketchup, mustard, and relish, as desired. Enjoy!

To take a look at our Traeger lineup click here !!

YOUR QUICKEST PATH TO A FLAWLESS GROUND GAME

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 29 Dec 2023 21:07:11 GMT

Solutions to Help You Look After Every Detail

When landscaping is your business, it pays to look after the details. There’s a balance between creating something new and elevating the existing features that give a property its character. Then, there’s your bottom line. You need powerful, reliable equipment – with maneuverability and precision to match – to pack back-to-back landscaping projects into tight deadlines and limited hours.

With Bobcat® equipment, you and your crew can push beyond the limits, whether it’s small jobsites or finite summer days. With the right machine and attachments, you can do it all, from land clearing and hardscaping to turf installation and lawn care. You can even keep your machine earning in the off-season with lucrative snow removal.

Industry Preferred Tools

For Landscaping & Grounds Maintenance

A beautiful landscape triggers many emotions. Awe, envy and desire. The same goes for Bobcat equipment. When you’re working with Bobcat equipment, your customers know you have the best-built tools for landscaping and grounds maintenance, including the industry’s largest selection of attachments for landscape worK.

Simple Controls & Easy Operation

Bobcat equipment stands as a legend in the industry, renowned for its thoughtfully designed operator controls that are not just intuitive, but also comfortable and user-friendly. Whether you're guiding seasonal assistance or maximizing the potential of experienced professionals, our objective is to transform Bobcat equipment into a seamless extension of your hands. This ensures that you can execute tasks with precision and enhanced control, even in confined spaces. The aim is to empower you to accomplish your job with heightened accuracy, regardless of your level of expertise.

Maximum Productivity & Profitability

Achieving greater efficiency with a single machine – that's the essence of Bobcat compact loaders, excavators, wheel loaders, and other versatile tool carriers. Bobcat takes pride in crafting more attachments than any other compact equipment manufacturer, guaranteeing unparalleled versatility for heightened productivity and profitability. The performance of Bobcat equipment is optimized to fit within a compact footprint, enabling you to deliver unmatched work capability to any jobsite, regardless of its size. Recognizing the value of time, we prioritize simplicity in maintenance and service, providing easy access to service points and expert assistance through an extensive network of Bobcat dealers. Because when it comes to getting the job done, there's no room for downtime.

Engineered Durability & Reliability

Our distinction as One Tough Animal® remains unwavering, dating back to the introduction of the world's first skid-steer loader. Over the decades, our unwavering commitment to quality, reliability, and durability has been instrumental in supporting landscapers in keeping their machines – and their businesses – performing at peak levels. Bobcat equipment is meticulously designed and rigorously tested to deliver the durability and reliability necessary to meet the demands of your most challenging landscaping projects. Trust in Bobcat to equip you with the tools that can withstand the rigors of your work, ensuring that your equipment is as resilient as your business.

ENTREES: TRAEGER NEW YEAR'S BLACK-EYED PEAS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 29 Dec 2023 16:23:47 GMT

TRAEGER NEW YEAR'S BLACK-EYED PEAS

Experience the rich flavor of these black-eyed peas, gently simmered with hearty chunks of bacon, fragrant fresh herbs, and just the right touch of garlic. A cherished Southern tradition on New Year's Day, this dish is said to usher in good luck. Whether or not it works its magic, one thing is certain – it's a delightful treat, especially when paired with the robust flavors of collard greens and warm cornbread.

Prep Time

15 MINUTES

Cook Time

3 HOURS

Pellets

APPLE

INGREDIENTS

1 1/2 Pound smoked slab bacon

2 Tablespoon garlic, minced

10 Cup unsalted chicken stock

1 Pound dried black-eyed peas, soaked and drained

4 Whole Bay leaves

2 Teaspoon dried thyme, plus more for serving

2 Cup fresh chopped parsley, plus more for serving

1 Teaspoon kosher salt

1/4 Teaspoon Black pepper

Cooked rice (optional)

STEPS

Heat the Traeger temperature with the lid closed to 350°F; this will take about 15 minutes. Line a plate with paper towel.

Heat a large Dutch oven or cast-iron pot on the stove over medium heat. Cut the bacon into 1-inch pieces place in Dutch oven. Cook, stirring occasionally, until the bacon is nicely browned on all sides. With a slotted spoon, transfer the bacon to the plate.

Add the garlic and cook briefly until fragrant. Add the chicken stock, black-eyed peas, bay leaves, thyme, parsley, and pepper. Return the bacon to the pot.

Cover the pot and place it directly on the grill grates. Cook, covered, for 1 hour.

Remove the lid and cook until the beans are tender, 30 minutes to 1 hour; the time will vary depending on the weather, your grill, and how long the beans soaked. Remove from the Traeger, season to taste with salt and black pepper. If you like, mix in cooked white rice for Hoppin' John. Serve garnished with additional parsley. Enjoy!

To take a look at our Traeger lineup click here !!

What To Know About Icing Your Sidewalks and Driveways

Thu, 28 Dec 2023 18:20:55 GMT

Melting your sidewalks and driveways is something that has to be done when they get slick! Nobody wants to slip and fall on their way to the mailbox, or leaving the house for work! Ice melts are the number one answer to this problem. But did you know this could be hurting the growth of your lawn when the sun comes out?

Why Is Salt Bad and What To Use

Salts are bad for the grass as well as the soil. In minor use their will be little to no harm done. If you have lots of winter storms then this is where salt can become an issue. The chloride in the salt practically starves the plant and can be detrimental if used too much. A great alternative is sand. Using sand does practically the same thing just not as effectively. More sand will have to be put out but it does not do nearly as much damage. Just be sure to sweep after the bad weather is gone!

How To Fix The Area

When trying to assess the damage, look at the turf near the areas you applied the ice. When it warms up and grass starts growing, if these spots are still not green by the time everything else is, more attention will be needed. This is common during dry springs as well and it may just need a boost by Hand watering and aeration. If you are not seeing any progress then you may need to plant new seed. This is in extreme cases but it does happen. If it comes to this then simply get the old grass out, rake the spot and throw new seed down!

Adventure World: Sustainable Playsets for Endless Fun

esparzayolanda174@gmail.com (Yolanda Esparza) — Tue, 26 Dec 2023 19:03:58 GMT

Their Mission

The mission of adventure world playsets is to inspire and empower children to embark on exciting journeys and create their own imaginative adventures. These playsets are designed to encourage exploration, creativity, and open-ended play while fostering a sense of wonder and curiosity. By providing a diverse range of characters, settings, and interactive features, adventure world playsets aim to spark storytelling, problem-solving, and social interaction among children. Through engaging and immersive play experiences, the mission is to foster a love for imaginative play and inspire children to dream, discover, and explore the world around them.

What They Offer

Adventure world playsets offer children the opportunity to explore and create their own imaginative worlds. These playsets are designed to spark creativity and open-ended play, allowing kids to pretend they are on a thrilling exploration through jungles, deserts, oceans, and more. With detailed accessories, interactive features, and diverse characters, adventure world playsets encourage children to engage in storytelling, problem-solving, and social interaction. Whether they are building a secret hideout, discovering hidden treasures, or embarking on daring expeditions, these playsets provide endless opportunities for imaginative play and endless hours of fun.

Environmental Friendly

Adventure World's environmentally friendly playsets are designed with sustainability in mind. Using eco-friendly materials and practices, these playsets are created with minimal impact on the environment. From the sourcing of renewable materials to the reduction of waste during production, Adventure World is committed to providing playsets that are both safe for children and gentle on the planet. By prioritizing the use of recycled materials and promoting energy-efficient manufacturing processes, these playsets embody a commitment to sustainable and responsible play.

Happy Hideout H68-2

The Happy hideout H68-2 has a five inch deck, and a 6x 5 playhouse tower along with a 6 x 8 deck. Some other accessories that this play set comes with is an entrance ladder, 3-position single beam 2 belt swings, a trapeze and a ripple rush slide. When looking at the Happy hideout models one of the features that stays the same is the deck height.

Happy Hideout H68-7

The next model of the Happy Hideout is H68-7. This model has the same deck height as the H68-2 model along with the tower and deck size. The difference with this model are the accessories on this play set. It has a gangplank, 4-position single beam, 2 swings, a trapeze, plastic glider with a single beam adaptor, along with a ripple rush slide, twisty turbo slide and a step and slide adapter.

Fun Fortress FF-G

The Adventure World's Fun Fortress FF-G playset model is a thrilling and innovative addition to any backyard or playground. This dynamic and durable structure features multiple levels, slides, climbing walls, and hideaways, providing endless opportunities for children to explore, climb, and play. The vibrant color scheme and durable construction make it an eye-catching and safe addition to any outdoor space. The Fun Fortress FF-G playset model is designed to encourage physical activity and imaginative play, making it the perfect place for children to let their imaginations run wild and their energy levels soar. With its high-quality materials and exciting design, this playset model is sure to be a favorite for years to come.

Warranty

When it comes to warranty for these playsets adventure world has different warranty options. The first opinion that they give is one year warranty if anything were to break on your swing set or if it affects the structural integrity of the swing set they will send a crew out (within 200 miles of any of their warehouses) to fix the issue. The only exception is willful damage, normal wear and tear, or an act of god. If the location is farther than 200 miles they will ship the part to the closest dealer or directly to your house. The only difference with the one year warranty to the 5 year and 20 year is that these cover any damage to the swing frame and or the swing, slide and accessories against any damage from the manufacturer.

Get Small Business Tax Benefits this Year from Section 179

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Mon, 18 Dec 2023 22:10:22 GMT

Get Small Business Tax Benefits

Businesses are now able to deduct the full purchase (or lease) price for qualifying equipment and/or software bought or financed during the tax year. See how you can benefit from Section 179 tax incentives designed to help small businesses.

With the end of the year in sight, now may be a good time to make moves that could potentially improve your tax situation. And believe it or not, there is still a sizeable tax benefit for small businesses in section 179 of the tax code.

What Is Section 179?

Businesses are now able to deduct the full purchase (or lease) price for qualifying equipment and/or

software bought or financed during the tax year. That’s great news if you’ve purchased, leased, or plan to purchase or lease a new or used Bobcat machine or any other large equipment this year. Leased equipment qualifies only to the extent the lease is treated as a capital lease. Section 179 is one of the few government incentives available to small businesses, and it has been included in many of the recent stimulus acts and congressional tax bills. Although large businesses also benefit from section 179 and bonus depreciation, the original target of this legislation was much-needed tax relief for small businesses.

Here’s How Section 179 Works

In previous years, businesses commonly spread the write-off of qualifying equipment over time through depreciation. Yet, there has always been a preference among businesses to deduct the full purchase price in the year of acquisition. Section 179 is the solution to this preference—it enables your business to write off the entire purchase price of qualifying equipment in the current tax year.

With Section 179, there's no need to wait. The entire cost of qualifying equipment can be expensed on the 2023 tax return, offering immediate financial relief for your business. The cap for this deduction is generous, allowing businesses to write off up to $1,160,000, making it a powerful tool for optimizing your tax strategy and boosting your cash flow.

But There Are Limits

It's important to note that there are limits and caps associated with Section 179. The maximum amount that can be written off is $1,160,000, and there are restrictions on the total amount of equipment purchased, set at $2,890,000. Once this spending limit is surpassed, the deduction starts to phase out on a dollar-for-dollar basis. This characteristic makes Section 179 particularly beneficial for small- and medium-sized businesses.

Furthermore, the total deduction for Section 179 property cannot exceed the taxable income derived from the trade or business. Any excess deduction that cannot be utilized in the current year can be carried forward for deduction in future years.

It's crucial to be aware that since the Section 179 expense deduction functions as a type of accelerated depreciation, recapture of those accelerated deductions may come into play if the equipment is sold or disposed of in subsequent periods. Careful consideration of these factors is advised to ensure accurate financial planning and compliance with tax regulations.

Who Qualifies?

In tax year 2023, any company that procures, funds, or leases new or used business equipment may be eligible for the section 179 deduction. To qualify, the equipment must be utilized for business purposes for over 50% of the time and must be put into service between January 1, 2023, and December 31, 2023. To determine the amount eligible for section 179, simply multiply the equipment cost by the percentage of business use.

The Difference Between Section 179 and Bonus Depreciation

Some years offer bonus depreciation, while in others it's not available. For the 2023 tax year, it's being offered at 80%. The most significant change is that both new and used equipment qualify for the section 179 deduction, as long as the used equipment is "new to you". Until the latest tax law was passed, bonus depreciation only covered new equipment. However, in a departure from recent years, bonus depreciation now also includes used equipment. Bonus depreciation is particularly beneficial for very large businesses that spend more than the section 179 spending cap (currently $2,890,000) on new capital equipment. Additionally, businesses with a net loss can still deduct some of the cost of new equipment and carry forward the loss. When applying these provisions, section 179 is generally taken first, followed by bonus depreciation, unless the business had no taxable profit. In that case, the unprofitable business is allowed to carry the loss forward to future years.

Time to Shop?

Absolutely, it's essential to consult with your tax advisor or accountant for personalized guidance. That being said, if you've been eyeing that Bobcat® machine and haven't made the purchase yet, the current period could present a favorable opportunity. With Section 179 offering potential tax advantages, acquiring the equipment now might align strategically with your business's financial goals. Take advantage of this opportune time to discuss your specific situation with your financial professionals and explore how investing in the Bobcat® machine could positively impact your overall tax strategy.

click here to check out all the bobcat equipment that m&D enterprises has to offer.

to take advantage of these great tax benefits contact us at 580-886-2345 !!!!

APPETIZER: TRAEGER CHRISTMAS TREE BACON-WRAPPED MEATBALLS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 15 Dec 2023 18:43:53 GMT

TRAEGER CHRISTMAS TREE BACON-WRAPPED MEATBALLS

Diva Q crafts her spectacular meatball tree annually during the holiday season, and now you can join in on the festive fun! This impressive creation becomes a centerpiece on the buffet table, inviting guests to delight in plucking delectable bacon-glazed meatballs directly from the tree. The quantities provided here are tailored for constructing a 9-inch tree, but if you're aiming for a grander display, feel free to scale up the ingredients. Any surplus meatballs can be served independently for continued enjoyment.

Prep Time

45 MINUTES

Cook Time

2 HOURS

Pellets

SIGNATURE PELLET BLEND

This recipe serves:

INGREDIENTS

TREE

1 9-inch foam cone

Aluminum Foil

Toothpicks

MEATBALLS

2 1/2 Pound sliced bacon

2 1/2 Pound packaged cooked meatballs, (about 45 meatballs), thawed if frozen

Traeger Burger Rub

Traeger Mango Habanero Glaze

GARNISHES

Bocconcini (small mozzarella balls)

Cherry or grape tomatoes

Fresh rosemary sprigs

STEPS

Wrap the cone in foil, trimming away the bottom of the foil so that the cone can stand upright on its base. Stand it on a flat plate or cutting board for assembling and serving. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper or butcher paper for easier cleanup, if you like. Have the toothpicks handy.

Preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 225°F.

Cut the bacon in half crosswise. Wrap each meatball with a half piece of bacon and secure the bacon with a toothpick through the meatball. (You will use this toothpick later to attach the meatballs to the foam cone.) Place the meatballs on the baking sheet as you finish. Lightly sprinkle the meatballs with the Hamburger Rub (or another favorite rub).

Place the baking sheet directly on the grill grates and smoke until the bacon has rendered much of its fat, 1 to 1 ½ hours.

Remove the baking sheet from the grill and increase the temperature to 275°F.

Using the toothpick as a handle, dip each meatball into some Mango Habanero Glaze (or other favorite glaze) and place them back on the tray. Return the baking sheet to the grill and cook until the sauce has set, 20 to 30 minutes.

Let the meatballs cool briefly. Starting at the very bottom of the cone, attached the meatballs to the cone by poking the toothpick into the cone. Leave some of the toothpick exposed so people can remove the meatballs from the cone to eat. Work you way around the cone, leaving as little space as possible between the meatballs. If you like, place a meatball right on top when you get to that layer.

Use more toothpicks to add some mozzarella, tomatoes, and rosemary to the tree and line the plate with more rosemary, if you like. The meatball tree can be served safely at room temperature for up to 3 hours. Enjoy!

To take a look at our Traeger lineup c lick here !!

Mower Parts and Numbers

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 15 Dec 2023 18:14:06 GMT

Mower Parts and Numbers

Just like your car, your lawnmower requires regular maintenance to ensure optimal performance. This includes tasks such as changing air filters, spark plugs, belts, and oil. It's crucial to resist the temptation to use anything other than the manufacturer-recommended parts, as aftermarket components may compromise your mower's power and efficiency. By sticking to the recommended parts, you can maximize performance and extend the lifespan of your lawnmower.

Not sure where to find the model number of your lawnmower? No worries—we've got you covered. Check out this informative video that guides you on locating the necessary numbers to purchase the right parts for your specific machine. If you prefer, we can also handle the maintenance for you. Our goal is to be your one-stop-shop for all your needs, both during and after the sale.

ENTREES: TRAEGER BRAISED SWEET & SOUR BRISKET

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Tue, 05 Dec 2023 20:15:46 GMT

TRAEGER BRAISED SWEET & SOUR BRISKET

Switch up your routine and try out a braised take on this BBQ staple. Brisket meets wood-fired smoke and a sweet and tangy sauce for the perfect bite of beef.

Prep Time

10 MINUTES

Cook Time

7 HOURS

Pellets

HICKORY

SERVES 8

INGREDIENTS

1 (6-7 lb) brisket

To Taste Traeger Prime Rib Rub

To Taste kosher salt

2 Tablespoon butter or margarine

1/2 Large Yellow onion, thinly sliced

2 garlic cloves, thinly sliced

1 Teaspoon dried oregano

1 Teaspoon dried thyme

1 Teaspoon paprika

Pinch cayenne pepper

To Taste freshly ground black pepper

1 1/2 Cup beef stock

1 Cup ketchup

1/4 Cup brown sugar

STEPS

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 450°F (or 500°, if available) and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Season the brisket liberally with Traeger Prime Rib Rub and salt.

Insert the probe into the thickest part of the brisket. Place the brisket directly on the grill grates, fat-side down, and cook until the fat is caramelized and lightly browned, 30-45 minutes .

Meanwhile, melt the butter or margarine in a medium sauté pan on the stovetop over medium heat. Add the onion and cook, stirring occasionally, until lightly caramelized, 5-6 minutes. Add the garlic and cook until fragrant, 1 minute more. Add the oregano, thyme, paprika, cayenne, salt, black pepper and cook until fragrant, 30 seconds.

Deglaze the pan with the beef stock, scraping up any browned bits from the bottom with a wooden spoon. Add the ketchup and brown sugar and bring to a simmer.

Remove the brisket from the grill and place in a large baking dish. Pour the onion mixture over the brisket, then cover the pan tightly with foil.

Reduce the Traeger temperature to 225℉. Place the baking dish on the grill grates. Close the lid and braise until the brisket is fork-tender but not falling apart, 5-6 hours. At this point, it's internal temperature should be about 200°F.

Remove the baking dish from the grill and open one end of the foil to vent. Let the brisket cool to room temperature, then transfer to the refrigerator overnight (this step is not necessary, but will result in a juicier and more flavorful brisket).

The next day, remove the baking dish from the refrigerator while you preheat the Traeger temperature to 350℉.

Place the baking dish on the grill, close the lid, and cook until the brisket is warmed through and the sauce has caramelized, about 45 minutes.

Remove the baking dish from the Traeger. Lift the brisket from the sauce and slice against the grain, then pour the sauce over the top and serve. Enjoy!

To take a look at our Traeger lineup click here !!

ENTREES: TRAEGER PERFECT PELLET GRILL TURKEY

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Tue, 21 Nov 2023 18:57:27 GMT

TRAEGER PERFECT PELLET GRILL TURKEY

Get ready to impress your loved ones this holiday season with the perfect pellet grill turkey. After brining in a solution of water, Traeger rub, sugar, garlic, and Worcestershire sauce overnight, let that bird smoke its way to deliciousness on your outdoor grill while the sides cook in the oven. This pellet smoked turkey is worth getting scrappy over.

INGREDIENTS

3 Gallon water

1 Cup Traeger Rub

1 Cup Sugar

1 1/2 Tablespoon minced garlic

1/2 Cup Worcestershire sauce

1 (12-16 lb) fresh or frozen turkey, thawed, giblets removed

2 Tablespoon Canola oil

STEPS

Make the brine: Pour the water into a 5 gallon non-metal bucket. Add the Traeger rub, sugar, garlic, and Worcestershire sauce and stir until the sugar has completely dissolved.

Place the turkey, breast side down, in the bucket with the brine, making sure the turkey is completely submerged. Cover the bucket and refrigerate overnight. mAKE SURE GIBLETS ARE REMOVED

Remove the turkey from brine and pat dry. Rub the canola oil all over the outside of turkey, then place breast-side up in a disposable aluminum roasting pan.

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 225°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes. For optimal flavor, use Super Smoke, if available.

Insert the probe into the thickest part of the turkey breast. Place the pan with the turkey on the grill grates. Close the lid and smoke for 2 1/2-3 hours.

Increase the grill temperature to 350℉ and continue cooking until the internal temperature of the turkey reaches 165°F, 3 1/2-4 hours more.

Remove the turkey from the grill and let rest for 30 minutes before carving. Enjoy!

TO CHECK OUT OUR LINE OF TRAEGER PRODUCTS CLICK HERE !!!!!

DESSERT: GMG PUMPKIN PIE WITH VANILLA BOURBON WHIP

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Tue, 03 Oct 2023 19:15:15 GMT

GMG PUMPKIN PIE WITH VANILLA BOURBON WHIP

The holidays are here which means the pumpkin craze has begun. What better way to fill your pumpkin spice cravings than with the desert that started it all. This (not so) traditional recipe features a simple pumpkin filling that is complemented with a unique, crispy crust and bourbon vanilla whipped topping.

PREP TIME

MINS

IDLE TIME

MINS

COOK TIME

MINS

PELLETS

Texas

BLEND

SERVES

PEOPLE

INGREDIENTS:

Crust:

1 1/2 cups finely ground graham cracker crumbs

6 tablespoons butter, melted and slightly warm

1/4 cup granulated sugar

1/4 teaspoon ground cinnamon

Filling:

1 (15-ounce) can pumpkin purée (not pie mix)

1 (14-ounce) can sweetened condensed milk

2 large eggs

1 teaspoon ground cinnamon

1/2 teaspoon ground nutmeg

1/2 teaspoon fine salt

1/8 teaspoon ground cloves

Whip:

1 tablespoon high quality bourbon

1 cup heavy cream

3 tablespoons confectioners’ sugar

1 teaspoon vanilla extract

½ cup crushed walnuts

Crust

1.Preheat the grill to 350 degrees.

2.Finely break down graham crackers and mix together the other crust ingredients until it has the consistency of wet sand.

3.Spread the mixture evenly into a 9-inch pie pan. Firmly press the mixture over the bottom and sides of the pan.

4.Put the pan on the grill and bake until the crust is light brown and firm to the touch, about 10 to 15 minutes. Remove from the oven and let cool.

Filling:

1.Place all of the ingredients in a large bowl and whisk until smooth and combined. A smooth filling at this stage is crucial. Clumps will not only change the texture of your finished pie, but also the consistency of flavor throughout. Pour the thoroughly blended filling into the cooled pie crust.

2.Place the pie on the grates and cook until the top starts to brown and the filling is set but still jiggles slightly in the center, about 55 minutes. Remove from the grill and let cool completely before serving. Letting the pie cool lets the interior solidify. Top slices of the pie with bourbon vanilla whipped cream, if desired.

Whip:

1.Beat cream in a mixing bowl until fluffy, then add confectioners sugar until soft peaks form. Add bourbon and vanilla and continue to beat until stiff peaks form. Top with crushed walnuts

TO VIEW OUR FULL GMG LINE CLICK HERE !!!!!!!.

ENTREES: TRAEGER GERMAN POTATO SALAD

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Mon, 25 Sep 2023 18:29:48 GMT

TRAEGER GERMAN POTATO SALAD

This wood-fired, bacon-studded take on German potato salad skips boiling the spuds. Instead, the potatoes cook in a zesty apple cider vinegar mixture right on the Traeger. The vinegar not only lends flavor but it also prevents the potatoes from becoming mushy during the cooking process. Soaking the potatoes in water removes excess starch and keeps them from browning.

Prep Time

10 MINUTES

Cook Time

2 HOURS

Pellets

APPLE

INGREDIENTS

3 Pound skin-on russet potatoes, peeled and cut into 3/4-inch (2 cm) chunks (about 8 cups)

2/3 Cup apple cider vinegar, plus more to taste

1 Tablespoon Sugar

kosher salt

8 Ounce bacon, cut crosswise into 1/2-inch pieces

1 Tablespoon canola or other neutral flavored oil

1 Small red onion, coarsely chopped (about 1 1/2 cups)

freshly ground black pepper

1/4 Cup whole grain mustard

1/2 Cup sliced scallions (from about 2 scallions

STEPS

Place the potato chunks into a medium bowl and fill the bowl with enough cold water to cover. Set aside. In a small bowl or liquid measuring cup, combine the vinegar with 1/3 cup water, the sugar, and 2 teaspoons kosher salt. Stir until the sugar and salt are dissolved and set aside while you cook the bacon.

Line a plate with paper towel. Place the bacon into a 9- by 13-inch baking dish, toss with the vegetable oil, then spread out in a single layer. Place the baking dish onto a rack inside of the unlit Traeger. (Starting the bacon cold helps it cook more evenly and renders more tasty fat.) Close the lid and set the temperature to 375°F. Cook without stirring for 25 minutes. After 25 minutes, give the bacon a good stir, and continue to cook, stirring occasionally, until the fat has rendered out and the bacon is browned and crisped to your liking, another 15 to 30 minutes; begin checking on it on the early side. Reserving the fat in the pan, use a slotted spoon to transfer the bacon to the paper towel-lined plate.

Drain the potatoes and add them to the bacon fat in the baking dish. Add the onion and the apple cider vinegar mixture. Season with several grinds of black pepper then toss until everything is well-combined. Cook without stirring for 30 minutes then give everything a good stir. Continue to cook, stirring occasionally, until the potato and onions are tender and most of the liquid has reduced, about another 1 hour.

Remove the baking dish from the grill and stir in the whole-grain mustard and half of the scallions. Season to taste with additional vinegar, salt, and pepper if desired. Let the potatoes sit for 10 minutes then top with the bacon and remaining sliced scallions. Serve while the potato salad is nice and warm. Enjoy!

TO CHECK OUT OUR FULL LINE OF TRAEGER PRODUCTS CLICK HERE !!!!!

ENTREES: TRAEGER SMOKED BOLOGNA

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Wed, 13 Sep 2023 17:28:55 GMT

TRAEGER SMOKED BOLOGNA

Bologna isn’t just for sack lunches–with rich, smoky flavor and toasted edges, this smoked meat is delicious piled high on your favorite bun.

Prep Time

5 MINUTES

Cook Time

4 HOURS

Pellets

MESQUITE

SERVES

INGREDIENTS

2 Pound bologna log

1/2 Cup brown sugar

2 Tablespoon yellow mustard

2 Teaspoon soy sauce

Dash Worcestershire sauce

STEPS

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 225℉ and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Score the bologna log 1/4-inch deep in a diamond pattern, spacing the cuts at 1-inch intervals.

In a small bowl, mix together the brown sugar, mustard, soy sauce, and Worcestershire sauce together.

Place the bologna in a small baking dish and pour the sauce over the meat, rubbing to coat all over.

Place the baking dish with the bologna on the grill grates. Close the lid and smoke for 3-4 hours, basting the bologna with the sauce every hour if desired. Remove from the grill and let cool.

Thinly slice the bologna and serve on sandwiches, or cut into larger pieces and serve as an appetizer. Enjoy!

TO CHECK OUT OUR LINE OF TRAEGER PRODUCTS CLICK HERE !!!!!!

ENTREES: TRAEGER SAUCELESS SMOKED RIBS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Wed, 06 Sep 2023 22:41:24 GMT

TRAEGER SAUCELESS SMOKED RIBS

Simple doesn’t mean boring! These sauceless, slow-smoked ribs are a classic for the purists in your life.

Prep Time

15 MINUTES

Cook Time

4 HOURS

Pellets

HICKORY

INGREDIENTS

3 Rack (4-5 pounds) baby back ribs

3/4 Cup Traeger Perfect Pork Rub

STEPS

When ready to cook, set Traeger temperature to 225°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

To remove the membrane from the ribs, flip the ribs meat-side down and slide a butter knife under the membrane at the corner of a rack of ribs. Lift and loosen the membrane until it tears away from the ribs. Repeat with the remaining rack.

Season the ribs on both sides with the Traeger Perfect Pork Rub, ¼ cup per rack.

Insert the probe horizontally into the center of the meaty section of one rack of ribs, avoiding the bone. Place the ribs directly on the grill grates, meat-side up, then close the lid and smoke until the internal temperature reaches between 160-165°F, 2½-3½ hours. Remove the ribs from the grill and increase the temperature to 350°F

Wrap each rack of ribs tightly in aluminum foil, meat-side down.

Return the wrapped ribs to the grill, meat-side down, and re-insert the probe. Close the lid and cook until the internal temperature reaches 204°F, 35-50 minutes.

Remove the ribs from the grill and let rest for 30 minutes before unwrapping and slicing between the bones into individual ribs.

TO CHECK OUT OUR LINE OF TRAEGER PRODUCTS CLICK HERE !!!!!!

DESSERT: TRAEGER SMOKED LEMON BARS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 01 Sep 2023 16:39:00 GMT

TRAEGER SMOKED LEMON BARS

These bars are smokin’. Our homemade lemon bars are made with fresh squeezed lemon juice, sugar, zest and baked over applewood for some serious dessert perfection.

Prep Time

30 MINUTES

Cook Time

1 HOURS

Pellets

APPLE

INGREDIENTS

3/4 Cup lemon juice

1 1/2 Cup Sugar

2 eggs

3 egg yolk

1 1/2 Teaspoon cornstarch

Pinch Sea salt

4 Tablespoon unsalted butter

1/4 Cup Olive oil

7/8 Tablespoon lemon zest

1 1/4 Cup flour

1/4 Cup granulated sugar

3 Tablespoon powdered sugar

1/4 Teaspoon fine sea salt

10 Tablespoon unsalted butter, cubed

STEPS

When ready to cook, set grill temperature to 180℉ and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes.

In a small mixing bowl, whisk together lemon juice, sugar, eggs and yolks, cornstarch and fine sea salt. Pour into a sheet tray or cake pan and place on grill. Smoke for 30 minutes whisking mixture halfway through smoking. Remove from grill and set aside.

Pour mixture into a small saucepan. Place on stove top set to medium heat until boiling. Once boiling, boil for 60 seconds. Remove from heat and strain through a mesh strainer into a bowl. Whisk in cold butter, olive oil, and lemon zest.

To make a crust, pulse together the flour, granulated sugar, confectioners’ sugar, lemon zest and salt in a food processor. Add butter and pulse until just mixed into a crumbly dough. Press dough into a prepared 9” by 9” baking dish lined with parchment paper that is long enough to hang over 2 of the sides.

When ready to cook, set the Traeger to 350℉ and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes.

Bake until crust is very lightly golden brown, about 30 to 35 minutes.

Remove from grill and pour the lemon filling over the crust. Return to grill and continue to bake until filling is just set about 15 to 20 minutes.

Allow to cool at room temperature, then refrigerate until chilled before slicing into bars. Sprinkle with confectioners’ sugar and flaky sea salt right before serving. Enjoy!

TO CHECK OUT OUR LINE OF TRAEGER PRODUCTS CLICK HERE !!!!!!

Why Choose a Pellet Grill

Tue, 29 Aug 2023 20:58:37 GMT

Smoke, Grill, Bake: The Endless Possibilities with a Pellet Grill

Pellet grills are renowned for their user-friendly operation. With digital controls and automatic pellet feeders, you can set your desired temperature and let the grill do the work. This "set it and forget it" approach allows for consistent cooking without constant monitoring.

2. Versatility

From smoking and grilling to baking and roasting , pellet grills offer a wide range of cooking options. Whether you're preparing ribs , pizzas , or desserts , a pellet grill can handle it all, making it a versatile addition to your outdoor kitchen.

3. Flavor Enhancement

Using wood pellets as fuel, these grills infuse your food with a rich, smoky flavor that's hard to replicate with gas or charcoal grills . The variety of wood pellet flavors available allows you to customize the taste to your preference.

4. Consistent Temperature Control

Pellet grills maintain steady temperatures throughout the cooking process, ensuring evenly cooked meals every time. This precision is particularly beneficial for slow-cooked dishes that require consistent heat.

��️ Explore Our Pellet Grill Selection

At M&D Enterprises , we proudly offer top-quality pellet grills to meet a variety of outdoor cooking needs. Whether you're a backyard barbecue enthusiast or a seasoned pitmaster, you'll find premium options that deliver unbeatable flavor and performance:

�� Traeger Pellet Grills

Known as the pioneer of pellet grilling, Traeger grills combine innovative technology with classic wood-fired flavor. With features like WiFIRE® technology , advanced temperature control, and rugged designs, Traeger makes it easy to achieve perfect results every time. Popular models like the Traeger Pro Series and Ironwood Series are customer favorites for their versatility and ease of use.

�� Green Mountain Grills (GMG)

Green Mountain Grills are known for offering exceptional value with professional-grade features. Their smart control technology allows users to manage the grill from their phones, making slow smoking or high-heat searing simple and convenient. Models like the Daniel Boone and Ledge series offer outstanding performance at a great price point.

�� Check out our full pellet grill selection at M&D Enterprises Grills and find the perfect model for your next cookout!

�� Learn More with M&D TV

For tips, tutorials, and product demonstrations , check out our YouTube channel . Our videos provide insights into getting the most out of your pellet grill and enhancing your outdoor cooking skills.

�� Stay Informed with Our Blog

Visit our blog for more information on pellet grills , including maintenance tips, recipe ideas , and the latest product reviews. Our articles are designed to help you make informed decisions and get the best results from your grill .

Choosing a pellet grill from M&D Enterprises means investing in quality, versatility, and flavor. Explore our selection today and take your outdoor cooking to the next level.

ENTREES: TREAGER WEEKNIGHT PORK CHOPS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 25 Aug 2023 16:43:48 GMT

TRAEGER WEEKNIGHT PORK CHOPS

Four ingredients and 30 minutes are all you need to get these weeknight pork chops on the table. We all need recipe shortcuts in that don't skimp out on flavor, and Traeger's Carolina-inspired Liquid Gold BBQ sauce is your new secret weapon--a punch of mustard, a hit of apple cider vinegar, and a perfectly balanced collection of seasonings combined to complement these chops and other proteins perfectly.

Prep Time

5 MINUTES

Cook Time

25 MINUTES

Pellets

APPLE

INGREDIENTS

4 boneless thick-cut pork chops (about 8 oz each)

2 Teaspoon kosher salt

1 Teaspoon freshly ground black pepper

1 Cup Traeger Liquid Gold BBQ Sauce

STEPS

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 375°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Pat the chops very dry with a paper towel. Season on all sides with salt and pepper.

Insert the probe horizontally into the thickest part of a pork chop. Place the chops directly on the lowest grill grate. Close the lid and cook until the internal temperature reaches 110°F, 12-15 minutes. Flip the chops and brush the top and sides with the Liquid Gold BBQ Sauce. Close the lid and continue cooking until the internal temperature reaches 135°F, 8-10 minutes more. Flip the chops once more, brush the top and sides with more Liquid Gold BBQ Sauce, and grill until the internal temperature reaches 145°F, another 5-7 minutes.

Remove the pork chops from the grill and let rest for 10 minutes before serving.

TO CHECK OUT OUR LINE OF TRAEGER PRODUCTS CLICK HERE !!!!!!

APPETIZER: TRAEGER SHOW ME THE HONEY CHICKEN SKEWERS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 25 Aug 2023 16:27:09 GMT

TRAEGER SHOW ME THE HONEY CHICKEN SKEWERS

These fun appetizers are full of flavor. They’re easy enough to make on a weeknight, or to round out a party.

Prep Time

10 MINUTES

Cook Time

15 MINUTES

Pellets

HICKORY

INGREDIENTS

2 Pound boneless, skinless chicken thighs, cut into 2-inch pieces

2 Teaspoon kosher salt

1 Teaspoon Ground black pepper

1 Cup Traeger Show Me the Honey BBQ Sauce

grilled vegetables of choice, for serving

STEPS

Soak the skewers in water for 30 minutes.

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 450°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Add the chicken thigh pieces to a medium bowl and season with the salt and pepper, tossing to coat well. Thread the chicken pieces onto the skewers (if any are long or hanging off, thread them twice so they are not dangling).

Place the skewers directly on the grill grates. Close the lid and cook for 5 minutes. Flip the skewer and brush with the Traeger Show Me The Honey BBQ Sauce. Close the lid and cook for another 5 minutes, then flip and brush again. Close the lid and cook until caramelized and the chicken is cooked through, about 5 minutes more.

Remove the chicken from the grill and let rest for 5 minutes before serving with your favorite grilled vegetables. Enjoy!

TO CHECK OUT OUR LINE OF TRAEGER PRODUCTS CLICK HERE !!!!!!

ENTREES: GMG SPUDS SUPREME POTATOES

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Mon, 21 Aug 2023 19:28:13 GMT

GMG SPUDS SUPREME POTATOES

Spuds Supreme can turn any frown upside down with a delicious snack. Perfect for any afternoon with the kids or as a pairing with your favorite Green Mountain Grills recipe as a side. You can part it with Ketchup or you favor GMG Sauces for an extra tasty burst of flavor with every bite. These potatoes are good with just some salt and butter too! Potatoes are the root vegetable we most see everywhere so why not have a great way to grill them up every time or all the time.

PREP TIME

MINS

COOK TIME

MINS

PELLETS

Gold

BLEND

SERVES

PEOPLE

INGREDIENTS:

GMG Rub

Olive OIl

Red Pepper Flakes

Russet Potatoes

Sweet Onion

Wash a few russet potatoes and slice lengthwise into wedges.

Pile onto a piece of aluminum foil large enough to wrap them up.

Sprinkle with GMG South of the Border Rub or GMG Wild Game Rub.

Dice a small onion and add this to the pile as well. Sprinkle some crushed red pizza pepper on and moisten the whole thing with olive oil or melted butter. Don’t saturate.

Cook at 400°F (204°C) for 30-45 minutes or until done, shaking once or twice to distribute the oil.

to take a closer look at our green mountain grill lineup click here !!!!!

A Deep Dive on Kress

Fri, 18 Aug 2023 16:08:47 GMT

Experience the Power of Kress Handheld Equipment at M&D Enterprises

In the ever-evolving world of lawn care, Kress stands out with its cutting-edge, battery-powered handheld equipment. Available at M&D Enterprises , Kress tools offer a cleaner, quieter alternative to traditional gas-powered equipment—without sacrificing an ounce of performance.

�� Why Choose Kress?

Kress is built for serious lawn care—residential and commercial alike. From trimmers and blowers to chainsaws, edgers, and hedge trimmers, Kress offers top-tier tools with high-efficiency brushless motors , long battery life , and powerful performance . Their advanced 60V battery system ensures fewer interruptions and faster recharges, making your landscaping work smoother than ever.

✂️ Featured Product: Kress 60V 25" Hedge Trimmer

Perfectly balanced and packed with cutting-edge features, the Kress KG285.9 60V Hedge Trimmer delivers power, precision, and comfort.

Key Features:

Blade Length: 24 inches
Blade Speed: 3,400 SPM (strokes per minute)
Cutting Capacity: 1.4 inches
Motor: Kress-built high-efficiency brushless motor
Ergonomics: Lightweight, low-vibration design for fatigue-free operation
Battery: 40V platform compatible with CyberSystem™ fast-charging packs

Whether you’re trimming hedges in a backyard or tackling commercial landscapes, the KG285.9 offers the clean cuts and lasting power you need.

�� Eco-Friendly & Efficient

All Kress equipment is 100% battery-powered—reducing emissions, noise, and operating costs. The CyberSystem™ battery platform features 8-minute charge technology, so you can charge a 4Ah or 11Ah battery in record time and get back to work fast. This makes Kress not only eco-conscious but extremely efficient.

��️ Built to Last with Industry-Leading Warranty

5-Year Tool Warranty (Residential)
3-Year Battery Warranty

Kress stands behind their gear, ensuring you're always ready for whatever your lawn or job site throws your way.

��️ Shop Kress at M&D Enterprises

Whether you’re a homeowner ready to upgrade or a professional landscaper in search of powerful, battery-powered alternatives, M&D Enterprises has you covered.

�� Explore Kress Handheld Power Equipment
�� Visit Our Full Blog for More Power Equipment Tips

Ready to ditch the gas and go green? Stop by M&D Enterprises or shop online today to get your hands on the latest from Kress . Quality tools, top-tier performance, and unbeatable support—all in one place.

Why a Storm Shelter is Crucial in Tornado Alley: A Closer Look at Oklahoma's Safety Precautions

beaufuqua22@gmail.com (Beau Fuqua) — Mon, 14 Aug 2023 16:32:01 GMT

Living in Oklahoma, situated in the heart of Tornado Alley, means facing the constant threat of severe weather. Tornadoes can strike with little warning, leaving devastating consequences in their wake. To protect yourself and your loved ones, investing in a storm shelter is not just a wise decision; it's an essential one. In this article, we'll explore the importance of having a storm shelter in Tornado Alley, particularly in Oklahoma, and how it can save lives during times of peril.

Understanding Tornado Alley

Tornado Alley refers to an area in the central United States, where conditions are conducive to the formation of tornadoes. It encompasses several states, including Oklahoma, which often experiences severe storms and tornado outbreaks. The state's flat terrain and warm, moist air from the Gulf of Mexico create the perfect environment for tornadoes to form, making it essential for residents to be prepared.

The Power of Tornadoes

Tornadoes are among the most violent and destructive natural disasters on Earth. With wind speeds that can exceed 300 miles per hour, they can uproot trees, demolish buildings, and hurl debris with deadly force. In Oklahoma, tornadoes pose a significant threat to both rural and urban areas, making the need for safety measures paramount .

The Role of Storm Shelters

A storm shelter , also known as a tornado shelter , is a designated structure specifically designed to protect individuals during severe weather events, such as tornadoes. These shelters can be built underground, like in-ground storm shelters , or above ground, like safe rooms or reinforced interior rooms. Regardless of the type, storm shelters offer a safe haven where families can seek refuge from the ferocity of tornadoes.

The Importance of Timely Action

One of the most crucial factors in surviving a tornado is having enough time to seek shelter . Tornadoes can form rapidly, leaving little time for warning. Having a storm shelter ensures that you and your family have a designated safe space to go to when tornado sirens sound or weather alerts are issued. This quick access to shelter can be the difference between life and death.

Protecting Loved Ones

During a tornado, the safety of your loved ones is a top priority. A storm shelter provides a secure environment where your family can ride out the storm together. Being able to stay united during such a perilous event can help alleviate fear and anxiety, providing comfort and support when it's most needed.

Peace of Mind

Living in Oklahoma's Tornado Alley demands careful consideration of safety measures, and investing in a storm shelter is a decision that could save lives. With tornadoes capable of causing immense destruction and posing a significant threat to residents, having a designated safe space is essential. Storm shelters offer timely protection, the ability to keep loved ones together, and the peace of mind needed to endure the storm. Don't wait for disaster to strike; make the choice to protect yourself and your family by investing in a storm shelter today. Your safety and well-being are worth every effort to ensure a safer tomorrow. Explore our storm shelter options here .

APPETIZER: TRAEGER SMOKED CHILI CON QUESO

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 11 Aug 2023 18:25:35 GMT

TRAEGER SMOKED CHILI CON QUESO

This cheesy, smoky snack is the perfect party starter. Spicy pork sausage and chiles are tossed with two types of cheese and smoked on the Traeger for one thick and delicious dip.

Prep Time

20 MINUTES

Cook Time

45 MINUTES

Pellets

HICKORY

INGREDIENTS

1 Pound hot pork sausage

1 (2 lb) block of Velveeta cheese, cut into 5-6 large pieces

1 Pound smoked Gouda cheese, cut into 1-inch cubes

1 Can (10 oz) RO*TEL Original Diced Tomatoes and Green Chilies

1 Can (10 oz) RO*TEL Fire Roasted Diced Tomatoes and Green Chilies

1 Can (10 oz) can of cream of mushroom soup

4 Tablespoon Traeger Coffee Rub

1/2 Cup chopped fresh cilantro

Tortilla chips, for serving

STEPS

Heat a medium cast iron skillet over medium heat. Add the pork sausage and cook, breaking into small chunks, until no longer pink. Remove the sausage from the pan.

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 350°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

In a 4-5-quart cast iron Dutch oven or another oven-safe dish, combine the Velveeta and smoked Gouda. Add the RO*TEL original and fire-roasted tomatoes, the cream of mushroom soup, cooked sausage, and Traeger Coffee Rub.

Set the Dutch oven on the grill grates. Close the lid and smoke the queso, stirring 3-4 times, until the cheese is melted and everything is well combined, about 45 minutes. Add most of the cilantro during the last 5 minutes of smoking.

Sprinkle the remaining cilantro on the top of the queso, then serve with tortilla chips for dipping. Enjoy!

TO CHECK OUT OUR LINE OF TRAEGER PRODUCTS CLICK HERE !!!!!!

Time To Learn About The EGO Blowers and Chainsaws

Fri, 11 Aug 2023 17:17:53 GMT

Quiet, Clean, and Powerful: Why EGO Battery Equipment Is a Game-Changer for Lawn Care

At M&D Enterprises , we’re proud to offer EGO Power+ battery-powered handheld equipment —designed for homeowners and professionals who demand performance without the noise, fumes, or maintenance of gas tools. As battery-powered lawn equipment continues to rise in popularity, EGO leads the way with a robust lineup of tools that deliver gas-like power and unmatched convenience. From blowers and chainsaws to string trimmers and even riding mowers , EGO has a solution for every outdoor task.

��️ Battery-Powered Blowers: Power Meets Portability

EGO’s leaf blowers are engineered to move debris quickly and efficiently, making yard cleanup a breeze.

LB530 Blower : Delivers up to 530 CFM of airflow and speeds up to 110 MPH , powered by a high-efficiency brushless motor. With the included 56V 2.5Ah ARC Lithium™ battery , enjoy up to 75 minutes of runtime on a single charge. Its variable speed dial and turbo button provide ultimate control for any task.

LB615 Blower : Offers a powerful 615 CFM airflow and airspeeds up to 170 MPH with the tapered nozzle attached. The variable speed dial ranges from 200 CFM to 480 CFM , and the turbo button delivers maximum power when needed. With the same 56V 2.5Ah battery , achieve up to 75 minutes of runtime .

Battery-Powered Chainsaws: Cut Through the Toughest Tasks

EGO’s chainsaws combine the power of gas with the convenience of battery operation, making them ideal for a variety of cutting tasks.

CS1600 Chainsaw : Features a 16-inch bar and chain , delivering performance equivalent to a 35cc gas chainsaw . The high-efficiency brushless motor provides 6,800 RPM , allowing for up to 250 cuts on a 4x4 with the included 56V 5.0Ah ARC Lithium™ battery .

CS1800 Chainsaw : Equipped with an 18-inch bar and chain , this saw offers power comparable to a 45cc gas chainsaw . Its brushless motor delivers 11,000 RPM , enabling up to 300 cuts on a 4x4 with the recommended 56V 5.0Ah battery . Additional features include bright LED lights for improved visibility and a tool-free chain tensioning system.

�� Why Choose EGO?

ARC Lithium™ Battery Technology : EGO’s batteries are designed for optimal performance, offering long runtimes and compatibility across all EGO tools.

Weather-Resistant Construction : Built to withstand the elements, ensuring durability and reliability in various conditions.

Quiet Operation : Enjoy powerful performance without the noise associated with gas-powered equipment.

Low Maintenance : No gas, oil changes , or spark plugs—just charge and go.

Explore our full range of EGO Power+ tools and find the perfect equipment to elevate your lawn care routine. Visit our website or stop by one of our locations to experience the EGO difference firsthand.

Protect What Matters Most:

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Thu, 10 Aug 2023 18:03:01 GMT

Why Legacy Buildings Are the Ultimate Steel Structure Solution

Looking for a reliable, cost-effective, and weather-resistant structure ? Whether you're battling blazing sun, torrential rain, or even tornadoes , Legacy Buildings from M&D Enterprises deliver the ultimate protection.

From RVs and farm equipment to commercial tools and family vehicles —Legacy's custom steel buildings aren't just tough; they’re smart investments.

Why Steel Structures Are the Future

Legacy steel carports and garages rival—if not outperform—traditional stick-frame or concrete buildings across residential, commercial, and industrial needs. Here's why they're changing the game:

Weather-Resistant Strength : Built to endure Oklahoma's wild weather , from high winds to hailstorms.
Lower Maintenance : No warping, rotting, or termites—just rugged, galvanized steel.
Affordable Installation : Get the same coverage at a fraction of the price of stick-built construction.
Customizable Options : Tailor dimensions, doors, colors, and extras to suit your lifestyle.

�� Protect Your RV with Purpose

That RV was a big investment—so why park it in the elements? Our metal RV carports keep your get-away vehicle ready for your next adventure.

✅ Shield your RV from UV damage
✅ Prevent roof leaks and tire cracking
✅ Custom heights for even Class A rigs

�� Need Shelter for Livestock or Equipment?

Whether you're housing horses, chickens, or Bobcat equipment , Legacy Buildings has rugged, open-sided barns and fully enclosed truss buildings that span up to 60 ft wide and 200 ft long—ideal for your agricultural needs.

�� Explore More: Insulated Well Houses : Affordable Protection Year-Round

�� Rethink the Backyard Shed

Today’s homeowners are ditching wood for steel. Why? M&D’s metal utility buildings require no maintenance and sit elevated on galvanized steel joists—so they never touch the ground.

✅ Includes treated ¾" wood floors
✅ No need to hire carpenters
✅ Free installation included!

�� Order Your Legacy Building Today

M&D Enterprises & Lawnmower Shops is a proud dealer of Legacy Buildings , offering durable steel carports , barns , sheds , RV ports , and commercial truss buildings —all customizable, all built to last.

�� Call us at 580-886-2345 or stop by one of our 5 convenient locations to get started.

�� Final Thought

Why settle for traditional when you can go steel? Protect your property with a solution that’s built for generations. Legacy Buildings by M&D Enterprises are more than just shelters—they're peace of mind.

�� While you're here, browse our blog for more tips on year-round property protection , custom storage solutions , and prepping for Oklahoma weather .

How A Polar Shed Can Help You This Season

Wed, 09 Aug 2023 16:57:52 GMT

Protect Your Well Year-Round with M&D Enterprises' Insulated Well Houses

Ensuring your well system remains operational throughout the year is crucial, especially during harsh winters.At M&D Enterprises , we offer top-quality insulated well houses designed to safeguard your well components from freezing temperatures, pests, and severe weather conditions .

Why Choose Insulated Well Houses?

An i nsulated well house acts as a protective barrier for your wellhead and plumbing, maintaining a stable internal temperature to prevent freezing.This protection ensures a consistent water supply and reduces the risk of costly repairs due to burst pipes.

Key Benefits:

Freeze Protection: Keeps well components safe during cold spells.
Energy Efficiency: Maintains warmth with minimal energy use, especially when paired with small heaters.
Durability: Constructed with robust materials to withstand extreme weather.
Pest Resistance: Prevents rodents and insects from accessing your well system.
Easy Access: Designed for convenient maintenance.

Our insulated well houses are made using second-hand insulated paneling, offering effective temperature regulation without breaking the bank. Please note that due to the use of second-hand materials, some units may have slight blemishes or wear marks, allowing us to provide them at a great price point.

Explore Our Range of Outdoor Solutions

Beyond insulated well houses , M&D Enterprises offers a variety of products to enhance your outdoor space:

Portable Buildings : Versatile storage solutions tailored to your needs.
Barns, Carports, & Steel Structures : Durable structures to protect vehicles and equipment .
Storm Shelters & Safe Rooms : Safety solutions for unpredictable weather.
Chicken Coops & Greenhouse s: Support for your agricultural pursuits.
Hunting Products : Quality blinds and feeders for hunting enthusiasts.

For a visual overview of our products and to see them in action, check out our YouTube channel :

Customer Experiences

Don't just take our word for it—see how our customers have transformed their properties with our products :

Stay Updated with M&D Enterprises

We regularly feature promotions and new products .For instance, explore our current sales on some of our most popular products: Shop Now

Ready to enhance your property with our insulated well houses or other outdoor solutions ? Visit our website or contact us directly for more information and personalized assistance.

At M&D Enterprises , we're committed to providing quality products and exceptional service to meet all your outdoor needs.

Como Puede Ayudarte una Caseta Polar Esta Temporada

Wed, 09 Aug 2023 16:57:00 GMT

Aqui en m&D Enterprises ofrecemos una variedad de tamanos y alojamientos de pozos personalizados para satisfacer sus necesidades. Ofercemos paneles de poliestireno r-8 y poliuretano r-16 . Nuestros tamnos incluyen pero no eastan limitados:

-4x4x5

-64x64

-80x80

-80x80TW

-8’x8’

-8’x10’

-8’x12’

-10’x10’

-10’x12’

-12’x12’

También ofrecemos cancamos de elevacion, puertas para losas y casas, ventanas, repisas, pisos y paredes altas. Nuestras casas de pozos están construidas aquí mismo en el noroeste de Oklahoma y nuestros precios y mano de obra son difíciles de superar. Mantenemos un stock estándar en 4 de nuestras 5 ubicaciones, pero cualquiera de nuestras 5 ubicaciones puede hacer un pedido personalizado de cualquier casa de pozos para adaptarse a sus necesidades. Nuestras casas de pozos pueden ser ancladas, pintadas y fácilmente movidas por el consumidor después de la compra.

Los términos "R-8" y "R-16" se refieren a los valores de resistencia térmica de los materiales de aislamiento, indicando su efectividad para resistir la transferencia de calor. Cuanto mayor sea el valor R, mejor será la capacidad del aislamiento para resistir el flujo de calor. Específicamente: Aislamiento R-8: Un material de aislamiento con una clasificación R-8 proporciona una resistencia térmica moderada, lo que significa que ofrece un grado razonable de aislamiento contra la transferencia de calor. Puede ser adecuado para áreas con climas más templados o donde se necesita menos aislamiento, como en algunas paredes o techos. Aislamiento R-16: Por otro lado, el aislamiento con una clasificación R-16 ofrece una resistencia térmica significativamente mayor en comparación con el aislamiento R-8. Esto lo hace más efectivo para prevenir la transferencia de calor, lo que lo hace adecuado para áreas que experimentan variaciones de temperatura más extremas o donde se requieren niveles más altos de aislamiento, como en climas más fríos o en áreas críticas de la envolvente de un edificio.

En resumen, la diferencia clave entre el aislamiento R-8 y el R-16 radica en sus respectivos niveles de resistencia térmica, siendo el R-16 el que ofrece un rendimiento de aislamiento superior en comparación con el R-8. La elección entre estas dos opciones de aislamiento depende de las condiciones climáticas específicas y las necesidades de aislamiento de un proyecto determinado.

Los precios entre los tamaños y tipos de paneles (poliestireno y poliuretano) varían. Cualquiera de nuestros miembros del equipo aquí en M&D Enterprises estaría más que feliz de darte un presupuesto rápido. Haz clic aquí para obtener más información sobre los cobertizos Polar.

Mantenga Su Cesped Verde En El Calor Del Verano

Mon, 07 Aug 2023 17:10:00 GMT

Los veranos en oklahoma y los alrededores son brutales, por decir lo memos. tenemos que lidiar con las sequias,el vento, los desastres naturales y el polvo. Todas estas cosas combinadas pueden hace que mantener un cesped verde durante todo el ano sea los mas dificil posible. Con algunos trucos, este processo puede volverse mucho mas facil de lo que uno piensa.

No riegues en exceso

Poner demasiada agua puede hacerse fácilmente sin pensarlo mucho. Si estamos en medio de una sequía o falta de lluvia, regar por la mañana y por la tarde es el mejor momento. Si riegas en medio del día, esto puede calentar el agua y realmente matar el césped. Enfriar el césped en medio del día, sin embargo, puede beneficiar al jardín. No lo empapes, solo humedécelo durante unos minutos ¡y listo!

Cortes de rutina son clave

Como he destacado en artículos anteriores, no espere a que su césped crezca mucho más alto que la altura ideal. Al cortar, trate de cortar solo un tercio de la hoja de césped. Si es de 3 pulgadas, córtelo a 2 pulgadas. Si no lo hace, puede poner el césped en estado de shock y arruinar rápidamente el proceso que ha logrado, volviéndolo amarillo e incluso muriendo. Durante una sequía, cuando no pueda regar el césped regularmente, evite cortarlo a menos que sea necesario.

Mantén tus cuchillas afiladas

Las cuchillas desafiladas pueden ser tu enemigo. Las cuchillas desafiladas desgarran la planta en lugar de simplemente cortarla. Al hacer esto, pueden dañar el tejido de la planta y hacer que las hojas de césped se vuelvan marrones. Al utilizar una cuchilla afilada, se realiza un corte limpio y preciso del cual el césped se recupera rápidamente.

Empacando El Césped

Empacar el césped al cortarlo puede funcionar en contra tuya en algunas ocasiones. Para darle un impulso adicional a tu jardín, devolver los recortes al césped puede mejorar la salud del mismo. La mejor manera de hacer esto es utilizando un kit de mantillo.

Trabajo durante todo el año

Realizar trabajo durante todo el año es el paso más importante para vencer el calor del verano. Cosas como rociar, controlar plagas e incluso airear tu jardín.

Para obtener más consejos, haz clic aquí o llámanos al 580-886-2345 para obtener información sobre qué equipo es el adecuado para tu jardín.

Por que un Derksen es Perfecto para tu Patio Trasero

Sat, 05 Aug 2023 17:15:00 GMT

Derksen Building ha sido el estandar de oro cuando se trata de estructuras portatiles desde 1995! Estas estructuras estan hechas en un estilo menonita tradicional en mente. SOn extremadamente utiles y pueden ser uana maraillosa adicion a su pedazo de cielo en su patio trasero.

¿Qué puedes hacer con un Derksen?

Los Derksen son una opción de construcción muy versátil. El uso más popular es para almacenamiento. Una de las opciones al elegir un edificio es un desván. ¡El desván le brinda al propietario más que suficiente espacio de almacenamiento!

Hecho para los mecánicos DIY!

Ahora otra excelente opción es un cobertizo/taller de herramientas. ¡Derksen ofrece un banco de trabajo y paneles perforados! ¡Esto te dará el espacio para trabajar en tu equipo! Con el panel perforado también podrás mantener todas tus herramientas organizadas, de manera que puedas pasar más tiempo haciendo las cosas en lugar de buscar una llave inglesa de 9/16.

¡Tu Nuevo Hogar!

Hacer una casa a partir de edificios portátiles ha aumentado drásticamente en los últimos años debido al precio del mercado inmobiliario. Estos edificios portátiles pueden ser tan grandes como 16x50, por lo que hay mucho espacio para hacer realidad tu casa de ensueño a un precio asequible. Además, si deseas mudarte, no hay ningún problema, ya que se pueden transportar a cualquier lugar.

¡Garaje para todos los juguetes!

Derksen produce garajes portátiles y esa no es una opción que muchas personas consideran al decidir sobre el autoalmacenamiento. ¡Puede ser la elección perfecta si necesitas almacenar carritos de golf, cortadoras de césped, vehículos todo terreno o incluso coches pequeños!

¡El nuevo lugar tranquilo!

Todos necesitan una pequeña escapada para invitar a algunos amigos y ver su programa favorito o disfrutar del gran partido con tus amigos. ¡Convertir un Derksen en una cueva de hombres o en un refugio solo para mujeres puede ser la solución perfecta para esto! ¡Lo genial de Derksen es que ofrecen un excelente paquete eléctrico!

¡Acabas de encontrar tu nuevo estudio!

Si eres alguien que hace manualidades como pasatiempo o incluso como fuente de ingresos, ¡un derksen es perfecto para almacenamiento y espacio de trabajo! En lugar de guardar tus materiales en la habitación de invitados, ¿por qué no darte un poco de espacio y salir al patio trasero?

Si desea obtener más información, haga clic aquí o llámenos al 580-886-2345.

ENTREES: GMG PELLET GRILLED SHRIMP CHIPOTLE

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Thu, 25 May 2023 19:44:54 GMT

GMG PELLET GRILLED SHRIMP CHIPOTLE

Pellet Grilled Shrimp Chipotle is one spicy savory dish that will get anyone hankering for more.

PREP TIME

MINS

COOK TIME

.20

HOURS

PELLETS

MesqUITE

BLEND

SERVES

PEOPLE

INGREDIENTS:

1 lb Uncooked Shrimp

Bamboo Skewers

GMG chipotle sauce

GMG Roasted Garlic Chipotle Rub

Let’s Get Started:

Start with uncooked deveined shrimp. Sometimes your grocer sells these completely peeled, but oftentimes you must peel them. Just make sure to take all of the shells off. Use a size you prefer. The sizes refer to the number of shrimp per pound, so a 31-40 size means that one pound will contain from 31 to 40 shrimp.

You can buy wooden skewers for next to nothing at a dollar store. Soak as many as you will use in a pan of water for about 30 minutes, which will keep them from burning.

Use two of these and push the shrimp onto them. When you use two skewers, you can flip the kabob (or shashlik) without them rotating on the skewer. You don’t have to separate them, as on shrimp, two adjacent ones will hold them in place.

Brush the kabobs with GMG chipotle sauce and refrigerate for about 3 hours.

Set your grill to about 330° and cook these for about eight minutes per side. Do not overcook, as they will turn out fairly tough if you do. Perfectly grilled shrimp will have slightly pink flesh on the outside and white, not translucent, meat on the inside.

Fresh pear slices accompany this very well.

to take a closer look at our green mountain grill lineup click here !!!!!

Entradas: Chipotle de camarones a la parrilla GMG Pellet

Thu, 25 May 2023 19:44:00 GMT

Chipotle de camarones a la parrilla GMG Pellet

Pellet Grilled Shrimp Chipotle es un plato salado picante que hará que cualquiera desee más.

TIEMPO DE PREPARACIÓN

MINUTOS

HORA DE COCINAR

.20

HORAS

PELLETS

Mezquita

MEZCLA

SIRVE

GENTE

INGREDIENTES:

1 libra de camarones crudos

brochetas de bambú

Salsa chipotle GMG

Aliño de Chipotle con Ajo Asado GMG

Let’s Get Started:

Comience con camarones desvenados crudos. A veces, su tendero los vende completamente pelados, pero a menudo debe pelarlos. Solo asegúrate de quitar todas las conchas. Usa el tamaño que prefieras. Los tamaños se refieren a la cantidad de camarones por libra, por lo que un tamaño de 31 a 40 significa que una libra contendrá de 31 a 40 camarones.

Puedes comprar pinchos de madera por casi nada en una tienda de dólar. Remoje tantos como vaya a utilizar en una cacerola con agua durante unos 30 minutos, lo que evitará que se quemen.

Usa dos de estos y empuja los camarones sobre ellos. Cuando usa dos brochetas, puede voltear la brocheta (o shashlik) sin que giren en la brocheta. No tienes que separarlos, ya que en el caso de los camarones, dos adyacentes los mantendrán en su lugar.

Cepille las brochetas con salsa de chipotle GMG y refrigere por aproximadamente 3 horas.

Rodajas de pera fresca lo acompañan muy bien.

para echar un vistazo más de cerca a nuestra línea de parrillas de montaña verdehaga clic aquí!!!!!

ENTREES: TRAEGER ROASTED CHICKEN ENCHILADAS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Sat, 06 May 2023 17:04:27 GMT

TRAEGER ROASTED CHICKEN ENCHILADAS

Roast and shred juicy chicken before rolling it up with chilies, black beans, and cheese then fire these enchiladas to perfection on the Traeger.rce.

Prep Time

15 MINUTES

Cook Time

1 HOURS

Pellets

MESQUITE

INGREDIENTS

1 1/2 (4 lb) whole chicken

4 1/2 Tablespoon Olive oil

As Needed Salt

As Needed freshly ground black pepper

1 1/2 Small white onion, diced

1 1/2 (4 oz) can diced green chilies

12 Large flour tortillas

3 (10 oz) cans enchilada sauce

1 1/2 (15.5 ounce) can black beans or lentils, rinsed and drained

4 1/2 Cup Mexican-blend shredded cheese

Fresh cilantro, for serving

Sour cream, for serving

STEPS

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 350°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Rub olive oil over chicken and season with salt and pepper.

Insert the probe into the thickest part of the breast, avoiding touching any bones. Place the chicken directly on grill grates, close the lid and cook until the internal temperature reaches 165°F, 1 hour.

Remove the chicken from the grill and let rest for 10 minutes. Using a fork, shred the chicken off of the bone, and set aside.

In large skillet over medium-high heat, warm the oil. Add the onion and sauté for 3 minutes, stirring occasionally. Add the green chiles, season with salt and pepper, and sauté for 6-8 minutes, stirring occasionally. Remove from heat and combine shredded chicken to mixture.

Grease a 9 x 13-inch baking dish. To assemble the enchiladas, set up an assembly line including: tortillas, enchilada sauce, beans, chicken mixture, and cheese.

Lay out a tortilla and spread two tablespoons of sauce over the surface of the tortilla. Add the beans in a line down the middle of the tortilla, then add a spoonful of the chicken mixture and sprinkle with 1/3 cup cheese. Roll up the tortilla and place seam-side-down in the baking dish. Repeat with the remaining ingredients.

Spread the remaining enchilada sauce on top of the tortillas, then sprinkle on remaining shredded cheese.

Place the baking dish directly on the grill grates, close the lid and cook uncovered, until the cheese and sauce is bubbling, and the enchiladas are warmed through, 20 minutes.

Remove from the grill and serve immediately. Garnish with sour cream and chopped fresh cilantro.

Enjoy!

TO CHECK OUT OUR LINE OF TRAEGER PRODUCTS CLICK HERE !!!!!!

ENTRADAS: ENCHILADAS DE POLLO ASADO TRAEGER

Sat, 06 May 2023 17:04:00 GMT

ENCHILADAS DE POLLO ASADO TRAEGER

Asa y desmenuza el jugoso pollo antes de enrollarlo con chiles, frijoles negros y queso, luego cuece estas enchiladas a la perfección en la Traeger.rce.

tiempo de preparación

15 MINUTOS

Hora de cocinar

1 HORA

Pellets

MESQUITE

INGREDIENTES

1 1/2 (4 libras) de pollo entero

4 1/2 Cucharada de Aceite de Oliva

Sal necesaria

Pimienta negra recién molida según sea necesario

1 1/2 cebolla blanca pequeña, cortada en cubitos

1 1/2 (4 oz) lata de chiles verdes cortados en cubitos

12 tortillas de harina grandes

3 latas (10 oz) de salsa para enchiladas

1 1/2 lata (15.5 onzas) de frijoles negros o lentejas, enjuagados y escurridos

4 1/2 taza de queso rallado mezcla mexicana

Cilantro fresco, para servir

Crema agria, para servir

PASOS

Cuando esté listo para cocinar, ajuste la temperatura Traeger a 350 °F y precaliente con la tapa cerrada durante 15 minutos.

Frote aceite de oliva sobre el pollo y sazone con sal y pimienta.

Inserte la sonda en la parte más gruesa del seno, evitando tocar los huesos. Coloque el pollo directamente sobre las rejillas de la parrilla, cierre la tapa y cocine hasta que la temperatura interna alcance los 165 °F, 1 hora.

Retire el pollo de la parrilla y deje reposar durante 10 minutos. Con un tenedor, desmenuce el pollo del hueso y déjelo a un lado.

En una sartén grande a fuego medio-alto, caliente el aceite. Agregue la cebolla y saltee durante 3 minutos, revolviendo ocasionalmente. Agregue los chiles verdes, sazone con sal y pimienta y saltee durante 6-8 minutos, revolviendo ocasionalmente. Retire del fuego y combine el pollo desmenuzado con la mezcla.

Engrase una fuente para hornear de 9 x 13 pulgadas. Para armar las enchiladas, configure una línea de ensamblaje que incluya: tortillas, salsa para enchiladas, frijoles, mezcla de pollo y queso.

Coloque una tortilla y extienda dos cucharadas de salsa sobre la superficie de la tortilla. Agregue los frijoles en línea por el centro de la tortilla, luego agregue una cucharada de la mezcla de pollo y espolvoree con 1/3 taza de queso. Enrolle la tortilla y colóquela con la costura hacia abajo en la fuente para hornear. Repita con los ingredientes restantes.

Extienda la salsa de enchilada restante sobre las tortillas, luego espolvoree el queso rallado restante.

Coloque la fuente para hornear directamente sobre las rejillas de la parrilla, cierre la tapa y cocine sin tapar, hasta que el queso y la salsa burbujeen y las enchiladas estén bien calientes, 20 minutos.

Retire de la parrilla y sirva de inmediato. Adorne con crema agria y cilantro fresco picado.

¡Disfrutar!

PARA VER NUESTRA LÍNEA DE PRODUCTOS TRAEGER HAGA CLIC AQUÍ!!!!!!

ENTREES: TRAEGER SMOKED RIB-EYES WITH BOURBON BUTTER

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Thu, 27 Apr 2023 17:19:42 GMT

TRAEGER SMOKED RIB-EYES WITH BOURBON BUTTER

For good reason, rib-eyes are the favorite steaks of many a discriminating meat eater. An hour's smoke followed by a quick sear and a luscious pat of bourbon-flavored butter take these to a whole new level.

Prep Time

10 MINUTES

Cook Time

1 HOURS

Pellets

MESQUITE

INGREDIENTS

BOURBON BUTTER

1/2 Cup (1 stick) unsalted butter, room temperature

2 Clove Garlic, minced

2 Tablespoon bourbon

1 Tablespoon minced fresh chives or green onions

1 Tablespoon minced fresh parsley

1/2 Teaspoon kosher salt

1/2 Teaspoon freshly ground black pepper

SMOKED RIB-EYES

4 (1 inch thick) rib-eye steaks

To Taste Traeger Prime Rib Rub

STEPS

Make the bourbon butter: In a small bowl, stir together the butter, garlic, bourbon, chives, parsley, salt, and pepper with a wooden spoon until well combined. Refrigerate until ready to use.

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 180℉ and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes. For optimal flavor, use Super Smoke, if available.

Generously season the steaks with Traeger Prime Rib Rub.

Insert the probe into the the center of a steak, avoiding the bone and any large pockets of fat. Place the steaks directly on the grill grates, close the lid, and smoke for 1 hour.

Remove the steaks from the grill. Increase the grill temperature to 500℉.

When the grill is hot, return the steaks to the grill and reinsert the probe. Close the lid, and cook, turning once, until the internal temperature reaches 135℉ for medium-rare, 6-8 minutes per side, or your desired temperature

Transfer the steaks to a serving platter and immediately top each with a pat of the bourbon butter. Let the meat rest for 3 minutes before slicing or serving. Enjoy!

TO CHECK OUT ALL OUR TRAEGER PRODUCTS CLICK HERE !!!!!

ENTRADAS: TRAEGER RIB-EYES AHUMADOS CON MANTEQUILLA BOURBON

Thu, 27 Apr 2023 17:19:00 GMT

RIB-EYES AHUMADOS TRAEGER CON MANTEQUILLA DE BOURBON

Por una buena razón, los rib-eyes son los bistecs favoritos de muchos carnívoros exigentes. El humo de una hora seguido de un dorado rápido y una deliciosa porción de mantequilla con sabor a bourbon los lleva a un nivel completamente nuevo.

tiempo de preparación

10 MINUTOS

Hora de cocinar

1 HORA

Pellets

MESQUITE

INGREDIENTES

MANTEQUILLA BOURBON

1/2 taza (1 barra) de mantequilla sin sal, temperatura ambiente

2 dientes de ajo, picados

2 cucharadas de bourbon

1 cucharada de cebollín fresco picado o cebollas verdes

1 cucharada de perejil fresco picado

1/2 cucharadita de sal kosher

1/2 Cucharadita de pimienta negra recién molida

OJOS DE COSTA AHUMADOS

4 filetes de costilla (de 1 pulgada de grosor)

Al gusto Traeger Prime Rib Rub

PASOS

Prepare la mantequilla de bourbon: en un tazón pequeño, mezcle la mantequilla, el ajo, el bourbon, las cebolletas, el perejil, la sal y la pimienta con una cuchara de madera hasta que estén bien combinados. Refrigere hasta que esté listo para su uso.

Cuando esté listo para cocinar, configure la temperatura Traeger a 180 ℉ y precaliente con la tapa cerrada durante 15 minutos. Para un sabor óptimo, use Super Smoke, si está disponible.

Sazone generosamente los bistecs con Traeger Prime Rib Rub.

Inserte la sonda en el centro de un bistec, evitando el hueso y las bolsas grandes de grasa. Coloque los bistecs directamente sobre las rejillas de la parrilla, cierre la tapa y ahume durante 1 hora.

Retire los filetes de la parrilla. Aumente la temperatura de la parrilla a 500 ℉.

Cuando la parrilla esté caliente, devuelva los bistecs a la parrilla y vuelva a insertar la sonda. Cierre la tapa y cocine, volteando una vez, hasta que la temperatura interna alcance los 135 ℉ para que esté medio cocido, de 6 a 8 minutos por lado, o la temperatura que desee.

Transfiera los bistecs a una fuente para servir e inmediatamente cubra cada uno con un poco de mantequilla de bourbon. Deje reposar la carne durante 3 minutos antes de cortarla o servirla. ¡Disfrutar!

PARA VER TODOS NUESTROS PRODUCTOS TRAEGERHAGA CLIC AQUÍ!!!!!

DESSERT: TRAEGER BOOZY & BACON-Y MARSHMALLOW TREATS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Thu, 20 Apr 2023 19:47:05 GMT

TRAEGER BOOZY & BACON-Y MARSHMALLOW TREATS

We transformed this classic kid-favorite, no-bake treat into a dessert that grownups will swoon over by adding crispy bacon, a bit of whiskey, and, of course, a hint of smoke. You’ll make more caramel sauce than you need for the treats, but it keeps for a couple weeks in the fridge and is delicious gently reheated and poured over ice cream or drizzled on apple pie.

Prep Time

20 MINUTES

Cook Time

40 MINUTES

Pellets

APPLE

INGREDIENTS

TREATS

8 slices thick-cut bacon

2 Ounce (4 Tbsp) unsalted butter, plus more for greasing the pan

2 10-oz bags mini marshmallows

6 Cup crispy rice cereal

CARAMEL SAUCE

1 Cup Sugar

1/4 Cup water

3 Ounce (6 Tbsp) unsalted butter

1/2 Cup heavy cream

2 Tablespoon Traeger WhistlePig Smokestock Whiskey

STEPS

Make the treats: Set the Traeger temperature to 375°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Place the bacon on a rimmed baking sheet with space between each slice. Cook with the lid closed until crisp, 20 to 25 minutes. Let cool, then chop. Set aside about ¼ cup of the chopped bacon.

Grease a 9x13-inch baking dish with butter. In a large Dutch oven or similar heavy-based pot, melt the 4 Tbsp butter over medium heat on your Traeger Induction cooktop or on the stove. Add one bag of the marshmallows and cook, stirring, until melted, 2 to 3 minutes.

Remove the pot from the heat and stir in the rice cereal, all but the reserved bacon, and the remaining bag of marshmallows. (The marshmallows will not fully melt.) Scrape and press the mixture into the prepared pan. Sprinkle the reserved bacon over the top, pressing on it lightly to help it adhere. Let cool to room temperature, about 1 hour.

Meanwhile, make the caramel sauce: Combine the sugar and water in a medium heavy-based saucepan over medium heat on your Traeger Induction cooktop or on a stove. Cook without stirring until the sugar comes to a boil and dissolves, about 4 minutes. Swirl the pan—do not stir—and continue to cook, swirling occasionally, until amber in color, another 8 to 12 minutes. Remove the saucepan from the heat and carefully add the butter, cream, and whiskey; the mixture will bubble and steam. Let cool to room temperature, then transfer to a jar; the sauce will thicken as it cools.

To serve: Pour about half of the sauce over the treats. (Cover and refrigerate the remaining sauce for up to 2 weeks.) Slice the treats and enjoy!

TO TAKE A LOOK AT OUR TRAEGER PRODUCTS CLICK HERE !!!!!

POSTRE: TRAEGER BOOZY Y PREMIOS DE MARSHMALLOWS CON TOCINO

Thu, 20 Apr 2023 19:47:00 GMT

TRAEGER BOOZY & BACON-Y PREMIOS DE MARSHMALLOWS

Transformamos este clásico favorito de los niños, delicia sin hornear en un postre que los adultos se desmayarán al agregar tocino crujiente, un poco de whisky y, por supuesto, una pizca de humo. Harás más salsa de caramelo de la que necesitas para las golosinas, pero se mantiene durante un par de semanas en el refrigerador y es deliciosa recalentada suavemente y vertida sobre helado o rociada sobre tarta de manzana.

tiempo de preparación

20 MINUTOS

Hora de cocinar

40 MINUTOS

Pellets

MANZANA

INGREDIENTES

GOLOSINAS

8 rebanadas de tocino de corte grueso

2 onzas (4 cucharadas) de mantequilla sin sal, y más para engrasar la sartén

2 bolsas de 10 oz mini malvaviscos

6 tazas de cereal de arroz crujiente

DULCE DE LECHE

1 taza de azúcar

1/4 taza de agua

3 onzas (6 cucharadas) de mantequilla sin sal

1/2 taza de crema espesa

2 cucharadas de whisky Traeger WhistlePig Smokestock

PASOS

Prepare las golosinas: configure la temperatura Traeger a 375 ° F y precaliente con la tapa cerrada durante 15 minutos.

Coloque el tocino en una bandeja para hornear con borde con espacio entre cada rebanada. Cocine con la tapa cerrada hasta que estén crujientes, de 20 a 25 minutos. Dejar enfriar, luego picar. Reserve aproximadamente ¼ de taza de tocino picado.

Engrasa una fuente para hornear de 9x13 pulgadas con mantequilla. En un horno holandés grande o una olla similar de base pesada, derrita las 4 cucharadas de mantequilla a fuego medio en su estufa de inducción Traeger o en la estufa. Agregue una bolsa de malvaviscos y cocine, revolviendo, hasta que se derrita, de 2 a 3 minutos.

Retire la olla del fuego y agregue el cereal de arroz, todo menos el tocino reservado y la bolsa restante de malvaviscos. (Los malvaviscos no se derretirán por completo). Raspe y presione la mezcla en el molde preparado. Espolvoree el tocino reservado sobre la parte superior, presionándolo ligeramente para ayudar a que se adhiera. Dejar enfriar a temperatura ambiente, aproximadamente 1 hora

Mientras tanto, prepare la salsa de caramelo: combine el azúcar y el agua en una cacerola mediana de base pesada a fuego medio en su estufa de inducción Traeger o en una estufa. Cocine sin revolver hasta que el azúcar hierva y se disuelva, aproximadamente 4 minutos. Agite la sartén, no revuelva, y continúe cocinando, revolviendo ocasionalmente, hasta que tomeun color ámbar, otros 8 a 12 minutos. Retire la cacerola del fuego y agregue con cuidado la mantequilla, la crema y el whisky; la mezcla burbujeará y se vaporizará. Deje enfriar a temperatura ambiente, luego transfiéralo a un frasco; la salsa se espesará a medida que se enfríe.

Para servir: Vierta aproximadamente la mitad de la salsa sobre las golosinas. (Cubra y refrigere la salsa restante hasta por 2 semanas). Rebane las golosinas y ¡disfrutar!

PARA VER NUESTROS PRODUCTOS TRAEGERHAGA CLIC AQUÍ!!!!!

APPETIZER: TRAEGER BAKED LOADED TATER TOTS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Thu, 20 Apr 2023 19:20:30 GMT

TRAEGER BAKED LOADED TATER TOTS

You’ve never tasted tots like these before. Loaded with chili, cheesy queso, onions, and a sour cream drizzle, this is one epic appetizer you’ll keep coming back to.

Prep Time

10 MINUTES

Cook Time

35 MINUTES

Pellets

HICKORY

INGREDIENTS

2 Pound frozen tater tots

1 (15-oz) can of black beans, drained and rinsed

1 1/2 Cup chili, warmed

1 Cup queso

1 Medium red onion, finely chopped

1/2 Cup fresh cilantro, chopped

1/2 Cup sour cream

1 sliced jalapeño

STEPS

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 375°F and preheat with the closed for 15 minutes.

Spread the frozen tots in a single layer on a baking sheet. Place the baking sheet on the grill grates, close the lid, and cook until the tots are crispy, 25-30 minutes.

Remove the baking sheet from the grill. Top the tots with the chili, queso, and black beans. Return to the grill, close the lid, and cook until warmed through, about 15 minutes.

Remove the loaded tots from grill. Top with the red onion, cilantro, sour cream, and jalapeño. Serve hot.

Enjoy!

TO TAKE A LOOK AT OUR TRAEGER PRODUCTS CLICK HERE !!!!!

APERITIVO: TOTS DE TATER CARGADOS AL HORNO CON TRAEGER

Thu, 20 Apr 2023 19:20:00 GMT

TOTS CARGADOS AL HORNO TRAEGER

Nunca has probado tots como estos antes. Cargado con chili, queso cursi, cebollas y una llovizna de crema agria, este es un aperitivo épico al que seguirás regresando.

tiempo de preparación

10 MINUTOS

Hora de cocinar

35 MINUTOS

Pellets

NUEZ DURA

INGREDIENTES

2 libras de papas fritas congeladas

1 lata (15 oz) de frijoles negros, escurridos y enjuagados

1 1/2 taza de chile, calentado

1 Cup queso

1 cebolla roja mediana, finamente picada

1/2 taza de cilantro fresco, picado

1/2 taza de crema agria

1 jalapeño en rodajas

PASOS

Cuando esté listo para cocinar, ajuste la temperatura Traeger a 375 °F y precaliente con la tapa cerrada durante 15 minutos.

Extienda los tots congelados en una sola capa en una bandeja para hornear. Coloque la bandeja para hornear sobre las rejillas de la parrilla, cierre la tapa y cocine hasta que los tots estén crujientes, 25-30 minutos.

Retire la bandeja para hornear de la parrilla. Cubra los tots con el chile, el queso y los frijoles negros. Regrese a la parrilla, cierre la tapa y cocine hasta que se caliente, aproximadamente 15 minutos.

Retire los tots cargados de la parrilla. Cubra con la cebolla roja, el cilantro, la crema agria y el jalapeño. Servir caliente.

¡Disfrutar!

PARA VER NUESTROS PRODUCTOS TRAEGERHAGA CLIC AQUÍ!!!!!

DESSERTS: TRAEGER CITRUS CHEESECAKE WITH PHYLLO CRUST

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Wed, 05 Apr 2023 19:38:06 GMT

CITRUS CHEESECAKE WITH PHYLLO CRUST

This crispy, frilly edges of this orange imbued cheesecake look so stunning that it’s hard to believe how easy this festive dessert is to make. Look for the paper-thin sheets of dough called phyllo (sometimes spelled filo) in the frozen food section of the supermarket. Though the cheesecake is quick and easy to make, it will need to chill for at least 4 hours before serving, so plan accordingly.

Prep Time

15 MINUTES

Cook Time

30 MINUTES

Pellets

PECAN

INGREDIENTS

PHYLLO CRUST

10 sheets phyllo dough, defrosted as package directs

4 Tablespoon unsalted butter, melted

1/4 Cup sugar

FILLING

2 (8 oz) packages cream cheese, softened

2 large eggs

2/3 Cup sugar

1 Teaspoon vanilla extract

2 Teaspoon finely grated orange zest or lemon zest

1/4 Teaspoon kosher salt

TOPPING

1/4 Cup orange or lemon marmalade (optional)

2 Tablespoon chopped pistachios (optional)

STEPS

If your grill allows, position a grill grate in the middle position. Preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 350°F; this will take about 15 minutes.

Prepare the crust: Have handy a large piece of parchment paper for stacking the phyllo sheets. Keeping the phyllo sheets covered while working so they don’t dry out, place one sheet of phyllo dough on the parchment paper and brush it all over with butter. Take a second sheet and slightly rotating it so the ends do not match up, place it on top of the first sheet. Brush with butter and sprinkle with a teaspoon of sugar. Continue layering with sheets of phyllo dough, rotating each slightly, brushing with melted butter, and sprinkling with sugar until all but the last sheet of phyllo has been used. Place the final sheet on top of the stack but leave it plain (without butter and sugar).

Transfer the phyllo crust from the parchment to the springform pan, discarding the parchment. Gently press the stack of phyllo into the pan, allowing the edges to overhang.

Make the filling: In the bowl of food processor, combine the cream cheese, eggs, sugar, vanilla, orange or lemon zest, and salt. Process until smooth, about 1 minute. (Alternatively, combine the ingredients in a bowl and beat with an electric mixer.)

Pour the filling into the prepared crust and smooth the top with an offset spatula. Allow the uneven edges of the phyllo dough to fall inwards naturally. Place the springform pan on a rimmed baking sheet.

Place the baking sheet directly on the grill grates, close the lid, and bake until the crust is golden brown and the center of the cheesecake is almost set, 30 to 40 minutes. The time will vary based on the weather, grate position, and grill model; begin checking on the early side.

Remove the cheesecake from the grill and cool at room temperature for 1 hour. Transfer the springform pan to the refrigerator and chill uncovered for at least 4 hours before serving. (You can cover it after the 4 hours, and the cake may be made 24 hours ahead and kept chilled.)

For the topping: In a small microwave-safe bowl, heat the marmalade until slightly fluid, 20 to 30 seconds. Remove the outer ring of the springform pan, then pour the glaze over the cheesecake filling, spread it evenly with a spatula. Top with chopped pistachios as desired, slice, and serve. Enjoy!

TO TAKE A LOOK AT OUR TRAEGER PRODUCTS CLICK HERE !!!!!

POSTRES: TARTA DE QUESO DE CÍTRICOS TRAEGER CON CORTEZA DE FILO

Wed, 05 Apr 2023 19:38:00 GMT

TARTA DE QUESO DE CÍTRICOS CON CORTEZA FILO FILO

Los bordes crujientes y con volantes de este pastel de queso con incrustaciones de naranja se ven tan impresionantes que es difícil creer lo fácil que es preparar este postre festivo. Busque las láminas de masa delgadas como papel llamadas filo (a veces escrito filo) en la sección de alimentos congelados del supermercado. Aunque la tarta de queso es rápida y fácil de hacer, deberá enfriarse durante al menos 4 horas antes de servir, así que planifique en consecuencia.

tiempo de preparación

15 MINUTOS

Hora de cocinar

30 MINUTOS

Pellets

PACANA

INGREDIENTES

CORTEZA FILO

10 hojas de masa filo, descongelada como indica el paquete

4 cucharadas de mantequilla sin sal, derretida

1/4 taza de azúcar

RELLENO

2 paquetes (8 oz) de queso crema, suavizado

2 huevos grandes

2/3 taza de azúcar

1 cucharadita de extracto de vainilla

2 cucharaditas de ralladura de naranja o ralladura de limón finamente rallada

1/4 cucharadita de sal kosher

ADICIÓN

1/4 taza de mermelada de naranja o limón (opcional)

2 cucharadas de pistachos picados (opcional)

PASOS

Si su parrilla lo permite, coloque una parrilla en la posición media. Precaliente el Traeger con la tapa cerrada a 350°F; esto tomará alrededor de 15 minutos.

Prepare la corteza: tenga a mano un trozo grande de papel pergamino para apilar las hojas de masa filo. Manteniendo las hojas de filo cubiertas mientras trabaja para que no se sequen, coloque una hoja de masa filo sobre el papel pergamino y úntela con mantequilla. Tome una segunda hoja y gírela ligeramente para que los extremos no coincidan, colóquela encima de la primera hoja. Pintar con mantequilla y espolvorear con una cucharadita de azúcar. Continúe colocando capas con láminas de masa filo, girando cada una ligeramente, untando con mantequilla derretida y espolvoreando con azúcar hasta que se haya utilizado toda la lámina excepto la última. Coloque la hoja final encima de la pila, pero déjela normal (sin mantequilla ni azúcar

Transfiera la corteza de hojaldre del pergamino al molde desmontable, desechando el pergamino. Presione suavemente la pila de hojaldre en la sartén, permitiendo que los bordes sobresalgan.

Haz el relleno: En el tazón del procesador de alimentos, combina el queso crema, los huevos, el azúcar, la vainilla, la ralladura de naranja o limón y la sal. Procese hasta que quede suave, alrededor de 1 minuto. (Alternativamente, combine los ingredientes en un tazón y bata con una batidora eléctrica).

Vierta el relleno en la corteza preparada y alise la parte superior con una espátula compensada. Deje que los bordes irregulares de la masa filo caigan hacia adentro de forma natural. Coloque el molde desmontable en una bandeja para hornear con borde.

Coloque la bandeja para hornear directamente sobre las rejillas de la parrilla, cierre la tapa y hornee hasta que la corteza esté dorada y el centro de la tarta de queso esté casi listo, de 30 a 40 minutos. El tiempo variará según el clima, la posición de la parrilla y el modelo de parrilla; Comience a verificar en el lado temprano.

Retire la tarta de queso de la parrilla y enfríe a temperatura ambiente durante 1 hora. Transfiera el molde desmontable al refrigerador y enfríe sin tapar durante al menos 4 horas antes de servir. (Puede cubrirlo después de 4 horas, y el pastel puede prepararse con 24 horas de anticipación y mantenerse refrigerado).

Para la cobertura: en un tazón pequeño apto para microondas, caliente la mermelada hasta que esté ligeramente líquida, de 20 a 30 segundos. Retire el anillo exterior del molde desmontable, luego vierta el glaseado sobre el relleno de tarta de queso y extiéndalo uniformemente con una espátula. Cubra con pistachos picados como desee, rebane y sirva. ¡Disfrutar!

PARA VER NUESTROS PRODUCTOS TRAEGERHAGA CLIC AQUÍ!!!!!

ENTREES: TRAEGER SPRING FRITTATA

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Mon, 27 Mar 2023 19:59:50 GMT

TRAEGER SPRING FRITATA

Great for breakfast, lunch, or a light dinner, this "Spring Frittata" features iconic springtime ingredients like fresh asparagus, ham, and chives. Customize it to your liking with other ingredients or flavor themes.

Prep Time

15 MINUTES

Cook Time

20 MINUTES

Pellets

APPLE

INGREDIENTS

6 Large eggs

1/4 Cup heavy cream

1/4 Teaspoon salt and pepper

2 Tablespoon chives, chopped

1/2 Cup grated mozzarella cheese

2 Tablespoon butter

1 Cup chopped mushrooms

4 fresh asparagus spears, sliced into 1 inch piece

1/4 Cup red bell pepper, diced

1/2 Cup diced ham

steps

When ready to cook, start the Traeger grill and set the temperature to 350F. Preheat, lid closed, for 10 to 15 minutes.

In a medium-sized mixing bowl, combine the eggs, cream, and salt and pepper. Whisk to combine. Stir in the chives, if using. Stir in the cheese. Set aside.

Melt the butter in a large oven-proof skillet, preferably nonstick or well-seasoned cast iron, over medium heat on the stovetop. Saute the mushrooms, asparagus, and red bell pepper until tender, about 5 minutes. Stir in the ham.

Distribute the ingredients evenly over the bottom of the skillet. Pour the egg mixture evenly over the vegetables and meat. Place the skillet on the grill grate and cook the frittata until it is firm in the center and lightly browned on the bottom, 15 to 20 minutes. Allow the frittata to cool for 5 minutes before slicing into wedges and serving.

to take a closer look at our traeger grill lineup click here! !!!!!!

ENTREES: GMG WOOD-FIRED BBQ PULLED PORK PIZZA

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Thu, 23 Mar 2023 19:15:17 GMT

GMG WOOD-FIRED BBQ PULLED PORK PIZZA

Great recipe to make if you just made yourself a pork butt and tons leftover. The flavor of BBQ with slow cooked pork and fresh herbs really bring a gourmet feel to the party. The GMG pizza oven attachment cooks your pizza perfectly in just a few minutes and will honestly blow away anyone you decide to share it with.

PREP TIME

MINS

COOK TIME

3-6

MINS

PELLETS

Texas

BLEND

SERVES

2-3

PEOPLE

INGREDIENTS:

1 Homemade or store bought pizza dough

1 cup flour

¼ cup semolina flour (or cornmeal)

favorite bbq sauce

1 tbsp chili powder

Olive oil

Red onion thick slices

Mozzarella shredded

Smoky pulled pork

Chives chopped

Cilantro

Preparation:

1. Set your grill temperature to 350 degrees.

2. Prep your work surface with a generous scatter of flour.

3. Allow dough to come to room temperature 1 hr before pressing.

4. Spread a generous layer of cornmeal on your Green Mountain Grill pizza peel to prevent the dough from sticking to it.

5. Carefully, transfer your dough to your pizza peel. Note: this is best done in one swift movement, rather than slowly.

6. Top your pizza dough with desired ingredients.

7. Put your pizza in your grill and allow to cook for 3-4 minutes, until cheese is melted and bubbling, and crust is golden.

8. Remove pizza from grill, and allow it to rest on your pizza peel for approximately 2 minutes, or until the cheese has stopped bubbling.

Enjoy!

to take a closer look at our green mountain grill lineup click here !!!!!

APPETIZER: TRAEGER MAPLE BACON PULL APARTS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Mon, 13 Mar 2023 20:04:00 GMT

TRAEGER MAPLE BACON PULL APARTS

Rise and shine with bacon. These breakfast rolls are a whole lot of sweet with a dash of savory bacon on top.

Prep Time

15 MINUTES

Cook Time

45 MINUTES

Pellets

APPLE

SERVINGS

INGREDIENTS

1 1/4 Pound sliced bacon

2 1/2 Can Jumbo homestyle refrigerator biscuits

1 1/4 Cup packed brown sugar

1 1/4 Cup maple syrup

1 1/4 Cup (2 sticks) unsalted butter

5/8 Cup water

2 1/2 Teaspoon ground cinnamon

Cooking spray, for greasing

STEPS

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 400°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Place the bacon directly on the grill grates. Close the lid and cook on each side for 5-8 minutes, depending on the thickness of your bacon.

Remove the bacon from the grill. Reduce the grill temperature to 350°F. Allow to cool slightly, then crumble the bacon and set aside.

Remove the biscuits from the can and cut each biscuit into 4 pieces and peel each piece in half. Place the biscuit pieces in a large bowl and set aside.

In a saucepan over medium heat, add the maple syrup, brown sugar, butter and water and bring to a boil. Reduce the heat and simmer for 1 minute. Stir in the cinnamon.

Grease a bundt pan with cooking spray. In the bowl with the biscuit pieces, add the crumbled bacon and syrup and mix to coat. Pour into the greased bundt pan and spread around evenly.

Place the bundt pan directly on the grill grates. Close the lid and cook until the biscuits are cooked through, 30-35 minutes.

Remove the bundt pan from the grill and invert the pan onto a serving platter. Serve warm.

Enjoy!

TO TAKE A LOOK AT OUR TRAEGER LINEUP CLICK HERE !!!!!

APERITIVO: TRAEGER MAPLE BACON PULL APARTS

Mon, 13 Mar 2023 20:04:00 GMT

TRAEGER MAPLE BACON PULL APARTS

Levántate y brilla con tocino. Estos panecillos de desayuno son muy dulces con una pizca de tocino salado encima.

tiempo de preparación

15 MINUTOS

Hora de cocinar

45 MINUTOS

Pellets

MANZANA

PORCIONES

INGREDIENTES

1 1/4 Libra de tocino rebanado

2 1/2 lata de galletas caseras Jumbo para refrigerador

1 1/4 taza de azúcar morena empacada

1 1/4 taza de jarabe de arce

1 1/4 taza (2 barras) de mantequilla sin sal

5/8 taza de agua

2 1/2 Cucharadita de canela molida

Aerosol para cocinar, para engrasar

PASOS

Cuando esté listo para cocinar, ajuste la temperatura Traeger a 400 °F y precaliente con la tapa cerrada durante 15 minutos.

Coloque el tocino directamente sobre las rejillas de la parrilla. Cierre la tapa y cocine por cada lado durante 5-8 minutos, dependiendo del grosor de su tocino.

Retire el tocino de la parrilla. Reduzca la temperatura de la parrilla a 350°F. Deje que se enfríe un poco, luego desmenuce el tocino y reserve.

Retire las galletas de la lata y corte cada galleta en 4 pedazos y pele cada pedazo por la mitad. Coloque los trozos de galleta en un tazón grande y reserve.

En una cacerola a fuego medio, agregue el jarabe de arce, el azúcar moreno, la mantequilla y el agua y deje hervir. Reduzca el fuego y cocine a fuego lento durante 1 minuto. Agregue la canela.

Engrasa un molde con aceite en aerosol. En el tazón con los trozos de galleta, agregue el tocino desmenuzado y el almíbar y mezcle para cubrir. Verter en el molde Bundt engrasado y distribuir uniformemente.

Coloque la sartén Bundt directamente sobre las rejillas de la parrilla. Cierre la tapa y cocine hasta que las galletas estén bien cocidas, 30-35 minutos.

Retire el molde bundt de la parrilla e inviértalo sobre una fuente para servir. Servir tibio.

¡Disfrutar!

PARA ECHAR UN VISTAZO A NUESTRA LÍNEA DE TRAEGERHAGA CLIC AQUÍ!!!!!

ENTREES: GMG Elementary to Extravagant BURGERS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Mon, 06 Mar 2023 17:15:56 GMT

GMG Elementary to Extravagant

BURGERS

The argument for burgers and whether to use lean and fat ground beef will never get settled. Personally, I prefer the leanest I can afford. I also like to make two thin patties for a “double” rather than one thick one, but that’s just me. Everyone has a special way to make their burgers and we won’t stop you from doing your own thing. We just want to give your our take on burgers and we wanna see what you guys some up with. Their are so many possibilities for some beef a bun and some fixing and that’s what a hamburger is all about.

PREP TIME

15-30

MINS

IDLE TIME

N/A

HOURS

COOK TIME

HOURS

PELLETS

Gold

BLEND

SERVES

2-6

PEOPLE

INGREDIENTS:

GMG Beef Rub

Ground Beef

Pepper

salt

Your Choice of Fixing

HOPPED-UP BURGERS

Here’s the good stuff: Mince an onion and a half slice of bacon. If you want, add some diced Ortega chilies. Knead these into your burger. You should cook this until medium-well to insure the bacon cooks thoroughly. If you make thick burgers, sauté the onion/bacon mix for a couple of minutes on your stove top before you mix it in with your ground beef. You can top the burgers with cheese during the last 2 minutes or so, and you can also toast your buns for about the same length of time.

check out ANOTHER awesome IDEA FOR AN UNUSUAL GREAT TASTING BURGER IN VIDEO BELOW!!!!!

to take a closer look at our green mountain grill lineup click here !!!!!

ENTREES: TRAEGER COMPETITION BBQ CHICKEN THIGHS

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Fri, 03 Mar 2023 19:59:02 GMT

TRAEGER COMPETITION BBQ CHICKEN THIGHS

This BBQ chicken recipe is so delicious that it'll crown you king or queen of every potluck, Sunday dinner, and chicken competition.

Prep Time

30 MINUTES

Cook Time

2 HOURS

Pellets

HICKORY

INGREDIENTS

20 (1/2 lb each) bone-in, skin-on chicken thighs

2 1/2 cups low-sodium chicken broth

1/3 Cup Pork & Poultry Rub

1 1/2 Cup (3 sticks) unsalted butter, melted

3 Cup Traeger Apricot BBQ Sauce, warmed

STEPS

Peel the skin off the chicken thighs and reserve. With kitchen shears, remove the fat on each side of the chicken thighs. Trim 1/4 inch off the bottom and top bone knuckle of each thigh so the thighs are uniform in size. Trim the reserved skin to fit the new size of the thighs, then place the skin back on the thighs.

Using a meat injector, inject 1 tablespoon of chicken broth into each side of each thigh, 2 tablespoons per thigh. Place the chicken in a large disposable roasting pan and season the tops of the thighs with the Traeger Pork & Poultry Rub. Chill in the refrigerator for 60 minutes.

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 250°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Pour the melted butter over the chicken thighs.

Place the pan with the chicken on the grill grates. Close the lid and cook for one hour.

Insert the probe into the thickest part of a chicken thigh at the center of the pan, avoiding the bone. Cover the pan with aluminum foil, close the grill lid, and cook for another hour, or until the internal temperature of the chicken reaches 165℉.

Use tongs to remove each chicken thigh from the pan and dunk in the Traeger Apricot BBQ sauce to coat. Transfer the chicken thighs to a clean disposable pan.

Place the pan with the chicken, uncovered, on the grill grates. Close the lid and cook for 20 minutes, until the sauce sets.

Remove the chicken from the grill and let rest for 10 minutes before serving.

Enjoy!

To take a look at our Traeger lineup click here !!

Snacks: Traeger Blackened Cheez Its

Mon, 20 Feb 2023 20:18:27 GMT

Traeger Blackened Cheez-Its

Is it possible to make Cheez-It crackers even more savory and delicious? You bet! This easy-to-make wood-fired snack packs on the umami flavor with a little bit of Worcestershire and a sprinkling of our Blackened Saskatchewan Rub, which features garlic plus bold spices. Just try to stop eating these.

Prep Time: 5 Minutes

Cook Time: 1 Hours

Serves: 10 people

Ingredients

main

1 12.4-Oz Box Cheez-It Crackers Or Similar

2 Tablespoon Unsalted Butter, Melted

2 Tablespoon Worcestershire Sauce

1 Tablespoon Traeger Blackened Saskatchewan Rub

Steps

Preheat the Traeger with the lid closed to 225°F; this will take about 15 minutes.

Put the crackers on a large, rimmed baking sheet. Add the butter, Worcestershire, and Traeger Blackened Saskatchewan Rub, toss until well coated, then spread the crackers out on the sheet.

Place the baking sheet directly on the grill grate. Smoke the crackers, using Super Smoke if available, until they look lightly toasted and have become slightly matte in appearance, about 1 hour. Let cool before serving. Enjoy!

ENTREES: TRAEGER SMOKED PORK TENDERLOIN

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Tue, 14 Feb 2023 17:09:37 GMT

TRAEGER SMOKED PORK TENDERLOIN

Give your pork a sweet and smoky kick. These tenderloins are marinated in a sweet honey and thyme mixture, then smoked to perfection over aromatic applewood pellets.

Prep Time

5 MINUTES

Cook Time

3 HOURS

Pellets

APPLE

INGREDIENTS

1/2 Cup apple juice

3 Tablespoon honey, warmed

3 Tablespoon Traeger Pork & Poultry Rub

1/4 Cup brown sugar

2 Tablespoon fresh thyme leaves

1/2 Tablespoon Black pepper

2 (1-1/2 lb) pork tenderloins, silverskin removed

STEPS

1. In a large bowl, whisk together the apple juice, honey, Traeger Pork & Poultry Rub, brown sugar, thyme, and black pepper.

2. Add the pork loins to the bowl with the marinade. Turn the pork to coat. Cover the bowl with plastic wrap and transfer to the refrigerator and marinate for 2-3 hours.

3. When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 225℉ and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes. For optimal flavor, use Super Smoke, if available.

4. Insert the probe into center of a tenderloin. Place the tenderloins directly on the grill grates, close the lid, and smoke until the internal temperature reaches 145℉, 2 1/2-3 hours.

5. Remove the tenderloins from the grill and let rest for 5 minutes before slicing.

Enjoy!

T o take a look at our Traeger lineup click here !!

APPETIZERS: TRAEGER BAKED BUFFALO CHICKEN DIP

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Thu, 02 Feb 2023 21:35:50 GMT

TRAEGER BAKED BUFFALO CHICKEN DIP

Give your game day crowd something to talk about. Chicken, cheese and buffalo hot sauce are baked until hot and bubbly and topped with blue cheese and bacon for the perfect shareable dip.

Prep Time

10 MINUTES

Cook Time

30 MINUTES

Pellets

MESQUITE

SERVES

INGREDIENTS

8 Ounce cream cheese, softened

1/2 Cup sour cream

1/2 Cup Mayonnaise

2 Tablespoon dry ranch seasoning

1 Teaspoon kosher salt

1/2 Cup Frank's RedHot Sauce

2 Cup cooked chicken, shredded

1 Cup shredded cheddar cheese

1 Cup shredded mozzarella cheese

1/2 Cup blue cheese

4 Strips cooked bacon, crumbled

chips, crackers, crostini or sliced vegetables, for serving

STEPS

1 When ready to cook, set Traeger temperature to 350°F and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes.

2 In a medium bowl or the bowl of a stand mixer, combine cream cheese, sour cream, mayonnaise, ranch, salt and hot sauce and mix until combined.

3 Fold in the cheddar, mozzarella and shredded chicken. Transfer to an ovenproof dish and top with blue cheese and crumbled bacon.

4 Place dish directly on the grill grate and cook for 20 to 30 minutes until the top is golden brown and dip is bubbling.

5 Serve with chips, crackers, crostini or sliced vegetables. Enjoy!

TO TAKE A LOOK AT OUR TRAEGER LINEUP CLICK HERE !

APPETIZERS: TRAEGER BROWN SUGAR AND BACON WRAPPED LIL SMOKIES

tkdunkin@gmail.com (Trina Dunkin) — Tue, 24 Jan 2023 18:25:18 GMT

BROWN SUGAR AND BACON WRAPPED LIL SMOKIES

3 simple ingredients come together for a triple threat of flavor. These bite-sized appetizers packs a sweet and salty punch you won’t be able to get enough of.

Prep Time

20 MINUTES

Cook Time

25 MINUTES

Pellets

APPLE

INGREDIENTS

1 Pound bacon

1 (14 oz) package of cocktail sausages

1/2 Cup brown sugar

STEPS

1. Lay the bacon strips on a clean, flat surface and roll out with a rolling pin until they are a bit longer with even thickness. Cut each strip in half crosswise.

2. Wrap a half-strip of bacon around each cocktail sausage and secure with a toothpick. Arrange the bacon-wrapped sausages in a casserole dish in a single layer and cover with the brown sugar. Transfer to the refrigerator for 30 minutes.

3. When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 350°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.

4 . Arrange the sausages on the prepared baking sheet, then place the pan directly on the grill grates. Close the lid and cook until the bacon is crispy, 25-30 minutes.

Serve warm. Enjoy!

To take a look at our Traeger lineup click here !

ENTREES: Traeger BBQ Chicken Legs

Wed, 18 Jan 2023 18:25:25 GMT

Traeger BBQ Chicken Legs

Don’t be fooled by the simplicity of this BBQ chicken recipe. Smoke and sauce bring out the flavor of these legs, making for an easy meal for any night of the week.

Ingredients

main

8 Whole Chicken Drumsticks

2 Tablespoon Traeger Chicken Rub

1 Cup Traeger Apricot BBQ Sauce

1 Cup Traeger 'Que BBQ Sauce

1 Cup Apple Jelly

Steps

When ready to cook, set the temperature to 180℉ and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

For optimal flavor, use Super Smoke if available.

Pat the drumsticks dry with a paper towel. Season generously with Traeger Chicken Rub.

Insert the probe into the thickest part of a drumstick, avoiding the bone. Set the drumsticks directly on the grill grates, close the lid, and smoke for 30 minutes.

Increase the grill temperature to 350°F and continue cooking for another 30 minutes.

While the drumsticks are cooking, combine the Traeger Apricot and Traeger 'Que BBQ sauces and the apple jelly in a small saucepan. Bring to a simmer over medium heat, then set aside until ready to use.

Brush the BBQ sauce over the chicken. Cook for another 10 minutes, or until the internal temperature of the drumsticks reaches 165°F.

Remove the drumsticks from the grill and serve. Enjoy!

To learn more about our traeger's click here !

SIDES: TRAEGER LOADED BAKED POTATO SALAD

Fri, 13 Jan 2023 17:26:50 GMT

TRAEGER LOADED BAKED POTATO SALAD

Bye bye boring. This potato salad is loaded with bacon, chives, and cheddar cheese for a creamy side of epic proportions.

Prep Time

15 MINUTES

Cook Time

35 MINUTES

Pellets

HICKORY

SERVES

INGREDIENTS

MAIN

3 Pound medium russet potatoes, scrubbed

1/4 Cup Olive oil

To Taste kosher salt

To Taste freshly ground black pepper

1 Pound slab bacon, cut into lardons (matchsticks)

1 Cup shredded cheddar cheese

4 scallions, thinly sliced

DRESSING

2 Cup sour cream

1/2 Cup Mayonnaise

2 Tablespoon chopped fresh chives

1/2 Tablespoon dry mustard

STEPS

1 When ready to cook, set Traeger temperature to 450℉ and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes. Place potatoes directly on the grill grate and cook 35 to 40 minutes or until tender.

2 Coat the potatoes with olive oil and season with salt and pepper.

3 Place bacon lardons in a cast iron skillet or oven-safe dish.

4 Place the potatoes directly on the grill grates. Place the dish with the lardons next to the potatoes. Close the lid and cook until fat is rendered and lardons are crispy, about 30 minutes.

5 Remove lardons from the grill, drain and discard the fat and set bacon aside.

6 When the potatoes are tender, remove from grill and let cool at room temperature for 15 minutes. Transfer to the refrigerator and cool completely.

7 While the potatoes are cooling make the dressing. In a medium bowl, combine sour cream, mayonnaise, chives, dry mustard, salt and pepper and mix well.

8 When potatoes are completely cool, cut them into 1 inch chunks. In a large bowl, toss potatoes, lardon and cheese together. Pour dressing over the top and stir to coat. Top with extra cheese if desired and sliced scallions.

need a Traeger to make a delicious loaded baked potato salad for yourself? then click here for our grills!

Enjoy!

SIDES: TRAEGER FRIES WITH CHIPOTLE KETCHUP

Mon, 09 Jan 2023 16:59:23 GMT

TRAEGER FRIES WITH CHIPOTLE KETCHUP

We’ve paired these crispy, thick-cut fries with spicy chipotle ketchup and topped them with Traeger Beef Rub for a bold pop of cracked pepper and a hint of zesty citrus.

Prep Time

10 MINUTES

Cook Time

15 MINUTES

Pellets

HICKORY

INGREDIENTS

CHIPOTLE KETCHUP

2 canned chipotle peppers in adobo sauce

1 Tablespoon Olive oil

1 Teaspoon onion powder

1 Teaspoon garlic powder

1 Cup tomato ketchup

1 Tablespoon Sugar

1 Tablespoon ground cumin

1 Tablespoon chile powder

Juice of 1 lime

FRIES

5 Yukon Gold potatoes, cut into thick strips

2 Tablespoon unsalted butter, melted

1 Tablespoon Traeger Beef Rub

MAIN

1/4 Cup finely chopped fresh flat-leaf parsley

STEPS

1. Make the chipotle ketchup: Chop the chipotle peppers, then add to a medium bowl with the olive oil, onion powder, garlic powder, ketchup, sugar, cumin, chile powder, and lime juice and mix well to combine. Cover the bowl with plastic wrap and refrigerate for at least 1 hour, preferably overnight, to allow the flavors to meld.

2. Make the fries: When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 450°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

3. Make the fries: Add the potatoes to a large bowl. Drizzle with the melted butter and sprinkle with the Traeger Beef Rub. Toss to coat well. Spread the fries in a single layer on a baking sheet.

4. Place the baking sheet on the grill grates. Close the lid and bake until the fries are crispy, 10-15 minutes.

5. Remove the fries from the grill, return to the bowl, and toss with the parsley.

6. Serve the fries with the chipotle ketchup for dipping.

Wanna make these fries and need a traeger? Then click here and find the right one for you!

DESSERTS: GMG SWEET SMOKED BANANAS

Fri, 06 Jan 2023 20:35:37 GMT

GMG SWEET SMOKED BANANAS

A simple recipe that turns out some of the best looking bananas you’ll ever see! If you’re looking for creative and delicious desert in a flash – look no further!

PREP TIME

MINS

COOK TIME

MINS

PELLETS

Gold

BLEND

SERVES

4-6

PEOPLE

Ingredients

1 hand of bananas

Melted caramel

1 cup chocolate sauce

Small chocolate chips

Crushed graham crackers

Small marshmallows

Directions

– Preheat your grill to 350 degrees.

– Cut the stem off of your bananas, and slice them down the middle. Don’t slice all the way through, just enough to have a lengthwise opening in the banana’s peel.

– Spread them open from the cut and squeeze in from the ends to create a pocket to fill with ingredients.

– Place small chocolate chips and marshmallows into the opened bananas, then wrap the banana in foil.

– Place foiled banana in the smoker for ~10 minutes until the chocolate and marshmallows are melted and the peel turns brown.

– Add graham crackers on top, then chocolate sauce, caramel, and anything else that’s to your liking.

Enjoy!

ENTREES: GMG PELLET-FRIED CHICKEN

Fri, 06 Jan 2023 17:47:24 GMT

GMG PELLET-FRIED CHICKEN

Pellet Fried Chicken is one’s easy recipe to master and wow your friends with. If you know any Kentucky colonels, they might just be a little envious of your crispy, crunchy, and smoky chicken delights coming from your personal kitchen. This is a great based recipe for creating your own fancy homestyle Pellet Fried chicken with the flavors and kick you are looking for in your Fried Chicken

PREP TIME

MINS

COOK TIME

HOURS

PELLETS

Gold

BLEND

SERVES

4-6

PEOPLE

INGREDIENTS:

1 cut-up frying chicken

1 egg

1 tablespoon baking powder

1 tablespoon paprika

1/2 teaspoon pepper

1/2 teaspoon salt

1/2 teaspoon seasoned salt

1/3 cup evaporated milk

3/4 AP Flour

Fried Chicken Preparation

Beat egg in small bowl.

Add evaporated milk and stir thoroughly.

Mix flour, paprika, baking powder, salts, and pepper in a bowl.

Use a small bowl to melt butter in microwave and then pour into shallow metal baking pan large enough to hold the chicken pieces.

Dip chicken pieces in egg/milk mixture and then roll in flour mix. Place into metal baking pan.

Set the grill to 375° and wait until this temperature stabilizes. Cook the chicken for 25 minutes. Then, reduce the heat to 325°, turn the chicken pieces over, and cook for 30 more minutes or until done.

Need a green mountain grill? Click here !

ENTREES: GMG KANSAS-STYLE BEEF BRISKET

Mon, 19 Dec 2022 22:26:05 GMT

GMG KANSAS-STYLE BEEF BRISKET

The brisket embodies the essence of BBQ. If you can prepare a brisket that tastes great, has a good, clean smoke ring, and cuts with a plastic fork, you’ve stepped outside the envelope of casual grilling and into the realm of serious barbecue. The Green Mountain pellet grill is up to the task of slow and low cooking that you need to make your inner barbecue spirit come out and create a masterpiece. Any Brisket is a feat and some may call it a right of passage when on the road to true barbecue perfection. The hunk of meat is large but if you keep your the prize you can have yourself a find treat to share with your friends .The brisket challenges you because it is a pretty crummy cut of meat that handicaps you before you start. It’s analogous to making a silk purse out of a sow’s ear. Sure, you could boil a brisket to make it tender as a Mother’s love, but the texture and taste would not earn many accolades from people with even a hint of a palate. So try this. It takes a long while, but if you succeed, you will do it again and again.

PREP TIME

MINS

IDLE TIME

N/A

HOURS

COOK TIME

12-16

HOURS

PELLETS

Gold

BLEND

SERVES

10+

PEOPLE

INGREDIENTS:

Beef Brisket

Dry Rub

Pepper

salt

Kansas-City Beef Brisket Preparation

Start with one whole brisket – 7-10 lbs. Use Choice grade instead of Select (Standard) so that the meat gets tender without being flaky and dry.

Trim the fat cap to ¼” thick. Then, score the fat in 3/8” squares, like a waffle. This allows the rub, heat, and smoke to penetrate into the meat. Rub with your choice of commercial dry rub such as Montreal Steak seasoning with added pepper, Prime Rib seasoning with added pepper, or Lawry’s with some onion powder. Or make your own with salt, pepper, season salt, onion powder. Massage the rub thoroughly into the meat. Refrigerate for 6-8 hours or overnight. Return the brisket to room temperature before you begin to cook it.

Cook the brisket on your Green Mountain grill at 185°, fat side up, for 5 hours. Spritz with an apple juice/Worcestershire mix every hour or so. After five hours, turn it over and cook for 2 more hours. After that, turn it back over to fat side up and cook until the brisket’s internal temperature (check with a meat thermometer!) reaches 165°, usually about another 4 hours. Next, remove the brisket from the grill. Now, mix about ½ cup of apple juice plus 3 tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce. Wrap the brisket completely in aluminum foil and drizzle the apple juice mix inside the foil onto the meat.

Brisket Cooking

Turn the grill up to 225°. Cook until the internal temperature of the meat reaches 198-201° (2-6 hours). Lay newspaper or paper towels in a cooler and lay the meat, still wrapped up in the aluminum foil, on the paper. Close the cooler and let the meat rest for about an hour and a half.

Drain the juices and cut the meat in 1/8” slices across the grain. You will be able to cut this with a plastic fork. You may also wish to cool the drained juices in the refrigerator, skim the fat from the surface of the liquid, and then reheat for an au jus dip.

Once you are finished you can enjoy the otherwise tough meat you have turned into a savory delight that anyone can make a meal out of anytime. Be sure to invite some friends because this roast yields a ton of savory meat for all.

Click here to get a green mountain grill!

ENTREES: TRAEGER GRILLED HOT HAWAIIAN BURGER

Wed, 14 Dec 2022 19:55:59 GMT

TRAEGER GRILLED HOT HAWAIIAN BURGER

If you like heat and sweet, then this burger has your name written all over it. Load your buns with a juicy, grilled beef patty, pineapple, swiss cheese and none other than spam, for a burger that'll take you to paradise.

Prep Time

10 MINUTES

Cook Time

15 MINUTES

Pellets

HICKORY

INGREDIENTS

1 1/2 Pound ground beef

1 Teaspoon Salt

1/2 Teaspoon Black pepper

4 Slices Swiss cheese

4 Slices Spam

4 Slices pineapple

4 English Muffins

1 Tablespoon Sriracha

1/4 Cup Mayonnaise

STEPS

when ready to cook, set Traeger temperature to 450˚F and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes. For optimal results, set to 500° if available.

In a medium bowl, add the ground beef, salt, and black pepper and mix with hands to combine. Form into four (1/3 lb) patties.

Insert the probe horizontally into the center of a burger patty. Place the patties directly on the grill grates. Close the lid and cook, 4-6 minutes per side, until the internal temperature registers 135˚F for medium-rare, or cook to desired doneness. Top the burgers with cheese during the last minute of cooking to melt.

Remove the burgers from the grill and set aside to rest. Place Spam and pineapple on the grill grates. Close the lid and cook, flipping occasionally until warmed through and lightly browned.

Place another slice of cheese on Spam and continue to cook until melted. Place the English muffins on the grill grates to toast 2-3 minutes.

In a small bowl, add the mayonnaise and Sriracha, and stir to combine.

Remove the English muffins, pineapple, and Spam from the grill. Place the bottom buns on a cutting board. Top with a slice of pineapple. Add burger patty and top with Spam. Top with Sriracha mayonnaise, then close burger. Serve immediately,

enjoy!

Need a traeger? Click here!

APPETIZERS: GMG SMOKED JALAPENO POPPERS

Wed, 14 Dec 2022 17:42:49 GMT

GMG SMOKED JALAPENO POPPERS

The perfect spicy party snack! Very quick to cook and makes a great presentation. This recipe will hands down be the best poppers you have ever tasted.

PREP TIME

MINS

IDLE TIME

HOURS

COOK TIME

60-75

MINS

PELLETS

Texas

BLEND

SERVES

4-5

PEOPLE

INGREDIENTS:

8 jalapeños

2 garlic cloves minced

1 cup shredded cheddar

8 oz cream cheese

2 slices sourdough bread

8 slices of bacon

toothpicks

Preparation:

-Preheat your grill to 250 degrees.

-Chop the tops off of your Jalapeño and scrape the seeds out with a knife.

-In a medium bowl, mix the cream cheese, minced garlic, and shredded cheddar. Blend these ingredients together until it is evenly mixed.

-Take your Jalapeño and stuff them with the cream cheese mixture about 80% of the way full.

-Cut the sourdough slices into squares and stuff 1 bread square into each Jalapeño to keep the contents inside.

-Wrap each pepper tightly with a bacon slice and try your best not to overlap. This will insure the bacon cooks evenly.

-Slide 2 toothpicks perpendicularly into each pepper to hold it all together.

-Cook the peppers at 250 for 60-75 minutes, depending on how crispy you want the bacon. I find the longer they go, the better.

Enjoy!

Click here to look at our green mountain grills!

DESSERTS: GMG SMOKED CHOCOLATE CHIP COOKIES

Fri, 09 Dec 2022 17:58:51 GMT

GMG SMOKED CHOCOLATE CHIP COOKIES

Smoked Chocolate Chip Cookies are just too easy. The taste your pellet grill imparts to these cookies will surprise you and you won’t have to turn the oven on in your kitchen on a hot summer day! All you need to do is fire up the grill and get the cookies ready for grilling!

PREP TIME

MINS

IDLE TIME

N/A

HOURS

COOK TIME

15-20

MINS

PELLETS

Any

BLEND

SERVES

2-6

PEOPLE

INGREDIENTS:

2 ¼ cup flour

1 tsp baking soda

1 ½ sticks unsalted butter (soft)

¾ cup brown sugar

⅔ cup granulated sugar

2 eggs

1 tsp vanilla extract

12 oz chocolate chips

Pinch of salt

Preparation:

-Preheat your grill to 375 degrees.

-Mix all dry ingredients together in a medium sized bowl.

-Add in the eggs, one at a time and mix thoroughly after each one.

-Add in the soft butter, vanilla extract, and chocolate chips.

-With a tablespoon, take 12 and place them on a nonstick baking sheet, spaced evenly.

-Bake the cookies for 10-15 minutes until the outer edge of the cookies get a nice golden brown. The longer you cook them, the more crunch they will have. Repeat these last two steps until you run out of dough.

Click here to look at our green mountain Grills!

ENTREES: TRAEGER ORANGE & MAPLE BAKED HAM

Mon, 05 Dec 2022 16:48:24 GMT

TRAEGER ORANGE & MAPLE BAKED HAM

This sweet maple and orange marmalade glaze makes for a memorable ham feast, whether around the table for Sunday dinner or Christmas Eve.

Prep Time

15 MINUTES

Cook Time

2 HOURS

Pellets

PECAN

INGREDIENTS

2/3 Cup orange juice

1/3 Cup maple syrup

1/3 Cup Marmalade, Orange

1/8 Cup Dijon mustard

1 1/3 Tablespoon apple cider vinegar

1/2 Teaspoon ground cinnamon

1/8 Teaspoon ground cloves

2/3 LB ham

STEPS

When ready to cook, start the Traeger grill, set the temperature to 325 degrees F and preheat, lid closed, for 10 to 15 minutes.

Meanwhile, make the glaze: In a small saucepan, combine the orange juice, the maple syrup, marmalade, mustard, vinegar, cinnamon, and cloves.

Warm over low heat, whisking to combine the ingredients. Remove from the heat and reserve.

Place ham in large roasting pan lined with aluminum foil. Place pan on grill and cook for 1.5 hours.

Open grill and glaze ham with reserved mixture. Continue cooking for another 30 minutes or until a thermometer is inserted into the thickest part of the meat and reaches an internal temperatures of 135 degrees F.

Remove ham from grill and allow to rest for 20 minutes before serving.

Warm remaining sauce and serve with ham if desired. Enjoy!

CLick here FOr our traeger

ENTREES: TRAEGER BBQ PULLED PORK SLIDERS

Mon, 05 Dec 2022 16:36:45 GMT

TRAEGER BBQ PULLED PORK SLIDERS

Homemade pickles give this classic BBQ sandwich a whole new tangy crunch. We use Persian cucumbers for the pickles (plan ahead--they brine for 24 hours!) and a bone-in pork butt for the pulled pork, with a quick and easy BBQ sauce to tie everything together.

Prep Time

15 MINUTES

Cook Time

10 HOURS

Pellets

CHERRY

PICKLES

1 Pound Persian cucumbers, washed

1/2 Cup kosher salt

1/4 Cup Sugar

6 garlic cloves

4 dried bay leaves

4 Tablespoon whole black peppercorns

2 Tablespoon whole white peppercorns

4 Tablespoon whole fennel seeds

1 Tablespoon whole coriander seeds

1 Tablespoon red pepper flakes

2 Cup white wine vinegar

2 Cup ice water

1 Bunch fresh dill

PULLED PORK

1 (8-10 lb) bone-in pork butt

3/4 Cup Traeger Pork & Poultry Rub, plus more to taste

1 Cup Traeger Apricot BBQ Sauce

SPECIAL SAUCE

2 Tablespoon Mayonnaise

1 Tablespoon ketchup

1 Tablespoon Traeger Apricot BBQ Sauce

2 Teaspoon sweet pickle relish

1 Teaspoon yellow mustard

1/2 Teaspoon Sugar

1/2 Teaspoon distilled white vinegar

MAIN

24 Slider Buns

STEPS

When ready to cook, set Traeger temperature 165℉ and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes. For optimal flavor, use Super Smoke if available.

For the Homemade Pickles: Plan ahead, these pickles brine overnight. Place the whole, washed cucumbers directly on the grill grate and smoke for 30 to 45 minutes.

In a medium saucepan, combine the salt, sugar, garlic, bay leaves, black and white peppercorns, fennel seeds, coriander seeds, red pepper flakes, and white wine vinegar. Bring to a boil over medium-high heat, then reduce the heat to medium-low and simmer for 5-10 minutes, stirring to dissolve the salt and sugar. Remove the brine from the heat and let steep for 20 minutes more. Pour the ice water into the brine and add the dill.

Remove the cucumbers from the Traeger and thinly slice crosswise. Transfer to a large glass jar or non-reactive container.

Pour the brine over the cucumbers and weigh down as needed to ensure the cucumbers are fully submerged. Cover and let sit at room temperature for 24 hours before using.

Make the pulled pork: Generously the pork butt on all sides with Traeger Pork & Poultry Rub. Let sit at room temperature for 45 minutes.

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 225℉ and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes. For optimal flavor, use Super Smoke, if available.

Place the pork butt directly on the grill grates, fat-side down. Close the lid and smoke for 3 hours.

Transfer the pork to a disposable aluminum foil pan and cover the pan with foil. Increase the Traeger temperature to 275℉. Place the pan on the grill, close the lid, and roast until an instant-read thermometer inserted in the thickest part of the roast, but not touching bone, registers 200℉, 3-5 hours more.

Meanwhile, make the special sauce: In a small bowl, stir together the mayonnaise, ketchup, Traeger Apricot BBQ Sauce, sweet pickle relish, mustard, sugar, and distilled white vinegar. Refrigerate until ready to use.

Carefully transfer the pork roast to a clean disposable pan and let rest for 20 minutes. Pour the juices from the bottom of the roasting pan into a fat separator.

With your hands (preferably protected from the heat with lined, heavy-duty rubber gloves), pull the pork into chunks. Discard the bone and any lumps of fat, including the cap. Pull each chunk into shreds and transfer to a large bowl. Season with Traeger Pork & Poultry Rub to taste and moisten with the reserved pork juices, discard any fat that has floated to the top. Add the Traeger Apricot BBQ Sauce and mix well.

Pile the pulled pork on the slider buns. Top with the pickles and special sauce. Enjoy!

ENTREES: TRAEGER GRILLED NEW YORK STYLE PEPPERONI PIZZA

Tue, 29 Nov 2022 18:13:46 GMT

TRAEGER GRILLED NEW YORK STYLE PEPPERONI PIZZA

Introducing a wood-fired take on a classic NY style pizza. Homemade dough is topped with a delicious homemade tomato sauce and finished with a healthy sprinkle of cheese and pepperoni.

SERVES 4 PEOPLE

Prep TimE

1 DAYS

Cook Time

15 MINUTES

Pellets

APPLE

PIZZA DOUGH

4 1/2 Cup bread flour, plus more as needed

1 1/2 Tablespoon Sugar

1 Teaspoon Salt

2 Teaspoon instant yeast

3 Tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil

MAIN

bread flour

As Needed cornmeal, for dusting pizza peel

1 Pound grated mozzarella cheese

1 Pound pepperoni slices

PIZZA SAUCE

1 Can (28 oz) whole peeled tomatoes

1 Tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil

1 Tablespoon unsalted butter

2 Medium cloves garlic, grated or minced

1 Teaspoon dried oregano

1 Pinch red pepper flakes

As Needed kosher salt

2 Sprig fresh basil

1 Medium yellow onion, peeled and halved

1 Teaspoon Sugar

STEPS

For the Pizza Dough: Combine flour, sugar, salt and yeast in food processor. Pulse 3 to 4 times until incorporated evenly. Add olive oil and 15 ounces of lukewarm water. Run food processor until mixture forms a ball that rides around the bowl above the blade, about 15 seconds. Continue processing for 15 seconds longer.

Transfer dough ball to a lightly floured surface and knead once or twice by hand until a smooth ball is formed.

Divide dough into three even parts and place each into a 1 gallon resealable bag. Place in the refrigerator and allow to rise at least one day, or up to 5 days.

At least 2 hours before baking, remove dough from refrigerator and shape into balls by gathering dough towards the bottom and pinching shut. Flour well and place each one in a separate medium mixing bowl. Cover tightly with plastic wrap and allow to rise at warm room temperature until roughly doubled in volume.

For the Pizza Sauce: Pulse tomatoes and their juice in a food processor until pureed. Puree should not be completely smooth, and still have some chunks of tomato. Set aside.

Combine butter and oil in a medium saucepan and heat over medium-low heat until butter is melted. Add garlic, oregano, pepper flakes and large pinch of salt and cook, stirring frequently, until fragrant, but not browned, about 3 minutes.

Add pureed tomatoes, basil sprigs, onion halves and sugar. Bring to a simmer, then reduce heat to the lowest setting. Cook, stirring occasionally, until reduced by half, about 60 minutes. Discard onions and basil stems. Season sauce to taste with salt.

When ready to cook, place a baking stone on the grill, set Traeger temperature to 450°F and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes.

Turn a single dough ball out onto lightly floured surface. Gently press out dough into rough 8 inch circle, leaving outer 1 inch higher than the rest. Gently stretch dough by draping over knuckles into a 12 to 14 inch circle, about 1/4 inch thick.

Transfer dough to pizza peel that has been sprinkled with cornmeal. Spread approximately 2/3 cup of sauce evenly over surface of crust, leaving 1/2 to 1 inch border along edge. Evenly spread half of cheese over sauce and top with pepperoni.

Slide pizza onto baking stone and bake until cheese is melted and slightly browned. Pizza crust should be golden brown and puffed, about 6 to 7 minutes total.

Transfer to a cutting board, top with fresh basil if desired, slice, and serve immediately. Enjoy!

ENTREES: GMG PELLET BEER CAN CHICKEN

Tue, 29 Nov 2022 16:42:14 GMT

GMG PELLET BEER CAN CHICKEN

Our beer can chicken is some of the best chicken you’ve ever had off the grill. The peaked lid shape of our grills makes it easy to cook multiple beer can chickens for a party or your family. The secret to our success is the beer and tequila we place in the cavity of the chicken to help it steam while cooking. It makes the meat extra tender from inside with the crispy outside we all know and love. This one has been a favorite for grillers in the GMG family and it’s one of the best recipes to get started on your journey to become a backyard pitmaster!

PREP TIME

MINS

IDLE TIME

N/A

HOURS

COOK TIME

2.5

HOURS

PELLETS

Gold

BLEND

SERVES

PEOPLE

INGREDIENTS:

1 American Beer in Can

1 Shot of Tequila

1-Whole Chicken

1/4 Cup Sea Salt

2 Tablespoons Butter

2 Tablespoons Vegetable Oil

Black Pepper

Garlic Salt

Preparation:

Put 1/4 cup kosher salt in about a gallon of water in a large pot and stir until dissolved.

Thoroughly wash and rinse a whole chicken, removing the giblets.

Immerse the chicken in the salt water, making sure the water covers it completely and refrigerate for about 3 hours.

Melt two tablespoons of butter and stir it into 2 tablespoons of vegetable oil. Rub the entire chicken, inside and out, with this liquid.

Sprinkle generous amounts of garlic salt and black pepper on the outside of the chicken and in the cavity.

Empty about one-half of the beer from a can. Warm beer works best.

Add one shot of tequila to the can of beer. (OPTIONAL)

Place the chicken on the beer can, inserting the can into the cavity. The chicken should stand up on the can by itself.

Set the grill to about 325°. Wait until the temperature stabilizes.

Cook for 2 hours 15 minutes or until done (165°F internal) . Chicken is usually done when leg moves freely in socket.

FOR info on green mountain grills, click here!

SIDES: GMG PELLET BAKED BEANS

Tue, 22 Nov 2022 19:57:52 GMT

PELLET BAKED BEANS

We can do these Baked Beans the easy way, or we can do it the hard way. If you like easy, then skip the next paragraph. This makes enough for about 6 hungry people, or 8 not-so-hungry people. Who doesn’t like Baked Beans?

PREP TIME

MINS

IDLE TIME

HOURS

COOK TIME

2.5

HOURS

PELLETS

Any

BLEND

SERVES

4-8

PEOPLE

INGREDIENTS:

1 ¼ cups of navy beans

1 Onion

1 teaspoon of dry mustard

1/2 teaspoon of salt

¼ cup of dark brown sugar

¼ cup of GMG Cattle Drive BBQ Sauce

¼ lb. of bacon

2 tablespoons of molasses

8 oz. can of crushed pineapple

1. Soak 1 ¼ cups of navy beans overnight in cold water. In the morning, cook the beans in the same water for about an hour or more until the beans are tender. In the meantime, fry about ¼ lb. of bacon (or cook it on your Green Mountain grill at 275° for about 20 minutes). Drain the beans, but keep the liquid. Mix the bacon into the beans.

2. Easy: use canned Campbell’s Pork and Beans

3. Mince a small onion and sauté it in 1 teaspoon of the bacon grease or butter until translucent. Add 2 tablespoons of molasses, ¼ cup of dark brown sugar, ¼ cup of GMG Cattle Drive BBQ Sauce, 1 teaspoon of dry mustard, and 1/2 teaspoon of salt. Bring to a boil.

4. Add this mixture to the beans your prepared or to the Campbell’s beans if you used the lug nut method. Stir in an 8 oz. can of crushed pineapple, including the liquid. Pour this into a disposable aluminum pan. Add the water you saved, making sure the beans are immersed.

5. Bake in your grill at 165° for an hour, and then turn up to 325° for an additional hour.

check out our Green mountain grills!

ENTREES: GMG BREAKFAST BACON AND EGG BITES

Tue, 22 Nov 2022 17:58:25 GMT

GMG BREAKFAST BACON AND EGG BITES

Bacon, eggs, and jalapenos… how can you go wrong!? With a little more preparation than your traditional breakfast, this recipe adds flavorful and photogenic qualities to your next big breakfast. A smoky breakfast is the way to gO!

PREP TIME

MINS

IDLE TIME

N/A

HOURS

COOK TIME

MINS

PELLETS

Texas

BLEND

SERVES

PEOPLE

INGREDIENTS:

6 eggs

12 slices bacon (1lb)

1 white onion minced

1 red bell pepper minced

1 cup minced shiitake mushrooms

1 cup grated parmesan

2 tbsp butter

1 tbsp salt

1 tbsp ground pepper

Chopped Cilantro

1 tbsp GMG poultry rub

Preparation:

-Preheat grill up to 400 degrees, and place bacon slices on.

-In a medium saucepan, mix the butter, onion, mushroom, jalapeño, and GMG poultry rub. Let it simmer until the ingredients are soft. Set aside to cool.

-Once bacon is crispy, turn the grill down to 300 degrees and chop the bacon up until it is in small bits.

-Add the bacon bits and parmesan into the veggies and mix thoroughly.

-In a 6 cup muffin tin, press in ~2 heaping scoops of the cooked mixture into each cup and form a crust-like coating.

-Crack 1 egg into each cup, and add salt, pepper, and cilantro on top of each egg.

-Place the muffin tin into your smoker and cook at 300 degrees for 50 minutes. The yolk should run just a bit when cut into.

Click here to view our green mountain grills!

ENTREES: Traeger Smoked Venison Tacos

Sat, 19 Nov 2022 16:51:19 GMT

Traeger Smoked Venison Tacos.

Field-to-table freshness tucked into a warm tortilla and garnished with a little green spice.

Info

Prep Time: 15 Minutes

Cook Time: 30 Minutes

Serves: 2 people

Ingredients

main

1 Pound Venison Backstrap Steaks

2 Tablespoon Traeger Prime Rib Rub

Salsa Verde

1/2 Pound Tomatillos, Husked

1 Jalapeño, Stemmed

2 Clove Garlic

1 Medium Yellow Onion

3 Anaheim Chiles

Juice Of 2 Limes

1/2 Cup Chopped Fresh Cilantro

To Taste Kosher Salt

For Serving

4 Flour Tortillas, Warmed

1 Avocado, Sliced

1/4 Cup Crumbled Queso Fresco

1/4 Cup Chopped Fresh Cilantro

Steps

Season the venison steaks with the Traeger Prime Rib Rub and let sit at room temperature for 20 minutes.

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 225℉ and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes. For optimal flavor, use Super Smoke, if available.

Insert the probe into the center of a venison steak. Place the steaks directly on the grill grates, close the lid, and cook until the internal temperature reaches 110℉, 30-45 minutes.

While steaks are smoking, make the salsa verde: Preheat the oven to 450℉.

Arrange the tomatillos, jalapeño, garlic, onion, and Anaheim chiles on a baking sheet. Roast until lightly browned.

Transfer the roasted vegetables to a blender and add the lime juice, cilantro, and salt. Purée until smooth.

Remove the steaks from the grill and increase the temperature to 450℉. Preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Return the steaks to the grill and re-insert the probe. Sear until the internal temperature reaches 130°F for medium-rare, or your desired temperature, 2-4 minutes per side.

Remove the steaks from grill and let rest for 10 minutes (the internal temperature will continue to rise to 135℉).

To assemble the tacos, slice the venison steaks against the grain, then transfer to the tortillas and top with the salsa verde, avocado, queso fresco, and cilantro.

check out our traeger grills here!

APPETIZERS: Traeger Baked Corn Dog Bites

Thu, 27 Oct 2022 18:43:19 GMT

Traeger Baked Corn Dog Bites

Prep Time: 15 Minutes

Cook Time: 30 Minutes

Serves: 10 people

Ingredients

main

1 Cup Milk, Room Temperature

4 Teaspoon Active Dry Yeast

1/4 Cup Granulated Sugar

2 Cup All-Purpose Flour

1/2 Cup Yellow Cornmeal

1 Teaspoon Baking Soda

1/2 Teaspoon Mustard Powder

1/4 Cup Vegetable Oil

1/2 Teaspoon Cayenne Pepper

1 Tablespoon Kosher Salt, Plus 1 Teaspoon

15 Cocktail Beef Frankfurters

1 Egg, Lightly Beaten

1 Teaspoon Dried Minced Garlic

Ketchup And Mustard, For Serving

Steps

Combine milk, yeast, and sugar in a bowl. Set aside for 5 minutes or until it starts to foam.

Add all-purpose flour, corn meal, baking soda, mustard powder, oil, cayenne pepper, and 1 teaspoon salt.

Mix with a spoon until combined then use your hands to knead into a dough.

Transfer dough to a bowl and cover with plastic wrap and set aside for about 45 minutes - until dough rises and doubles in size.

When ready to cook, set Traeger temperature to 375℉ and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes.

Remove dough from bowl and divide into 15 pieces.

On a working surface dusted with flour, use a rolling pin to roll out each piece of dough into 3” x 3” pieces.

Place each hot dog in the middle of the sheet of dough. Roll it in the dough and press edges to seal to make 15 mini corn dog bites.

Transfer corn dog bites onto a baking pan lined with parchment paper and brush each bite lightly with beaten egg. Sprinkle each bite with dried minced garlic and remaining salt.

Place sheet tray directly on grill grate and bake until golden brown, about 30 mins.

Serve with ketchup and mustard or dipping sauce of your choice. Enjoy!

Take a look at our traegers!

SIDES: Traeger Grilled Romaine Caesar Salad

Thu, 27 Oct 2022 17:23:10 GMT

Traeger Grilled Romaine Caesar Salad

Prep Time: 10 Minutes

Cook Time: 10 Minutes

Serves: 4 people

Ingredients

Salad Dressing

6 Small Anchovy Fillets, Minced (Optional)

1 Clove Garlic, Minced

Salt And Pepper

2 Large Egg Yolks

2 Tablespoon Fresh Lemon Juice

1 Teaspoon Dijon Mustard

2 Tablespoon Olive Oil

1/2 Cup Vegetable Oil

3 Tablespoon Finely Grated Parmesan Cheese

main

2 Medium Lemons, Halved

1/2 Cup Olive Oil, Plus More As Needed

2 Head Romaine Lettuce, Halved

1 Cup Croutons

1/2 Cup Store-Bought Parmesan Crisps

Steps

For the Dressing: Place the anchovies and garlic on a cutting board. Sprinkle with a little salt and using the back of a chef's knife, scrape it over the mixture to make a paste. Place the paste in a medium bowl and top with the egg yolks, lemon juice, mustard and olive oil. Whisk well to combine.

Drizzle the vegetable oil into the bowl whisking constantly until the dressing is thick and glossy. Fold in Parmesan cheese and taste, adding salt and pepper as needed. Dressing can be made up to 1 day before serving.

When ready to cook, set Traeger temperature to 400°F and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes.

Brush the cut sides of lemons with olive oil. Place the lemons cut side down and grill for about 2 to 3 minutes, or until lightly charred.

Brush the cut side of the romaine lettuce with olive oil. Place cut-side down and grill for about 1 minute, or until the lettuce is lightly charred but not wilted throughout.

Remove the lettuce and carefully chop into bite-sized pieces. Toss the lettuce with croutons, Parmesan crisps and a large drizzle of the salad dressing.

Serve the charred lemons alongside the salad. Enjoy!

CLick here to check out a traeger that you can cook this delicious dish on!

APPETIZERS: Wild Turkey Southwest Egg Rolls

beaufuqua22@gmail.com (Beau Fuqua) — Thu, 20 Oct 2022 17:55:35 GMT

Wild Turkey Southwest Egg Rolls

You'll go wild for this Southwestern take on egg rolls. Wild turkey meets a corn, black bean, and pepper mix, then gets wrapped in a thin and crispy shell for the perfect unexpected appetizer.

Prep Time: 15 Minutes

Cook Time: 40 Minutes

Serves: 4 people

Ingredients:

main

2 As Needed Extra-Virgin Olive Oil

1/2 Cup White Onion, Chopped

1 Whole Poblano Pepper, Chopped

4 Clove Garlic, Minced

1 Can RO*TEL Original Diced Tomatoes And Green Chilies

1/2 Cup Black Beans, Rinsed And Drained

2 Cup Leftover Cooked Wild Turkey

3 Tablespoon Taco Seasoning

1/3 Cup Water

12 Whole Egg Roll Wrappers

Steps:

Add olive oil to a large skillet and heat on the stove over medium heat. Add onions and peppers and sauté 2-3 minutes until soft. Add garlic, cook 30 seconds, then Rotel and black beans. Reduce heat and simmer.

Pour taco seasoning over meat and add 1/3 cup of water and mix to coat well. Add to veggie mixture and stir to mix well. If it seems dry, add 2 tbsp water. Cook until heated all the way through.

Remove from the heat and transfer the mixture to the fridge. The mixture should be completely cooled prior to stuffing the egg rolls or the wrappers will break.

Place spoonful of the mixture in each wrapper and wrap tightly. Repeat with remaining wrappers.

When ready to cook, set grill temperature to High and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes.

Brush each egg roll with oil or butter and place directly on the Traeger grill grate. Cook until the exterior is crispy, about 20 min per side.

Remove from Traeger and cool. Serve. Enjoy!

click here to check out our traeger grill lineup

ENTREES: Traeger Whole Smoked Chicken

Thu, 13 Oct 2022 15:37:18 GMT

Traeger Whole Smoked Chicken

Wrap your next poultry cook with a little smoke. This whole chicken is brined, seasoned with our chicken rub, lemon, garlic, and fresh thyme, and mesquite-smoked for some smokin' flavor.

Prep Time: 10 Minutes

Cook Time: 3 Hours

Serves: 6 people

Ingredients:

Brine:

1 Gallon Water

1/2 Cup Kosher Salt

1 Cup Brown Sugar

1 Whole (3 To 3-1/2 Lb) Whole Chicken

Seasoning:

1 Teaspoon Minced Garlic

Traeger Chicken Rub

1 Lemon, Halved

1 Medium Yellow Onion, Quartered

3 Whole Garlic Cloves

5 Sprig Fresh Thyme

Steps:

Make the brine: In a large pot, combine the salt, sugar, and water, stirring to dissolve the salt and sugar. Add the chicken to the brine, making sure it is fully submerged and weighing down if necessary. Refrigerate overnight.

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 225℉ and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes. For optimal flavor, use Super Smoke, if available.

While the grill preheats, remove the chicken from the brine and rinse well, then pat dry with paper towels. Rub the outside with the minced garlic and Traeger Chicken Rub. Stuff the cavity with the lemon, onion, whole garlic cloves, and thyme. Tie the legs together.

Insert the probe into the thickest part of the chicken breast. Place the chicken directly on the grill grates, close the lid, and smoke until the internal temperature reaches 160℉, 2 1/2-3 hours.

Remove the chicken from the grill and let rest for 15 minutes before carving. The internal temperature will rise to 165℉ while the chicken rests. E njoy!

need a traeger grill? Click Here!

APPETIZER: Traeger Garlic Parmesan Wings

Fri, 30 Sep 2022 20:36:47 GMT

Traeger's Garlic Parmesan Wings

If you're looking for simple and downright delicious, these wings are calling your name. Chicken Rub-seasoned wings are grilled and topped with Parmesan cheese and fresh parsley for some handheld happiness.

Traeger Kitchen

Prep Time: 10 Minutes

Cook Time: 40 Minutes

Serves: 4 people

Ingredients

main

1/2 Cup Traeger Chicken Rub

5 Pound Chicken Wings

1 Cup Parmesan Cheese, Grated

3 Tablespoon Chopped Fresh Parsley

Garlic Sauce

1/2 Cup (1 Stick) Unsalted Butter

10 Cloves Garlic, Minced

1 Tablespoon Traeger Chicken Rub

Steps

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 450℉ and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

In a large bowl, toss the chicken wings with the Traeger Chicken Rub.

Place the wings directly on the grill grates. Insert the probe into the thickest part of a wing, avoiding the bone. Close the lid and cook, flipping once, until the internal temperature reaches 165°F-180°F, about 10-15 minutes per side.

Meanwhile, make the garlic sauce: In a medium saucepan, combine the butter, garlic, and Traeger Chicken Rub. Cook over medium heat, stirring occasionally, until the garlic is just golden, 8-10 minutes.

Remove the wings from the grill and place in a large bowl. Toss with the garlic sauce, Parmesan cheese, and parsley until well coated. Enjoy!

Look at our traeger grills Here

ENTREES: GMG Smoked Prime Rib

Fri, 30 Sep 2022 20:30:55 GMT

GMG Smoked Prime Rib

this recipe will produce a tender and juicy roast that anyone will enjoy. GMG beef rub has just about every spice you’ll need to draw out the decadent flavors of a Prime Rib Roast.

INGREDIENTS:

1 4-5 lb Prime Rib Roast

1 cup GMG beef rub

1 Tbsp Canola Oil

¼ cup water

1 Tbsp soy sauce

1 Tbsp Worcestershire sauce

Spicy horseradish

Preparation:

Whisk the beef rub, oil, water, soy sauce, and worcestershire in a bowl until there is an even consistency. Rub this mixture heavily around the rib roast and let it sit at room temperature for 2 hours .

Cooking:

Preheat your grill to 400 degrees.

Place on the rib roast for 1 hr then, then turn your grill down to 225 degrees.

Continue to cook the roast at 225 degrees until the internal temperature is 125 degrees (for medium rare). * USDA recommends 145 degrees.

Let the meat rest covered for at least 30 minutes, then serve with spicy horseradish.

SIDES: GMG Spuds Supreme Potatoes

Thu, 29 Sep 2022 20:14:10 GMT

GMG Spuds Supreme Potatoes

INGREDIENTS:

GMG Rub

Olive OIl

Red Pepper Flakes

Russet Potatoes

Sweet Onion

Spuds Supreme Potatoes:

Wash a few russet potatoes and slice lengthwise into wedges.

Pile onto a piece of aluminum foil large enough to wrap them up.

Sprinkle with GMG South of the Border Rub or GMG Wild Game Rub.

Dice a small onion and add this to the pile as well. Sprinkle some crushed red pizza pepper on and moisten the whole thing with olive oil or melted butter. Don’t saturate.

Cook at 400°F (204°C) for 30-45 minutes or until done, shaking once or twice to distribute the oil.

CLick here to check out our green mountain grills!

DESSERTS: GMG Bourbon Salted Caramel Apple Pie

Thu, 29 Sep 2022 20:00:42 GMT

GMG Bourbon Salted Caramel Apple Pie

Ingredients

2 refrigerated pie crusts

5-cups sliced apples OR 6-7 small-medium apples chopped

1/2 cup dark brown sugar

1/2 tsp cinnamon

1 dash each: nutmeg, allspice, ginger

2 tbsp melted butter

2 tbsp bourbon

2 tbsp dulce de leche

1 tbsp maldon smoked sea salt or large flake sea salt

Bourbon Salted Caramel Apple Pie

All American apple pie paired with bourbon and caramel, smoked in the Green Mountain Grill, makes for a match made in Dessert heaven.

Note, the term caramel is used loosely here as the recipe uses Dulce De Leche, which is a cousin of caramel. Dulce De Leche is a popular heavenly concoction in Latin American countries and is used by itself as well as in desserts like Tres Leches. The core difference between Dulce De Leche and Caramel is that Dulce De Leche is made from sweetened condensed milk and sugar whereas caramel is made from sugar and water. Look for Dulce De Leche in the Latin section of the grocery store, or feel free to substitute an easier to find caramel sauce and use the same method of application below. If you want to make it from scratch, go for it! The beauty of a pellet smoker is that they are as easy to use as an oven, but also impart smoky flavor you cannot get in your oven. The bourbon, apples, salted caramel and smoke make for an intoxicating flavor combination.

Directions:

– Roughly peel the apples with a vegetable peeler to remove the majority of the peel (doesn’t have to be perfect), then chop them up uniformly and put them in a big bowl. Add the bourbon, spices, brown sugar and butter and stir to combine .

– Next, let your refrigerated pie crusts slightly thaw and soften out of the refrigerator. I prefer to bake in a 12 inch cast iron skillet for pies on my smoker, but a pie plate would work as well. Roll out the pie dough into the skillet trying to get the dough to roll up on the sides as far as possible. Next, add your apple mixture.

– Here’s the fun part! Put the dulce de leche into a Ziploc sandwich bag and add the maldon sea salt. Run it under hot water in the sink to get it warmed up. This will allow the salt to combine and the caramel to spread easily. Snip the corner of the bag to create a pastry bag. Now, pipe the dulce de leche onto the top of the apple pie mixture. Take the other pie crust and put it on top of the pie and seal the edges. Cut a few slits to let the steam escape.

– Set your Green Mountain Grill or pellet smoker to 300 degrees. Let your pie bake for approximately 45 minutes OR until the crust has browned and the apple mixture is bubbly. It is normal for some of the pie juice to come up on the side of the crust, I believe this is due to the shape of the cast iron skillet.

APPETIZERS: Traeger Spicy Crab Poppers

beaufuqua22@gmail.com (Beau Fuqua) — Fri, 23 Sep 2022 20:52:46 GMT

Traeger Spicy Crab Poppers

This delicious jalapeño popper recipe will impress every last game day guest. It’s a simple appetizer that’s packed with buttery fresh crab & has a bit of kick.

Ingredients

main

18 Medium Jalapeño Peppers

Crab Filling

8 Ounce Cream Cheese, Softened

1 Cup Canned Corn, Drained

1/2 Cup Crab Meat

2 Whole Scallions Trimmed, Finely Chopped

1 1/2 Teaspoon Old Bay Seasoning

Steps

When ready to cook, set the Traeger temperature to 350°F and preheat with the lid closed for 15 minutes.

Cut each jalapeño in half lengthwise through the stem and remove the ribs and seeds.

Make the crab filling. In a medium bowl, combine the cream cheese, corn, crab meat, scallions, and Old Bay Seasoning and stir until blended. Stir in the scallions.

Spoon the filling into the jalapeño halves, mounding it slightly. Place the poppers on a baking sheet covered with foil or parchment paper.

Place the baking sheet directly on the grill grates. Close the lid and cook the jalapeños until the peppers have softened and the filling is hot and bubbling, 25-30 minutes.

Remove the spicy crab poppers from the grill. Let cool slightly before serving. Enjoy!

Check out our traeger grills here!

ENTREES: Traeger Grilled Shrimp & Grits

beaufuqua22@gmail.com (Beau Fuqua) — Fri, 23 Sep 2022 20:39:19 GMT

Traeger Grilled Shrimp & Grits

This sweet and peppery dry rub fuses with the salmon to form a caramelization when grilled over high heat. Drizzle the balsamic over top of that crisp, peppery sweetness, this opulent salmon dish it's simply delectable.

Prep Time: 15 Minutes

Cook Time: 30 Minutes

Serves: 4 people

Ingredients:

Grits

1 Cup Quick-Cooking Grits

4 Cup Water

1 Teaspoon Salt

1 Cup Shredded Cheddar

Shrimp Marinade

1/2 Cup Olive Oil

1/4 Cup Lemon Juice

1 Clove Garlic

1/2 Teaspoon Pepper

1 Pound Shrimp, Peeled And Deveined

Skewers

8 Ounce Mushrooms, Such As Button Or Cremini, Quartered

1 Green Bell Pepper, Cut Into 1-Inch-Pieces

1/2 Red Onion, Cut Into 1/2-Inch-Pieces

1 Teaspoon Salt

1/4 Cup Cilantro, Chopped, For Garnish

Steps:

When ready to cook, set Traeger temperature to 450˚F and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes. For optimal results, set to 500˚F if available.

Make the grits. In a medium cast iron pan over medium-high heat, bring 4 cups of water to a boil and add the salt. Remove from heat and gradually whisk in grits, working out any lumps. Return to heat and stir occasionally until thickened, 8-10 minutes. Stir in the cheddar cheese, cover and keep warm.

In a medium bowl, add the olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, pepper and stir. Add the shrimp, and toss to coat evenly. Let stand at room temperature for 5 minutes.

Assemble the skewers. Remove the shrimp from marinade, discarding the marinade. Build the skewers alternating between mushrooms, peppers, onion, and shrimp. Sprinkle with salt.

Place the skewers directly on the grill grates. Close the lid and cook for 4-5 minutes on each side, until shrimp starts to curl, and turns opaque.

Remove the shrimp skewers from the grill. Remove the skewers from the shrimp and vegetables and place the shrimp and vegetables on the grits. Garnish with cilantro and serve warm. Enjoy!

Click here to check out our traeger grills!

ENTREES: Traeger Cajun Broil

Fri, 09 Sep 2022 18:20:56 GMT

Traeger's Cajun Broil

Traeger Cajun Broil

Traeger Kitchen

Prep Time: 30 Minutes

Cook Time: 1 Hours

Serves: 8 people

Ingredients:

main

2 Tablespoon Olive Oil

2 Pound Red Potatoes

Old Bay Seasoning

6 Ears Corn, Cut Into Thirds

2 Pound Smoked Kielbasa Sausage

3 Pound Large Shrimp With Tails, Deveined

2 Tablespoon Butter

Steps:

When ready to cook, set Traeger temperature to 450℉ and preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes.

Drizzle potatoes with half of the olive oil and lightly season with Old Bay seasoning. Place directly on the grill grate. Roast 20 minutes or until tender.

Drizzle corn with remaining olive oil and lightly season with Old Bay seasoning. Place corn and kielbasa directly on the grill grate next to the potatoes. Roast 15 minutes.

Season shrimp with Old Bay seasoning. Place shrimp directly on grill grate next to the rest of the items and cook for 10 minutes, or until bright pink and cooked through.

Remove everything from the grill and transfer to a large bowl. Add butter and season with more Old Bay seasoning to taste. Toss to coat and serve immediately. Enjoy!

CLick here to check out our traeger lineup!

ENTREES: Traeger Smoked Brisket

Thu, 08 Sep 2022 20:14:52 GMT

Traeger Smoked Brisket

Prep Time: 15 Minutes

Cook Time: 9 Hours

Serves: 8 people

Ingredients:

2 Tablespoon Garlic Powder

2 Tablespoon Onion Powder

2 Tablespoon Paprika

2 Teaspoon Chile Powder

1/3 Cup Jacobsen Salt Or Kosher Salt, 1/3 Cup Coarse Ground Black Pepper, Divided

1 (12-14 Lb) Whole Packer Brisket, Trimmed

1 1/2 Cup Beef Broth

Instructions:

1. When ready to cook, set Traeger temperature to 225℉ and

preheat, lid closed for 15 minutes. For optimal flavor, use Super

Smoke if available.

2. For the Rub: Mix together garlic powder, onion powder, paprika,

chili pepper, kosher salt and pepper in a small bowl.

3. Season the brisket on all sides with the rub.

4. Place brisket, fat side down on grill grate. Cook brisket until it

reaches an internal temperature of 160℉, about 5 to 6 hours.

When brisket reaches internal temperature of 160℉, remove from grill.

5. Double wrap meat in aluminum foil and add the beef broth to the

foil packet. Return brisket to grill and cook until it reaches an

internal temperature of 204℉, about 3 hours more.

6. Once finished, remove from grill, unwrap from foil and let rest for 15 minutes.

Slice against the grain and serve.

FOr more on traeger grills click here!

DESSERTS: GMG Smoked Chocolate Chip Cookies

Wed, 07 Sep 2022 20:31:43 GMT

GMG Smoked Chocolate Chip Cookies

INGREDIENTS:

2 ¼ cup flour

1 tsp baking soda

1 ½ sticks unsalted butter (soft)

¾ cup brown sugar

⅔ cup granulated sugar

2 eggs

1 tsp vanilla extract

12 oz chocolate chips

Pinch of salt

Preparation:

-Preheat your grill to 375 degrees.

-Mix all dry ingredients together in a medium sized bowl.

-Add in the eggs, one at a time and mix thoroughly after each one.

-Add in the soft butter, vanilla extract, and chocolate chips.

-With a tablespoon, take 12 and place them on a nonstick baking sheet, spaced evenly.

Baking Instructions:

-Enjoy!